LV1T_03_2011_10_en_129653222023918956

Controls
Contactors and Contactor Assemblies

Reference Manual • October 2011
Industrial Controls
Switching Devices –
Contactors and
Contactor Assemblies
2 Introduction 3RH, 3TH Contactor Relays

130 3RH1 contactor relays, 4- and 8-pole
3RT, 3TB, 3TF Contactors
136 3RH14 latched contactor relays,
for Switching Motors
4-pole
5 General data
137 3TH4 contactor relays, 8- and 10-pole
11 3RT10 contactors, 3-pole, 3 ... 250 kW
55 3RT12 vacuum contactors, 3-pole, 141 3TH2 contactor relays, 4- and 8-pole
110 ... 250 kW 145 3RH11 coupling relays for switching
64 3TF6 vacuum contactors, 3-pole, auxiliary circuits, 4-pole
335 ... 450 kW
71 3TB5 contactors with DC solenoid 3RT Coupling Relays
system, 3-pole, 55 ... 200 kW 146 3RT10 coupling relays (interface),
76 3TF2 contactors, 3-pole, 2.2 ... 4 kW 3-pole, 3 ... 11 kW
3RA13, 3RA14 Contactor 3TX7, 3RS18 Coupling Relays

Assemblies 3TX7 Coupling Relays,
3RA13 Reversing Contactor Narrow Design
Assemblies 148 Relay couplers
84 3RA13 complete units, 3 ... 45 kW 152 Relay couplers with plug-in design
3RA14 Contactor Assemblies for 153 Semiconductor couplers
Wye-Delta Starting
3RS18 Coupling Relays with Industrial
86 3RA14 complete units, 3 ... 75 kW
Housing
3TD, 3TE Contactor Assemblies 157 Relay couplers
90 3TD6 reversing contactor assemblies,
335 kW Coupling Relays with
91 3TE6 contactor assemblies for LZS/LZX Plug-In Relays
wye-delta starting, 630 kW 160 Plug-in relay couplers
3RT, 3RH, 3TB, 3TC, 3TH, 3TK 3TG10 Power Relays/Miniature
Contactors for Special Contactors
Applications 164 4-pole, 4 kW
3RT14 Contactors for Switching
Resistive Loads (AC-1) Accessories and Spare Parts
93 3-pole, 140 ... 690 A For 3RT, 3RH Contactors and
3RT13 Contactors for Switching Contactor Relays
Resistive Loads (AC-1) 167 Accessories for 3RT, 3RH contactors
102 4-pole, 4 NO, 18 ... 140 A and contactor relays
3TK1 Contactors for Switching
Resistive Loads (AC-1) For 3T Contactors and Contactor
106 4-pole, 4 NO, 200 ... 1000 A Relays
3TK20 Contactors 176 Accessories for 3TB, 3TC, 3TF,
109 4-pole, 4 kW 3TG, 3TK contactors
3RT15 Contactors 177 Accessories for 3TH contactor relays
116 4-pole, 2 NO + 2 NC, 4 ... 18.5 kW
3RT16 Capacitor Contactors Project Planning Aids
118 12.5 ... 50 kvar 178 - Overview
Contactors with Extended 179 - Dimensional drawings
Operating Range 0.7 ... 1.25 × Us, for 221 - Schematics
Railway Applications
120 3RH11 contactor relays
121 3TH4 contactor relays
122 3RT10 motor contactors, 5.5 ... 45 kW
124 3TB5 motor contactors, 55 ... 200 kW
125 3TC contactors for switching
DC voltage, 2-pole
3TC Contactors for Switching
DC Voltage
126 1- and 2-pole, 32 ... 400 A
Siemens · 2011
Switching Devices – Contactors and Contactor Assemblies
Introduction
■ Overview
Size S00 S0 S2
Type 3RT10 1 3RT10 2 3RT10 3
3RT10 contactors • 3RT12 and 3TF68/69 vacuum contactors
Type 3RT10 15 3RT10 16 3RT10 17 3RT10 23 3RT10 24 3RT10 25 3RT10 26 3RT10 34 3RT10 35 3RT10 36
AC, DC operation
Type -- -- --
AC-3
Ie/AC-3/400 V A 7 9 12 9 12 17 25 32 40 50
400 V kW 3 4 5.5 4 5.5 7.5 11 15 18.5 22
230 V kW 2.2 3 3 3 3 4 5.5 7.5 11 15
500 V kW 3.5 4.5 5.5 4.5 7.5 10 11 18.5 22 30
690 V 3RT10/12 kW 4 5.5 5.5 5.5 7.5 11 11 18.5 22 22
1 000 V 3RT10/12 kW -- -- -- -- -- -- -- -- -- --
AC-4 (for Ia = 6 x Ie)
400 V kW 3 4 4 4 5.5 7.5 7.5 15 18.5 22
400 V 3RT10/12 kW 1.15 2 2 2 2.6 3.5 4.4 8.2 9.5 12.6
(200 000 operating cycles)
AC-1 (40 °C, ≤ 690 V)
Ie 3RT10/12 A 18 22 22 40 40 40 40 50 60 60
3RT14 AC-1 contactors

Type -- -- --
Ie/AC-1/40 °C/≤ 690 V A -- -- --
Accessories for contactors

Auxiliary switch blocks front 3RH19 11 3RH19 21
lateral -- 3RH19 21
Terminal covers -- -- 3RT19 36-4EA2
Box terminal blocks -- -- --
Surge suppressors 3RT19 16 3RT19 26 3RT19 26/36
3RU11 and 3RB20/21 overload relays (protection equipment: overload relays)

3RU11, thermal, CLASS 10 3RU11 16 0.1 ... 12 A 3RU11 26 1.8 ... 25 A 3RU11 36 5.5 ... 50 A
3RB20/21, solid-state, 3RB20 16 0.1 ... 12 A 3RB20 26 3 ... 25 A 3RB20 36 6 ... 50 A
CLASS 5, 10, 20 and 30 3RB21 16 3RB21 26 3RB21 36
3RB22/23, solid-state, 3RB2. 83 + 3RB29 06 3RB2. 83 + 3RB29 06
CLASS 5, 10, 20 and 30 0.3 ... 25 A 10 ... 100 A
3RV10 motor starter protectors (protection equipment: motor starter protectors)
Type 3RV10 11 0.18 ... 12 A 3RV10 21 9 ... 25 A 3RV10 31 22 ... 50 A
Link modules 3RA19 11 3RA19 21 3RA19 31
3RA13 reversing contactor assemblies

Complete units Type 3RA13 15 3RA13 16 3RA13 17 3RA13 24 3RA13 25 3RA13 26 3RA13 34 3RA13 35 3RA13 36
400 V kW 3 4 5.5 5.5 7.5 11 15 18.5 22
Assembly kits/wiring modules 3RA19 13-2A 3RA19 23-2A 3RA19 33-2A
Mechanical interlocks 3RA19 12-2H 3RA19 24-1A/-2B
3RA14 contactor assemblies for wye-delta starting

Complete units Type 3RA14 15 3RA14 16 3RA14 23 3RA14 25 3RA14 34 3RA14 35 3RA14 36
400 V kW 5.5 7.5 11 15/18.5 22/30 37 45
Assembly kits/wiring modules 3RA19 13-2B 3RA19 23-2B 3RA19 33-2B/-2C
Note:
For safety characteristics for contactors see LV 1 "Appendix" --> "Standards and approvals" --> "Overview".
2 Siemens · 2011
Introduction
S3 S6 S10 S12 S14

3RT1. 4 3RT1. 5 3RT1. 6 3RT1. 7 3TF6
3RT10 44 3RT10 45 3RT10 46 3RT10 54 3RT10 55 3RT10 56 3RT10 64 3RT10 65 3RT10 66 3RT10 75 3RT10 76 --
-- -- 3RT12 64 3RT12 65 3RT12 66 3RT12 75 3RT12 76 3TF68 3TF69
65 80 95 115 150 185 225 265 300 400 500 630 820
30 37 45 55 75 90 110 132 160 200 250 335 450
18.5 22 22 37 45 55 55 75 90 132 160 200 260
37 45 55 75 90 110 160 160 200 250 355 434 600
45 55 55 110 132 160 200 250 250 400 400/500 600 800
30 37 37 75 90 90 90/315 132/355 132/400 250/560 250/710 600 800
30 37 45 55 75 90 110 132 160 200 250 355 400

15.1 17.9 22 29 38 45 54/78 66/93 71/112 84/140 98/161 168 191
100 120 120 160 185 215 275/330 330 330 430/610 610 700 910
3RT14 46 3RT14 56 3RT14 66 3RT14 76 --

140 275 400 690 --
--
3TY7 561
3RT19 46-4EA1/2 3RT19 56-4EA1/2/3 3RT19 66-4EA1/2/3 3TX7 686/696
-- 3RT19 55/56-4G 3RT19 66-4G --
3RT19 56-1C (RC element) 3TX7 572
3RU11 46 18 ... 100 A -- -- -- --

3RB20 46 12.5 ... 100 A 3RB20 56 50 ... 200 A 3RB20 66 55 ... 630 A 3RB20 66 160 ... 630 A 3RB20 66 160 ... 630 A
3RB21 46 3RB21 56 3RB21 66 3RB21 66 3RB21 66
3RB2. 83 + 3RB29 56 3RB2. 83 + 3RB29 66
20 ... 200 A 63 ... 630 A
3RV10 41 45 ... 100 A -- -- -- --

3RA19 41 -- -- -- --
3RA13 44 3RA13 45 3RA13 46 -- -- -- 3TD68 04

30 37 45 55 75 90 110 132 160 200 250 335
3RA19 43-2A 3RA19 53-2A 3RA19 63-2A 3RA19 73-2A 3TX7 680-1A
3RA19 54-2A 3TX7 686-1A
3RA14 44 3RA14 45 -- -- -- 3TE68 04

55 75 -- -- -- 630
3RA19 43-2B/-2C 3RA19 53-2B 3RA19 63-2B 3RA19 73-2B 3TX7 680-1B
Siemens · 2011 3
Introduction
The advantages at a glance
3TX7 3RS18 LZS/LZX 3TG10
Order No. Page

Coupling links, narrow design
Relay couplers • Width 6.2 mm (1 NO, 1 CO), 12.5 mm and 17.5 mm 3TX7 002, 148
• Output coupling links 3TX7 003,
• Input coupling links with hard gold-plating 3TX7 004,
3TX7 005
Plug-in base couplers, complete with relay • Width 6.2 mm (1 NO, 1 CO) 3TX7 014-1. .00 152
• Relays, replaceable
Plug-in base couplers, complete with relay • Width 6.2 mm (1 CO) 3TX7 014-1. .02 152
and hard gold-plating
Semiconductor couplers • Output 1 semiconductor, triac or transistor 3TX7 002, 152
3TX7 004,
3TX7 005
Coupling relays in industrial housing
Relay couplers • Protective separation up to 300 V between contacts and re- 3RS18 157
lay circuits
• 1, 2 and 3 changeover contacts
• Hard gold-plated contacts in combination and wide voltage
range versions
Coupling relays with plug-in relays
Plug-in relay couplers with 2, 3 and 4 changeover • Switching capacity 12 A/10 A/6 A LZS/LZX:PT 160
contacts • Width 27 mm
• Base optionally with or without logical isolation
Plug-in relay couplers with 1, 2 changeover • Switching capacity 16 A/8 A LZS/LZX:RT 160
contacts • Width 15.5 mm
• Base optionally with or without logical isolation
Plug-in relay couplers with 3 changeover contacts • Switching capacity 6 A LZS/LZX:MT 160
and circular base • 11-pole circular base
• Width 38 mm
Power relays
With screw and flat connectors 3TG10 164
Connection method
The contactors and relays are available with screw terminals
(box terminals and connecting bars) or with Cage Clamp termi-
nals or spring-type terminals. Some device types are also availa-
ble with plug-type connectors.
Screw terminals
Cage Clamp terminals or spring-type terminals
Flat connectors
Plug-in terminals
Solder pin connections
These connections are indicated in the Technical

specifications by orange backgrounds.
4 Siemens · 2011
3RT, 3TB, 3TF Contactors for Switching Motors
General data
■ Overview
3RT1 contactors and coupling relays
Size S00 with mountable accessories
The SIRIUS generation of

controls is a complete, 3 17
modular system family, 18
logically designed right 4
down to the last detail,
from the basic units to the
accessories.
5
12
1
6 19 13
20
7
2
8
10
11
21
15
14 16
NSB0_00448a
1 Contactor
2 Coupling relay
3 Solid-state timing relay block, with ON-delay 14 Additional load module for increasing the permissible residual current
4 Solid-state timing relay block, with OFF-delay 15 Surge suppressor with LED
5 Auxiliary switch block with solid-state time delay 16 Surge suppressor without LED
(ON or OFF-delay or wye-delta function) 17 3-phase feeder terminal
6 1-pole auxiliary switch block, cable entry from above 18 Link for paralleling (star jumper), 3-pole,
7 2-pole auxiliary switch block, cable entry from above without connection terminal
8 1-pole auxiliary switch block, cable entry from below 19 Link for paralleling, 3-pole, with terminal
9 2-pole auxiliary switch block, cable entry from below 20 Link for paralleling, 4-pole, with terminal
10 4-pole auxiliary switch block (terminal designations 21 Connection module (adapter and connector) for contactors with
according to EN 50012 or EN 50005) screw-type connection
11 2-pole auxiliary switch block, standard version or solid-state
compatible version (terminal designations according to EN 50005)
12 Solder pin adapter for contactors with 4-pole auxiliary switch block For contactors
13 Solder pin adapter for contactors and coupling relays For contactors and coupling relays (interface)
For contactor assemblies see pages 84 to 85.

For assembly kit for reversing contactor assemblies
(mech. interlocking, wiring modules) see Catalog LV 1.
For mountable overload relays see "Protection Equipment -->
Overload Relays".
For fuseless load feeders, see "Load Feeders and Motor

Starters --> 3RA Fuseless Load Feeders".
Siemens · 2011 5
General data
3RT1 contactors
Sizes S0 to S3 with mountable accessories
5
17 21
11
18
10 22
16 2
25
12
1
14
1
6
9
15
7
19
8
16
21
13 26
22
23
3
24
20
NSB0_00449b
1 Contactor, size S0
For sizes S0 to S3: 18 Coupling link for mounting directly onto contactor coil
4 Solid-state timing relay block, with ON-delay 19 LED module for indicating contactor operation
5 Solid-state timing relay block, with OFF-delay
6 Auxiliary switch block with solid-state time delay
Only for size S0:
(ON or OFF-delay or wye-delta function)
25 Pneumatic delay block
7 2-pole auxiliary switch block, cable entry from above
26 Connection module (adapter and connector) for contactors with
8 2-pole auxiliary switch block, cable entry from below
screw-type connection
9 4-pole auxiliary switch block
(terminal designations according to EN 50012 or EN 50005) Only for sizes S0 and S2:
10 Link for paralleling (star jumper), 3-pole, 20 Mechanical latching
without connection terminal
Only for sizes S2 and S3:
11 Link for paralleling, 3-pole, with terminal
21 Coil repeat terminal for making contactor assemblies
12 2-pole auxiliary switch block, laterally mountable left or right
22 Terminal cover for box terminals
(terminal designations according to EN 50012 or EN 50005)
13 Single-pole auxiliary switch block (up to 4 can be snapped on) Only for size S3:
14 Mechanical interlock, laterally mountable 23 Terminal cover for cable lugs and busbar connections
15 Mechanical interlock, mountable on the front 24 Auxiliary terminal, 3-pole
16 Wiring module on the top and bottom (reversing duty)
17 Surge suppressor (varistor, RC element, diode assembly), can be Accessories identical for sizes S0 to S3
mounted on the top or bottom (different for S0 and S2/S3) Accessories differ according to size
6 Siemens · 2011
General data
3RT1 contactors
Sizes S6 to S12 with accessories
(illustration for basic unit)
9
7
2 10
3
4
11
5
6
NSB0_01157c
1 3RT10 and 3RT14 air-break contactor, sizes S6, S10 and S12
2 Auxiliary switch block with solid-state time delay 9 Terminal cover for cable lug and busbar connection,
(ON or OFF-delay or wye-delta function) different for sizes S6 and S10/S12
3 4-pole auxiliary switch block 10 Terminal cover for box terminal,
(terminal designations according to EN 50012 or EN 50005) different for sizes S6 and S10/S12
4 2-pole auxiliary switch block, cable entry from above 11 Box terminal block, different for sizes S6 and S10/S12
6 Single-pole auxiliary switch block (up to 4 can be snapped on)
7 2-pole auxiliary switch block, laterally mountable left or right
(identical for S0 to S12) Accessories identical for sizes S0 to S12
8 Surge suppressor (RC element), for plugging into top of withdrawable coil Accessories identical for sizes S6 to S12
Accessories differ according to size

Overload Relays".
Siemens · 2011 7
General data
3RA1 contactor assemblies, 3RT1 contactors
Size S6 with accessories
6
1
NSB0_01668
1 3RT10 and 3RT14 air-break contactor, size S6
2 3RA19 54-2A mechanical interlock, laterally mountable

3 3RA19 53-2A wiring modules on the top and bottom
4 3RT19 56-4BA31 link for paralleling (star jumper), 3-pole,
with through hole
5 Terminal cover for cable lug and busbar connection,
different for sizes S6 and S10/S12
6 Terminal cover for box terminal,
different for sizes S6 and S10/S12 Accessories identical for sizes S6 to S12
7 Box terminal block, different for sizes S6 and S10/S12 Accessories differ according to size

Overload Relays".
8 Siemens · 2011
General data
3RA1 contactor assemblies, 3RT1 contactors
Sizes S10 and S12 with accessories
1
2
3
NSB0_01669a
1 3RT10 and 3RT14 air-break contactor, sizes S6, S10 and S12 or
3RT12 vacuum contactor, sizes S10 and S12
2 Mechanical interlock, laterally mountable

3 3RA19 wiring modules on the top and bottom
4 3RT19 56-4BA31 link for paralleling (star jumper), 3-pole,
with through hole
5 Terminal cover for box terminal,
different for sizes S6 and S10/S12
6 Terminal cover for cable lug and busbar connection, Accessories identical for sizes S6 to S12
different for sizes S6 and S10/S12 Accessories differ according to size

Overload Relays".
Siemens · 2011 9
General data
3RT1 contactors
Sizes S6 to S12 with accessories
1 Air-break contactor, sizes S6, S10 and S12

2 Vacuum contactor, sizes S10 and S12
3 Withdrawable coils for 3RT1. ..-.A..

(size S10: differentiation between 3RT10/3RT14 air-break contactors
and 3RT12 vacuum contactors)
(size S12: the same for air-break and vacuum contactors)
4 Withdrawable coils for 3RT1. ..-.N..
(size S10: differentiation between 3RT10/3RT14 air-break contactors
and 3RT12 vacuum contactors)
(size S12: the same for air-break and vacuum contactors)
5 Withdrawable coils and laterally mountable module (plug-on) for air-break
contactors with solid-state operating mechanism and remaining lifetime
indicator 3RT1. ..-.P.. and 3RT1. ..-.Q..
6 Surge suppressor (RC element), plug-mountable on withdrawable coils
With conventional operating mechanism 3RT1...-.A..
With solid-state operating mechanism 3RT1...-.N..
Identical for sizes S6 to S12

Different according to size

Overload Relays".
10 Siemens · 2011
3RT10 contactors, 3-pole, 3 ... 250 kW
■ Overview
3RT10 contactors, 3-pole, sizes S00 to S3, up to 45 kW The plug-in direction of the diodes and diode assemblies is spe-
cified by coding.
AC and DC operation Exceptions:
IEC 60947, EN 60947 (VDE 0660) 3RT19 26-1T.00 and
3RT19 36-1T.00, in this case the plug-in direction is marked with
The 3RT1 contactors are climate-proof. They are finger-safe "+" and "-".
according to EN 50274.
Coupling relays are supplied either without overvoltage dam-
Size S00 contactors have an auxiliary contact integrated in the ping or with a varistor or diode connected as standard, accor-
basic unit. The basic units of sizes S0 to S3 contain only the main ding to the version.
current paths.
Note:
All basic units can be extended with auxiliary switch blocks. For The OFF-delay times of the NO contacts and the ON-delay times
size S0 and higher, complete units with 2 NO + 2 NC are availa- of the NC contacts increase if the contactor coils are damped
ble (connection designation according to EN 50012). The auxili- against voltage peaks (noise suppression diode 6 to 10 times;
ary switch block can be removed (for more information diode assemblies 2 to 6 times, varistor +2 to 5 ms).
see Integration).
3RT10 contactors, 3-pole, sizes S6 to S12,
In addition, complete units with permanently mounted auxiliary > 45 to 250 kW
switch block (2 NO + 2 NC according to EN 50012) are offered
for sizes S00 and S0. These versions are built according to spe- • 3RT10, contactors for switching motors,
cial Swiss regulations "SUVA" and are distinguished externally • 3RT12, vacuum contactors for switching motors,
by a red labeling plate. • 3RT14, contactors for AC-1 applications.
Connection method Operating mechanism types
The 3RT1 contactors are available with screw terminals (box ter- Two types of solenoid operation are available:
minals and connecting bars) or with Cage Clamp terminals.
• Conventional operating mechanism
The size S3 contactors have removable box terminals for the
main conductor connections. This permits connection of ring ter- • Solid-state operating mechanism (with 3 performance levels)
minal lugs or busbars. UC operation
Contact reliability The contactors can be operated with AC (40 to 60 Hz) as well as
If voltages ≤ 110 V and current ≤ 100 mA are to be switched, the with DC.
auxiliary contacts of the 3RT1 contactor or 3RH11 contactor re- Withdrawable coils
lay should be used as they guarantee a high level of contact
reliability. For simple coil replacement, e. g.. if the application is replaced,
the magnetic coil can be pulled out upwards after the release
These auxiliary contacts are suitable for solid-state circuits with mechanism has been actuated and can be replaced by any
currents ≥ 1 mA at a voltage of 17 V. other coil of the same size.
Short-circuit protection of the contactors Auxiliary contact complement
Short-circuit protection of the contactors without overload relay, For details of the auxiliary switch fittings per S0-S12 contactor
see "Technical specifications". For short-circuit protection of the see page 16.
contactors with overload relay, see "Overload Relays". To assem- • 3RT10 and 3RT14 contactors:
ble fuseless motor feeders you must select combinations of mo- Auxiliary contacts mounted laterally and on front
tor starter protector and contactor as explained in "Fuseless
Load Feeders". • 3RT12 vacuum contactors:
Auxiliary contacts mounted laterally
Motor protection
Note:
3RU11 thermal overload relays or 3RB20 solid-state overload re- Auxiliary contact complement according to SUVA.
lays can be fitted to the 3RT1 contactors for protection against
overload. The overload relays must be ordered separately. Contactors with permanently mounted auxiliary switch block for
safety applications according to SUVA.
Ratings of induction motors
Contactors with conventional operating mechanism
The quoted rating (in kW) refers to the output power on the motor
shaft (according to the nameplate). Version 3RT1. . .-.A:
Surge suppression The magnetic coil is switched directly on and off with the control
supply voltage Us by way of terminals A1/A2.
3RT1 contactors can be retrofitted with RC elements, varistors,
diodes or diode assemblies (assembly of diode and Zener diode Multi-voltage range for the control supply voltage Us:
for short break times) for damping opening surges in the coil. Several closely adjacent control supply voltages, available
around the world, are covered by just one coil,
The surge suppressors are plugged onto the front of size S00 for example 110-115-120-127 V UC or 220-230-240 V UC.
contactors. Space is provided for them next to a snap-on auxili-
ary switch block. In addition, allowance is also made for a coil operating range of
0.8 times the lower (Us min) and 1.1 times the upper (Us max) ra-
For size S0 to S3 contactors, varistors and RC elements can be ted control supply voltage within which the contactor switches
snapped on either on the top or directly below the coil terminals. reliably and no thermal overloading occurs.
Diode assemblies are available in 2 different versions on ac-
count of their polarity. Depending on the application they can be
connected either only at the bottom (assembly with motor starter
protector) or only at the top (assembly with overload relay).
Siemens · 2011 11

Contactors with solid-state operating mechanism • Additional visual indication of various levels of erosion by me-
ans of LEDs on the laterally mounted solid-state module when
The magnetic coil is supplied selectively with the power required remaining lifetime is 60 % (green), 40 % (orange) and 20 %
for reliable switching and holding by upstream control (red)
electronics.
• Wide voltage range for the control supply voltage Us: LED- new 60% 40% 20%
Compared with the conventional operating mechanism, the so- displays
lid-state operating mechanism covers an even broader range green RLT RLT RLT RLT
of control supply voltages used worldwide within one coil vari-
ant. For example, the coil for 200 to 277 V UC (Us min to Us max) green 60% 60% 60% 60%
covers the voltages 200-208-220-230-240-254-277 V used
orange 40% 40% 40% 40%
worldwide.
• Extended operating range 0.7 to 1.25 x Us: red 20% 20% 20% 20%
The wide range for the rated control supply voltage and the
Reset Reset Reset Reset
additionally allowed coil operating range of 0.8 x Us min to
1.1 x Us max results in an extended coil operating range of at NSB0_01150a
least 0.7 to 1.25 x Us, within which the contactors will operate
reliably, for the most common control supply voltages of 24, • Early warning to replace contacts
110 and 230 V. • Optimum utilization of contact material
• Bridging temporary voltage dips: • Visual inspection of the condition of contacts no longer
Control voltage failures dipping to 0 V (at A1/A2) are bridged necessary
for up to approx. 25 ms to avoid unintentional tripping. • Reduction of ongoing operating costs
• Defined ON and OFF thresholds: • Optimum planning of maintenance measures
For voltages of ≥ 0.8 x Us min and higher the electronics will re-
liably switch the contactor ON, and as of ≤ 0.5 x Us min it is re- • Avoidance of unforeseen plant downtimes
liably switched off. The hysteresis in the switching thresholds
prevents the main contacts from chattering as well as increa- 3RT1. . .-.N version: for 24 V DC PLC output
sed wear or welding when operated in weak, unstable net- 2 control options:
works. This also prevents thermal overloading of the contactor
coil if the voltage applied is too low (contactor does not close • Control without a coupling link directly through a
properly and is continuously operated with 24 V DC/≥ 30 mA PLC output (EN 61131-2). Connection by
overexcitation). means of 2-pole plug-in connection. The screwless spring-
type connection is part of the scope of supply. The control
• Low control power consumption when closing and in the supply voltage which supplies the solenoid operating mecha-
closed state. nism must be connected to A1/A2.
Electromagnetic compatibility (EMC) Note:
The contactors with solid-state operating mechanism comply Before start-up, the slide switch for PLC operation must be mo-
with the requirements for operation in industrial plants. ved to the "PLC ON" position (setting ex works: "PLC OFF").
• Interference immunity
- Burst (IEC 61000-4-4): 4 kV $ Slide switch must be in
L1/L+ "PLC ON" position
- Surge (IEC 61000-4-5): 4 kV N/L-
- Electrostatic discharge, ESD (IEC 61000-4-2): 8/15 kV % Plug-in connection, 2-pole
PLC output 3
- Electromagnetic field (IEC 61000-4-3): 10 V/m 24 V DC / 30 mA & Emergency shutdown
– optional
• Emitted interference 2 A1 A2
- Limit value class A according to EN 55011
24 V DC
Note: 1 PLC
NSB0_01143d
In connection with converters, the control cables should be ins- OFF ON
talled separately from the load cables of the converter.

Indication of remaining lifetime (RLT)
Main contactor contacts are working parts which must be repla- • Conventional control by applying the control supply voltage at
ced in good time when the end of their service life has been A1/A2 through a switching contact.
reached. The degree of contact erosion and thus the electrical Note:
endurance (= number of operating cycles) depends on the loa- The slide switch must be in the "PLC OFF" position
ding, utilization category, operating mode, etc. Up to now, rou- (= setting ex works).
tine checks/visual inspections by the maintenance personnel
were needed in order to gain an insight into the state of the main
contacts. The remaining lifetime indication function now takes L1/L+ $ Slide switch must be in
over this task. It does not count the number of operating cycles N/L- "PLC OFF" position
– which does not provide information about contact erosion – but % Emergency shutdown
instead electronically identifies, evaluates and stores the actual 2 – optional
progress of erosion of each one of the three main contacts, and A1 A2
outputs a warning when specified limits are reached. The stored
DC 24 V
data are not lost even if the control supply voltage for A1/A2 fails.
1
After replacement of the main contacts, measurement the remai- PLC
NSB0_01144d
OFF ON
ning lifetime must be reset using the "RESET" button (hold down
RESET button for about 2 seconds using a pen or similar tool).
Advantages:
• Signaling through relay contact or AS-i when remaining life-
time is 20 %, i. e. contact material wear is 80 %
12 Siemens · 2011

3RT1. . .-.P version: For 24 V DC PLC output or • Contactor control through relay outputs, e. g. by
PLC relay output, with remaining lifetime indicator (RLT). - PLC
- SIMOCODE
-.PP3.
by way of terminals H1/H2. Contact loading: Us/approx. 5 mA.
200-277 V When operated through SIMOCODE, a communication link to
50-60 Hz
DC
PROFIBUS DP is also provided.
A1 A2
Contactor ON
$ Solid-state module of
ON L1/L+
N/L- 3RT1. . .-.P contactor
Displays for RLT: 3
PROFIBUS DP % Plug-in connection, 7-pole
RLT LED green A1 A2 S1
e.g.
60% LED green SIMOCODE
S1 Selector switch for
LED orange
H1 S2
PLC switching from automatic
40% other
H2 control, for example,
20% LED red through SIMOCODE or PLC
R1 Indication
Reset RLT Reset of remaining relay output to local control
R2
H1 300 V lifetime 20%
IN S2 Local control option
H2 AC/DC IN
Plug-in & Emergency shutdown
R1 connection – optional
RLT
R2 7-pole NSB0_01147d
IN 24 V 1 2
IN DC
NSB0_01145b
3RT1. . .-.Q version: Communication-capable with integrated

AS-Interface and remaining lifetime indicator (RLT)
3RT105/3RT145
-.QP3.
200-277 V
To supply the solenoid and the remaining lifetime indicator with 50-60 Hz
Bus status
power, the control supply voltage Us must be connected to ter- DC Adress jack
A1 A2
minals A1/A2 of the laterally mounted solid-state module. The Contactor ON
control inputs of the contactor are connected to a 7-pole plug-in Automatic
AS-i ON control
connection; the screwless spring-type connection is part of the AUTO Displays for RLT:
scope of supply. ADDR.
RLT LED green
• The "Remaining Lifetime RLT" status signal is available at 60% LED green
terminals R1/R2 through a floating relay contact (hard gold- 40% LED orange
plated, enclosed) and can be input to SIMOCODE, PLC or 20% LED red
other devices for processing, for example. Reset RLT Reset
Permissible current-carrying capacity of the R1/R2 relay out- H1 300 V
H2 AC/DC
put: H3
- Ie/AC-15/24 to 230 V: 3 A Plug-in
connection
- Ie/DC-13/24 V: 1 A SF1
6-pole
SF2
• LED indications 1
Plug-in
The following states are indicated by means of LEDs on the la- AS-i
2 connection
NSB0_01148c
3
terally mounted solid-state module: 4
4-pole
- Contactor ON (energized state): green LED ("ON")
- Indication of remaining lifetime 3RT105/3RT145
2 control options:
• Contactor control without a coupling link directly through a To supply the solenoid and the remaining lifetime indicator with
24 V DC/≥ 30 mA PLC output (EN 61131-2) by way of terminals power, the control supply voltage Us must be connected to ter-
IN+/IN-. minals A1/A2 of the laterally mounted solid-state module. The
contactor itself is controlled by way of the integrated
AS-Interface interface. The inputs and outputs are connected to
L1/L+ $ Solid-state module of a 10-pole plug-in connection; the screwless spring-type connec-
N/L- 3RT1. . .-.P contactor tions (6-pole for external connection and 4-pole for AS-Interface
3
% Plug-in connection, 7-pole connection) are part of the scope of supply.
A1 A2
S2 S1 Selector switch for • LED indications
H1 S1 switching from automatic
H2
control through PLC The following states are indicated by means of LEDs on the la-
Indication
R1 of remaining semiconductor output to terally mounted solid-state module:
R2
S1
lifetime 20% local control - Contactor ON (energized state): green LED ("ON")
IN PLC output
IN 24 V/30 mA DC S2 Local control option - Automatic/Local control: green LED ("AUTO")
& Emergency shutdown - Bus status: green/red dual LED ("AS-i")
– optional - Remaining lifetime indicator (RLT)
NSB0_01146e
1 2 • AS-Interface addressing socket "ADDR":
The contactor address can be assigned after installation.
Possibility of switching from automatic control to local control by
way of terminals H1/H2, i. e. automatic control through PLC or
SIMOCODE/PROFIBUS DP can be deactivated e. g. at start-up
or in the event of a fault and the contactor can be controlled ma-
nually.
Siemens · 2011 13

Control circuit:
$ Solid-state module of
• Contactor control through AS-Interface by way of terminals L1/L+ 3RT1. . .-.Q contactor
AS-i +/AS-i –. Each of these terminals is jumpered and con- N/L-
4 % Plug-in connection, 6-pole
nected twice to a 4-pole connector which is separate from the 2
A1 A2 & Plug-in connection, 4-pole
other control inputs. S2
Advantages: H1 S1 Selector switch for
H2 switching from automatic
- The AS-Interface cable is not interrupted if the connector is H3
S1 control, for example,
pulled out SF1 e.g.
through AS-Interface to
SF2 3RB20
- The contactor remains functional through the local control in- Overload relay local control
AS-i
puts and its own 6-pole connector AS-i AS-i
S1 open: Automatic mode
AS-i
• Control signals through AS-i: AS-i S2 Local control option
- Contactor ON/OFF ( Emergency shutdown
NSB0_01149d – optional
• Status signals through AS-i:
1 3
- Contactor ON/OFF
- Automatic/local control
- Remaining lifetime indicator (RLT) Possibility of switching from automatic control to local control by
- Signal through free input, e. g. overload relay tripped. means of terminals H1/H2/H3, i. e. automatic control through
AS-Interface can be deactivated e. g. during startup or in the
event of a fault and the contactor can be controlled manually.
I/O configuration (hex) 7

ID code (hex) F
Power supply V 26.5 ... 31.6 (acc. to AS-Interface specification)
AS-Interface power consumption mA Max. 20
Contact loading at SF1/2 mA 3 ... 6
Watchdog function (disconnects outputs in the event of AS-Interface fault) Built-in
Indication behavior LEDs States Description of state

During operation, the LEDs on AS-Interface On On Flash- Flash-
the contactor indicate the ing ing
states shown on the right.
Station address 0
No AS-Interface communication
AS-Interface communication OK
Contactor diagnostics using the user program

• Inputs • Outputs
Input signals Device status Output signals Device status
DI0 "Ready" 0 Device not ready/manual operation DO0 "Running" 0 Contactor off
1 Device ready/automatic mode 1 Contactor on
DI1 "Running" 0 Contactor off DO1 0 --
1 Contactor on 1 --
DI2 "Remaining lifetime" 0 Remaining lifetime RLT > 20 % DO2 0 --
1 Remaining lifetime RLT ≤ 20 % 1 --
DI3 "Free input" 0 No input signal at SF1/2 DO3 0 --
1 Input signal at SF1/2 1 --
14 Siemens · 2011
■ Integration
Auxiliary switch blocks The solid-state compatible 3RH19 11-1NF. . auxiliary switch
blocks for contactors of size S00 include 2 enclosed contacts.
Various auxiliary switch blocks can be added to the 3RT1 basic They are suitable in particular for switching small voltages and
units depending on the application: currents (hard gold-plated contacts) and for operation in dusty
Size S00 atmospheres. The NC auxiliary contacts are not mirror contacts.
3RT10 1. contactors All the previously mentioned auxiliary switch variants can be
snap-fitted onto the front of the contactor. The auxiliary switch
Terminal designations according to EN 50012 or EN 50005. block has a centrally positioned release lever for disassembly.
Sizes S0 to S3
Contactors, EN 50012,
1 aux. contact 3RT10 2. to 3RT10 4. contactors,
1-pole auxiliary switch blocks,
terminal designations according to EN 50005 or EN 50012.
Contactors
3RT10 2.
Ident. No. 10E Ident. No. 01 3RT10 3.
3RT10 4.
without
Aux. switch blocks, Aux. switch blocks, aux. contact
EN 50012, EN 50005,
4, 3 or 1 contacts 4 or 2 contacts
Aux. switch blocks,
with 1 contact
Ident. No. 32E, Ident. No. 40, 31,

1 NO 1 NC
23E, 22E, 11E 22, 20, 11, 02
Contactors, Contactors, Possible complements of

EN 50012 EN 50005, contactors with 1-pole
5, 4 or 2 5 or 3 aux. switch blocks,
aux. contacts aux. contacts terminal signations
acc. to EN 50 005 or
EN 50 012
Ident. No.
01, 10
11
21, 12
NSB0_00450b
31, 22, 13
Ident. No. 32E, Ident. No. 40, 31,
02, 20
NSB0_00451b
23E, 22E, 11E 22, 20, 11, 02 03, 30

04, 40
Size S00 contactors have an auxiliary contact integrated in the

basic unit.
Contactors with a NO contact as auxiliary contact with screw or
Cage Clamp terminals, identification number 10E, can be ex-
panded into contactors with 2, 4 and 5 auxiliary contacts accor-
ding to EN 50012 using auxiliary switch blocks. The identifica-
tion numbers 11E, 22E, 23E and 32E on the auxiliary switch
blocks apply to the complete contactors. These auxiliary switch
blocks cannot be combined with contactors which have a NC
contact in the basic unit (identification number 01) as they are
coded.
All contactors of size S00 with one auxiliary contact (identifica-
tion numbers 10E or 01) and the contactors with 4 main contacts
can be expanded into contactors with 3 or 5 auxiliary contacts
using auxiliary switch blocks with the identification numbers 40
to 02 (in the case of contactors with 4 main contacts: 2 or 4 au-
xiliary contacts) according to EN 50005.
The identification numbers on the auxiliary switch blocks apply
only to the attached auxiliary switches.
Single- or two-pole auxiliary switch blocks with connection op-
tions from above or below enable easy and clearly arranged wi-
ring especially for the installation of network access junctions.
These auxiliary switch blocks are offered only with screw
terminals.
Siemens · 2011 15

3RT10 2. to 3RT10 4. contactors, Also available are 2-pole auxiliary switch blocks (screw termi-
4-pole auxiliary switch blocks, nals) for cable entry from above or below in the design of a quad
terminal designations according to EN 50005 or EN 50012 block (feeder auxiliary switch).
. If the installation space is limited in depth, 2-pole auxiliary switch
blocks (screw or Cage Clamp terminals) can be attached late-
rally for use on the left or on the right.
3RT10 2.
3RT10 3. The auxiliary switch blocks attached to the front can be disas-
3RT10 4. sembled with the help of a centrally arranged release lever; the
contactors
laterally attached auxiliary switch blocks are easy to remove by
without
aux. contact pressing on the checkered surfaces.
The terminal designation of the individual auxiliary switch blocks
corresponds to EN 50005 or EN 50012, that of the complete
contactor with auxiliary switch block 2 NO + 2 NC corresponds
Aux. switch blocks Aux. switch blocks
with 4 contacts, 3RH19 21-. FA.. with 4 contacts, 3RH19 21-. HA..
to EN 50012.
acc. to EN 50 005 acc. to EN 50 012 The laterally attachable auxiliary switch blocks according
to EN 50012 can be used only when no 4-pole auxiliary switch
blocks are snapped onto the front. If single-pole auxiliary switch
blocks are used in addition, the location identifiers on the con-
tactor must be noted.
Ident. No. 40, 31, 22, 04, 22U Ident- No. 31, 22, 13
Two enclosed and 2 standard contacts are available with the
3RH19 21-.FE22 solid-state compatible auxiliary switch block,
Possible complements of Possible complements of which can be attached to the front. The 3RH19 21-2DE11 late-
contactors with 4-pole contactors with 4-pole rally mountable auxiliary switch block contains 2 enclosed con-
aux. switch blocks, aux. switch blocks, tacts (1 NO + 1 NC). The enclosed contacts are suitable in par-
terminal designations terminal designations
ticular for switching small voltages and currents (hard gold-
acc. to EN 50 005 acc. to EN 50 012
plated contacts) and for operation in dusty atmospheres. The
NC auxiliary contacts are mirror contacts.
Sizes S0 and S2
A maximum of 4 auxiliary contacts can be attached; the auxiliary
switch blocks used can be of any version. For reasons of sym-
metry, when two 2-pole laterally mountable auxiliary switch
NSB0_00452b
blocks are used, one block must be attached on the right and
Ident. No. 40, 31, 22, 02 Ident. No. 31, 22, 13 one on the left.
More auxiliary contacts are permissible with size S2 under cer-
tain conditions (please ask).
A diverse range of auxiliary switch blocks is available for various
applications. The contactors themselves have no integrated For 4-pole contactors see 3RT13 and 3RT15.
conducting path.
Size S3 to S12
The auxiliary switch variants are uniform for the contactors
of size S0 to S12. A maximum of 8 auxiliary contacts can be attached; please note
the following:
One 4-pole or up to four single-pole auxiliary switch blocks • Of these 8 auxiliary contacts, there must be no more than 4 NC
(screw or Cage Clamp terminals) can be snapped on. When the contacts
contactors are switched on, the NC contacts are opened first
and then the NO contacts are closed. • Ensure the symmetry of laterally mounted auxiliary switch
blocks
The terminal designations of the single-pole auxiliary switch
locks are comprised of identification numbers (location identi- For 4-pole contactors see 3RT13 and 3RT15.
fiers) on the basic unit and of function numbers on the auxiliary
switch blocks.
16 Siemens · 2011
■ Technical specifications
SIRIUS controls are climate-proof and are suitable and tested for Weather-Protected"), the manufacturer must be consulted about
use worldwide. possible restrictions with regard to the reliability and endurance
of the device and possible protective measures.
If the devices are used in ambient conditions which deviate from
common industrial conditions (EN 60721-3-3 "Stationary Use,
Contactors Type 3RT1

Size S00 ... S12
Rated data of the auxiliary contacts
Acc. to IEC 60947-5-1/EN 60947-5-1 (VDE 0660 Part 200)
The data apply to integrated auxiliary contacts and contacts in the auxiliary
switch blocks for contactor sizes S00 to S121)
Rated insulation voltage Ui (degree of pollution 3) V 690
For 3RH19 21-. laterally mountable auxiliary switch blocks V Max. 500
Continuous thermal current Ith = A 10
Rated operational current Ie/AC-12
AC load
Rated operational current Ie/AC-15/AC-14
• For rated operational voltage Ue 24 V A 6
110 V A 6
125 V A 6
220 V A 6
230 V A 6
380 V A 3
400 V A 3
500 V A 2
660 V2) A 1
690 V2) A 1
DC load
Rated operational current Ie/DC-12
60 V A 6
110 V A 3
125 V A 2
220 V A 1
440 V A 0.3
600 V2) A 0.15
• For rated operational voltage Ue 24 V A 101)
60 V A 2
110 V A 1
125 V A 0.9
220 V A 0.3
440 V A 0.14
600 V2) A 0.1
Contact reliability at 17 V, 1 mA Frequency of contact faults < 10-8 i. e. < 1 fault per 100 million
acc. to EN 60947-5-4 operating cycles
Endurance of the auxiliary contacts
It is assumed that the operating mechanisms are switched randomly, i. e. 30
not synchronized with the phase angle of the supply system. NSB0_00472
The contact endurance is mainly dependent on the breaking current. Basic unit
Million operating cycles (10 6 )
The characteristic curves apply to: 10

5 Basic unit
• Integrated auxiliary contacts on 3RT10 4 with aux.
• Auxiliary switch blocks 3RH19 11, 3RH19 21 for contactors of size S00 3 block
to S12 snapped on
2
DC-13 DC-13
1 220 V 110 V
AC-15/AC-14
0,5
DC-13
24 V
0,1
0,05
1)
0,01
0,01 0,03 0,05 0,1 0,3 0,5 1 2 3 5 6 7 10 I a (A)
I e -DC-13 I e -DC-13 I e -AC-15 I e -DC-13
220 V 110 V < 230 V 24 V
Diagram legend:
Ia = Breaking current
Ie = Rated operational current
1) Snap-on auxiliary switch blocks for size S00 and laterally mountable auxi- 2) Up to 500 V switching capacity for laterally mountable auxiliary switch
liary switch blocks for S0 to S12: 6 A. blocks.
Siemens · 2011 17
Endurance of the main contacts

The characteristic curves show the contact endurance of the Size S00
contactors when switching resistive and inductive AC loads O p e r a tin g c y c le s a t
(AC-1/AC-3) depending on the breaking current and rated ope-
2 3 0 V
5 0 0 V
6 9 0 V
4 0 0 V
rational voltage. It is assumed that the operating mechanisms are C o n ta c to r ty p e 3 R T 1 0 1 5 3 R T 1 0 1 6 , 3 R T 1 0 1 7
switched randomly, i. e. not synchronized with the phase angle of (3 k W ) (4 k W , 5 .5 k W )
1 0 7
the supply system. 1 0 7 8 6 8 N S B 0 0 4 7 3 a
8 6 6
4
The rated operational current Ie complies with utilization category 6 4 4
AC-4 (breaking six times the rated operational current) and is in- 4 2
tended for a contact endurance of at least 200 000 operating 2 2
cycles. 2 1 0 6
1 0 6 8 1 0 6
If a shorter endurance is sufficient, the rated operational current 1 0 6 8 6 8
8 6 6
Ie/AC-4 can be increased. 4
6 4 4
If the contacts are used for mixed operation, i. e. normal swit- 4 2
ching (breaking the rated operational current according to utiliza- 2 2
tion category AC-3) in combination with intermittent inching 2 1 0 5
5
(breaking several times the rated operational current according 1 0 8 1 0 5
to utilization category AC-4), the contact endurance can be cal- 1 0 5 8 6 8
8 6 6
culated approximately from the following equation: 4
6 4 4
A 4 2
X = -------------------------------------------------------- 2 2
1 + ----------  ---- – 1
C A
2 1 0 4
100  B 
1 0 4
8 1 0 4
2 3 4 5 6 8 1 0 2 0 1 a (A ) 4 0 5 0 6 0 8 0
Characters in the equation: 7 9 1 2 1 e (A )
X Contact endurance for mixed operation in operating cycles
3 4 5 ,5 2 N (k W )
A Contact endurance for normal operation (Ia = Ie) in operating
cycles
B Contact endurance for inching (Ia = multiple of Ie) in Size S0
operating cycles
Operating cycles at
C Inching operations as a percentage of total switching
230 V
500 V
690 V
400 V
operations Contactor type 3RT1023 3RT1024 3RT1025 3RT1026

(4 kW) (5.5 kW) (7.5 kW) (11 kW)
10 7
10 7 8 6 8 NSB0_00474a
8 6 6
4
6 4 4
4 2
2 2
2 10 6
10 6 8 10 6
10 6 8 6 8
8 6 6
4
6 4 4
4 2
2 2
10 52
10 5 8 10 5
10 5 8 6 8
8 6 6
4
6 4 4
4 2
2 2
Diagram legend: 2 10 4
10 4 8 10 4
PN= Rated power for squirrel-cage motors at 400 V
3 4 5 6 8 10 20 30 40 50 60 80 100 1 a (A)
Ia= Breaking current
9 12 17 25 1 e (A)
Ie= Rated operational current
4 5.5 7.5 11 PN(kW)
18 Siemens · 2011

Size S2 Size S3
O p e r a tin g c y c le s a t
O p e r a tin g c y c le s a t
2 3 0 V
5 0 0 V
6 9 0 V
4 0 0 V
2 3 0 V
5 0 0 V
6 9 0 V
4 0 0 V
C o n ta c to r ty p e 3 R T 1 0 3 4 3 R T 1 0 3 5 3 R T 1 0 3 6 C o n ta c to r ty p e 3 R T 1 0 4 4 3 R T 1 0 4 5 3 R T 1 0 4 6
(1 5 k W ) (1 8 .5 k W ) (2 2 k W ) (3 0 k W ) (3 7 k W ) (4 5 k W )
1 0 7 1 0 7
1 0 7 8 6 8 N S B 0 0 4 7 5 a
1 0 7 8 6 8 N S B 0 0 4 7 6 a
8 6 4 6 8 6 4 6
6 4 6 4 4
4
4 2 4 2
2 2 2 2
6 2 6
2 1 0 6 1 0
6 6
1 0 8 1 0
6
6
1 0 8 1 0
6 1 0
1 0 8 6 8 8 6 8
8 6 4 6 8 6 4 6
6 4 6 4 4
4
4 2 4 2
2 2 2 2
2 5 2 5
1 0 5 1 0
5 5 1 0 5
5
1 0 8 1 0 5 8 1 0
1 0 8 6 8 1 0 8 6 8
8 6 4 6 8 6 4 6
6 4 6 4 4
4
4 2 4 2
2 2 2 2
2 4 2 1 0
4
1 0
1 0 4 8 1 0 4 1 0 4 8 1 0 4
1 0 2 0 3 0 4 0 5 0 6 0 8 0 1 0 0 1 a (A ) 2 0 0 3 0 0 4 0 0 6 0 0
1 0 2 0 3 0 4 0 5 0 6 0 8 0 1 0 0 1 a (A ) 2 0 0 3 0 0 4 0 0
3 2 4 0 5 0 1 e (A ) 6 5 8 0 9 5 1 e (A )
1 5 1 8 ,5 2 2 2 N (k W ) 3 0 3 7 4 5 2 N
(k W )
Sizes S6 to S12
Operating cycles at
230 V
500 V
690 V
400 V
Contactor 3RT1054 3RT1055 3RT1056 3RT1064 3RT1065 3RT1066 3RT1075 3RT1076

type (55 kW) (75 kW) (90 kW) (110 kW) (132 kW) (160 kW) (200 kW) (250 kW)
7 10 7
10 8 6 8 NSB01141
8 6 4 6
6 4 4
4 2
2 2
2 6
6 10
6
10 8 10 6
10 8 6 8
8 6 4 6
6 4 4
4 2
2 2
2 5
5 10
5
10 8 10 5
10 8 6 8
8 6 4 6
6 4 4
4 2
2 2
2 4
10
10 4 8 10 4
10 20 30 40 50 60 80 100 200 300 400 600 8001000 1 a(A) 2000 3000
55 90 132 200 PN (kW)

75 110 160 250
3RT12 vacuum contactors
Sizes S10 and S12
Operating cycles at
230 V
500 V
690 V
400 V
Contactor type 3RT1264 3RT1265 3RT1266 3RT1275 3RT1276

(110 kW) (132 kW) (160 kW) (200 kW) (250 kW)
10 7
10 7 8 6 8 NSB01142
8 6 4 6
6 4 4
4 2
2 2
2 6
6 10 6
6
10 8 10
10 8 6 8
8 6 4 6
6 4 4
4 2
2 2
2 5
5 10 5
5
10 8 10
10 8 6 8
8 6 4 6
6 4 4
4 2
2 2
2 4
10 Diagram legend:
10 4 8 10 4
40 50 60 80 100 200 300 400 600 800 1000 1 a (A) 2000 3000 PN= Rated power for squirrel-cage motors at 400 V
110 160 250 PN (kW)
132 200 Ie= Rated operational current
Siemens · 2011 19
Contactors Type 3RT10 1.

Size S00
General data
Permissible mounting position • AC and DC operation
360° 30° 30°
NSB0_00478b
The contactors are designed for ope-
ration on a vertical mounting
surface.
Upright mounting position: • AC operation
N S B 0 _ 0 0 4 7 7 a
Special version required.
• DC operation Standard version
Mechanical endurance • Basic units Opera- 30 million
ting
cycles
• Basic unit with snap-on auxiliary 10 million
switch block
• Solid-state compatible auxiliary 5 million
switch block
1)
Electrical endurance
Rated impulse withstand voltage Uimp kV 6
Protective separation between the coil and the main contacts V 400
acc. to EN 60947-1, Appendix N
Mirror contacts
• A mirror contact is an auxiliary NC - 3RT10 1., 3RT13 1. Yes, this applies to both the basic unit as well as to between the basic
contact that cannot be closed simul- (removable auxiliary switch block) unit and the mounted auxiliary switch block acc. to EN 60947-4-1,
taneously with a NO main contact. Appendix F.
- 3RT10 1., 3RT13 1.
(non-removable auxiliary switch block) Yes, acc. to EN 60947-4-1, Appendix F, SUVA
• No mirror contacts for the solid-state
compatible auxiliary switch blocks - 3RH19 11-.NF. .
Ambient temperature • During operation °C -25 ... +60
• During storage °C -55 ... +80
Degree of protection acc. to EN 60947-1, Appendix C IP20, coil assembly IP40
Touch protection acc. to EN 50274 Finger-safe
Shock resistance rectangular pulse • AC operation g/ms 7/5 and 4.2/10
• DC operation g/ms 7/5 and 4.2/10
Shock resistance sine pulse • AC operation g/ms 9.8/5 and 5.9/10
• DC operation g/ms 9.8/5 and 5.9/10
2)
Conductor cross-sections
Short-circuit protection for contactors without overload relays
For short-circuit protection for contactors with overload relays see
"Protection Equipment --> Overload Relays"
For short-circuit protection for fuseless load feeders see "Load Feeders
and Motor Starters --> 3RA Fuseless Load Feeders".
Main circuit
• Fuse links gL/gG LV HRC 3NA,
DIAZED 5SB, NEOZED 5SE
acc. to IEC 60947-4-1/ - Type of coordination "1" A 35
EN 60947-4-1 - Type of coordination "2" A 20
- Weld-free3) A 10
• Miniature circuit breakers (up to 230 V) with C characteristic A 10
Short-circuit current 1 kA, type of coordination "1"
Auxiliary circuit
• Fuse links gL/gG A 10
DIAZED 5SB, NEOZED 5SE (weld-free protection Ik ≥ 1 kA)
• Miniature circuit breakers up to 230 V with C characteristic A 6
Short-circuit current Ik < 400 A
1) For endurance of the main contacts see page 18.
2) For conductor cross-sections see page 23.
3) Test conditions according to IEC 60947-4-1.
20 Siemens · 2011

Size S00
Control
Magnetic coil operating range
• AC operation 50 Hz 0.8 ... 1.1 x Us
60 Hz 0.85 ... 1.1 x Us
• DC operation Up to 50 °C 0.8 ... 1.1 x Us
Up to 60 °C 0.85 ... 1.1 x Us
Power consumption of the magnetic coils (when coil is cold and 1.0 x Us)
AC operation, 50/60 Hz
• Standard version - Closing VA 27/24.3
- P.f. 0.8/0.75
- Closed VA 4.4/3.4
- P.f. 0.27/0.27
• AC operation, 50 Hz, USA/Canada - Closing VA 26.4

- P.f. for closing 0.81
- Closed VA 4.7
- P.f. for closed 0.26
• AC operation, 60 Hz, USA/Canada - Closing VA 31.7

- P.f. for closing 0.77
- Closed VA 5.1
- P.f. for closed 0.27
• DC operation Closing = Closed W 3.3
Permissible residual current of the electronics (with 0 signal)
• AC operation < 3 mA x (230 V/Us), the 3RT19 16-1GA00 additional load module is
recommended for a higher residual current
• DC operation < 10 mA x (24 V/Us), the 3RT19 16-1GA00 additional load module is
recommended for a higher residual current
Operating times1)
Total break time = Opening delay + Arcing time
• AC operation - Closing delay ms 8 ... 35
at 0.8 ... 1.1 x Us - Opening delay ms 4 ... 30
• DC operation - Closing delay ms 25 ... 100
at 0.85 ... 1.1 x Us - Opening delay ms 7 ... 10
• Arcing time ms 10 ... 15
Operating times for 1.0 x Us1)
- Opening delay ms 5 ... 30
1) The OFF-delay of the NO contact and the ON-delay of the NC contact are
increased if the contactor coils are attenuated against voltage peaks
(noise suppression diode 6 to 10 times; diode assemblies 2 to 6 times,
varistor +2 to 5 ms).
Contactors Type 3RT10 15 3RT10 16 3RT10 17

Size S00 S00 S00
Main circuit
AC capacity
Utilization category AC-1
Switching resistive loads
• Rated operational current Ie At 40 °C up to 690 V A 18 22 22
At 60 °C up to 690 V A 16 20 20
1)
• Rated power for AC loads 230 V kW 6.3 7.5 7.5
P.f.= 0.95 (at 60 °C) 400 V kW 11 13 13
500 V kW 13.8 17 17
690 V kW 19 22 22
• Minimum conductor cross-section At 40 °C mm2 2.5 2.5 2.5
for loads with Ie At 60 °C mm2 2.5 2.5 2.5
Utilization categories AC-2 and AC-3
• Rated operational currents Ie Up to 400 V A 7 9 12
440 V A 7 9 11
500 V A 5 6.5 9
690 V A 4 5.2 6.3
• Rated power for slipring or squirrel- At 230 V kW 2.2 3 3
cage motors at 50 and 60 Hz 400 V kW 3 4 5.5
500 V kW 3.5 4.5 5.5
690 V kW 4 5.5 5.5
Thermal load capacity 10 s current2) A 56 72 96
1) Industrial furnaces and electric heaters with resistance heating, etc. 2) According to IEC 60947-4-1.
(increased power consumption on heating up has been taken into For rated values for various start-up conditions see "Protection Equipment
account). --> Overload Relays".
Siemens · 2011 21

Size S00 S00 S00
Main circuit
AC capacity
Power loss per conducting path At Ie/AC-3 W 0.42 0.7 1.24
Utilization category AC-4 (for Ia = 6 x Ie)1)
• Rated operational current Ie Up to 400 V A 6.5 8.5 8.5
• Rated power for squirrel-cage Up to 400 V kW 3 4 4
motors with 50 Hz and 60 Hz
• The following applies to a contact endurance
of about 200000 operating cycles:
- Rated operational currents Ie Up to 400 V A 2.6 4.1 4.1
690 V A 1.8 3.3 3.3
- Rated power for squirrel-cage At 230 V kW 0.67 1.1 1.1
motors with 50 Hz and 60 Hz 400 V kW 1.15 2 2
500 V kW 1.45 2 2
690 V kW 1.15 2.5 2.5
Utilization category AC-5a
Switching gas discharge lamps, inductive ballast
per main current path at 230 V
• Uncorrected,
rated power per lamp/rated operational current per lamp
L 18 W/0.37 A Units 54 59 59
L 36 W/0.43 A Units 46 51 51
L 58 W/0.67 A Units 29 32 32
L 80 W/0.79 A Units 25 27 27
• DUO switching (two-lamp)
L 18 W/0.22 A Units 90 (r 2 x 90 lamps) 100 (r 2 x 100 lamps) 100 (r 2 x 100 lamps)
Switching gas discharge lamps with correction
per main current path at 230 V
• Shunt compensation with inductive ballast,
rated power per lamp/capacitance/
rated operational current per lamp
L 18 W/4.5 μF/0.11 A Units 17 22 22
L 36 W/4.5 μF/0.21 A Units 16 22 22
L 58 W/7.0 μF/0.32 A Units 10 14 14
L 80 W/7.0 μF/0.49 A Units 6 9 9
• With solid-state ballast2) single lamp
L 18 W/6.8 μF/0.10 A Units 49 63 63
L 36 W/6.8 μF/0.18 A Units 27 35 35
L 58 W/10 μF/0.29 A Units 16 23 23
L 80 W/10 μF/0.43 A Units 11 14 14
• With solid-state ballast2) two-lamp
L 18 W/10 μF/0.18 A Units 27 (r 2 x 27 lamps) 35 (r 2 x 35 lamps) 35 (r 2 x 35 lamps)
Utilization category AC-5b, switching incandescent lamps kW 1.3 1.7 1.7
per main current path at 230/220 V
switching AC transformers
• Rated operational current Ie
- For inrush current n = 20 Up to 400 V A 3.6 5.1 7.2
• Rated power P
- For inrush current n = 20 At 230 V kVA 1.4 2 2.9
400 V kVA 2.5 3.5 5
500 V kVA 3.3 4.6 6.2
690 V kVA 4.3 6 8.6
- For inrush current n = 30 At 230 V kVA 1 1.3 2
400 V kVA 1.6 2.3 3.5
500 V kVA 2.2 3.1 4.6
690 V kVA 2.9 4 6
For deviating inrush current factors x, the power must be recalculated as follows:
Px = Pn 30 · 30/x
1) The data only apply to 3RT15 16 and 3RT15 17 (2 NO + 2 NC) up to a
rated operational voltage of 400 V.
2) Depending on the electronic ballast used, higher lamp numbers are also
possible.
22 Siemens · 2011

Size S00 S00 S00
Main circuit
Load rating with DC
Utilization category DC-1
Switching resistive loads (L/R ≤ 1 ms)
• Rated operational current Ie (at 60 °C)
- 1 conducting path Up to 24 V A 15 20
60 V A 15 20
110 V A 1.5 2.1
220 V A 0.6 0.8
440 V A 0.42 0.6
600 V A 0.42 0.6
- 2 conducting paths in series Up to 24 V A 15 20
60 V A 15 20
110 V A 8.4 12
220 V A 1.2 1.6
440 V A 1.6 0.8
600 V A 0.5 0.7
60 V A 15 20
110 V A 15 20
220 V A 15 20
440 V A 0.9 1.3
600 V A 0.7 1
Utilization category DC-3 and DC-5
Shunt-wound and series-wound motors (L/R ≤ 15 ms)
60 V A 0.35 0.5
110 V A 0.1 0.15
220 V A -- --
440 V A -- --
600 V A -- --
60 V A 3.5 5
110 V A 0.25 0.35
220 V A -- --
440 V A -- --
600 V A -- --
60 V A 15 20
110 V A 15 20
220 V A 1.2 1.5
440 V A 0.14 0.2
600 V A 0.14 0.2
Switching frequency
Switching frequency z in operating cycles/hour
• Contactors without overload relay No-load switching frequency AC h-1 10000
No-load switching frequency DC h-1 10000
Dependence of the switching fre- Rated operation
quency z' on the operational current AC-1 (AC/DC) h-1 1000
I' and operational voltage U' : AC-2 (AC/DC) h-1 750
z' = z ⋅(Ie/I' ) ⋅(400 V/U' )1.5 ⋅1/h AC-3 (AC/DC) h-1 750
AC-4 (AC/DC) h-1 250
• Contactors with overload relays (mean value) h-1 15
Main and auxiliary conductors: Screw terminals
2
(1 or 2 conductors can be connected) • Solid mm 2 x (0.5 ... 1.5)1); 2 x (0.75 ... 2.5)1) acc. to IEC 60947;
For standard screwdriver size 2 and max. 2 x (1 ... 4)
Pozidriv 2 • Finely stranded with end sleeve mm2 2 x (0.5 ... 1.5)1); 2 x (0.75 ... 2.5)1)
• Solid or stranded, AWG cables AWG 2 x (20 ... 16)1); 2 x (18 ... 14)1); 1 x 12
• Terminal screw M3
- Tightening torque Nm 0.8 ... 1.2 (7 ... 10.3 lb.in)
Main and auxiliary conductors; Cage Clamp terminals
coil terminals:
(1 or 2 conductors can be connected) • Solid mm2 2 x (0.25 ... 2.5)
• Finely stranded with end sleeve mm2 2 x (0.25 ... 1.5)
2
• Finely stranded without end slee- mm 2 x (0.25 ... 2.5)
ve
• AWG cables, solid or stranded AWG 2 x (24 ... 14)
For tools for opening Cage Clamp terminals see Catalog LV 1, 1) If two different conductor cross-sections are connected to one clamping
Chapter 3, Accessories and Spare Parts. point, both cross-sections must lie in the range specified. If identical
cross-sections are used, this restriction does not apply.
Maximum external diameter of the conductor insulation: 3.6 mm.
For conductor cross-sections ≤ 1 mm² an "insulation stop" must
be used, see Catalog LV 1, Chapter 3, "Accessories and Spare
Parts".
Siemens · 2011 23
Contactors Type 3RT10 23 3RT10 24 3RT10 25 3RT10 26

Size S0 S0 S0 S0
General data
360° 30° 30°
NSB0_00478b
surface.
N S B 0 _ 0 0 4 7 7 a
Standard version
• DC operation Special version required, also applies to
3RT10 2.-.K.40. coupling relays.
ting
cycles
• Basic unit with snap-on 10 million
auxiliary switch block
• Solid-state compatible 5 million
1)
(acc. to EN 60947-1, Appendix N)
Mirror contacts
• A mirror contact is an auxiliary NC - 3RT10 2., 3RT13 2. Yes, acc. to EN 60947-4-1, Appendix F
contact that cannot be closed simul- (removable auxiliary switch block)
taneously with a NO main contact.
- 3RT10 2., 3RT13 2. Acc. to SUVA requirements on request
(non-removable auxiliary switch
block)
Permissible ambient temperature • During operation °C -25 ... +60
Shock resistance rectangular pulse • AC operation g/ms 8.2/5 and 4.9/10
• DC operation g/ms 10/5 and 7.5/10
Shock resistance sine pulse • AC operation g/ms 12.5/5 and 7.8/10
• DC operation g/ms 15/5 and 10/10
2)
Main circuit For short-circuit protection for contactors with overload relays see
• Fuse links gL/gG "Protection Equipment --> Overload Relays".
LV HRC 3NA, DIAZED 5SB, NEOZED 5SE For short-circuit protection for fuseless load feeders see "Load Feeders
acc. to IEC 60947-4-1/ and Motor Starters --> 3RA Fuseless Load Feeders".
EN 60947-4-1
- Type of coordination "1" A 63 100
- Weld-free3) A 10 16
• Miniature circuit breakers with C characteristic A 25 32
(short-circuit current 3 kA, type of coordination "1")
Auxiliary circuit
(weld-free protection at Ik ≥ 1 kA)
• Miniature circuit breaker with C characteristic A 10
(short-circuit current Ik < 400 A)
24 Siemens · 2011

Size S0
Control
Magnetic coil operating range AC/DC 0.8 ... 1.1 x Us
• AC operation, 50 Hz, - Closing VA 61
standard version - P.f. 0.82
- Closed VA 7.8
- P.f. 0.24
• AC operation, 50/60 Hz, - Closing VA 64/63
standard version - P.f. 0.72/0.74
- Closed VA 8.4/6.8
- P.f. 0.24/0.28
• AC operation, 50 Hz, USA/Canada - Closing VA 61
- P.f. 0.82
- Closed VA 7.8
- P.f. 0.24
• AC operation, 60 Hz, USA/Canada - Closing VA 69
- P.f. 0.76
- Closed VA 7.5
- P.f. 0.28
• DC operation Closing = Closed W 5.4
• AC operation mA < 6 mA x (230 V/Us)
• DC operation mA < 16 mA x (24 V/Us)
Operating times for 0.8 ... 1.1 x Us1)
- Opening delay ms 13.5 ... 15.5
• Arcing time ms 10
- Opening delay ms 14 ... 15.5
(varistor +2 ms to 5 ms, diode assembly: 2 to 6 times).

Size S0 S0 S0 S0
Main circuit
AC capacity
• Rated operational current Ie At 40 °C up to 690 V A 40
At 60 °C up to 690 V A 35
1)
• Rated power for AC loads 230 V kW 13.3
P.f. = 0.95 (at 60 °C) 400 V kW 23
500 V kW 29
690 V kW 40
• Minimum conductor cross-section At 40 °C mm2 10
for loads with Ie At 60 °C mm2 10
Utilization category AC-2 and AC-3
• Rated operational currents Ie Up to 400 V A 9 12 17 25
440 V A 9 12 17 22
500 V A 6.5 12 17 18
690 V A 5.2 9 13 13
• Rated power for slipring or squirrel- At 110 V kW 1.1 1.5 2.2 3
cage motors at 50 Hz and 60 Hz 230 V kW 3 3 4 5.5
400 V kW 4 5.5 7.5 11
500 V kW 4.5 7.5 10 11
660 V/690 V kW 5.5 7.5 11 11
Thermal load capacity 10 s current2) A 80 110 150 200
Power loss per conducting path At Ie/AC-3 W 0.4 0.5 0.9 1.6
1) Industrial furnaces and electric heaters with resistance heating, etc.
(increased power consumption on heating up has been taken into
account).
2) According to IEC 60947-4-1.
For rated values for various start-up conditions
see "Protection Equipment --> Overload Relays".
Siemens · 2011 25

Size S0 S0 S0 S0
Main circuit
AC capacity
Utilization category AC-4 (for Ia = 6 x Ie)
• Rated operational current Ie Up to 400 V A 8.5 12.5 15.5 15.5
• Rated power for squirrel-cage motors At 400 V kW 4 5.5 7.5 7.5
with 50 Hz and 60 Hz
- Rated operational currents Ie Up to 400 V A 4.1 5.5 7.7 9
690 V A 3.3 5.5 7.7 9
- Rated power for squirrel-cage motors At 110 V kW 0.5 0.73 1 1.2
with 50 Hz and 60 Hz 230 V kW 1.1 1.5 2 2.5
400 V kW 2 2.6 3.5 4.4
500 V kW 2 3.3 4.6 5.6
690 V kW 2.5 4.6 6 7.7
Per main current path at 230 V1)
• Rated power per lamp/rated operational current per lamp
- Uncorrected L 18 W/0.37 A Units 108
L 36 W/0.43 A Units 93
L 58 W/0.67 A Units 59
L 80 W/0.79 A Units 50
- DUO switching (two-lamp) L 18 W/0.22 A Units 181 (r 2 x 181 lamps)
L 36 W/0.42 A Units 95 (r 2 x 95 lamps)
Per main current path at 230 V
• Rated power per lamp/capacitance/rated
operational current per lamp
- Shunt compensation with inductive L 18 W/4.5 μF/0.11 A Units 37 41 61
ballast
L 36 W/4.5 μF/0.21 A Units 30 30 51
L 58 W/7.0 μF/0.32 A Units 20 20 33
L 80 W/7.0 μF/0.49 A Units 13 13 22
- With solid-state ballast2) single lamp L 18 W/6.8 μF/0.10 A Units 105 119 175
L 36 W/6.8 μF/0.18 A Units 58 66 97
L 58 W/10 μF/0.29 A Units 36 41 60
L 80 W/10 μF/0.43 A Units 24 27 40
- With solid-state ballast2) two-lamp L 18 W/10 μF/0.18 A Units 58 (r 2 x 58 lamps) 66 (r 2 x 66 l.) 97 (r 2 x 97 l.)
L 36 W/10 μF/0.35 A Units 30 (r 2 x 30 lamps) 34 (r 2 x 34 l.) 50 (r 2 x 50 l.)
Utilization category AC-5b, switching incandescent lamps kW 2.8 3.2 4.7
per main current path at 230/220 V
- For inrush current n = 20 Up to 400 V A 11.4 20.2
- For inrush current n = 30 Up to 400 V A 7.6 13.5
• Rating P
- For inrush current n = 20 At 230 V kVA 4.5 8
400 V kVA 7.9 13.9
500 V kVA 9.9 15.5
690 V kVA 13.6 15.5
- For inrush current n = 30 At 230 V kVA 3 5.4
400 V kVA 5.2 9.3
500 V kVA 6.6 11.7
690 V kVA 9.1 15.5
Px = Pn30 ⋅ 30/x
Utilization category AC-6b,
switching low-inductance (low-loss, metallized dielectric) AC capacitors
• Rated operational currents Ie Up to 400 V A 5.8 10.8
• Rated power for single capacitors or At 230 V kvar 2.5 4
banks of capacitors (minimum induc- 400 V kvar 4 7.5
tance of 6 µH between capacitors con- 500 V kvar 4 7.5
nected in parallel) at 50 Hz, 60 Hz and 690 V kvar 4 7.5
1) For Ie/AC-1 = 35 A (60 °C) and the corresponding minimum conductor
cross-section 10 mm2.
possible.
26 Siemens · 2011

Size S0 S0 S0 S0
Main circuit
Load rating with DC
- 1 conducting path Up to 24 V A 35
60 V A 20
110 V A 4.5
220 V A 1
440 V A 0.4
600 V A 0.25
- 2 conducting paths in series Up to 24 V A 35
60 V A 35
110 V A 35
220 V A 5
440 V A 1
600 V A 0.8
60 V A 35
110 V A 35
220 V A 35
440 V A 2.9
600 V A 1.4
60 V A 5
110 V A 2.5
220 V A 1
440 V A 0.09
600 V A 0.06
60 V A 35
110 V A 15
220 V A 3
440 V A 0.27
600 V A 0.16
60 V A 35
110 V A 35
220 V A 10
440 V A 0.6
600 V A 0.6
Switching frequency
• Contactors without overload relays No-load switching h-1 5000
frequency AC
-1
Dependence of the switching frequency z' No-load switching h 1500
on the operational current I' and operatio- frequency DC
nal voltage U' : AC-1 (AC/DC) h-1 1000
z' = z ⋅(Ie/I' ) ⋅(400 V/U' )1.5 ⋅1/h AC-2 (AC/DC) h-1 1000 750
AC-3 (AC/DC) h-1 1000 750
AC-4 (AC/DC) h-1 300 250
Siemens · 2011 27

Size S0 S0 S0 S0
Conductor cross-sections (1 or 2 conductors connectable)
Main conductors Screw terminals
Conductor cross-section
• Solid mm² 2 x (1 ... 2.5)1); 2 x (2.5 ... 6)1) acc. to IEC 60947; max. 1 x 10
• Finely stranded with end sleeve mm² 2 x (1 ... 2.5)1); 2 x (2.5 ... 6)1)
• AWG cables, solid AWG 2 x (16 ... 12)
• AWG cables, AWG 2 x (14 ... 10)
solid or stranded
• AWG cables, stranded AWG 1x8
• Terminal screws M4 (Pozidriv size 2)
- Tightening torque Nm 2 ... 2.5 (18 ... 22 lb.in)
Auxiliary conductors
• Solid mm2 2 x (0.5 ... 1.5)1); 2 x (0.75 ... 2.5)1) acc. to IEC 60947;
max. 2 x (0.75 ... 4)
• Finely stranded with end sleeve mm2 2 x (0.5 ... 1.5)1); 2 x (0.75 ... 2.5)1)
• solid or stranded AWG (2 x) AWG 2 x (20 ... 16)1); 2 x (18 ... 14)1); 1 x 12
• Terminal screws M3
Auxiliary conductors Cage Clamp terminals
• Solid mm2 2 x (0.25 ... 2.5)

2
• Finely stranded without end sleeve mm 2 x (0.25 ... 2.5)
• AWG cables, AWG 2 x (24 ... 14)
solid or stranded
1) If two different conductor cross-sections are connected to one clamping
point, both cross-sections must lie in the range specified. If identical

Size S2 S2 S2
General data
Permissible mounting position • AC and DC operation 360° 30° 30° NSB0_00478b
surface.
For DC operation and 22.5 ° inclination towards the front,

operating range 0.85 ... 1.1 x Us
Upright mounting position: • AC and DC operation
N S B 0 _ 0 0 4 7 7 a
ting
cycles
switch block
switch block
1)
Mirror contacts
• A mirror contact is an auxiliary NC - 3RT10 3., 3RT13 3. Yes, acc. to EN 60947-4-1, Appendix F
taneously with a NO main contact. - 3RT10 3., 3RT13 3. Acc. to SUVA requirements on request.
block)
Degree of protection acc. to EN 60947-1, Appendix C IP20 (terminal compartment IP00),
AC coil assembly IP40,
DC coil assembly IP30
Shock resistance
• Rectangular pulse AC and DC operation g/ms 10/5 and 5/10
• Sine pulse AC and DC operation g/ms 15/5 and 8/10
Conductor cross-sections 2)
1) For endurance of the main contacts see page 19. 2) For conductor cross-sections see page 32.
28 Siemens · 2011

Size S2 S2 S2
For short-circuit protection for contactors with overload relays see
"Protection Equipment --> Overload Relays".
For short-circuit protection for fuseless load feeders see "Load Feeders
and Motor Starters --> 3RA Fuseless Load Feeders".
Main circuit
Fuse links, gL/gG
LV HRC 3NA, DIAZED 5SB, NEOZED 5SE
acc. to IEC 60947-4-1/ • Type of coordination "1" A 125 125 160
EN 60947-4-1 • Type of coordination "2" A 63 63 80
• Weld-free1) A 16 16 50
Auxiliary circuit
DIAZED 5SB, NEOZED 5SE (weld-free protection at Ik ≥ 1 kA)
• Miniature circuit breakers with C characteristic A 10
(short-circuit current Ik ≤ 400 A)
Control
• AC operation, 50 Hz, - Closing VA 104 145
standard version - P.f. 0.78 0.79
- Closed VA 9.7 12.5
- P.f. 0.42 0.36
• AC operation, 50/60 Hz, - Closing VA 127/113 170/155
standard version - P.f. 0.73/0.69 0.76/0.72
- Closed VA 11.3/9.5 15/11.8
- P.f. 0.41/0.42 0.35/0.38
• AC operation, 50 Hz, USA/Canada - Closing VA 108 150
- P.f. 0.76 0.77
- P.f. 0.42 0.35
- P.f. 0.7 0.71
- Closed VA 10.1 12.6
- P.f. 0.42 0.37
• DC operation Closing = Closed W 13.3 13.3
• AC operation mA < 12 mA x (230 V/Us) < 18 mA x (230 V/Us)
• DC operation mA < 38 mA x (24 V/Us) < 38 mA x (24 V/Us)
(Total break time = Opening delay + Arcing time)
• AC operation - Closing delay ms 11 ... 30 10 ... 24
- Opening delay ms 7 ... 10 7 ... 10
• DC operation - Closing delay ms 50 ... 95 60 ... 100
- Opening delay ms 20 ... 30 20 ... 25
• Arcing time ms 10 10
- Opening delay ms 7 ... 10 7 ... 10
- Opening delay ms 20 ... 30 20 ... 25
Siemens · 2011 29

Size S2 S2 S2
Main circuit
AC capacity
• Rated operational currents Ie At 40 °C up to 690 V A 50 60 60
At 60 °C up to 690 V A 45 55 55
• Rated power for AC loads1) 230 V kW 18 22 22
P.f. = 0.95 (at 60 °C) 400 V kW 31 38 38
500 V kW 39 46 46
690 V kW 54 66 66
• Minimum conductor cross-section for At 40 °C mm2 16 16 16
loads with Ie At 60 °C mm2 10 16 16
690 V A 20 24 24
• Rated power for slipring 230 V kW 7.5 11 15
or squirrel-cage motors 400 V kW 15 18.5 22
at 50 and 60 Hz 500 V kW 18.5 22 30
690 V kW 18.5 22 22
Power loss per conducting path At Ie/AC-3 W 1.8 2.6 5
• Rated operational current Ie Up to 400 V A 29 35 41
• Rated power for squirrel-cage motors At 400 V kW 15 18.5 22
- Rated operational currents Ie Up to 400 V A 15.6 18.5 24
690 V A 15.6 18.5 24
- Rated power for squirrel-cage 230 V kW 4.7 5.4 7.3
motors with 50 Hz and 60 Hz 400 V kW 8.2 9.5 12.6
500 V kW 9.8 11.8 15.8
690 V kW 13 15.5 21.8
• Uncorrected,
rated power per lamp/rated operational current
per lamp
L 18 W/0.37 A Units 135 162 162
L 36 W/0.43 A Units 116 139 139
L 58 W/0.67 A Units 74 89 89
L 80 W/0.79 A Units 63 75 75
rated power per lamp/capacitance/rated
L 18 W/4.5 µF/0.11 A Units 78 98 123
L 36 W/4.5 µF/0.21 A Units 78 98 123
L 58 W/7 µF/0.32 A Units 50 63 79
L 80 W/7 µF/0.49 A Units 50 63 73
L 18 W/6.8 µF/0.10 A Units 224 280 350
L 36 W/6.8 µF/0.18 A Units 124 155 194
L 58 W/10 µF/0.29 A Units 77 96 120
L 80 W/10 µF/0.43 A Units 52 65 81
L 18 W/10 µF/0.18 A Units 124 (r 2 x 124 lamps) 155 (r 2 x 155 lamps) 194 (r 2 x 194 lamps)
account).
For rated values for various start-up conditions see
possible.
30 Siemens · 2011

Size S2 S2 S2
Main circuit
AC capacity
Utilization category AC-5b kW 6.0 7.6 9.5
Switching incandescent lamps
Per main current path at 230/220 V
- For inrush current n = 20 Up to 400 V A 31 36.5 43.2
• Rating P
- For inrush current n = 20 At 230 V kVA 12.3 14.5 17.2
400 V kVA 21.5 25.3 29.9
500 V kVA 26.8 31.6 37.4
690 V kVA 23.9 28.7 28.7
- For inrush current n = 30 230 V kVA 8.2 9.7 11.5
400 V kVA 14.3 16.8 20
500 V kVA 17.9 21 24.9
690 V kVA 23.9 28.7 28.7
For deviating inrush current factors x, the power must be recalculated as follows.
Px = Pn30 ⋅ 30/x
Utilization category AC-6b
Switching low-inductance (low-loss, metallized dielectric) AC capacitors
Ambient temperature 40 °C
• Rated power for single capacitors or At 230 V kvar 12 15 15
banks of capacitors (minimum induc- 400 V kvar 20 25 25
tance of 20 µH between capacitors 525 V kvar 25 33 33
connected in parallel) at 50 Hz, 60 Hz 690 V kvar 20 25 25
and
Load rating with DC
Switching resistive loads (L/R < 1 ms)
- 1 conducting path Up to 24 V A 45 55 55
60 V A 20 23 23
110 V A 4.5 4.5 4.5
220 V A 2 2 2
440 V A 0.4 0.4 0.4
600 V A 0.25 0.25 0.25
- 2 conducting paths in series Up to 24 V A 45 55 55
60 V A 45 45 45
110 V A 45 45 45
220 V A 5 5 5
440 V A 1 1 1
600 V A 0.8 0.8 0.8
60 V A 45 55 55
110 V A 45 55 55
220 V A 45 45 45
440 V A 2.9 2.9 2.9
600 V A 1.4 1.4 1.4
60 V A 6 6 6
110 V A 2.5 2.5 2.5
220 V A 2 2 2
440 V A 0.1 0.1 0.1
600 V A 0.06 0.06 0.06
60 V A 45 45 45
110 V A 25 25 25
220 V A 5 5 5
440 V A 0.27 0.27 0.27
600 V A 0.16 0.16 0.16
60 V A 45 55 55
110 V A 45 55 55
220 V A 25 25 25
440 V A 0.6 0.6 0.6
600 V A 0.6 0.6 0.6
Siemens · 2011 31

Size S2 S2 S2
Switching frequency
• Contactors without overload relays No-load switching frequency AC h-1 5000 5000 5000
No-load switching frequency DC h-1 1500 1500 1500
Dependence of the switching fre- AC-1 (AC/DC) h-1 1200 1200 1000
quency z' on the operational cur- AC-2 (AC/DC) h-1 750 600 400
rent I' and operational voltage U' : AC-3 (AC/DC) h-1 1000 1000 800
z' = z ⋅(Ie/I' ) ⋅(400 V/U' )1.5 ⋅1/h AC-4 (AC/DC) h-1 250 300 300
• Contactors with overload relays (mean value) h-1 15 15 15

Size S2
Main conductors: Screw terminals
With box terminal
Front clamping point • Finely stranded with end sleeve mm² 0.75 ... 25
connected • Finely stranded without end sleeve mm² 0.75 ... 25
• Stranded mm² 0.75 ... 35
• Solid mm² 0.75 ... 16
NSB00479
• Ribbon cable conductors mm 6 x 9 x 0.8

(number x width x thickness)
• AWG cables, AWG 18 ... 2
solid or stranded
Rear clamping point • Finely stranded with end sleeve mm² 0.75 ... 25
connected • Finely stranded without end sleeve mm² 0.75 ... 25
• Stranded mm² 0.75 ... 35
• Solid mm² 0.75 ... 16
NSB00480

• AWG cables, AWG 18 ... 2
solid or stranded
Both clamping points • Finely stranded with end sleeve mm² 2 x (0.75 ... 16)
connected • Finely stranded without end sleeve mm² 2 x (0.75 ... 16)
• Stranded mm² 2 x (0.75 ... 25)
• Solid mm² 2 x (0.75 ... 16)
• Ribbon cable conductors mm 2 x (6 x 9 x 0.8)
NSB00481

• AWG cables, AWG 2 x (18 ... 2)
solid or stranded
• Terminal screw M6 (Pozidriv size 2)
- Tightening torque Nm 3 ... 4.5 (27 ... 40 lb.in)
Auxiliary conductors:
• Solid mm² 2 x (0.5 ... 1.5)1); 2 x (0.75 ... 2.5)1) acc. to IEC 60947;
max. 2 x (0.75 ... 4)
• Finely stranded with end sleeve mm² 2 x (0.5 ... 1.5)1); 2 x (0.75 ... 2.5)1)
• AWG cables, solid or stranded AWG 2 x (20 ... 16)1); 2 x (18 ... 14)1); 1 x 12
Auxiliary conductors: Cage Clamp terminals
• Solid mm² 2 x (0.25 ... 2.5)

• Finely stranded with end sleeve mm² 2 x (0.25 ... 1.5)
• Finely stranded without end sleeve mm² 2 x (0.25 ... 2.5)
• AWG cables, 2 x (24 ... 14)
solid or stranded
For tools for opening Cage Clamp terminals see Catalog LV 1,
Chapter 3, Accessories and Spare Parts.
Parts".
32 Siemens · 2011

Size S3 S3 S3
General data
Permissible mounting position • AC and DC operation 360° 30° 30°
NSB0_00478b
The contactors are designed
for operation on a vertical
mounting surface.
For DC operation and 22.5° inclination towards the front,

N S B 0 _ 0 0 4 7 7 a
• DC operation --
ting
cycles
switch block
switch block
Electrical endurance 1)

Mirror contacts
• A mirror contact is an auxiliary NC - 3RT10 4., 3RT13 4., 3RT14 4. Yes, acc. to EN 60947-4-1, Appendix F
taneously with a NO main contact. - 3RT10 4., 3RT13 4., 3RT14 4. Acc. to Swiss regulations (SUVA) on request.
block)
Shock resistance
• Rectangular pulse AC and DC operation g/ms 6.8/5 and 4/10
• Sine pulse AC and DC operation g/ms 10.6/5 and 6.2/10
2)
• Fuse links gL/gG "Protection Equipment --> Overload Relays".
LV HRC 3NA, DIAZED 5SB, NEOZED 5SE For short-circuit protection for fuseless load feeders see "Load Feeders
acc. to IEC 60947-4-1/ and Motor Starters --> 3RA Fuseless Load Feeders".
EN 60947-4-1
- Weld-free3) A 63 100
Auxiliary circuit
DIAZED 5SB, NEOZED 5SE (weld-free protection at Ik ≥ 1 kA)
• Miniature circuit breakers with C characteristic (short-circuit current A 10
Ik < 400 A)
Siemens · 2011 33

Size S3 S3 S3
Control
• AC operation, 50 Hz, - Closing VA 218 270
standard version - P.f. 0.61 0.68
- Closed VA 21 22
- P.f. 0.26 0.27
• AC operation, 50/60 Hz, - Closing VA 247/211 298/274
standard version - P.f. 0.62/0.57 0.7/0.62
- Closed VA 25/18 27/20
- P.f. 0.27/0.3 0.29/0.31
- P.f. 0.61 0.68
- Closed VA 21 22
- P.f. 0.26 0.27
- P.f. 0.55 0.52
- Closed VA 20 21
- P.f. 0.28 0.29
• DC operation Closing = Closed W 15 15
• AC operation < 25 mA x (230 V/Us)
• DC operation < 43 mA x (24 V/Us)
- Opening delay ms 10 ... 19 10 ... 25
- Opening delay ms 14 ... 20 14 ... 20
• Arcing time ms 10 ... 15 10 ... 15
- Opening delay ms 11 ... 18 11 ... 23
- Opening delay ms 16 ... 20 16 ... 20
Main circuit
AC capacity
1000 V A 50 60 70
At 60 °C up to 690 V A 90 100 100
1000 V A 40 50 60
• Rated output of AC loads2) At 230 V kW 34 38 38
P.f. = 0.95 (at 60 °C) 400 V kW 59 66 66
500 V kW 74 82 82
690 V kW 102 114 114
1000 V kW 66 82 98
• Minimum conductor cross-section At 40 °C mm2 35 50 50
for loads with Ie At 60 °C mm2 35 35 35
Utilization categories AC-2 and AC-3
690 V A 47 58 58
1000 V A 25 30 30
• Rated power of slipring At 230 V kW 18.5 22 22
or squirrel-cage motors at 50 and 400 V kW 30 37 45
60 Hz 500 V kW 37 45 55
690 V kW 45 55 55
1000 V kW 30 37 37
Power loss per conducting path At Ie/AC-3 W 4.6 7.7 10.8
account).
34 Siemens · 2011

Size S3 S3 S3
Main circuit
AC capacity
• Rated power for squirrel-cage motors At 400 V kW 30 37 45
- Rated operational currents Ie Up to 400 V A 28 34 42
690 V A 28 34 42
1000 V A 20 23 23
- Rated power for squirrel-cage At 230 V kW 8.7 10.4 12
motors with 50 Hz and 60 Hz 400 V kW 15.1 17.9 22
500 V kW 18.4 22.4 27
690 V kW 25.4 30.9 38
1000 V kW 22 30 30
• Uncorrected,
rated power per lamp/rated operational current per lamp
L 18 W/0.37 A Units 270 324
L 36 W/0.43 A Units 232 279
L 58 W/0.67 A Units 149 179
L 80 W/0.79 A Units 126 151
L 18 W/0.21 A Units 454 (r 2 x 454 lamps) 545 (r 2 x 545 lamps)
rated power per lamp/capacitance/rated
L 18 W/4.5 μF/0.11 A Units 160 197 234
L 36 W/4.5 μF/0.21 A Units 160 197 234
L 58 W/7 μF/0.32 A Units 103 127 150
L 80 W/7 μF/0.49 A Units 103 126 146
L 18 W/6.8 μF/0.10 A Units 455 560 665
L 36 W/6.8 μF/0.18 A Units 253 311 369
L 58 W/10 μF/0.29 A Units 156 193 229
L 80 W/10 μF/0.43 A Units 105 130 154
Switching incandescent lamps
Per main current path at 230/220 V kW 12.3 15.2 18.1
possible.
Siemens · 2011 35

Size S3 S3 S3
Main circuit
AC capacity
• Rated operational current Ie (60 °C)
- For inrush current n = 20 Up to 400 V A 63.5 80 84.4
Up to 690 V A 47 58 58
Up to 690 V A 42.3 56.3 56.3
• Rating P
400 V kVA 43.9 55.4 58
500 V kVA 54.9 69.3 73.1
690 V kVA 56.2 69.3 69.3
400 V kVA 29.3 39 39
500 V kVA 36.6 48.7 48.7
690 V kVA 50.3 67.3 67.3
For deviating inrush current factors x, the power must be recalculated as follows.
Px = Pn30 ⋅ 30/x
• Rated operational current Ie (60 °C) Up to 400 V A 57 72
• Rated power for single capacitors or At 230 V kvar 24 29
banks of capacitors (minimum induc- 400 V kvar 40 50
tance of 6 µH between capacitors con- 525 V kvar 50 65
nected in parallel) at 50 Hz, 60 Hz and 690 V kvar 40 50
Load rating with DC
Switching resistive load (L/R ≤ 1 ms)
60 V A 23 60 60
110 V A 4.5 9 9
220 V A 1 2 2
440 V A 0.4 0.6 0.6
600 V A 0.26 0.4 0.4
60 V A 90 100 100
110 V A 90 100 100
220 V A 5 10 10
440 V A 1 1.8 1.8
600 V A 0.8 1 1
60 V A 90 100 100
110 V A 90 100 100
220 V A 70 80 80
440 V A 2.9 1.8 4.5
600 V A 1.4 1 2.6
60 V A 6 6.5 6.5
110 V A 2.5 2.5 2.5
220 V A 1 1 1
440 V A 0.15 0.15 0.15
600 V A 0.06 0.06 0.06
60 V A 90 100 100
110 V A 90 100 100
220 V A 7 7 7
440 V A 0.42 0.42 0.42
600 V A 0.16 0.16 0.16
60 V A 90 100 100
110 V A 90 100 100
220 V A 35 35 35
440 V A 0.8 0.8 0.8
600 V A 0.35 0.35 0.35
36 Siemens · 2011

Size S3 S3 S3
Main circuit
Switching frequency
• Contactors without overload relays No-load switching frequency AC h-1 5000 5000 5000
No-load switching frequency DC h-1 1000 1000 1000
Dependence of the switching fre- AC-1 (AC/DC) h-1 1000 900 900
quency z' on the operational current AC-2 (AC/DC) h-1 400 400 350
I' and operational voltage U' : AC-3 (AC/DC) h-1 1000 1000 850
z' = z ⋅(Ie/I' ) ⋅(400 V/U' )1.5 ⋅1/h AC-4 (AC/DC) h-1 300 300 250

Size S3
With box terminal
connected • Finely stranded without end sleeve mm² 4 ... 50
• Solid mm² 2.5 ... 16
• Stranded mm² 4 ... 70
NSB00479

• AWG cables, AWG 10 ... 2/0
solid or stranded
• Solid mm² 2.5 ... 16
NSB00480

solid or stranded
Both clamping points • Finely stranded with end sleeve mm² 2 x (2.5 ... 35)
connected • Finely stranded without end sleeve mm² 2 x (4 ... 35)
• Solid mm² 2 x (2.5 ... 16)
• Stranded mm² 2 x (4 ... 50)
NSB00481

• AWG cables, AWG 2 x (10 ... 1/0)
solid or stranded
• Terminal screw M6 (hexagon socket, A/F 4)
- Tightening torque Nm 4 ... 6 (36 ... 53 lb.in)
Connection for drilled copper bars1) Max. width mm 10
Without box terminal with • Finely stranded with cable lug mm² 10 ... 503)
cable lugs2) • Stranded with cable lug mm² 10 ... 703)
(1 or 2 conductors can be connected) • AWG cables, AWG 7 ... 1/0
solid or stranded
max. 2 x (0.75 ... 4)
• AWG cables, AWG 2 x (20 ... 16)4); 2 x (18 ... 14)4); 1 x 12
solid or stranded
• Solid mm2 2 x (0.25 ... 2.5)

• Finely stranded without end sleeve mm2 2 x (0.25 ... 2.5)
• AWG cables, AWG 2 x (24 ... 14)
solid or stranded
For tools for opening Cage Clamp terminals see Catalog LV 1, 1) If bars larger than 12 x 10 mm are connected, a 3RT19 46-4EA1 terminal
Chapter 3, Accessories and Spare Parts. cover is needed to comply with the phase clearance.
Maximum external diameter of the conductor insulation: 3.6 mm. 2) If conductors larger than 25 mm2 are connected, a 3RT19 46-4EA1
For conductor cross-sections ≤ 1 mm² an "insulation stop" must terminal cover is needed to comply with the phase clearance.
be used, see Catalog LV 1, Chapter 3, "Accessories and Spare 3) Only with crimped cable lugs according to DIN 46234. Cable lug
Parts". max. 20 mm wide.
Siemens · 2011 37

Size S6 S6 S6
General data
Permissible mounting position
The contactors are designed for operation on a vertical mounting surface. 30° 30°
NSB0_00649
360°
Mechanical endurance Opera- 10 million

ting
cycles
Electrical endurance 1)

Mirror contacts Yes, acc. to EN 60947-4-1, Appendix F
A mirror contact is an auxiliary NC contact that cannot be closed simultane-
ously with a NO main contact.
Permissible ambient temperature • During operation °C -25 ... +60/+55 with AS-Interface
Degree of protection acc. to EN 60947-1, Appendix C IP00/open, coil assembly IP20
Touch protection acc. to EN 50274 Finger-safe with cover
Shock resistance • Rectangular pulse g/ms 8.5/5 and 4.2/10
• Sine pulse g/ms 13.4/5 and 6.5/10
2)
3)
Electromagnetic compatibility (EMC)
Short-circuit protection
Fuse links, gL/gG "Protection Equipment --> Overload Relays".
acc. to IEC 60947-4-1/ • Type of coordination "1" A 355 355
EN 60947-4-1 • Type of coordination "2" A 315 315
• Weld-free4) A 80 160
Auxiliary circuit
• Or miniature circuit breakers with C characteristic (Ik < 400 A)
3) For electromagnetic compatibility (EMC) see page 12.
38 Siemens · 2011

Size S6
Control
Operating range of the solenoid AC/DC (UC) 0.8 x Us min ... 1.1 x Us max
Power consumption of the solenoid
(when coil is cool and rated range Us min ... Us max)
- AC operation Closing at Us min VA/p.f. 250/0.9
Closing at Us max VA/p.f. 300/0.9
Closed at Us min VA/p.f. 4.8/0.8
Closed at Us max VA/p.f. 5.8/0.8
- DC operation Closing at Us min W 300
Closing at Us max W 360
Closed at Us min W 4.3
Closed at Us max W 5.2
• Solid-state operating mechanism
PLC control input (EN 61131-2/type 2) 24 V DC/≤ 30 mA power consumption,
(operating range 17 ... 30 V DC)
Operating times (Total break time = Opening delay + Arcing time)
- With 0.8 x Us min ... 1.1 x Us max Closing delay ms 20 ... 95
Opening delay ms 40 ... 60
- With Us min ... Us max Closing delay ms 25 ... 50
• Solid-state operating mechanism, actuated via PLC input
• Solid-state operating mechanism, actuated via A1/A2
Siemens · 2011 39

Size S6 S6 S6
Main circuit
AC capacity
At 60 °C up to 690 V A 140 160 185
At 60 °C up to 1000 V A 80 90 100
• Rated power for AC loads1) At 230 V kW 53 60 70
P.f. = 0.95 (at 60 °C) 400 V kW 92 105 121
500 V kW 115 131 152
690 V kW 159 181 210
1000 V kW 131 148 165
• Minimum conductor cross-section for At 40 °C mm2 70 95 95
loads with Ie At 60 °C mm2 50 70 95
690 V A 115 150 170
1000 V A 53 65 65
• Rated power of slipring At 230 V kW 37 50 61
or squirrel-cage motors at 50 and 400 V kW 64 84 104
60 Hz 500 V kW 81 105 132
690 V kW 113 146 167
1000 V kW 75 90 90
Power loss per main current path At Ie/AC-3/500 V W 7 9 13
• Rated power for squirrel-cage At 400 V kW 55 75 90
• The following applies to a contact endurance of
about 200 000 operating cycles:
690 V A 48 57 65
1000 V A 34 38 42
- Rated power for squirrel-cage At 230 V kW 16 20 25
motors with 50 Hz and 60 Hz 400 V kW 29 38 45
500 V kW 37 47 57
690 V kW 48 55 65
1000 V kW 49 55 60
- For inrush current n = 20 Up to 690 V A 115 148 148
• Rating P
- For inrush current n = 20 At 230 V kVA 45 58 58
400 V kVA 79 102 102
500 V kVA 99 128 128
690 V kVA 137 176 176
1000 V kVA 80 98 117
400 V kVA 62 68 68
500 V kVA 77 85 85
690 V kVA 107 118 118
1000 V kVA 80 98 117
For deviating inrush current factors x, the power must be recalculated
as follows: Px = Pn 30 ⋅ 30/x
• Rated power for single capacitors or At 230 V kvar 42 50 58
banks of capacitors (minimum induc- 400 V kvar 72 86 100
tance of 6 μH between capacitors con- 500 V kvar 90 108 125
nected in parallel) at 50 Hz, 60 Hz 690 V kvar 72 86 100
account).
40 Siemens · 2011

Size S6 S6 S6
Main circuit
Load rating with DC
60 V A 160
110 V A 18
220 V A 3.4
440 V A 0.8
600 V A 0.5
60 V A 160
110 V A 160
220 V A 20
440 V A 3.2
600 V A 1.6
60 V A 160
110 V A 160
220 V A 160
440 V A 11.5
600 V A 4
60 V A 7.5
110 V A 2.5
220 V A 0.6
440 V A 0.17
600 V A 0.12
60 V A 160
110 V A 160
220 V A 2.5
440 V A 0.65
600 V A 0.37
60 V A 160
110 V A 160
220 V A 160
440 V A 1.4
600 V A 0.75
Switching frequency
• Contactors without overload relays No-load switching frequency h-1 2000 2000
Dependence of the switching fre- AC-1 h-1 800 800
quency z' on the operational current AC-2 h-1 400 300
I' and operational voltage U' : AC-3 h-1 1000 750
z' = z ⋅(Ie/I' ) ⋅(400 V/U' )1.5 ⋅1/h AC-4 h-1 130 130
• Contactors with overload relays (mean value) h-1 60 60
Siemens · 2011 41

Size S6
Conductor cross-sections of main conductors with box terminal
(1 or 2 conductors can be Main conductors:
connected) With 3RT19 55-4G box terminal (55 kW) Screw terminals
Front or rear clamping point • Finely stranded with end sleeve mm² 16 ... 70
• Ribbon cable conductors mm Min. 3 x 9 x 0.8, max. 6 x 15.5 x 0.8
NSB00480
NSB00479

solid or stranded
Both clamping points • Finely stranded with end sleeve mm² Max. 1 x 50, 1 x 70
connected • Finely stranded without end sleeve mm² Max. 1 x 50, 1 x 70
• Stranded mm² max. 2 x 70
• Ribbon cable conductors mm Max. 2 x (6 x 15.5 x 0.8)
NSB00481
• AWG cables, AWG Max. 2 x 1/0

solid or stranded
Main conductors:
(1 or 2 conductors can be With 3RT19 56-4G box terminal
connected)
Front or rear clamping point • Finely stranded with end sleeve mm² 16 ... 120
• Ribbon cable conductors mm Min. 3 x 9 x 0.8, max. 10 x 15.5 x 0.8
NSB00480
NSB00479

• AWG cables, AWG 6 ... 250 kcmil
solid or stranded
Both clamping points • Finely stranded with end sleeve mm² Max. 1 x 95, 1 x 120
connected • Finely stranded without end sleeve mm² Max. 1 x 95, 1 x 120
• Stranded mm² Max. 2 x 120
• Ribbon cable conductors mm Max. 2 x (10 x 15.5 x 0.8)
NSB00481
• AWG cables, AWG Max. 2 x 3/0

solid or stranded
Main conductors:
Without box terminal/busbar connection
• Finely stranded with cable lug1) mm2 16 ... 95
• Stranded with cable lug1) mm2 25 ... 120
solid or stranded
• Connecting bar (max. width) mm 17
• Terminal screw M8 x 25 (A/F 13)
max. 2 x (0.75 ... 4)
• Finely stranded with end sleeve mm2 2 x (0.5 ... 1.5)2); 2 x (0.75 ... 2.5)2)
• Terminal screw M3 (PZ 2)
• Solid mm2 2 x (0.25 ... 2.5)

• AWG cables, AWG 2 x (24 ... 14)
solid or stranded
Parts".
1) When connecting cable lugs to DIN 46235, use 3RT19 56-4EA1 terminal
cover for conductor cross-sections from 95 mm² to ensure phase spacing.
42 Siemens · 2011

Size S10 S10 S10
General data
30° 30°
NSB0_00649
360°
surface.

ting
cycles
1)
2)
Electromagnetic compatibility (EMC) 3)
Main circuit
Fuse links, gL/gG
acc. to IEC 60947-4-1/ • Type of coordination "1" A 500
EN 60947-4-1 • Type of coordination "2" A 400
• Weld-free4) A 250
Auxiliary circuit
• Or miniature circuit breakers with C characteristic
Siemens · 2011 43

Size S10 S10 S10
Control
Closed at Us min VA/p.f. 4/0.5
Closed at Us max VA/p.f. 5/0.4
PLC control input (EN 61131-2/type 2) 24 V DC/≤ 30 mA power consumption, (operating range 17 ... 30 V DC)
- For Us min ... Us max Closing delay ms 35 ... 50
44 Siemens · 2011

Size S10 S10 S10
Main circuit
AC capacity
• Rated operational currents Ie At 40 °C up to 690 V A 275 330
At 60 °C up to 690 V A 250 300
At 60 °C up to 1000 V A 100 150
• Rated power for AC loads1) At 230 V kW 94 113
P.f. = 0.95 (at 60 °C) 400 V kW 164 197
500 V kW 205 246
690 V kW 283 340
1000 V kW 164 246
• Minimum conductor cross-section for At 40 °C mm2 150 185
loads with Ie At 60 °C mm2 120 185
690 V A 225 265 280
1000 V A 68 95 95
• Rated power of slipring At 230 V kW 73 85 97
or squirrel-cage motors at 50 and 60 Hz 400 V kW 128 151 171
500 V kW 160 189 215
690 V kW 223 265 280
1000 V kW 90 132 132
Power loss per main current path At Ie/AC-3/500 V W 17 18 22
690 V A 85 105 115
1000 V A 42 57 57
- Rated power for squirrel-cage motors At 230 V kW 30 37 40
with 50 Hz and 60 Hz 400 V kW 54 66 71
500 V kW 67 82 87
690 V kW 82 102 112
1000 V kW 59 80 80
• Rated power P
400 V kVA 157 183 189
500 V kVA 196 229 236
690 V kVA 271 317 326
1000 V kVA 117 164 164
400 V kVA 105 126 126
500 V kVA 130 158 158
690 V kVA 180 217 217
1000 V kVA 117 164 164
For deviating inrush current factors x, the power must be
recalculated as follows: Px = Pn 30 ⋅ 30/x
• Rated operational currents Ie Up to 500 V A 183 220
tance of 6 µH between capacitors con- 500 V kvar 159 191
account).
Siemens · 2011 45

Size S10 S10 S10
Main circuit
Load rating with DC
60 V A 200 300
110 V A 18 33
220 V A 3.4 3.8
440 V A 0.8 0.9
600 V A 0.5 0.6
60 V A 200 300
110 V A 200 300
220 V A 20 300
440 V A 3.2 4
600 V A 1.6 2
60 V A 200 300
110 V A 200 300
220 V A 200 300
440 V A 11.5 11
600 V A 4 5.2
60 V A 7.5 11
110 V A 2.5 3
220 V A 0.6 0.6
440 V A 0.17 0.18
600 V A 0.12 0.125
60 V A 200 300
110 V A 200 300
220 V A 2.5 2.5
440 V A 0.65 0.65
600 V A 0.37 0.37
60 V A 200 300
110 V A 200 300
220 V A 200 300
440 V A 1.4 1.4
600 V A 0.75 0.75
Switching frequency
• Contactors without overload relays No-load switching frequency h-1 2000 2000 2000
Dependence of the switching fre- AC-1 h-1 750 800 750
quency z' on the operational current AC-2 h-1 250 300 250
I' and operational voltage U' : AC-3 h-1 500 700 500
z' = z ⋅(Ie/I' ) ⋅(400 V/U' )1.5 ⋅1/h AC-4 h-1 130 130 130
46 Siemens · 2011

Size S10
With 3RT19 66-4G box terminal
Front clamping point • Finely stranded with end sleeve mm² 70 ... 240
• AWG cables, AWG 3/0 ... 600 kcmil
NSB00479
solid or stranded
• Ribbon cable conductors mm Min. 6 x 9 x 0.8, max. 20 x 24 x 0.5
Rear clamping point • Finely stranded with end sleeve mm² 120 ... 185
• Stranded mm² 120 ... 240
NSB00480
solid or stranded
Both clamping points • Finely stranded with end sleeve mm² Min. 2 x 50, max. 2 x 185
connected • Finely stranded without end sleeve mm² Min. 2 x 50, max. 2 x 185
• Stranded mm² Min. 2 x 70, max. 2 x 240
• AWG cables, AWG Min. 2 x 2/0, max. 2 x 500 kcmil
solid or stranded
NSB00481
• Ribbon cable conductors mm Max. 2 x (20 x 24 x 0.5)

• Terminal screws M12 (hexagon socket, A/F 5)
Main conductors:
Without box terminal/
busbar connection
• Finely stranded with cable lug1) mm² 50 ... 240
• Stranded with cable lug1) mm² 70 ... 240
solid or stranded
• Terminal screws M10 x 30 (A/F 17)
max. 2 x (0.75 ... 4)
2
• Finely stranded with end sleeve mm 2 x (0.5 ... 1.5)2); 2 x (0.75 ... 2.5)2)
• AWG cables, AWG 2 x (18 ... 14)
solid or stranded
• Terminal screws M3 (PZ 2)
• Solid mm2 2 x (0.25 ... 2.5)

• Finely stranded without end sleeve mm2 2 x (0.25 ...2.5)
• AWG cables, AWG 2 x (24 ... 14)
solid or stranded
Parts".
1) When connecting cable lugs to DIN 46234, the 3RT19 66-4EA1 terminal
cover must be used for conductor cross-sections of 240 mm² and more as
well as DIN 46235 for conductor cross-sections of 185 mm² and more to
keep the phase clearance.
Siemens · 2011 47
Contactors Type 3RT10 75 3RT10 76

Size S12 S12
General data
Permissible mounting position 30° 30°
NSB0_00649
The contactors are designed for operation on a vertical mounting surface. 360°

ting
cycles
1)
2)
Main circuit
Fuse links, gL/gG
• Weld-free4) A 250 315
Auxiliary circuit
(weld-free protection for Ik ≥ 1 kA)
48 Siemens · 2011

Size S12 S12
Control
Closed at Us max W 10
Closed at Us min W 4
Operating times
Siemens · 2011 49

Size S12 S12
Main circuit
AC capacity
At 60 °C up to 690 V A 400 550
At 60 °C up to 1000 V A 200 200
• Rated power for AC loads1) At 230 V kW 151 208
P.f. = 0.95 (at 60 °C) 400 V kW 263 362
500 V kW 329 452
690 V kW 454 624
1000 V kW 329 329
• Minimum conductor cross-section for At 40 °C mm2 2 x 150 2 x 185
loads with Ie At 60 °C mm2 240 2 x 185
690 V A 400 450
1000 V A 180 180
• Rated power of slipring At 230 V kW 132 164
or squirrel-cage motors at 50 and 400 V kW 231 291
60 Hz 500 V kW 291 363
690 V kW 400 453
1000 V kW 250 250
Thermal load capacity 10 s current2) A 3200 4000
Power loss per main current path At Ie/AC-3/500 V W 35 55
• Rated operational current Ie Up to 400 V A 350 430
• Rated power for squirrel-cage At 400 V kW 200 250
- Rated operational current Ie Up to 500 V A 150 175
690 V A 135 150
1000 V A 80 80
- Rated power for squirrel-cage At 230 V kW 48 56
motors with 50 Hz and 60 Hz 400 V kW 85 98
500 V kW 105 123
690 V kW 133 148
1000 V kW 113 113
- For inrush current n = 20 Up to 690 V A 377 404
- For inrush current n = 30 Up to 690 V A 251 270
• Rating P
- For inrush current n = 20 At 230 V kVA 150 161
400 V kVA 261 280
500 V kVA 326 350
690 V kVA 450 483
1000 V kVA 311 311
- For inrush current n = 30 At 230 V kVA 100 107
400 V kVA 173 187
500 V kVA 217 234
690 V kVA 300 323
1000 V kVA 311 311
For deviating inrush current factors x, the power must be recalculated as
follows: Px = Pn 30 ⋅ 30/x
tance of 6 μH between capacitors con- 500 V kvar 248 352
(increased power consumption on heating up taken into account).
50 Siemens · 2011

Size S12 S12
Main circuit
Load rating with DC
60 V A 330
110 V A 33
220 V A 3.8
440 V A 0.9
600 V A 0.6
60 V A 400
110 V A 400
220 V A 400
440 V A 4
600 V A 2
60 V A 400
110 V A 400
220 V A 400
440 V A 11
600 V A 5.2
60 V A 11
110 V A 3
220 V A 0.6
440 V A 0.18
600 V A 0.125
60 V A 400
110 V A 400
220 V A 2.5
440 V A 0.65
600 V A 0.37
60 V A 400
110 V A 400
220 V A 400
440 V A 1.4
600 V A 0.75
Switching frequency
Dependence of the switching fre- AC-1 h-1 700 500
quency z' on the operational current AC-2 h-1 200 170
I' and operational voltage U' : AC-3 h-1 500 420
z' = z ⋅(Ie/I' ) ⋅(400 V/U' )1.5 ⋅1/h AC-4 h-1 130 130
Siemens · 2011 51

Size S12
NSB00479
solid or stranded
• Ribbon cable conductors mm² Min. 6 x 9 x 0.8, max. 20 x 24 x 0.5
• Stranded mm² 120 ... 240
NSB00480
solid or stranded
• Ribbon cable conductors mm² Min. 6 x 9 x 0.8, max. 20 x 24 x 0.5
solid or stranded
NSB00481
• Ribbon cable conductors mm² Max. 2 x (20 x 24 x 0.5)

Main conductors:
busbar connection
solid or stranded
max. 2 x (0.75 ... 4)
• AWG cables, AWG 2 x (18 ... 14)
solid or stranded
• Solid mm2 2 x (0.25 ... 2.5)

• AWG cables, mm2 2 x (24 ... 14)
solid or stranded
Parts".
1) When connecting cable lugs according to DIN 46234 for conductor cross-
sections of 185 mm² and more and according to DIN 46235 for conductor
cross-sections of 240 mm² and more, the 3RT19 66-4EA1 terminal cover
must be used more to keep the phase clearance.
52 Siemens · 2011
Contactors Type 3RT10 15 3RT10 16 3RT10 17 3RT10 23 3RT10 24 3RT10 25 3RT10 26

Size S00 S00 S00 S0 S0 S0 S0
s and u ratings
Rated insulation voltage V AC 600 600
Uninterrupted current, at 40 °C • Open and enclosed A 20 35
Maximum horsepower ratings
(s and u approved values)
• Rated power for induction motors At 200 V hp 1.5 2 3 2 3 5 7.5
at 60 Hz 230 V hp 2 3 3 3 3 5 7.5
460 V hp 3 5 7.5 5 7.5 10 15
575 V hp 5 7.5 10 7.5 10 15 20
Short-circuit protection1) At 600 V kA 5 5 5 5 5 5 5
(contactor or overload relay) • CLASS RK5 fuse A 60 60 60 70 70 70 100
• Circuit breakers with overload A 50 50 50 70 70 70 100
protection acc. to UL 489
• Combination motor controllers
type E acc. to UL 508
- At 480 V Type -- -- -- 3RV10 2
A -- -- -- 8 10 16 22
kA -- -- -- 65 65 65 65
- At 600 V Type -- -- -- 3RV10 2
A -- -- -- 8 10 12.5 12.5
kA -- -- -- 25 25 25 25
NEMA/EEMAC ratings
NEMA/EEMAC size hp -- 0 -- 1
• Uninterrupted current - Open A -- 18 -- 27
- Enclosed A -- 18 -- 27
• Rated power for induction motors At 200 V hp -- 3 -- 7.5
at 60 Hz 230 V hp -- 3 -- 7.5
460 V hp -- 5 -- 10
575 V hp -- 5 -- 10
Overload relay • Type 3RU11 16 3RU11 2
• Setting range A 0.11 ... 12 1.8 ... 25
Contactors Type 3RT10 34 3RT10 35 3RT10 36 3RT10 44 3RT10 45 3RT10 46

Size S2 S2 S2 S3 S3 S3
s and u ratings
Uninterrupted current, at 40 °C • Open and enclosed A 45 55 50 90 105 105
• Rated power for induction motors At 200 V hp 10 10 15 20 25 30
at 60 Hz 230 V hp 10 15 15 25 30 30
460 V hp 25 30 40 50 60 75
575 V hp 30 40 50 60 75 100
Short-circuit protection1) At 600 V kA 5 5 5 10 10 10
(contactor or overload relay) • CLASS RK5 fuse A 125 150 200 250 300 350
• Circuit breakers with overload pro- A 125 150 200 250 300 400
tection acc. to UL 489
• Combination motor controllers
type E acc. to UL 508
- At 480 V Type 3RV10 3 3RV10 4
A 32 40 50 63 75 100
kA 65 65 65 65 65 65
- At 600 V Type 3RV10 4 3RV10 4
A 32 40 50 63 75 75
kA 25 25 25 30 30 30
NEMA/EEMAC ratings
NEMA/EEMAC size hp -- 2 -- 3
• Uninterrupted current - Open A -- 45 -- 90
- Enclosed A -- 45 -- 90
• Rated power At 200 V hp -- 10 -- 25
for induction motors with 60 Hz 230 V hp -- 15 -- 30
460 V hp -- 25 -- 50
575 V hp -- 25 -- 50
Overload relay • Type 3RU11 3 3RU11 4
• Setting range A 5.5 ... 50 18 ... 100
1) For more information about short-circuit values, e. g. for protection against
short-circuit currents, see the UL guides (Order No.: A5E02118883 for
German) or UL reports (http://www.siemens.com/lowvoltage/ul-europe)
for the individual devices.
Siemens · 2011 53
Contactors Size S00 S0 ... S12

Screw terminals and Screw terminals and Screw terminals and
Cage Clamp terminals Cage Clamp terminals Cage Clamp terminals
Integrated or 1- and 4-pole Laterally
snap-on snap-on mountable
auxiliary switch block auxiliary switch block auxiliary switch block
s and u ratings of the auxiliary contacts
Rated voltage V AC 600 600 600
Switching capacity A 600, Q 600 A 600, Q 600 A 300, Q 300
• Uninterrupted current
at 240 V AC A 10 10 10
Contactors Type 3RT10 54 3RT10 55 3RT10 56 3RT10 64 3RT10 65 3RT10 66

Size S6 S6 S6 S10 S10 S10
s and u ratings
Uninterrupted current, at 40 °C • Open and enclosed A 140 195 195 250 330 330
• Rated power for induction motors At 200 V hp 40 50 60 60 75 100
at 60 Hz 230 V hp 50 60 75 75 100 125
460 V hp 100 125 150 150 200 250
575 V hp 125 150 200 200 250 300
Short-circuit protection1) At 600 V kA 10 10 10 10 18 18
• CLASS RK5/L fuse A 450 500 500 700 800 800
• Circuit breakers with overload A 350 450 500 500 700 800
protection acc. to UL 489
NEMA/EEMAC ratings
NEMA/EEMAC size hp -- 4 -- -- -- 5
• Uninterrupted current - Open A -- 150 -- -- -- 300
- Enclosed A -- 135 -- -- -- 270
• Rated power At 200 V hp -- 40 -- -- -- 75
for induction motors 230 V hp -- 50 -- -- -- 100
with 60 Hz 460 V hp -- 100 -- -- -- 200
575 V hp -- 100 -- -- -- 200
Overload relay • Type 3RB20 56 3RB20 66

Size S12 S12
s and u ratings
Rated insulation voltage V AC 600
• Rated power for induction motors At 200 V hp 125 150
at 60 Hz 230 V hp 150 200
460 V hp 300 400
575 V hp 400 500
Short-circuit protection1) At 600 V kA 18 30
• CLASS L fuse A 1000 1200
• Circuit breakers with overload pro- A 900 900
tection acc. to UL 489
NEMA/EEMAC ratings
NEMA/EEMAC size hp -- 6
• Uninterrupted current - Open A -- 600
- Enclosed A -- 540
• Rated power for induction motors At 200 V hp -- 150
at 60 Hz 230 V hp -- 200
460 V hp -- 400
575 V hp -- 400
Overload relay • Type 3RB20 66
short-circuit currents, see the UL guide (Order No.: A5E02118883 for
German) or UL reports (http://www.siemens.com/lowvoltage/ul-europe)
for the individual devices.
54 Siemens · 2011
3RT12 vacuum contactors, 3-pole, 110 ... 250 kW
■ Overview
• 3RT12 vacuum contactors for switching motors Contactors with conventional operating mechanism
Operating mechanism types 3RT1. . .-.A version:
The magnetic coil is switched directly on and off with the control
Two types of solenoid operation are available: supply voltage Us by way of terminals A1/A2.
• Conventional operating mechanism, version 3RT12. .-.A
Multi-voltage range for the control supply voltage Us:
• Solid-state operating mechanism, version 3RT12. .-.N
Several closely adjacent control supply voltages, available
UC operation around the world, are covered by just one coil, for example
The contactors can be operated with AC (40 to 60 Hz) as well as 110-115-120-127 V AC/DC or 220-230-240 V AC/DC.
with DC. In addition, allowance is also made for a coil operating range of
Withdrawable coils 0.8 times the lower (Us min) and 1.1 times the upper (Us max) ra-
ted control supply voltage within which the contactor switches
For simple coil replacement, e. g. if the application is replaced, reliably and no thermal overloading occurs.
the magnetic coil can be pulled out upwards after the release
mechanism has been actuated and can be replaced by any Contactors with solid-state operating mechanism
other coil of the same size. The magnetic coil is supplied selectively with the power required
Auxiliary contact complement for reliable switching and holding by upstream control
electronics.
The contactors can be fitted with up to 8 lateral auxiliary contacts
(identical auxiliary switch blocks from S0 to S12). Of these, no • Wide voltage range for the control supply voltage Us:
more than 4 are permitted to be NC contacts. Compared with the conventional operating mechanism, the so-
lid-state operating mechanism covers an even broader range
■ Function of control supply voltages used worldwide within one coil vari-
ant. For example, the coil for 200 to 277 V UC (Us min to Us max)
covers the voltages 200-208-220-230-240-254-277 V used
3RT12 vacuum contactors
worldwide.
In contrast with the 3RT10 contactors – the main contacts ope- • Extended operating range 0.7 to 1.25 × Us:
rate in air under atmospheric conditions – the contact gaps of The wide range of the rated control supply voltage and the ad-
the 3RT12 vacuum contactors are contained in hermetically en- ditional coil operating range of 0.8 × Us min to 1.1 × Us max re-
closed vacuum contact tubes. Neither arcs nor arcing gases are sults in an extended coil tolerance of at least 0.7 to 1.25 × Us
produced. The particular benefit of 3RT12 vacuum contactors, for the most common control supply voltages 24, 110 and
however, is that their electrical endurance is at least twice as 230 V for which the contactors operate reliably.
long as that of 3RT10 contactors. They are therefore particularly
well suited to frequent switching in jogging/mixed operation, • Bridging temporary voltage dips:
for example in crane control systems. Control voltage failures dipping to 0 V (at A1/A2) are bridged
for up to approx. 25 ms to avoid unintentional tripping.
Advantages: • Defined ON and OFF thresholds:
• Very long electrical endurance For voltages of ≥ 0.8 × Us min and higher, the electronics will re-
• High short-time loading capacity for heavy starting liably switch the contactors on and off ≤ 0.5 × Us min. The hys-
teresis in the switching thresholds prevents the main contacts
• No reduction of rated operational currents up to 1000 V from chattering as well as increased wear or welding when
• No open arcs, no arcing gases, i. e. no minimum clearances operated in weak, unstable networks. This also prevents ther-
from grounded parts required either mal overloading of the contactor coil if the voltage applied is
• Longer maintenance intervals too low (contactor does not close properly and is continuously
operated with overexcitation).
• Increased plant availability
• Low control power consumption when closing and in the
Notes on operation: closed state.
• Switching motors with operational voltages Ue > 500 V: Electromagnetic compatibility (EMC)
To damp overvoltages and protect the motor coil insulation
against reignition when switching off induction motors, it is re- The contactors with solid-state operating mechanism conform to
commended to connect the 3RT19 66-1PV surge suppression the requirements for operation in industrial plants.
module – RC varistor – to the outgoing side (2/T1, 4/T2, 6/T3) • Interference immunity
of the contactors (accessory). This additional equipment is - Burst (IEC 61000-4-4): 4 kV
not required for use in circuits with converters. It could be de- - Surge (IEC 61000-4-5): 4 kV
stroyed by the voltage peaks and harmonics which are - Electrostatic discharge, ESD (IEC 61000-4-2): 8/15 kV
generated. - Electromagnetic field (IEC 61000-4-3): 10 V/m
• Switching DC voltage: • Emitted interference
Vacuum contactors are basically unsuitable for switching - Limit value class A according to EN 55011
DC voltage.
Note:
In connection with converters, the control cables must be routed
separately from the load cables to the converter.
Siemens · 2011 55

3RT1. . .-.N version: for 24 V DC PLC output Vacuum contactors S10 and S12 contact erosion indication
2 control options: If the contact erosion indicator on the contactor head part indi-
• Control without a coupling link directly through a cates an excessive erosion of the vacuum contact tubes (indica-
24 V DC/≥ 30 mA PLC output (EN 61131-2). Connection by ting line is on level with the tool symbol), the tubes must be
means of 2-pole plug-in connection. The screwless spring- replaced.
type connection is part of the scope of supply. The control To ensure greater reliability, it is recommended to replace all
supply voltage which supplies the solenoid operating mecha- 3 contact tubes.
nism must be connected to A1/A2.
Note: Before start-up, the slide switch for PLC operation must be
moved to the "PLC ON" position (setting ex works: "PLC OFF").
1
$ Slide switch must be in 04
20
L1/L+ "PLC ON" position B 0_
0
NS
N/L-
% Plug-in connection, 2-pole
PLC output 3
24 V DC / 30 mA & Emergency shutdown
– optional
2 A1 A2
2
24 V DC
1 PLC
NSB0_01143d
OFF ON
• Conventional control by applying the control supply voltage at 3

A1/A2 through a switching contact.
Note:
The slide switch must be in the "PLC OFF" position
(= setting ex works).
L1/L+ $ Slide switch must be in

N/L- "PLC OFF" position
$ State as new
% Emergency shutdown
2 – optional % Tube replacement not yet necessary
& Tube replacement necessary
A1 A2
DC 24 V
1
PLC
NSB0_01144d
OFF ON
Size S10 S10 S10
General data
Permissible mounting position 2 2 ,5 ° 2 2 ,5 ° 2 2 ,5 ° 2 2 ,5 °
N S B 0 _ 0 0 6 5 0 b
The contactors are designed for operation on a vertical mounting surface.

ting
cycles
1)
2)
3)
1) For endurance of the main contacts see page 19. 3) For electromagnetic compatibility (EMC) see page 12.
56 Siemens · 2011

Size S10 S10 S10
Main circuit
Fuse links, gL/gG
EN 60947-4-1 • Type of coordination "2" A 500
Auxiliary circuit
(short-circuit current Ik 400 A)

Size S10 S10 S10
Control
Siemens · 2011 57

Size S10 S10 S10
Main circuit
AC capacity
• Rated operational currents Ie At 40 °C up to 1000 V A 330
At 60 °C up to 1000 V A 300
• Rated power for AC loads1) At 230 V kW 113
P.f. = 0.95 (at 60 °C) 400 V kW 197
500 V kW 246
690 V kW 340
1000 V kW 492
• Minimum conductor cross-section for At 40 °C mm2 185
loads with Ie At 60 °C mm2 185
• Rated power for slipring At 230 V kW 73 85 97
or squirrel-cage motors at 50 and 60 Hz 400 V kW 128 151 171
500 V kW 160 189 215
690 V kW 223 265 288
1000 V kW 320 378 428
Power loss per conducting path At Ie/AC-3 W 9 12 14
1000 V A 68 81 98
- Rated power for squirrel-cage motors At 230 V kW 30 37 45
with 50 Hz and 60 Hz 400 V kW 55 65 79
500 V kW 68 81 98
690 V kW 94 112 138
1000 V kW 95 114 140
Switching AC transformers
Rated operational current Ie
• For inrush current n = 20 Up to 690 V A 278
• For inrush current n = 30 Up to 690 V A 185
Rating P
• For inrush current n = 20 At 230 V kVA 111
400 V kVA 193
500 V kVA 241
690 V kVA 332
1000 V kVA 482
• For inrush current n = 30 At 230 V kVA 74
400 V kVA 128
500 V kVA 160
690 V kVA 221
1000 V kVA 320
lrecalculated as follows: Px = Pn 30 ⋅ 30/x
• Rated operational currents Ie Up to 500 V A 220
• Rated power for single capacitors or At 230 V kvar 88
banks of capacitors (minimum induc- 400 V kvar 152
tance of 6 µH between capacitors con- 500 V kvar 191
nected in parallel) at 50 Hz, 60 Hz and 690 V kvar 152
Switching frequency
Dependence of the switching frequency AC-1 h-1 800 750
z' on the operational current I' and AC-2 h-1 300 250
operational voltage U' : AC-3 h-1 750 750
z' = z ⋅(Ie/I' ) ⋅(400 V/U' )1.5 ⋅1/h AC-4 h-1 250 250
1) Industrial furnaces and electric heaters with resistance heating, etc. 2) According to IEC 60947-4-1.
(increased power consumption on heating up taken into account). For rated values for various start-up conditions see
58 Siemens · 2011

Size S10
Main conductor cross-sections
Front clamping point • Finely stranded with end sleeve mm² 70 ...240
connected • Finely stranded without end sleeve mm² 70 ...240
• Stranded mm² 95 ...300
• AWG cables, AWG 3/0 ...600 kcmil
NSB00479
solid or stranded
Rear clamping point • Finely stranded with end sleeve mm² 120 ...185
connected • Finely stranded without end sleeve mm² 120 ...185
• Stranded mm² 120 ...240
• AWG cables, AWG 250 ...500 kcmil
NSB00480
solid or stranded
solid or stranded
NSB00481

Main conductors:
busbar connection
• Finely stranded with cable lug1) mm² 50 ...240
• Stranded with cable lug1) mm² 70 ...240
• AWG cables, AWG 2/0 ...500 kcmil
solid or stranded
max. 2 x (0.75 ... 4)
• AWG cables, AWG 2 x (18 ... 14)
solid or stranded
1) When connecting cable lugs according to DIN 46234 for conductor cross-
sections of 185 mm² and more and according to DIN 46235 for conductor
cross-sections of 240 mm² and more, the 3RT19 66-4EA1 terminal cover
must be used more to keep the phase clearance.
Siemens · 2011 59

Size S12 S12
General data
N S B 0 _ 0 0 6 5 0 b

ting
cycles
1)
A mirror contact is an auxiliary NC contact that cannot be closed
simultaneously with a NO main contact.
2)
Main circuit
Fuse links, gL/gG
EN 60947-4 • Type of coordination "2" A 800
Auxiliary circuit
1) See endurance of the main contacts on page 19.
2) See conductor cross-sections on page 63.
3) See Electromagnetic Compatibility (EMC) on page 12.
60 Siemens · 2011

Size S12 S12
Control
Closed at Us min W 4
Operating times
Main circuit
AC capacity
At 60 °C up to 1000 V A 550
• Rated power for AC loads1) At 230 V kW 208
P.f. = 0.95 (at 60 °C) 400 V kW 362
500 V kW 452
690 V kW 624
1000 V kW 905
• Minimum conductor cross-section At 40 °C mm2 2 x 185
for loads with Ie At 60 °C mm2 2 x 185
• Rated power for slipring or squirrel- At 230 V kW 132 164
cage motors at 50 and 60 Hz 400 V kW 231 291
500 V kW 291 363
690 V kW 400 507
1000 V kW 578 728
Thermal load capacity 10 s current2) A 3200 4000
Power loss per conducting path At Ie/AC-3 W 21 32
For rated values for various start-up conditions
see "Protection Equipment --> Overload Relays".
Siemens · 2011 61

Size S12 S12
Main circuit
AC capacity
• Rated power for squirrel-cage motors with 50 Hz At 400 V kW 200 250
and 60 Hz
• The following applies to a contact endurance of about 200 000 operating cycles:
- Rated operational currents Ie 690 V A 175 215
1000 V A 123 151
• Rated power for squirrel-cage motors with 50 Hz At 230 V kW 56 70
and 60 Hz 400 V kW 98 122
500 V kW 124 153
690 V kW 172 212
1000 V kW 183 217
- For inrush current n = 20 Up to 690 V A 419
- For inrush current n = 30 Up to 690 V A 279
• Rating P
- For inrush current n = 20 At 230 V kVA 167
400 V kVA 290
500 V kVA 363
690 V kVA 501
1000 V kVA 726
- For inrush current n = 30 At 230 V kVA 111

400 V kVA 193
500 V kVA 241
690 V kVA 332
1000 V kVA 482
recalculated as follows:
Px = Pn 30 ⋅ 30/x
• Rated power for single capacitors or banks of At 230 V kvar 162
capacitors (minimum inductance of 6 μH bet- 400 V kvar 282
ween capacitors connected in parallel) at 500 V kvar 352
50 Hz, 60 Hz and 690 V kvar 282
Switching frequency
• Contactors without overload relays No-load switching h-1 2000
frequency
Dependence of the switching frequency z' AC-1 h-1 700
on the operational current I' and operational AC-2 h-1 250
voltage U' : AC-3 h-1 750
z' = z ⋅(Ie/I' ) ⋅(400 V/U' )1.5 ⋅1/h AC-4 h-1 250
62 Siemens · 2011

Size S12
NSB00479
solid or stranded
• Stranded mm² 120 ... 240
NSB00480
solid or stranded
solid or stranded
NSB00481


Main conductors:
busbar connection
solid or stranded
• Terminal screws M10 x 30 (hexagon socket, A/F 17)
max. 2 x (0.75 ... 4)
• AWG cables, AWG 2 x (18 ... 14)
solid or stranded
1) When connecting cable lugs to DIN 46234, the 3RT19 66-4EA1 terminal 2) If two different conductor cross-sections are connected to one clamping
cover must be used for conductor cross-sections of 240 mm² and more as point, both cross-sections must lie in the range specified. If identical
well as DIN 46235 for conductor cross-sections of 185 mm² and more to cross-sections are used, this restriction does not apply.
Contactors Type 3RT12 64 3RT12 65 3RT12 66 3RT12 75 3RT12 76

Size S10 S10 S10 S12 S12
s and u ratings
• Rated power for induction motors at At 200 V hp 60 75 100 125 150
60 Hz 230 V hp 75 100 125 150 200
460 V hp 150 200 250 300 400
575 V hp 200 250 300 400 500
Short-circuit protection1) kA 10 18 18 18 30
• CLASS L fuse A 700 800 800 1200 1200
• Circuit breakers acc. to A 500 700 900 1000 1200
UL 489
NEMA/EEMAC ratings NEMA/EEMAC size hp -- -- 5 -- 6
• Uninterrupted current - Open A -- -- 300 -- 600
- Enclosed A -- -- 270 -- 540
• Rated power for induction motors at At 200 V hp -- -- 75 -- 150
60 Hz 230 V hp -- -- 100 -- 200
460 V hp -- -- 200 -- 400
575 V hp -- -- 200 -- 400
Overload relay • Type 3RB20 66 3RB20 66
1) For more information about short-circuit values, e. g. for protection against short-circuit currents, see the UL guide (Order No.: A5E02118883 for German) or
UL reports (http://www.siemens.com/lowvoltage/ul-europe) for the individual devices.
Siemens · 2011 63
3TF6 vacuum contactors, 3-pole, 335 ... 450 kW
■ Overview Causes for such interference can be, for example:

• Frequency converters which are operated nearby can cause
IEC 60947-4-1, EN 60947-4-1 (VDE 0660 Part 102) periodic overvoltages at the control level of the contactors.
The 3TF68/69 contactors are climate-proof. They are finger-safe • High-energy pulses cause by switching operations and atmos-
according to EN 50274. Terminal covers may have to be fitted pheric discharges can cause interference on the control
onto the connecting bars, depending on the configuration with cables.
other devices (see Accessories and Spare Parts). To reduce interference voltages caused by frequency conver-
ters, the manufacturer recommends the use of e. g. input filters,
■ Function output filters, grounding or shielding in the installation.
Main contacts Further measures that should be applied for overvoltage
damping:
Contact erosion indication with 3TF68/69 vacuum contactors
• Feeding the contactors using control transformer according to
The contact erosion of the vacuum interrupters can be checked EN 60204 - rather than directly from the network
during operation with the help of 3 white double slides on the • Use of surge arresters, if required
contactor base. If the distance indicated by one of the double
slides is < 0.5 mm while the contactor is in the closed position, For operating conditions where there are high interference volta-
the vacuum interrupter must be replaced. To ensure maximum ges and no measures that reduce interference voltage coupling
reliability, it is recommended to replace all 3 vacuum to the control voltage level have been taken, use of 3TF68. .-.Q
interrupters. and 3TF69. .-.Q contactors is highly recommended.
Auxiliary contacts Version
Contact reliability The magnetic systems of the 3TF68. .-.Q and 3TF69. .-.Q con-
tactors for AC operation are equipped with rectifiers for DC eco-
The auxiliary contacts are suitable for solid-state circuits nomy circuit.
• With currents ≥ 1 mA
A 3TC44 reversing contactor with a mounted series resistor is
• And voltages from 17 V. used to switch to the holding excitation.
Surge suppression The reversing contactor can be fitted separately. The reversing
contactors is connected to the 3TF6 main contactor by means of
Control circuit
a one-meter connecting cable with plug-in connectors (see
Protection of coils against overvoltages: page 239).
AC operation Connection
• Fitted with varistors as standard Control circuit
DC operation The rectifier bridge is connected to varistors for protection
Retrofitting options: against overvoltages. The built-in rectifier bridge affords suffici-
ent protection for the coils.
• With varistors
Main circuit
If TF68/TF69 is to be used for DC operation, an additional rever-
sing contactor is required; this is included in the scope of supply As standard 3TF6 contactors with integrated RC varistors.
in the same packaging as the vacuum contactor.
Protection of the main current paths
Electromagnetic compatibility
An integrated RC varistor connection for the main current paths
3TF68/69. .-.C contactors for AC operation are fitted with an of the contactors dampens the switching overvoltage rises to
electronically controlled solenoid operating mechanism with a safe values. This prevents multiple restriking.
high interference immunity.
The operator of an installation can therefore rest assured that the
Contactor Rated control Overvolt- Degree of Overvolt- motor winding cannot be damaged by switching overvoltages
type supply voltage type severity age with steep voltage rises.
age Us (IEC 60801) (IEC 60801) strength
Note:
3TF68 44-.C.., 110 ... 132 V Burst 3 2 kV The overvoltage damping circuit is not required if
3TF69 44-.C.. Surge 4 6 kV 3TF68/69 contactors are used in circuits with DC choppers, fre-
200 ... 277 V Burst 4 4 kV quency converters or speed-variable operating mechanisms, for
Surge 4 5 kV example. It could be damaged by the voltage peaks and harmo-
nics which are generated. This may cause phase-to-phase
380 ... 600 V Burst 4 4 kV
Surge 4 6 kV
short-circuits in the contactors.
Solution: Order special contactor version without overvoltage
Note: damping. The Order No. must include "-Z" and the order code
During operation in installations in which the emitted interference "A02". Without additional price.
limits cannot be observed, e. g. when used for output contactors
in converters, 3TF68/69. .-.Q contactors without a main conduc-
tor path circuit are recommended (see description below).
Application
The standard 3TF68. .-.C and 3TF69. .-.C contactors with elect-
ronically controlled contactor mechanism, have high resistance
to electromagnetic interference.
The 3TF68. .-.Q and 3TF69. .-.Q contactors have been desig-
ned for use in installations in which the AC control supply voltage
is subject to very high levels of interference.
64 Siemens · 2011
Contactors Type 3TF68 and 3TF69
Rated data of the auxiliary contacts Acc. to IEC 60947-5-1 (VDE 0660 Part 200)
Rated insulation voltage Ui V 690
(degree of pollution 3)
Continuous thermal current A 10
Ith = Rated operational current Ie/AC-12
AC load
• For rated operational voltage Ue
24 V A 10
110 V A 10
125 V A 10
220 V A 6
230 V A 5.6
380 V A 4
400 V A 3.6
500 V A 2.5
660 V A 2.5
690 V A 2.3
DC load
24 V A 10
60 V A 10
110 V A 3.2
125 V A 2.5
220 V A 0.9
440 V A 0.33
600 V A 0.22
24 V A 10
60 V A 5
110 V A 1.14
125 V A 0.98
220 V A 0.48
440 V A 0.13
600 V A 0.07
Rated voltage V AC, 600
max.
Switching capacity A 600, P 600
Siemens · 2011 65

The contact endurance for utilization category 3TF68 and 3TF69 contactors at 230 V AC
4
AC-12 or AC-15/AC-14 depends mainly on the breaking cur- NSB00651b
3
rent. It is assumed that the operating mechanisms are switched
2
randomly, i. e. not synchronized with the phase angle of the
Operating cycles
supply system. 107
8
6
4
3
2
6
10
8
6
4
3
2
5
10
10 -2 2 3 4 6 8 10-1 2 3 4 6 8 10 0 2 3 4 6 8 10 1 2
Ia ( A )
Contact erosion indication with 3TF68 and 3TF69 vacuum contactors

The contact erosion of the vacuum interrupters can be checked If the distance indicated by one of the double slides is < 0.5 mm
during operation with the help of 3 white double slides on the while the contactor is in the closed position, the vacuum inter-
contactor base. rupter must be replaced. To ensure maximum reliability, it is re-
commended to replace all 3 vacuum interrupters.

C o n ta c to r T y p e
3 T F 6 8 3 T F 6 9
1 0 7
1 0 7 8 6 8 n s b 0 0 6 5 4 a
8 6
4 6
6 4 4
4 2
2
O p e r a tin g c y c le s a t 4 0 0 V
6
2
2 6 1 0
1 0 8 6
1 0
1 0 6 8 6 8
8 6
4 6
6 4
4
4
2
2 2
2 5
5 1 0
1 0 8 5
5 8 1 0
1 0 6 8
8 6
4 6
6 4
4
4 2
2
2
2 4
4 1 0
1 0 8 4
8 1 0
1 0 4 6 8
8 6 6
4
6 4
4
4
2
2
2
2 1 0
3
1 0 3 3
1 0
1 0 0 2 0 0 4 0 0 6 0 0 1 0 0 0 2 0 0 0 4 0 0 0 11 a ( A ) 6 0 0 0
6 3 5
8 2 0 1 e (A )
3 3 5 2 N (k W )
4 5 0
3TF68 and 3TF69 contactors

Diagram legend:
PN = Rated power for squirrel-cage motors at 400 V
66 Siemens · 2011
Contactors Type 3TF68 3TF69

Size 14 14
General data
Permissible mounting position, AC operation and DC operation 30° 30°
installation instructions1) 2)
NSB0_00649
360°
surface.

ting
cycles
Electrical endurance Opera- 3)
ting
cycles
Rated insulation voltage Ui (degree of pollution 3) kV 1
Protective separation between the coil and the main contacts kV 1
One NC contact each must be connected in series for the right and left
auxiliary switch block respectively.
Shock resistance
• Rectangular pulse - AC operation g/ms 8.1/5 and 4.7/10 9.5/5 and 5.7/10
- DC operation g/ms 9/5 and 5.7/10 8.6/5 and 5.1/10
• Sine pulse - AC operation g/ms 12.8/5 and 7.4/10 13.5/5 and 7.8/10
- DC operation g/ms 14.4/5 and 9.1/10 13.5/5 and 7.8/10
Conductor cross-sections See "Conductor Cross-Sections".
Electromagnetic compatibility (EMC) See "Electromagnetic Compatibility (EMC)"
Main circuit
Fuse links, gL/gG
• Weld-free4) A 400 500
Auxiliary circuit
• Or miniature circuit breakers with C characteristic (Ik < 400 A) A 10
1) To easily replace the laterally mounted auxiliary switches it is recommen-
ded to maintain a minimum distance of 30 mm between the
contactors.
2) If mounted at a 90° angle (conducting paths are horizontally above each
other), the switching frequency is reduced by 80 % compared with the
normal values.
3) See "Endurance of the Auxiliary Contacts".
Siemens · 2011 67

Size 14 14
Control
Magnetic coil operating range 0.8 x Us min ... 1.1 x Us max
• AC operation, Us max - Closing VA/p.f. 1850/1 950/0.98
- Closed VA/p.f. 49/0.15 30.6/0.31
• AC operation, Us min - Closing VA/p.f. 1200/1 600/0.98
- Closed VA/p.f. 13.5/0.47 12.9/0.43
• DC economy circuit1) - Closing at 24 V W 1010 960
- Closed W 28 20.6
For contactors of type 3TF68/69. .-.Q:
• AC operation, Us min2) - Closing VA/p.f. 1000/0.99 1150/0.99
- Closed VA/p.f. 11/1 11/1
Operating times at 0.8 ... 1.1 x Us (Values apply to cold and warm coil)
• AC operation - Closing delay ms 70 ... 120 (22 ... 65)3) 80 ... 120
- Opening delay ms 70 ... 100 70 ... 80
• DC economy circuit - Closing delay ms 76 ... 110 86 ... 280
- Opening delay ms 50 19 ... 25
• Arcing time ms 10 ... 15 10
For contactors of type 3TF68/69. .-.Q:
- Opening delay ms 65 ... 90 30 ... 80
Operating times at 1.0 x U s
• AC operation - Closing delay ms 80 ... 100 (30 ... 45)3) 85 ... 100
- Opening delay ms 70 ... 100 70
• DC economy circuit - Closing delay ms 80 ... 90 90 ... 125
- Opening delay ms 50 19 ... 25
Minimum command duration Standard ms 120 120
for closing Reduced make-time ms 90 --
Minimum interval time between two ON commands ms 100 300
1) At 24 V DC; for further voltages, deviations of up to ±10 % are possible.
2) Including reversing contactor.
3) Values in brackets apply to contactors with reduced operating times.
68 Siemens · 2011

Size 14 14
Main circuit
AC capacity
At 55 °C up to 690 V A 630 850
At 55 °C up to 1000 V A 450 800
• Rated power for AC loads 230 V kW 240 323
with p.f. = 0.95 at 55°C 400 V kW 415 558
500 V kW 545 735
690 V kW 720 970
1000 V kW 780 1385
• Minimum conductor cross-sections for loads At 40°C mm2 2 x 240 Ie ≥ 800 A: 2 x 60 x 5
with Ie (copper busbars)
At 55°C mm2 2 x 185 Ie < 800 A: 2 x 240
1000 V A 435 580
• Rated power for slipring or squirrel-cage At 230 V kW 200 260
motors at 50 Hz and 60 Hz 400 V kW 347 450
500 V kW 434 600
690 V kW 600 800
1000 V kW 600 800
• Rated power for squirrel-cage motors with At 400 V kW 355 400
50 Hz and 60 Hz
of about 200 000 operating cycles:
- Rated operational currents Ie Up to 690 V A 300 360
1000 V A 210 250
- Rated power for squirrel-cage motors with At 230 V kW 97 110
50 Hz and 60 Hz 400 V kW 168 191
500 V1) kW 210 250
690 V1) kW 278 335
1000 V1) A 290 350
• Rated operational currents Ie Up to 400 V
- For inrush current n = 20 A 513 675
- For inrush current n = 30 A 342 450
• Rating P
- For inrush current n = 20 230 V kVA 195 256
400 V kVA 338 445
500 V kVA 444 584
690 V kVA 586 771
1000 V kVA 752 1003
- For inrush current n = 302) 230 V kVA 130 171
400 V kVA 226 297
500 V kVA 296 389
690 V kVA 390 514
1000 V kVA 592 778
Utilization category AC-6b,
switching low-inductance (low-loss, metallized dielectric)
AC capacitors
• Rated power for single capacitors At 230 V kvar 175
at 50 and 60 Hz 400 V kvar 300
500 V kvar 400
690 V kvar 300
• Rated power for banks of capacitors (mini- At 230 V kvar 145
mum inductance is 6 µH between capacitors 400 V kvar 250
connected in parallel) at 50 and 60 Hz 500 V kvar 333
690 V kvar 250
1) Max. permissible rated operational current Ie/AC-4 = Ie/AC-3 up to 500 V,
for reduced contact endurance and reduced switching frequency.
2) For deviating inrush current factors x, the power must be recalculated as
follows:
Px = Pn30 ⋅ 30/x.
Siemens · 2011 69

Size 14 14
Main circuit
AC capacity
Short-time loading capacity (5 ... 30 s)
• CLASS 5 and 10 A 630 820
• CLASS 15 A 630 662
• CLASS 20 A 536 572
• CLASS 25 A 479 531
• CLASS 30 A 441 500
Thermal current-carrying capacity 10-s-current1) A 5040 7000
Power loss per conducting path at Ie/AC-3 /690 V W 45 70
Switching frequency
• Contactors without overload relays No-load switching frequency AC 1/h 2000 1000
No-load switching frequency DC 1/h 1000 1000
AC-1 1/h 700 700
AC-2 1/h 200 200
AC-3 1/h 500 500
AC-4 1/h 150 150
• Contactors with overload relays (mean value) 1/h 15 15
• Busbar connections
- Finely stranded with cable lug mm2 50 ... 240 50 ... 240
- Stranded with cable lug mm2 70 ... 240 50 ... 240
- Solid or stranded AWG 2/0 ... 500 MCM 2/0 ... 500 MCM
- Connecting bar (max. width) mm 50 60 (Ue ≤ 690 V)
50 (Ue > 690 V)
• Terminal screw M10 x 30 M12 x 40
- Tightening torque Nm 14 ... 24 (124 ... 210 lb.in) 20 ... 35 (177 ... 310 lb.in)
• With box terminal2)
- Connectable copper bars
- Width mm 15 ... 25 15 ... 38
- Max. thickness mm 1 x 26 or 2 x 11 1 x 46 or 2 x 18
- Terminal screw A/F 6 (hexagon socket) A/F 8 (hexagon socket)
- Tightening torque Nm 25 ... 40 (221 ... 354 lb.in) 35 ... 50 (266 ... 443 lb.in)
• Solid mm2 2 x (0.5 ... 1)3)/2 x (1 ... 2.5)3)
• Finely stranded with end sleeve mm2 2 x (0.5 ... 1)3)/2 x (0.75 ... 2.5)3)
• Pin-end connector to DIN 46231 mm2 2 x (1 ... 1.5)
• Solid or stranded AWG 2 x (18 ... 12)
• Tightening torque Nm 0.8 ... 1.4 (7 ... 12 lb.in)
s and u ratings
Uninterrupted current • Open and enclosed A 630 820
• Rated power for induction motors at At 200 V hp 231 290
60 Hz 230 V hp 266 350
460 V hp 530 700
575 V hp 664 860
NEMA/EEMAC ratings
SIZE hp 6 7
• Uninterrupted current - Open A 600 820
- Enclosed A 540 810
• Rated power for induction motors at At 200 V hp 150 --
60 Hz 230 V hp 200 300
460 V hp 400 600
575 V hp 400 600
Overload relay • Type 3RB12 .
• Setting range A 200 ... 820
For short-circuit protection with overload relays see "Protection

Equipment --> Overload Relays".
2) See Accessories and Spare Parts.
70 Siemens · 2011
3TB5 contactors with DC solenoid system,
3-pole, 55 ... 200 kW
■ Overview
3-pole, 55 ... 200 kW
EN 60947-4-1.
The contactors are climate-proof and finger-safe according
to EN 50274.
Contactors Type 3TB50 3TB52 to 3TB56
Continuous thermal current A 10
Ith = Rated operational current Ie/AC-12
AC load
24 V A 10
110 V A 10
125 V A 10
220 V A 6
230 V A 5.6
380 V A 4
400 V A 3.6
500 V A 2.5
660 V A 2.5
690 V A --
DC load
24 V A 10 10
60 V A 10 10
110 V A 3.2 8
125 V A 2.5 6
220 V A 0.9 2
440 V A 0.33 0.6
600 V A 0.22 0.4
Rated operational current Ie/DC-131)
24 V A 10 (10) 10 (10)
60 V A 5 (7) 5 (4)
110 V A 1.14 (3.2) 2.4 (1.8)
125 V A 0.98 (2.5) 2.1 (1.6)
220 V A 0.48 (0.9) 1.1 (0.9)
440 V A 0.13 (0.33) 0.32 (0.27)
600 V A 0.075 (0.22) 0.21 (0.18)
Contactors Type 3TB50 to 3TB56

max.
1) Values in brackets apply to auxiliary contacts with delayed NC contact.
Siemens · 2011 71
3-pole, 55 ... 200 kW

The characteristic curves show the contact endurance of the If the contacts are used for mixed operation, i. e. normal swit-
contactors when switching resistive and inductive AC loads ching (breaking the rated operational current according to utili-
(AC-1/AC-3) depending on the breaking current and rated ope- zation category AC-3) in combination with intermittent inching
rational voltage. It is assumed that the operating mechanisms (breaking several times the rated operational current according
are switched randomly, i. e. not synchronized with the phase to utilization category AC-4), the contact endurance can be cal-
angle of the supply system. culated approximately from the following equation:
The rated operational current Ie complies with utilization cate- A
X = ----------------------------------------------------------
C A
gory AC-4 (breaking six times the rated operational current) and 1 + --------- -  ---- – 1
is intended for a contact endurance of approx. 200 000 opera- 100 B
ting cycles. Characters in the equation:
X Contact endurance for mixed operation in operating cycles
If a shorter endurance is sufficient, the rated operational current A Contact endurance for normal operation (Ia = Ie) in operating cycles
Ie/AC-4 can be increased. B Contact endurance for inching (Ia = multiple
of Ie) in operating cycles
C Inching operations as a percentage of total switching operations
3TB50 to 3TB56 contactors
Contactor Type 3TB50 3TB54
3TB52 3TB56
10 7
8 NSB00652a
6
4
Operating cycles at 400 V
2
10 6
8
6
4
10 5
8
6
4
104
8
6
4
103
10 30 40 50 60 80 100 200 300 400 600 800 1000 2000 1 a (A) 4000
110 170 250 400 1 e (A)
55 90 132 200 PN (kW)
Diagram legend:
PN = Rated power for squirrel-cage motors at 400 V
72 Siemens · 2011
3-pole, 55 ... 200 kW
Contactors Type 3TB50 3TB52 3TB54 3TB56

Size 6 8 10 12
General data
N S B 0 _ 0 0 6 5 0 b
Installation instructions1)
surface.
ting
cycles
2)
Degree of protection acc. to EN 60947-1, Appendix C IP00 (open), coil assembly IP40
Shock resistance (rectangular pulse) g/ms 5/10 5.9/10 5.9/10 5.9/10
Main circuit
Fuse links gL/gG • Type of coordination "1" A 250 315 400 630
LV HRC 3NA, DIAZED 5SB • Type of coordination "2" A 224 250 315 500
Auxiliary circuit short-circuit current Ik ≥1 kA
• Fuse links gL/gG, A 16
Control
Magnetic coil operating range 0.8 ... 1.1 x Us
Power consumption of the magnetic coil (for cold coil and 1.0 x Us)
Closing = Closed W 25 30 60 86
Operating times at 0.8 ... 1.1 x Us (The values apply up to and including 20 % undervoltage,
Total break time = Opening delay + Arcing time 10 % overvoltage, as well as when the coil is cold and warm)
• Closing delay ms 105 ... 360 115 ... 400 105 ... 400 110 ... 400
• Opening delay3) ms 18 ... 30 22 ... 35 24 ... 55 40 ... 110
• Arcing time ms 10 ... 15 10 ... 15 10 ... 15 10 ... 15
Operating times at 1.0 x Us
• Closing delay ms 120 ... 230 130 ... 250 115 ... 250 120 ... 250
• Opening delay3) ms 20 ... 26 24 ... 32 35 ... 50 60 ... 95
Main circuit
AC capacity
Utilization category AC-1, switching resistive loads
• Rated operational current Ie At 40 °C up to 690 V A 170 230 325 425
At 55 °C up to 690 V A 160 200 300 400
• Rated power for AC loads4) 230 V kW 61 76 114 152
P.f. = 0.95 (at 55 °C) 400 V kW 105 132 195 262
500 V kW 138 173 260 345
690 V kW 183 228 340 455
• Minimum conductor cross-sections for loads with Ie mm² 70 95 185 240
Utilization category AC-2 and AC-3 5)

- Rated operational current Ie A 52 72 103 120
- Rated power for squirrel-cage 230 V kW 15.6 21 31 37.5
motors with 50 Hz and 60 Hz 400 V kW 27 37 55 65
500 V kW 35 48 72 85.5
690 V kW 45 64 92 106
- Max. rated operational At 400 V A 110 170 250 400
current Ie /AC-4
1) For reversing duty, deviations from the vertical axis are not permitted.
2) See "Endurance of the Main Contacts".
3) The opening delay times can increase if the contactor coils are damped
against voltage peaks.
account).
5) See selection table in Catalog LV 1.
Siemens · 2011 73
3-pole, 55 ... 200 kW

Size 6 8 10 12
Main circuit
AC capacity
Switching low-inductance (low-loss, metallized dielectric)
AC capacitors1)
• Rated operational current Ie at 400 V A 87 144 217 289
• Rated power for single capacitors at 230 V kvar 35 58 87 115
50 Hz 400 V kvar 60 100 150 200
500 V kvar 80 130 190 265
690 V kvar 60 100 150 200
• Rated power for banks of capacitors 230 V kvar 30 40 66 85
(minimum inductance is 6 µH bet- 400 V kvar 50 70 115 150
ween capacitors connected in par- 500 V kvar 66 90 145 195
allel) at 50 Hz 690 V kvar 50 70 115 150
Load rating with DC
- 1 conducting path 24 V A 160 200 300 400
60 V A 80 80 300 330
110 V A 18 18 33 33
220 V A 3.4 3.4 3.8 3.8
440 V A 0.8 0.8 0.9 0.9
600 V A 0.5 0.5 0.6 0.6
- 2 conducting paths in series 24 V A 160 200 300 400
60 V A 160 200 300 400
110 V A 160 200 300 400
220 V A 20 20 300 400
440 V A 3.2 3.2 4 4
600 V A 1.6 1.6 2 2
60 V A 160 200 300 400
110 V A 160 200 300 400
220 V A 160 200 300 400
440 V A 11.5 11.5 11 11
600 V A 4 4 5.2 5.2
Utilization category DC-3/DC-5
- 1 conducting path 24 V A 16 16 35 35
60 V A 7.5 7.5 11 11
110 V A 2.5 2.5 3 3
220 V A 0.6 0.6 0.6 0.6
440 V A 0.17 0.17 0.18 0.18
600 V A 0.12 0.12 0.125 0.125
60 V A 160 200 300 400
110 V A 160 200 300 400
220 V A 2.5 2.5 2.5 2.5
440 V A 0.65 0.65 0.65 0.65
600 V A 0.37 0.37 0.37 0.37
60 V A 160 200 300 400
110 V A 160 200 300 400
220 V A 160 200 300 400
440 V A 1.4 1.4 1.4 1.4
600 V A 0.75 0.75 0.75 0.75
Switching frequency
• Contactors without overload relays AC-1 h-1 1000
AC-2 h-1 500
AC-3 h-1 500
AC-4 h-1 250
1) Contact endurance 0.1 million operating cycles.
74 Siemens · 2011
3-pole, 55 ... 200 kW

Size 6 8 10 12
• Finely stranded with cable lug mm2 16 ... 70 35 ... 95 50 ... 240 50 ... 240
• Stranded with cable lug mm2 25 ... 70 50 ... 120 70 ... 240 70 ... 240
• Busbars mm 15 x 3 20 x 3 25 x 5 2 x (25 x 3)
• Terminal screw M6 M8 M10 M10
• Solid mm2 1 ... 2.5
• Finely stranded with end sleeve mm2 0.75 ... 1.5
• Pin-end connector (DIN 46231) mm2 2 x 1 ... 2.5
Protective conductors: mm2 -- 25 ... 70 35 ... 70 50 ... 120
Stranded with cable lug
s and u ratings
s rating
• Uninterrupted current - Open A 150 170 240 300
- Enclosed A 135 153 215 270
• Rated power for induction motors at 115 V hp 25 30 40 50
60 Hz (enclosed) 230 V hp 50 60 75 100
460 V hp 100 120 150 200
575 V hp 125 160 200 250
• Overload relay - Type 3RB20 56 3RB20 56 3RB20 66 3RB20 66
- Setting range A 50 ... 200 50 ... 200 50 ... 250 200 ... 540
• NEMA/EEMAC size - Contactors 4 4 4 5
- Starters (= contactors + 3 4 4 5
overload relay, enclosed)
u rating
• Uninterrupted current - Open A 150 150 240 390
- Enclosed A 135 135 215 350
• Rated power for induction motors at 115 V hp 25 25 30 --
60 Hz 230 V hp 50 50 75 125
460 V hp 100 100 150 250
575 V hp 125 125 200 3001)
• Overload relay - Type 3RB20 56 3RB20 56 3RB20 66 3RB20 66
- Setting range A 50 ... 200 50 ... 200 50 ... 250 200 ... 540
• NEMA/EEMAC size - Contactors 4 4 4 5
- Starters (= contactors + 3 4 4 5
overload relay, enclosed)
Short-circuit protection devices
• CLASS RK5 fuses A 400 400 450 600
• Circuit breakers acc. to UL 489 A 175 175 250 600
1) At 575/600 V AC max.
rated motor current 325 A and
motor starting current 3250 A.
Siemens · 2011 75
3TF2 contactors, 3-pole, 2.2 ... 4 kW
■ Overview 3TF20-0 motor contactors according to EN 50012 or EN 50005
AC and DC operation Contactors, EN 50012,

IEC 60947 (VDE 0660). 1 aux. contact
The contactors are suitable for use in any climate. The contac-
tors with screw terminals are finger-safe according to EN 50274.
The contactors are available in versions with screw terminals,
6.3 mm plug-in terminals and solder pin connections for solde-
ring in printed circuit boards. Ident. No. 10E Ident. No. 01
■ Design
Aux. switch blocks, Aux. switch blocks,
Auxiliary contacts EN 50012, EN 50005,
4, 3 or 1 contacts 4 or 2 contacts
Contact reliability
To switch voltages ≤ 110 V and currents ≤ 100 mA the 3TF2 con-
tactor relays should be used as they guarantee a high level of
contact reliability.
These auxiliary contacts are suitable for solid-state circuits with
currents ≥ 1 mA at a voltage of 17 V and higher. Ident. No. 32E, Ident. No. 40, 31,
23E, 22E, 11E 22, 20, 11, 02
Short-circuit protection of the contactors
For short-circuit protection of the contactors without overload re-
lays see "Technical specifications". Contactors, Contactors,
EN 50012 EN 50005,
Version 5, 4 or 2 5 or 3
aux. contacts aux. contacts
The 3TF2 contactors are available with SIGUT screw terminals,
6.3 mm x 0.8 mm flat connectors and solder pin connectors.
The contactors with 6.3 mm x 0.8 mm flat connectors can be
used in the plug-in base with solder pin connectors for printed
circuit boards. The contactors are coded and the plug-in base is
NSB0_00450b
codable in order to ensure non-interchangeability. Ident. No. 32E, Ident. No. 40, 31,
Auxiliary switch blocks 23E, 22E, 11E 22, 20, 11, 02
The contactors with 1 auxiliary contact with screw terminals can

be expanded by up to four contacts by the addition of snap-on Surge suppression
auxiliary switch blocks.
RC elements, varistors, diodes or diode assemblies (combina-
The contactors according to EN 50012 with identification num- tion of a diode and a Zener diode for short break times) can be
ber 10E can be expanded into contactors with 2, 4 and 5 auxili- plugged onto all 3TF2 contactors and auxiliary switch blocks
ary contacts according to EN 50012 using auxiliary switch with screw terminals from the front in order to damp opening sur-
blocks. ges in the coil. The unit labeling plate must be removed for this
The identification numbers 11E, 22E, 23E and 32E on the auxili- purpose. It can be snapped onto the attached surge
ary switch blocks apply to the complete contactors (see the gra- suppressor.
phic on the right). These auxiliary switch blocks cannot be com- Note:
bined with contactors with identification number 01E. The OFF-delay of the NO contacts and the ON-delay of the NC
All contactors with screw terminals and 1 auxiliary contact ac- contacts increase if the contactor coils are protected against vol-
cording to EN 50012, identification number 10E and 01E, can be tage peaks (noise suppression diode 6 to 10 times, diode as-
extended with auxiliary switch blocks 40, 31, 22, 20, 11 and 02 semblies 2 to 6 times, varistor +2 to 5 ms).
to obtain contactors with 3 or 5 auxiliary contacts according
to EN 50005. The identification numbers on the auxiliary switch Reversing duty
blocks apply only to the attached auxiliary switches. To use the 3TF2 AC-operated contactor in reversing or Dahlan-
der mode an additional dead interval of 50 ms is required along
with an NC contact interlock.
76 Siemens · 2011
Contactors Type 3TF2
The contact endurance for utilization cate- 30 NSB00659
gory AC-12 or AC-15/AC-14 depends Coupling links
mainly on the breaking current. It is assu-
Million operating cycles (106)

10
Contactor relays
med that the operating mechanisms are 5 +coupling links
switched randomly, i. e. not synchronized 3
2 DC-13 DC-13
with the phase angle of the supply system. 220 V 110 V
Diagram legend: 1
DC-13 AC-15/AC-14
Ia = Breaking current 0,5 24 V
0,1
0,05
0,01
0,01 0,03 0,05 0,1 0,3 0,5 1 2 3 4 5 7 10 1 a (A)
1 e- DC-13 1 e - DC-13 1 e - DC-13 1 e - AC-15/AC-14
220 V 110 V 24 V 230 V
v
3TF2
The characteristic curves show the con- Contactor type
tact endurance of the contactors when 3TF28 3TF20
3TK2
switching inductive AC loads (AC-3) de- 8
107
107 6 8 NSB00653a
pending on the breaking current and rated 8 6
4 6
operational voltage. It is assumed that the 6 4 4
operating mechanisms are switched ran- 4 2

domly, i. e. not synchronized with the 2
2
phase angle of the supply system. 2 106
106 8 106
The rated operational current Ie complies 8
106 6 8
with utilization category AC-4 (breaking 8 6
4 6
six times the rated operational current) 6 4
4
and is intended for a contact endurance of 4 2
at least 200 000 operating cycles. If a 2 2
shorter endurance is sufficient, the rated 2 105
operational current Ie/AC-4 can be 105 8 105
105 8 6
increased. 6
8
8 4 6
If the contacts are used for mixed opera- 6 4
tion, i. e. normal switching (breaking the 4
4 2
rated operational current according to uti- 2
2
lization category AC-3) in combination 2 104
with intermittent inching (breaking several 104 8 104
times the rated operational current accor- 104 8 6 8
8 6
ding to utilization category AC-4), the con- 4 6
6 4
tact endurance can be calculated appro- 4
ximately from the following equation: 4 2
2
A 2
X = ---------------------------------------------------------- 2 103
1 + ----------  ---- – 1
C A 103 103
100 B 1 2 3 4 5 6 8 10 20 30 40 50 60 80
1 a (A)
Characters in the equation: 5 9 1 e (A)
X = Contact endurance for mixed opera-
tion in operating cycles 2,2 4 PN (kW)
A = Contact endurance for normal opera-
tion (Ia = Ie) in operating cycles
B = Contact endurance for inching Diagram legend:
(Ia = multiple of Ie) in operating cycles PN= Rated power for squirrel-cage motors at 400 V
C = Inching operations as a percentage of Ia= Breaking current
total switching operations
Siemens · 2011 77
Contactors Type 3TF20/3TF28 3TF22/3TF29

General data
Permissible mounting position AC and DC operation Any
Mechanical endurance • AC operation Opera- 10 million
• DC operation ting 30 million
• Auxiliary switch block cycles 10 million
Rated insulation voltage Ui
• Screw terminals V 690 6901)
• Flat connector 6.3 mm x 0.8 mm V 500 --
• Solder pin connections V 500 --
Rated impulse withstand voltage Uimp
• Screw terminals kV 8 82)
• Flat connector 6.3 mm x 0.8 mm kV 6 --
• Solder pin connections kV 6 --
Protective separation between coil and main contacts V Up to 300
(acc. to EN 61140)
Mirror contacts
A mirror contact is an auxiliary NC contact that cannot be closed simulta- Yes, this applies to both the basic Yes, acc. to EN 60947-4-1
neously with a NO main contact. unit as well as to between the basic Appendix F SUVA
unit and the mounted auxiliary switch
block acc. to EN 60947-4-1, Appen-
dix F
Permissible ambient temperature3) • During operation °C -25 ... +55
Degree of protection acc. to EN 60947-1 Appendix C IP00 open
IP20 for screw terminals
IP40 coil assembly
Touch protection acc. to EN 50274 Finger-safe for screw terminals
Shock resistance
• Without 3TX44 auxiliary switch block
- Rectangular pulse - AC operation g/ms 8.3/5 and 5.2/10 --
- DC operation g/ms 11.3/5 and 9.2/10 --
- Sine pulse - AC operation g/ms 13/5 and 8/10 --
- DC operation g/ms 17.4/5 and 12.9/10 --
• With 3TX44 auxiliary switch block
- Rectangular pulse - AC operation g/ms 5/5 and 3.6/10 5/5 and 3.6/10
- DC operation g/ms 9/5 and 6.9/10 9/5 and 7.3/10
- Sine pulse - AC operation g/ms 7.8/5 and 5.6/10 7.8/5 and 5.6/10
- DC operation g/ms 13.9/5 and 10.1/10 14/5 and 11/10
4)
Main circuit5)
• Fuse links gL/gG
acc. to IEC 60947-4-1 - Type of coordination "1" A 25
(VDE 0660, Part 102) - Type of coordination "2"6) A 10
- Weld-free A 10
Auxiliary circuit
Short-circuit current Ik ≥ 1 kA
1) Auxiliary contacts 500 V.
2) Auxiliary contacts 6 kV.
3) Applies to 50/60 Hz coil:
At 50 Hz, 1.1 x Us, , side-by-side mounting and 100 % ON period the
max. ambient temperature is +40 °C.
4) See "Conductor Cross-Sections".
5) According to excerpt from IEC 60947-4-1 (VDE 0660 Part 102)
Type of coordination "1":
Destruction of the contactor and the overload relay is permissible. The
contactor and/or overload relay can be replaced if necessary.
The overload relay must not suffer any damage. Contact welding on the
contactor is permissible, however, if the contacts can be easily separated.
6) A short-circuit current of Iq ≤ 6 kA applies to type of coordination "2".
78 Siemens · 2011

Control
Magnetic coil operating range1) 0.8 ... 1.1 x Us
Standard version:
• AC operation, 50 Hz Closing VA 15
P.f. 0.41
Closed VA 6.8
P.f. 0.42
• AC operation, 60 Hz Closing VA 14.4
P.f. 0.36
Closed VA 6.1
P.f. 0.46
• AC operation, 50/60 Hz1) Closing VA 16.5/13.2
P.f. 0.43/0.38
Closed VA 8.0/5.4
P.f. 0.48/0.42
For USA and Canada:
P.f. 0.38
Closed VA 6.5
P.f. 0.40
P.f. 0.30
Closed VA 6.0
P.f. 0.44
• DC operation Closing = Closed W 3
Permissible residual current of the electronic circuit2) (for 0 signal)
• AC operation mA ≤ 3 x (230 V/Us)
• DC operation mA ≤ 1 x (230 V/Us)
Operating times at 0.8 ... 1.1 x Us3)
Values apply with coil in cold state and at operating temperature for
operating range
• AC operation Closing delay ms 5 ... 19
- Dead interval To use the 3TF2 AC-operated contactor in reversing an additional dead
interval of 50 ms is required along with an NC contact interlock.
• DC operation Closing delay ms 16 ... 65
Operating times at 1.0 x Us3)
- Dead interval To use the 3TF2 AC-operated contactor in reversing an additional dead
interval of 50 ms is required along with an NC contact interlock.
At 50 Hz, 1.1 x Us, side-by-side mounting and 100 % ON period the max.
ambient temperature is +40 °C.
2) The 3TX4 490-1J additional load module is recommended for higher resi-
dual currents (see "Accessories and Spare Parts").
Siemens · 2011 79
Contactors Type 3TF28 3TF20 . .-0. . ., 3TF20 . .-3. . .,

3TF29 3TF22 . .-0. . . 3TF20 . .-6. . .,
3TF20 . .-7. . .
Size S00 S00 S00
Main circuit
AC capacity
• Rated operational current Ie (at 40 °C) Up to 400/380 V A 18 18 18
690/660 V A 18 18 --
• Rated operational current Ie (at 55 °C) 400/380 V A 16 16 16
690/660 V A 16 16 --
• Rated power of AC loads At 230/220 V kW 6.0 6.0 6.0
P.f. = 1 400/380 V kW 10 10 10
500 V kW 13 13 13
690/660 V kW 17 17 --
• Minimum conductor cross-section for loads with Ie mm2 2.5 2.5 2.5
230 V A 5.1 9.0 9.0
380 V A 5.1 9.0 9.0
400 V A 5.1 8.4 8.4
500 V A 4.8 6.5 6.5
660 V A 4.8 5.2 --
690 V A 4.8 5.2 --
• Rated power for motors with slipring or squirrel cage At 110 V kW 0.7 1.2 1.2
at 50 and 60 Hz and 115 V kW 0.7 1.2 1.2
120 V kW 0.7 1.3 1.3
127 V kW 0.8 1.4 1.4
200 V kW 1.2 2.2 2.2
220 V kW 1.3 2.4 2.4
230 V kW 1.4 2.5 2.5
240 V kW 1.5 2.6 2.6
380 V kW 2.2 4.0 4.0
400 V kW 2.2 4.0 4.0
415 V kW 2.5 4.0 4.0
440 V kW 2.5 4.0 4.0
460 V kW 2.7 4.0 4.0
500 V kW 2.9 4.0 4.0
575 V kW 3.2 4.0 --
660 V kW 3.8 4.0 --
690 V kW 4.0 4.0 --
(contact endurance approx. 200 000 operating cycles at Ia = 6 x Ie)
690 V A 1.4 1.8 --
• Rated power for motors with squirrel cage at 50 and At 110 V kW 0.23 0.32 0.32
60 Hz and 115 V kW 0.24 0.33 0.33
120 V kW 0.26 0.35 0.35
• Max. permissible rated operational current 127 V kW 0.27 0.37 0.37
Ie/AC-4 r Ie/AC-3 up to 500 V, for reduced contact 200 V kW 0.42 0.58 0.58
endurance and reduced switching frequency 220 V kW 0.47 0.64 0.64
230 V kW 0.49 0.67 0.67
240 V kW 0.51 0.70 0.70
380 V kW 0.81 1.10 1.10
400 V kW 0.85 1.15 1.15
415 V kW 0.93 1.20 1.20
440 V kW 1.0 1.27 1.27
460 V kW 1.0 1.33 1.33
500 V kW 1.1 1.45 1.45
575 V kW 1.0 1.30 --
660 V kW 0.86 1.10 --
690 V kW 0.89 1.15 --
80 Siemens · 2011

3TF29 3TF22 . .-0. . . 3TF20 . .-6. . .,
3TF20 . .-7. . .
Size S00 S00 S00
Main circuit
AC capacity
Switching gas discharge lamps
• Rated power Rated operational current
per lamp per lamp (A)
- Uncorrected
L 18 W 0.37 Units 43
L 36 W 0.43 Units 37
L 58 W 0.67 Units 23
- DUO switching
L 18 W 011 Units 144
L 36 W 0.21 Units 76
L 58 W 0.32 Units 50
Switching gas discharge lamps with correction, solid-state ballast
• Rated power Capacitance Rated operational current
per lamp (μF) per lamp (A)
- Parallel correction
L 18 W 4.5 0.11 Units 22
L 36 W 4.5 0.21 Units 22
L 58 W 7 0.31 Units 14
- With solid-state ballast (single
lamp)
L 18 W 6.8 0.10 Units 63
L 36 W 6.8 0.18 Units 35
L 58 W 10 0.27 Units 23
- With solid-state ballast (two
lamps)
L 18 W 10 0.18 Units 35
L 36 W 10 0.35 Units 18
L 58 W 22 0.52 Units 12
Utilization category AC-5b, kW 1.6 --
switching incandescent lamps
Utilization category AC-6a,
- For inrush current n = 20 At 400 V A 2.9 5.1 5.1
- For inrush current n = 30 At 400 V A 1.9 3.3 3.3
• Rated power P
- For inrush current n = 20 Up to 230/220 V kVA 1.14 2.0 2.0
400/380 V kVA 2 3.5 3.5
500 V kVA 4.1 4.6 4.6
690/660 V kVA 5.4 6.0 --
- For inrush current n = 30 Up to 230/220 V kVA 0.74 1.3 1.3
400/380 V kVA 1.3 2.3 2.3
500 V kVA 2.8 3.1 3.1
690/660 V kVA 3.6 4.0 --
Px= Pn30 x (30/x)
Utilization category AC-6b No switching capacity
Switching low inductive loads in household appliances
• Rated operational current Ie (at 55 °C) At 400/380 V A 16 16 16
690/660 V A 16 16 --
• Rated power at 50 and 60 Hz At 230/220 V kW 6 6 6
400/380 V kW 10 10 10
• Minimum conductor cross-section for loads with Ie mm2 2.5 2.5 2.5
Switching motor loads in household appliances
230 V A 5.1 9.0 9.0
380 V A 5.1 9.0 9.0
400 V A 5.1 8.4 8.4
• Rated power of motors At 110 V kW 0.68 1.2 1.2
at 50 and 60 Hz and 220 V kW 1.3 2.4 2.4
230 V kW 1.4 2.5 2.5
240 V kW 1.5 2.6 2.6
380 V kW 2.2 4.0 4.0
400 V kW 2.4 4.0 4.0
Siemens · 2011 81

3TF29 3TF22 . .-0. . . 3TF20 . .-6. . .,
3TF20 . .-7. . .
Size S00 S00 S00
Main circuit
Load rating with DC
(contact endurance 0.1 x 106 operating cycles; L/R ≤ 1 ms)
60 V A 4 6 6
110 V A 1.5 2 2
220/240 V A 0.6 1 1
60 V A 10 16 16
110 V A 4 6 6
220/240 V A 1.5 2 2
60 V A 10 16 16
110 V A 10 16 16
220/240 V A 4 6 6
60 V A 1.8 3 3
110 V A 0.3 0.5 0.5
220/240 V A -- 0.1 0.1
60 V A 3 5 5
110 V A 1.5 2 2
220/240 V A 0.3 0.5 0.5
60 V A 10 16 16
110 V A 10 16 16
220/240 V A 1.5 2 2
Thermal load capacity 10 s current A 70
Power loss per conducting path At Ie/AC-3 W 0.3
Switching frequency
• Contactors without overload relays No-load switching frequency h-1 10000
Dependence of the switching frequency z' AC-1 h-1 1000
on the operational current I' and operational AC-2 h-1 500
z' = z ⋅(Ie/I' ) ⋅(400 V/U' )1.5 ⋅1/h
Main and auxiliary conductors Screw terminals
2
• Solid mm 2 x (0.5 ... 2.5), 1 x 4
2 x (20 ... 14) AWG, 1 x 12 AWG
• Finely stranded with end sleeve mm2 2 x (0.5 ... 1.5), 1 x 2.5
• Prescribed tightening torque for terminal screws Nm 0.8 ... 1.3
(7 ... 11lb.in)
Flat connectors
• When using a plug-in sleeve 6.3 ... 1 mm2 0.5 ... 1

• Finely stranded 6.3 ... 2.5 mm2 1 ... 2.5
(only for printed circuit boards)
82 Siemens · 2011
Contactors Type 3TF20 . .-0. . . 3TF20 . .-3. . .,

3TF20 . .-6. . .,
3TF20 . .-7. . .
Size S00 S00
s and u rated data of the 3TF20 contactors
Rated insulation voltage Ui V AC 600 300
Uninterrupted current • Open and enclosed A 16 16 (10 for solder pin connection)
• Rated power for induction motors at 60 Hz
- 1-phase At 115 V hp 0.5 --
200 V hp 1 1
230 V hp 1.5 1
460/575 V hp -- --
- 3-phase At 115 V hp -- --
200 V hp 3 3 (1 for 3TF20 ..-6)
230 V hp 3 3 (1 for 3TF20 ..-6)
460/575 V hp 5 --
Overload relay • Type/Setting range 3UA7/EB 8 ... 10 A

Size
Rated data of the auxiliary contacts acc. to IEC 60947-5-1 (VDE 0660 Part 200)
AC load
110 V A 4
125 V A 4
220 V A 4
230 V A 4
380 V A 3
400 V A 3
500 V A 2
660 V A 1
690 V A 1
DC load
48 V A 2.2
110 V A 1.1
125 V A 1.1
220 V A 0.5
440 V A --
600 V A --
• For rated operational voltage Ue 24 V A 2.1
48 V A 1.1
110 V A 0.52
125 V A 0.52
220 V A 0.27
440 V A --
600 V A --
s, u and U rated data of the auxiliary contacts
Rated voltage, max. V AC 600
Auxiliary switch blocks, max. V AC 300
Switching capacity A 600, Q 300
Uninterrupted current at 240 V AC A 10
Siemens · 2011 83
3RA13, 3RA14 Contactor Assemblies
3RA13 Reversing Contactor Assemblies
3RA13 complete units, 3 ... 45 kW
■ Overview
The 3RA13 reversing contactor assemblies can be ordered as Complete units
follows:
The fully wired reversing contactor assemblies are suitable for
Sizes S00 to S3 use in any climate. They are finger-safe according to EN 50274.
Fully wired and tested, with mechanical and electrical interlock. The contactor assemblies consist of 2 contactors with the same
For assemblies with AC operation and 50/60 Hz, a dead interval power, with one NC contact in the basic unit. The contactors are
of 50 ms must be provided when used with voltages ≥ 500 V; a mechanically and electrically interlocked (NC contact interlock).
dead interval of 30 ms is recommend for use with voltages
≥ 400 V. These dead times do not apply to assemblies with DC For motor protection, either 3RU11 or 3RB2. . overload relays for
operation. direct mounting or stand-alone installation or thermistor motor
protection tripping units must be ordered separately.
Sizes S00 to S12
Components for customer assembly
As individual parts for customer assembly.
Assembly kits for all sizes are available for customer assembly
There is also a range of accessories (auxiliary switch blocks, of reversing contactor assemblies.
surge suppressors, etc.) that must be ordered separately. Contactors, overload relays, the mechanical interlock (as of
For overload relays for motor protection, see size S0) and – for momentary-contact operation – auxiliary
"Protection Equipment --> Overload Relays". switch blocks for latching must be ordered separately.
The 3RA13 contactor assemblies have screw terminals and are
suitable for screwing or snapping onto 35 mm standard moun-
ting rails.
Rated data AC-2 and AC-3 at Size Order No.

AC 50 Hz 400 V
Rating Operational Contactors Mechanical Mechanical Mechanical Assembly kit Fully wired and tested
current Ie interlock1) interlock2) interlock3) contactor assemblies
kW A
3 7 S00 3RT10 15 --4) -- -- 3RA19 13-2A5) 3RA13 15-8XB30-1 . .
4 9 3RT10 16 3RA13 16-8XB30-1 . .
5.5 12 3RT10 17 3RA13 17-8XB30-1 . .
5.5 12 S0 3RT10 24 3RA19 24-1A 3RA19 24-2B -- 3RA19 23-2A6) 3RA13 24-8XB30-1 . .
7.5 17 3RT10 25 3RA13 25-8XB30-1 . .
11 25 3RT10 26 3RA13 26-8XB30-1 . .
15 32 S2 3RT10 34 3RA19 24-1A 3RA19 24-2B -- 3RA19 33-2A7) 3RA13 34-8XB30-1 . .
18.5 40 3RT10 35 3RA13 35-8XB30-1 . .
22 50 3RT10 36 3RA13 36-8XB30-1 . .
30 65 S3 3RT10 44 3RA19 24-1A 3RA19 24-2B -- 3RA19 43-2A7) 3RA13 44-8XB30-1 . .
37 80 3RT10 45 3RA13 45-8XB30-1 . .
45 95 3RT10 46 3RA13 46-8XB30-1 . .
55 115 S6 3RT10 54 -- -- 3RA19 54-2A 3RA19 53-2M8) --
75 150 3RT10 55
90 185 3RT10 56
110 225 S10 3RT10 64 -- -- 3RA19 54-2A 3RA19 63-2A8) --
132 265 3RT10 65
160 300 3RT10 66
200 400 S12 3RT10 75 -- -- 3RA19 54-2A 3RA19 73-2A8) --
250 500 3RT10 76
1) Can be mounted onto the front. 6) Assembly kit contains: wiring modules on the top and bottom.
2) Laterally mountable with one auxiliary contact. 7) Assembly kit contains: 2 connecting clips for contactors; wiring modules
3) Laterally mountable without auxiliary contact. on the top and bottom.
4) Interlock can only be ordered with assembly kit. 8) Assembly kit contains: wiring module on the top and bottom.
5) Assembly kit contains: mechanical interlock; connecting clips for
2 contactors; wiring modules on the top and bottom.
84 Siemens · 2011
3RA13 Reversing Contactor Assemblies
■ Function
The operating times of the individual 3RT10 contactors are rated Sizes S6 to S12
in such a way that no overlapping of the contact making and the
arcing time between two contactors can occur on reversing, pro- To insert the mechanical interlock, the prestamped location
viding they are interlocked by way of their auxiliary switches (NC holes positioned opposite on the contactor must be knocked
contact interlock) and the mechanical interlock. For assemblies out. The internal auxiliary contacts (up to 1 NO + 1 NC per con-
with AC operation and 50/60 Hz, a dead interval of 50 ms must tactor) can be used for the electrical interlock and latching. The
be provided when used with voltages ≥ 500 V; a dead interval of mechanical interlock itself does not contain any auxiliary con-
30 ms is recommend for use with voltages ≥ 400 V. These dead tacts. Additional auxiliary contacts can be used on the outside
times do not apply to assemblies with DC operation. and front (on the front in the case of 3RT10) of the reversing con-
tactor assembly.
The operating times of the individual contactors are not affected
by the mechanical interlock. Surge suppression
The following points should be noted: Sizes S00 to S3
Size S00 All contactor assemblies can be fitted with RC elements or varis-
tors for damping opening surges in the coil.
• For maintained-contact operation:
Use contactors with an NC contact in the basic unit for the As with the individual contactors, the surge suppressors can eit-
electrical interlock. her be plugged onto the top of the contactors (S00) or fitted onto
• For momentary-contact operation: the coil terminals on the top or bottom (S0 to S3).
Use contactors with an NC contact in the basic unit for the Sizes S6 to S12
electrical interlock; in addition, an auxiliary switch block with
at least one NO contact for latching is required per contactor. The contactors are fitted with varistors as standard.
Sizes S0 to S3
• For maintained-contact operation:
The contactors have no auxiliary contact in the basic unit; NC The technical specifications are identical to those of the
contacts for the electrical interlock are therefore integrated in 3RT10 .. contactors listed on page 17 onwards.
the mechanical interlock that can be mounted on the side of The s and u approvals only apply to the complete contactor as-
each contactor (one contact each for the left and right-hand semblies and not to the individual parts for customer assembly.
contactors).
• For momentary-contact operation:
Electrical interlock as for maintained-contact operation; for the
purpose of latching an auxiliary contact with an NO contact is
additionally required for each contactor. This contact can be
snapped onto the top of the contactors. Alternatively, auxiliary
switch blocks mounted on the side can be used; they must be
fitted onto the outside of each contactor.
If the front-mounted mechanical interlock is used for size S0 to
S3 contactors, two location holes for single-pole auxiliary switch
blocks are provided on the front of each S0 or S2 contactor,
while three additional, single-pole auxiliary switch blocks can be
snapped onto S3 contactors. The maximum auxiliary switch fit-
tings per contactor must not be exceeded.
When size S2 and S3 contactors are combined with a front-
mounted mechanical interlock, the assembly kits for
3RA19 33–2B and 3RA19 43–2B contactor assemblies cannot
be used.
Siemens · 2011 85
3RA14 Contactor Assemblies for Wye-Delta Starting
■ Overview
These 3RA14 contactor assemblies for wye-delta starting are A dead interval of 50 ms on reversing is already integrated in the
designed for standard applications. time relay function.
Note: There is also a range of accessories (auxiliary switch blocks,
Contactor assemblies for wye-delta starting in special applica- surge suppressors, etc.) that must be ordered separately.
tions such as very heavy starting or wye-delta starting of special
motors must be customized. Help with designing such special For overload relays for motor protection see
applications is available from Technical Assistance. "Protection Equipment --> Overload Relays --> 3RB2 Solid-State
Overload Relays".
The 3RA14 contactor assemblies for wye-delta starting can be
ordered as follows: The 3RA14 contactor assemblies have screw terminals and are
suitable for screwing or snapping onto 35 mm standard moun-
Sizes S00 to S3: ting rails.
Fully wired and tested, with electrical interlock, dead interval of Fully wired and tested 3RA14 contactor assemblies have one
up to 10 s on reversing (size S00 with electrical and mechanical unassigned NO contact which is mounted onto the front of the
interlocks) K3 delta contactor.
Sizes S00 to S12: A solid-state time-delay auxiliary switch block is snapped onto
the front of the complete contactor assemblies, size S00 up to
As individual parts for customer assembly. 7.5 kW, while a timing relay is mounted onto the side of sizes S0
to S3, 11 kW to 75 kW.
Rated data Size Accessories for
at AC 50 Hz 400 V customer assembly
Rating Operational Motor current Line/delta Star contactor Order No. Timing relay Assembly kit A,
current Ie contactor complete for double infeed
kW A A
5.5 12 9.5 ... 13.8 S00-S00-S00 3RT10 15 3RT10 15 3RA14 15-8XB31-1... 3RT19 16-2G.51 --
7.5 17 12.1 ... 17 3RT10 17 3RA14 16-8XB31-1... 3RP15 74-1N.30
11 25 19 ... 25 S0-S0-S0 3RT10 24 3RT10 24 3RA14 23-8XC21-1... 3RP15 74-1N.30 --
15 32 24.1 ... 34 3RT10 26 3RA14 25-8XC21-1...
18.5 40 34.5 ... 40
22 50 31 ... 43 S2-S2-S0 3RT10 34 3RT10 26 3RA14 34-8XC21-1... 3RP15 74-1N.30 3RA19 33-2C 3)
30 50 48.3 ... 65 3RT10 35 --
37 80 62.1 ... 77.8 S2-S2-S2 3RT10 34 3RA14 35-8XC21-1... 3RA19 33-2B 3)
45 86 69 ... 86 3RT10 36 3RA14 36-8XC21-1...
55 115 77.6 ... 108.6 S3-S3-S2 3RT10 44 3RT10 35 3RA14 44-8XC21-1... 3RP15 74-1N.30 3RA19 43-2C 3)
75 150 120.7 ... 150 3RT10 45 3RT10 36 3RA14 45-8XC21-1...
90 160 86 ... 160 S6-S6-S3 3RT10 54 3RT10 44 -- 3RP15 74-1N.30 --
110 195 86 ... 195
132 230 86 ... 230 3RT10 55 3RT10 45
160 280 86 ... 280 3RT10 56 3RT10 46
200 350 95 ... 350 S10-S10-S6 3RT10 64 3RT10 54 -- 3RP15 74-1N.30 --
250 430 95 ... 430 3RT10 65 3RT10 55
315 540 277 ... 540 S12-S12-S10 3RT10 75 3RT10 64 -- 3RP15 74-1N.30 --
355 610 277 ... 610
400 690 277 ... 690 3RT10 65
500 850 277 ... 850 3RT10 76 3RT10 66
1) Assembly kit contains mechanical interlock, 3 connecting clips; wiring 3) Assembly kit contains wiring module on the bottom (connection between
modules on the top (connection between line and delta contactor) and on delta and star contactor) and star jumper.
the bottom (connection between delta and star contactor); star jumper. 4) Wiring module on top from reversing contactor assembly (note conductor
2) Assembly kit contains 5 connecting clips; wiring modules on the top (con- cross-sections).
nection between line and delta contactor) and on the bottom (connection
between delta and star contactor); star jumper.
86 Siemens · 2011
Components for customer assembly
Assembly kits with wiring modules and, if necessary, mechanical In the case of sizes S2 to S12 only the bottom main conducting
connectors are available for contactor assemblies for wye-delta path connection between the delta and star contactors is inclu-
starting. Contactors, overload relays, wye-delta timing relays, ded in the wiring module, owing to the larger conductor cross-
auxiliary switches for electrical interlock – if required also feeder section at the infeed.
terminals, mechanical interlocks (exception: In the case of the
assembly kit for size S00 contactor assemblies the mechanical Motor protection
interlock between the delta contactor and the star contactor is Overload relays or thermistor motor protection tripping units can
included in the kit) and base plates – must be ordered be used for overload protection.
separately.
The overload relay can be either mounted onto the line contactor
The wiring kits for sizes S00 and S0 contain the top and bottom or separately fitted. It must be set to 0.58 times the rated motor
main conducting path connections between the line and delta current.
contactors (top) and between the delta and star contactors
(bottom). Note:
The selection of contactor types refers to fused configurations
(see table on page 88).
Overload relay, thermal Overload relay, solid-state

(CLASS 10 trip class) (CLASS 10 trip class)
Assembly kit B, Star jumper Base plates Setting range Order No. Setting range Order No.
for single infeed
A A
3RA19 13-2B 1) 3RT19 16-4BA31 -- 5.5 ... 8 3RU11 16-1HB0 3 ... 12 3RB20 16-1SB0
7 ... 10 3RU11 16-1JB0
3RA19 23-2B 2) 3RT19 26-4BA31 -- 11 ... 16 3RU11 26-4AB0 6 ... 25 3RB20 26-1QB0
14 ... 20 3RU11 26-4BB0
20 ... 25 3RU11 26-4DB0
3RV19 35-1A 3RT19 26-4BA31 3RA19 32-2E 18 ... 25 3RU11 36-4DB0 12.5 ... 50 3RB20 36-1UB0
28 ... 40 3RU11 36-4FB0
3RT19 36-4BA31 3RA19 32-2F 36 ... 45 3RU11 36-4GB0
40 ... 50 3RU11 36-4HB0
-- 3RT19 36-4BA31 3RA19 42-2E 45 ... 63 3RU11 46-4JB0 25 ... 100 3RB20 46-1EB0
70 ... 90 3RU11 46-4LB0
3RA19 53-3D 4) 3RT19 46-4BA31 3RA19 52-2E -- -- 50 ... 200 3RB20 56-1FW2
3RB20 56-1FC2
-- 3RT19 56-4BA31 3RA19 62-2E -- -- 55 ... 250 3RB20 66-1GC2
-- 3RT19 66-4BA31 3RA19 72-2E -- -- 160 ... 630 3RB20 66-1MC2
For footnotes see page 86.
Siemens · 2011 87
■ Function
Wye-delta starting can only be used either if the motor normally switch block with a wye-delta function or a 3RP15 74. wye-delta
operates in a Δ connection or starts softly or if the load torque du- timing relay with a dead interval on reversing of approximately
ring Y starting is low and does not increase sharply. On the Y 50 ms.
step the motors can carry approximately 50 % (class KL 16) or
30 % (class KL 10) of their rated torque; The tightening torque is Surge suppression
approximately 1/3 of that during direct on-line starting. The star- Sizes S00 to S3:
ting current is approximately 2 to 2.7 times the rated motor cur-
rent. All contactor assemblies can be fitted with RC elements, varis-
tors or diode assemblies for damping opening surges in the coil.
The changeover from Y to Δ must not be effected until the motor
has run up to rated speed. Operating mechanisms which require As with the individual contactors, the surge suppressors can eit-
this changeover to be performed earlier are unsuitable for wye- her be plugged onto the top of the contactors (S00) or fitted onto
delta starting. the coil terminals on the top or bottom (S0 to S3).
The ratings given in the table are only applicable to motors with Sizes S6 to S12:
a starting current ratio IA ≤ 8.4 x IN and using either a The contactors are fitted with varistors as standard.
3RT19 16-2G or 3RT19 26-2G solid-state time-delay auxiliary
Short-circuit protection with fuses for motor feeders with short-circuit currents up to 50 kA and 690 V.
For overload relays see "Protection Equipment --> Overload Relays --> 3RB2 Solid-State Overload Relays".
Rating Sizes Rated motor Overload relay Setting range Permissible back-up fuses for starters,
of contactors current comprising contactor assemblies and overload relays.
K1-K3-K2
(the overload relays Single or double infeed1)

must be set to 0.58 Fuse links
times the rated LV HRC Type 3NA LV HRC TYPE 3ND u British
motor current) DIAZED Type 5SB Operational class listed Standard
NEOZED Type 5SE aM fuses Fuses
gL/gG operational class CLASS BS88
Type of coordination Type of RK5/L Type of
coordination coordination
"1" "2" "2" "1" "2"
kW A Type A A A A A A A
5.5 S00-S00-S00 12 3RU11 16-1HB0 5.5 ... 8 35 20 10 30 35 20
7.5 S00-S00-S00 16 3RU11 16-1JB0 7 ... 10 35 20 16 40 35 20
11 S0-S0-S0 22 3RU11 26-4AB0 11 ... 16 63 25 20 60 63 25
15 S0-S0-S0 29 3RU11 26-4BB0 14 ... 20 100 35 20 80 100 35
18.5 S0-S0-S0 35 3RU11 26-4DB0 20 ... 25 100 35 20 100 100 35
22 S2-S2-S0 41 3RU11 36-4EB0 22 ... 32 125 63 35 125 125 63
30 S2-S2-S0 55 3RU11 36-4FB0 28 ... 40 125 63 50 150 125 63
37 S2-S2-S2 66 3RU11 36-4GB0 36 ... 45 125 63 50 175 125 63
45 S2-S2-S2 80 3RU11 36-4HB0 40 ... 50 160 80 50 200 160 80
55 S3-S3-S2 97 3RU11 46-4KB0 57 ... 75 250 125 63 300 250 125
75 S3-S3-S2 132 3RU11 46-4LB0 70 ... 90 250 160 80 350 250 160
90 S6-S6-S3 160 3RB20 56-1FC2 50 ... 200 355 315 160 450 355 250
110 S6-S6-S3 195 3RB20 56-1FC2 50 ... 200 355 315 160 450 355 250
132 S6-S6-S3 230 3RB20 56-1FC2 50 ... 200 355 315 160 500 355 315
160 S6-S6-S3 280 3RB20 56-1FC2 50 ... 200 355 315 200 500 355 315
200 S10-S10-S6 350 3RB20 66-1GC2 55 ... 250 500 400 2502) 700 500 400
250 S10-S10-S6 430 3RB20 66-1MC2 160 ... 630 500 4002) 3152)
800 500 400
315 S12-S12-S10 540 3RB20 66-1MC2 160 ... 630 630 5002) 4002) 1000 630 4502)
355 S12-S12-S10 610 3RB20 66-1MC2 160 ... 630 630 5002) 4002) 1000 630 4502)
400 S12-S12-S10 690 3RB20 66-1MC2 160 ... 630 6302) 5002) 4002) 1000 6302) 4502)
500 S12-S12-S10 850 3RB20 66-1MC2 160 ... 630 6302) 5002) 5002) 1200 6302) 5002)
1) The maximum rated motor current must not be exceeded.
2) Only double infeed with separately fused feeder lines for line and delta
contactor is possible because the maximum possible fuse value lies far
below the rated motor current.
88 Siemens · 2011
Starter Sizes S..-S..-S.. 00-00-00 00-00-00 0-0-0 0-0-0 2-2-0 2-2-2 2-2-2 3-3-2 3-3-2
Type 3RA. . . . 14 15 14 16 14 23 14 25 14 34 14 35 14 36 14 44 14 45
All technical specifications not mentioned in the table below are identical to those of the individual 3RT contactors and
3RU overload relays
ting cyc-
les
Short-circuit protection without overload relay 1)
Maximum rated current of the fuse

Main circuit
Fuse links, gL/gG
Single or double infeed
acc. to IEC 60947-4-1/ • Type of coordination "1" A 35 35 63 100 125 125 160 250 250
EN 60947-4-1 • Type of coordination "2" A 20 20 25 35 63 63 80 125 160
Control circuit
Fuse links, gL/gG A 10
DIAZED 5SB, NEOZED 5SE A 62), if the auxiliary contact of the overload relay is connected
(short-circuit current Ik ≤ 1 kA) in the contactor coil circuit
Miniature circuit breaker with C characteristic A 10
A 62), if the auxiliary contact of the overload relay is connected
in the contactor coil circuit
Size of individual contactors • K1 line contactor Type 3RT 10 15 10 17 10 24 10 26 10 34 10 35 10 36 10 44 10 45
• K3 delta contactor Type 3RT 10 15 10 17 10 24 10 26 10 34 10 35 10 36 10 44 10 45
• K2 star contactor Type 3RT 10 15 10 15 10 24 10 24 10 26 10 34 10 34 10 35 10 36
3)
Unassigned auxiliary contacts of the individual contactors
Current-carrying capacity with reversing time up to 10 s
• Rated operational current Ie At 400 V A 12 17 25 40 65 80 86 115 150
500 V A 8.7 11.3 20.8 31.2 55.4 69.3 86 112.6 138.6
690 V A 6.9 9 20.8 22.5 53.7 69.3 69.3 98.7 138.6
• Rated power for induction motors at At 230 V kW 3.3 4.7 7.2 12 20.4 25.5 27.8 37 49
50 Hz and 60 Hz and 400 V kW 5.8 8.2 12.5 21 35 44 48 65 85
500 V kW 5.3 6.9 13 20.5 38 48 60 80 98
690 V kW 5.8 7.5 18 20.4 51 66 67 97 136
1000 V kW -- -- -- -- -- -- -- -- --
• Switching frequency with overload relay h-1 15 15 15 15 15 15 15 15 15
500 V A 8.7 11.3 20.8 31 44 57 67 97 106
690 V A 6.9 9 20.8 22.5 44 57 67 97 106
• Rated power for induction motors at At 230 V kW 3.3 4.7 7.2 9.4 13.8 18.2 21.6 32 35
50 Hz and 60 Hz and 400 V kW 5.8 8.2 12.5 16.3 24 31.6 38 55 60
500 V kW 5.3 6.9 13 20.4 30 40 47 69 75
690 V kW 5.8 7.5 18 20.4 42 55 65 95 104
1000 V kW -- -- -- -- -- -- -- -- --
500 V A 8.7 11.3 20.8 28 39 51 57 85 92
690 V A 6.9 9 20.8 22.5 39 51 57 85 92
• Rated power for induction motors at At 230 V kW 3.3 4.7 7.2 8.5 12.2 16.3 18.4 28 30
50 Hz and 60 Hz and 400 V kW 5.8 8.2 12.5 14.7 21.3 28 32 48 52
500 V kW 5.3 6.9 13 18.4 26.7 35 40 60 65
690 V kW 5.8 7.5 18 20.4 37 49 55 83 90
1000 V kW -- -- -- -- -- -- -- -- --
1) For short-circuit protection with overload relays see "Protection Equipment
--> Overload Relays --> 3RB2 Solid-State Overload Relays".
2) Up to Ik < 0.5 kA; ≤ 260 V.
3) For circuit diagrams of the control circuit see page 238.
Siemens · 2011 89
3TD, 3TE Contactor Assemblies
3TD6 reversing contactor assemblies, 335 kW
■ Overview Auxiliary contacts

The contactor assemblies each have 2 NO + 2 NC contacts per
The contactor assemblies are suitable for use in any climate and contactor. 1 NO + 1 NC contacts with momentary-contact ope-
the contactors are mechanically interlocked. They are finger- ration and 2 NO + 1 NC contacts with continuous operation are
safe according to EN 50274. unassigned.
Complete units and components for customer assembly are
available. For motor protection, either overload relays for stand- ■ Function
alone installation or thermistor motor protection tripping units
must be ordered separately. The operating times of the individual contactors are rated in
such a way that no overlapping of the contact making and the
Complete units arcing time between two contactors can occur on reversing, pro-
3TD68 contactor assemblies each consist of two mechanically viding they are interlocked via their auxiliary switches and the
interlocked 3TF68 contactors. Electrical interlocking is wired. operating mechanisms.
The main and control circuits are wired according to the The operating times of the individual contactors are not affected
schematics. by the mechanical interlock.
An internal circuit diagram, a type designation and an unit labe-
ling plate are provided on a common cover.
Contactors Type 3TD68
General data
Permissible mounting position, 30° 30°
installation instructions1)
NSB0_00649
360°
s and u ratings
Rated insulation voltage V AC 600
Uninterrupted current enclosed A 550
• Rated power for induction motors at At 200 V hp 200
60 Hz 230 V hp 229
460 V hp 464
575 V hp 582
NEMA/EEMAC ratings NEMA/EEMAC SIZE hp 6
• Uninterrupted current - Open A 600
- Enclosed A 540
• Rated power for At 200 V hp 150
induction motors with 60 Hz 230 V hp 200
460 V hp 400
575 V hp 400
Overload relays • Type 3RB20 66
• Setting range A 160 ... 630
For short-circuit protection with overload relays see

"Protection Equipment --> Overload Relays --> 3RB2 Solid-State
Overload Relays".
The technical specifications are identical to those of the 3TF68
individual contactors.
The mechanical endurance is 5 million operating cycles for
3TD68.
For the unassigned auxiliary contacts of the individual contac-
tors, see "Circuit Diagrams of the Control Circuits".
1) If the contactors are mounted at a 90° angle (conducting paths horizon-
tally one above the other), the following reductions apply: switching fre-
quency: to 80 % of the standard values.
90 Siemens · 2011
3TE6 contactor assemblies for wye-delta starting,
630 kW
■ Overview ■ Function
The contactor assemblies are suitable for use in any climate. Wye-delta starting can only be used either if the motor normally
They are finger-safe according to EN 50274. operates in a Δ connection or starts softly or if the load torque du-
ring Y starting is low and does not increase sharply. On the Y
3TE contactor assemblies are available as complete units and step the motors can carry approximately 50 % (class KL 16) or
components for customer assembly. 30 % (class KL 10) of their rated torque; The tightening torque is
The complete unit combinations are optionally supplied without approximately 1/3 of that during direct on-line starting. The star-
a main conducting path connection between the line contactor ting current is approximately 2 to 2.7 times the rated motor
and the delta contactor. current.
Motor protection The changeover from Y to Δ must not be effected until the motor
has run up to rated speed. Operating mechanisms which require
3TE68 contactor assemblies are supplied without overload pro- this changeover to be performed earlier are unsuitable for wye-
tection. Overload relays or thermistor motor protection tripping delta starting.
units must be ordered separately.
The ratings given in the selection table are only applicable to
The overload relay can be either mounted onto the line contactor motors with a starting current ratio of IA ≤ 8.4 x IN and using a
or separately fitted. It must be set to 0.58 times the rated motor 3RP15 74 wye-delta timing relay with a dead interval of approxi-
current. mately 50 ms on reversing.
Starter Type 3TE68
General data
Permissible mounting position, installation instructions1)
30° 30°
NSB0_00649
360°

ting
cycles
Type of individual contactors • K1 line contactor Type 3TF68
• K3 delta contactor Type 3TF68
• K2 star contactor Type 3RT10 75
2)
Unassigned auxiliary contacts of the individual contactors
• Rated operational current Ie Up to 690 V A 1090
• Rated power for induction motors at At 230 V kW 355
50 Hz 400 V kW 612
500 V kW 800
690 V kW 1046
• Switching frequency with overload relay h-1 3
690 V A 883
50 Hz 400 V kW 515
500 V kW 677
690 V kW 885
690 V A 765
50 Hz 400 V kW 444
500 V kW 590
690 V kW 770
Main circuit
Fuse links, gL/gG
Acc. to IEC 60947-4-1/ • Type of coordination "1" A 1000
EN 60947-4-1 • Type of coordination "2" A 5003)
Auxiliary circuit
(Ik < 400 A)
1) If the contactors are mounted at a 90° angle (conducting paths horizontally 2) See "Circuit diagrams of the control circuits".
one above the other), the following reductions apply: switching frequency: 3) The maximum rated motor current must not be exceeded.
to 80 % of the standard values.
Siemens · 2011 91
3TE6 contactor assemblies for wye-delta starting,
630 kW
Contactor assembly Type 3TE68

Short-circuit protection with fuses for motor feeders with
short-circuit currents up to 50 kA and 690 V
Rated motor current A 277 ... 1090
Overload relays Type 3RB20 66
Setting range A 160 ... 630
(the overload relays must be set to 0.58 times
the rated motor current)
Permissible back-up fuses for starters,
comprising contactor assemblies and overload relays.
Single or double infeed1)
• Fuse links LV HRC Type 3NA,
DIAZED Type 5SB,
NEOZED Type 5SE
- Type of coordination "1" A 1000
• Fuse links LV HRC type 3ND, aM operational class
• Fuse links, Siemens Canada, HRC fuses, Type II A 1000
• Fuse links UL-listed fuses CLASS L A 1200
• Fuse links British Standard Fuses BS88
For short-circuit protection with overload relays see

"Protection Equipment --> Overload Relays --> 3RB2 Solid-State
Overload Relays".
Use double infeed for higher rated motor currents (see "Circuit
diagram").
1) The maximum rated motor current must not be exceeded.
92 Siemens · 2011
3RT, 3RH, 3TB, 3TC, 3TH, 3TK Contactors for Special Applications
3RT14 Contactors for Switching Resistive Loads (AC-1)
3-pole, 140 ... 690 A
■ Overview
AC and DC operation (size S3) 3RT14 contactors are used for switching resistive loads (AC-1)
or as contactors, for example, for variable-speed operating me-
UC operation (AC/DC) (sizes S6 to S12) chanisms that normally only have to carry the current.
IEC 60947, EN 60947 (VDE 0660) The accessories for the 3RT10 contactors can also be used
The contactors are suitable for use in any climate. They are here.
finger-safe according to EN 50274. For more detailed descriptions about the sizes S6 to S12, see
"3RT10 Contactors, 3-pole, 3 ... 250 kW".
Contactors Type 3RT14 46
Size S3
General data
360° 30° 30°
NSB0_00478b
surface.
For DC operation and 22.5 °C inclination towards the front,

N S B 0 _ 0 0 4 7 7 a
• DC operation --
ting
cycles
Electrical endurance in operating cycles Opera- 0.5 million
Utilization category AC-1 at Ie ting
cycles
Mirror contacts - Removable auxiliary switch block Yes, acc. to EN 60947-4-1, Appendix F
• A mirror contact is an auxiliary NC - Permanently fitted auxiliary Acc. to Swiss regulations (SUVA) on request
contact that cannot be closed simul- switch block
taneously with a NO main contact.
Shock resistance
• Rectangular pulse AC and DC operation g/ms 6.8/5 and 4/10
• Sine pulse AC and DC operation g/ms 10.6/5 and 6.2/10
1)
Main circuit
Fuse links, gL/gG operational class, • Type of coordination "1": A 250
LV HRC, 3NA
Fuse links, gR operational class, • Type of coordination "2" A 250
SITOR 3NE
Auxiliary circuit
• Fuse links gL/gG (weld-free protection at Ik ≥1 kA) A 10
• Or miniature circuit breakers with C characteristic (Ik < 400 A) A 10
Siemens · 2011 93
3-pole, 140 ... 690 A

Size S3
Control
Standard version: Closing VA 270
• AC operation, 50 Hz P.f. 0.68
Closed VA 22
P.f. 0.27
Closing VA 298/274
• AC operation, 50/60 Hz P.f. 0.7/0.62
Closed VA 27/20
P.f. 0.29/0.31
For USA and Canada: Closing VA 270
Closed VA 22
P.f. 0.27
Closing VA 300
Closed VA 21
P.f. 0.29
94 Siemens · 2011
3-pole, 140 ... 690 A

Size S3
Main circuit
AC capacity
At 60 °C up to 690 V A 130
At 1000 V A 60
• Ratings of AC loads At 230 V kW 50
P.f. = 0.95 (at 60 °C) 400 V kW 86
500 V kW 107
690 V kW 148
1000 V kW 98
• Minimum conductor cross-section At 40 °C mm2 50
for loads with Ie
2
At 60 °C mm 50
With an electrical endurance of 1.3 million operating cycles
• Rated power of slipring At 230 V kW 12.7
or squirrel-cage motors at 400 V kW 22
50 Hz and 60 Hz(at 60 °C) 500 V kW 29.9
690 V kW 38.2
Load rating with DC
Utilization category DC-1, switching resistive loads (L/R ≤ 1 ms)
• Rated operational currents Ie (at 60 °C)
60 V A 80
110 V A 12
220 V A 2.5
440 V A 0.8
600 V A 0.48
60 V A 130
110 V A 130
220 V A 13
440 V A 2.4
600 V A 1.3
60 V A 130
110 V A 130
220 V A 130
440 V A 6
600 V A 3.4
60 V A 3
110 V A 1.25
220 V A 0.35
440 V A 0.15
600 V A 0.1
60 V A 130
110 V A 130
220 V A 1.75
440 V A 0.42
600 V A 0.27
60 V A 130
110 V A 130
220 V A 4
440 V A 0.8
600 V A 0.45
Switching frequency
• Contactors without overload relays No-load switching frequency AC 1/h 5000
No-load switching frequency DC 1/h 1000
• Rated operation Acc. to AC-1 (AC/DC) 1/h 650
Acc. to AC-3 (AC/DC) 1/h 1000
Dependence of the switching frequency z' on the operational current I'
and operational voltage U' : z' = z ⋅(Ie/I' ) ⋅(400 V/U' )1.5 ⋅1/h.
Siemens · 2011 95
3-pole, 140 ... 690 A

Size S3
(1 or 2 conductors can be Main conductors: Screw terminals
connected) With box terminal
• Solid mm² 2.5 ... 16
NSB00479

solid or stranded
• Solid mm² 2.5 ... 16
NSB00480

solid or stranded
Both clamping points • Finely stranded with end sleeve mm² max. 2 x 35
connected • Finely stranded without end sleeve mm² max. 2 x 35
• Solid mm² max. 2 x 16
• Stranded mm² max. 2 x 50
NSB00481

• AWG cables, AWG 2 x (10 ... 1/0)
solid or stranded
• Terminal screws M6 (hex. socket, A/F 4)
Connection for drilled Max. width1) mm 10
copper bars
Main conductors:
Without box terminal with
cable lugs2)
• Finely stranded with cable lug mm² 10 ... 503)
• Stranded with cable lug mm² 10 ... 703)
solid or stranded
• Solid mm² 2 x (0.5 ... 1.5) 2 x (0.75 ... 2.5) acc. to IEC 60947; max. 2 x (0.75 ... 4)
• Finely stranded with end sleeve mm² 2 x (0.5 ... 1.5) 2 x (0.75 ... 2.5)
• AWG cables, AWG 2 x (20 ... 16) 2 x (18 ... 14) 1 x 12
solid or stranded
1) If bars larger than 12 x 10 mm are connected, a 3RT19 46-4EA1 terminal
cover is needed to comply with the phase clearance.
2) When connecting rails which are larger than 25 mm², the 3RT19 46-4EA1
terminal cover must be used to keep the phase clearance.
3) Only with crimped cable lugs according to DIN 46234.
Cable lug max. 20 mm wide.
96 Siemens · 2011
3-pole, 140 ... 690 A

Size S6 S10 S12
General data
NSB0_00649
The contactors are designed for 360°
operation on a vertical mounting surface.

ting
cycles
Electrical endurance Opera- 0.5 million
Utilization category AC-1 at Ie ting
cycles
Protective separation between the coil and the auxiliary contacts and V 690
main contacts acc. to EN 60947-1, Appendix N
A mirror contact is an auxiliary NC contact that cannot be closed
simultaneously with a NO main contact.
1)
2)
Main circuit
Fuse links gL/gG • Type of coordination "1": A 355 500 800
LV HRC 3NA
Fuse links gR, • Type of coordination "2": A 350 500 710
SITOR 3NE
Auxiliary circuit
1) For conductor cross-sections see pages 100, 101.
Siemens · 2011 97
3-pole, 140 ... 690 A

Size S6 S10 S12
Control
- AC operation Closing at Us min VA/p.f. 250/0.9 490/0.9 700/0.9
Closing at Us max VA/p.f. 300/0.9 590/0.9 830/0.9
Closed at Us min VA/p.f. 4.8/0.8 5.6/0.9 7.6/0.9
Closed at Us max VA/p.f. 5.8/0.8 6.7/0.9 9.2/0.9
- DC operation Closing at Us min W 300 540 770
Closing at Us max W 360 650 920
Closed at Us min W 4.3 6.1 8.5
Closed at Us max W 5.2 7.4 10
- AC operation Closing at Us min VA/p.f. 190/0.8 400/0.8 560/0.8
Closing at Us max VA/p.f. 28/0.8 530/0.8 750/0.8
Closed at Us min VA/p.f. 3.5/0.5 4/0.5 5.4/0.8
Closed at Us max VA/p.f. 4,/0.4 5/0.4 7/0.8
- DC operation Closing at Us min W 250 440 600
Closing at Us max W 320 580 800
Closed at Us min W 2.3 3.2 4
Closed at Us max W 2.8 3.8 5
PLC control input (EN 61131-2/type 2) 24 V DC/≤ 30 mA power consumption,
(operating range 17 ... 30 V DC)
Operating times
- With 0.8 x Us min ... 1.1 x Us max Closing delay ms 20 ... 95 30 ... 95 45 ... 100
Opening delay ms 40 ... 60 40 ... 80 60 ... 100
- For Us min ... Us max Closing delay ms 25 ... 50 35 ... 50 50 ... 70
Opening delay ms 40 ... 60 50 ... 80 70 ... 100
Opening delay ms 80 ... 90 80 ... 200 80 ... 100
Opening delay ms 80 ... 90 80 ... 100 80 ... 100
Opening delay ms 80 ... 90 80 ... 100 80 ... 100
Opening delay ms 80 ... 90 80 ... 100 80 ... 100
• Arcing time ms 10 ... 15 10 ... 15 10 ... 15
Main circuits
AC capacity
At 60 °C up to 690 V A 250 380 6501)
At 1000 V A 100 150 250
• Rated power for AC loads2) At 230 V kW 95 145 245
P.f. = 0.95 (at 60 °C) 400 V kW 165 250 430
500 V kW 205 315 535
690 V kW 285 430 740
1000 V kW 165 247 410
• Minimum conductor cross-section At 40 °C mm² 2 x 70 240 2 x 240
for loads with Ie At 60 °C mm² 120 240 2 x 240
Power loss per conducting path At Ie/AC-1 W 20 27 55
for an electrical endurance of 1.3 million operating cycles
• Rated power of slipring or squirrel- At 230 V kW 30 37 55
cage motors at 50 Hz and 60 Hz (at 400 V kW 55 75 90
60 °C) 500 V kW 55 90 110
690 V kW 90 132 160
1) 600 A for 3RT14 76-N contactor.
98 Siemens · 2011
3-pole, 140 ... 690 A

Size S6 S10 S12
Main circuit
Load rating with DC
• Rated operational currents Ie(at 60 °C)
60 V A 250 380 500
110 V A 18 33 33
220 V A 3.4 3.8 3.8
440 V A 0.8 0.9 0.9
600 V A 0.5 0.6 0.6
60 V A 250 380 500
110 V A 250 380 500
220 V A 20 380 500
440 V A 3.2 4 4
600 V A 1.6 2 2
60 V A 250 380 500
110 V A 250 380 500
220 V A 250 380 500
440 V A 11.5 11 11
600 V A 4 5.2 5.2
60 V A 7.5 11 11
110 V A 2.5 3 3
220 V A 0.6 0.6 0.6
440 V A 0.17 0.18 0.18
600 V A 0.12 0.125 0.125
60 V A 250 380 500
110 V A 250 380 500
220 V A 2.5 2.5 2.5
440 V A 0.65 0.65 0.65
600 V A 0.37 0.37 0.37
60 V A 250 380 500
110 V A 250 380 500
220 V A 250 380 500
440 V A 1.4 1.4 1.4
600 V A 0.75 0.75 0.75
Switching frequency
AC-1 h-1 600
AC-3 h-1 1000
Dependence of the switching fre-
quency z' on the operational current
I' and operational voltage U' :
z' = z ⋅(Ie/I' ) ⋅(400 V/U' )1.5 ⋅1/h
Siemens · 2011 99
3-pole, 140 ... 690 A

Size S6
Front or rear • Finely stranded with end sleeve mm2 16 ... 70
clamping point connected • Finely stranded without end sleeve mm2 16 ... 70
• Stranded mm2 16 ... 70
NSB00480
NSB00479
• Ribbon cable conductors mm 3 x 9 x 0.8 ... 6 x 15.5 x 0.8

• AWG cables, solid or stranded AWG 6 ... 2/0
Both clamping points
connected
• Finely stranded with end sleeves, max. mm2 1 x 50, 1 x 70
• Finely stranded without end sleeve mm2 1 x 50, 1 x 70
mm2
NSB00481
• Stranded (max.) 2 x 70
• Ribbon cable conductors mm 2 x (6 x 15.5 x 0.8)
(number x width x thickness), max.
• AWG cables, solid or stranded, max. AWG 2 x 1/0
Front or rear Main conductor
clamping point connected With 3RT19 56-4G box terminal
• Finely stranded with end sleeve mm2 16 ... 120
• Finely stranded without end sleeve mm2 16 ... 120
NSB00480
NSB00479
• Stranded mm2 16 ... 120

• Ribbon cable conductors mm 3 x 9 x 0.8 ... 10 x 15.5 x 0.8
• AWG cables, solid or stranded AWG 6 ... 250 kcmil
Both clamping points
connected
• Finely stranded with end sleeves, max. mm2 1 x 95, 1 x 120
• Finely stranded without end sleeve mm2 1 x 95, 1 x 120
mm2
NSB00481
• Stranded (max.) 2 x 120

• Ribbon cable conductors mm 2 x (10 x 15.5 x 0.8)
(number x width x thickness), max.
• AWG cables, solid or stranded, max. AWG 2 x 3/0
• Terminal screws M10 (hexagon socket, A/F4)
Main conductors:
Without box terminal/busbar connection1)
• Finely stranded with cable lug 16 ... 95
• Stranded with cable lug 25 ... 120
• AWG cables, solid or stranded 4 ... 250 kcmil
• Connecting bar (max. width) 17
• Terminal screw M8 x 25 (A/F 13)
- Tightening torque Nm 10 ... 14 (90 ... 110) lb.in
• Conductor cross-section
- Solid 2 x (0.5 ... 1.5)2); 2 x (0.75 ... 2.5)2) acc. to IEC 60947;
max. 2 x (0.75 ... 4)
- Finely stranded with end sleeve 2 x (0.5 ... 1.5)2); 2 x (0.75 ... 2.5)2)
- Solid or stranded AWG (2 x) 2 x (18 ... 14)
• Terminal screw M3 (PZ 2)
- Tightening torque Nm 0.8 ... 1.2 (7 ... 10.3) lb.in
1) When connecting cable lugs according to DIN 46235, use the
3RT19 56-4EA1 terminal cover for conductor cross-sections from 95 mm2
to ensure phase spacing.
100 Siemens · 2011

3-pole, 140 ... 690 A

Size S10 S12
(1 or 2 conductors can be With 3RT19 66-4G box terminal
connected)
NSB00479

solid or stranded
• Stranded mm² 120 ... 240
NSB00480

solid or stranded
NSB00481
solid or stranded
Main conductors:
Without box terminal/busbar connection1)
• Finely stranded with cable lug mm² 50 ... 240
• Stranded with cable lug mm² 70 ... 240
solid or stranded
• Solid mm² 2 x (0.5 ... 1.5)2), 2 x (0.75 ... 2.5)2) acc. to IEC 60947,
max. 2 x (0.75 ... 4)
• AWG cables, AWG 2 x (18 ... 14)
solid or stranded
1) When connecting cable lugs to DIN 46234, the 3RT19 66-4EA1 terminal
cover must be used for conductor cross-sections of 240 mm² and more as
well as DIN 46235 for conductor cross-sections of 185 mm² and more to
Siemens · 2011 101

4-pole, 4 NO, 18 ... 140 A
■ Overview Contactor assembly with mechanical interlock

AC and DC operation The 4-pole 3RT13 contactors with 4 NO contacts as the main
EN 60947-4-1 (VDE 0660 Part 102). contacts are suitable for making contactor assemblies with a
mechanical interlock, e. g. for system transfers.
The contactors are suitable for use in any climate. They are
finger-safe according to EN 50274. Size S00
The accessories for the 3-pole SIRIUS contactors can also be Contactor assemblies can be constructed from two 3RT13 1.
used for the 4-pole versions. contactors in conjunction with mechanical interlocks and
two connecting clips (Order No.: 3RA19 12-2H, pack with
10 interlock elements and 20 clips for 10 assemblies).
■ Function Size S0
• Switching resistive loads
When constructing 4-pole contactor assemblies from
• Isolating systems with ungrounded or poorly grounded neutral
two 3RT13 2. contactors, the fourth pole of the left contactor
conductors
must always be moved to the left side. The contactor assembly
• System transfers when alternative AC power supplies are can then be made easily with the aid of the 3RA19 24-1A mecha-
used nical interlock fitted onto the front and the 3RA19 22-2C mecha-
• As contactors, e. g. for variable-speed operating mechanisms nical connectors. The laterally mountable 3RA19 24-2B mecha-
which only have to carry current and not switch nical interlock can be used if the contactor assembly is mounted
on a base plate.
• The contactors are also suitable for switching mixed loads in
distribution systems (e. g. for supplying heaters, lamps, mo- Sizes S2 and S3
tors, PC power supply units) with p.f. > 0.8 according to
IEC 60947-4-1 test conditions for utilization category AC-1. Contactor assemblies can be constructed from two 3RT13 3. or
two 3RT13 4. contactors in conjunction with the laterally moun-
■ Integration table 3RA19 24-2B mechanical interlock and the 3RA19 .2-2G
mechanical connectors. The mechanical interlock for fitting onto
the front cannot be used for size S2 and S3 contactors.
Mountable auxiliary contacts
Size S00
4 auxiliary contacts (according to EN 50005)
Size S0
Maximum 2 auxiliary contacts (either laterally mounted or snap-
ped onto the top).
Size S2 to S3
Max. 4 auxiliary contacts (either laterally mounted or snapped
onto the top)
102 Siemens · 2011

4-pole, 4 NO, 18 ... 140 A
Contactors Type 3RT13 16 3RT13 17 3RT13 25 3RT13 26 3RT13 36 3RT13 44 3RT13 46
Size S00 S0 S2 S3 S3
General data
Permissible mounting position1)
Mechanical endurance Opera- 30 million 10 million
ting
cycles
Electrical endurance at Ie/AC-1 Opera- Approx. 0.5 million
ting
cycles
Degree of protection Device IP20 IP20
Acc. to EN 60947-1, Appendix C Connection range IP00
Short-circuit protection of contactors without overload relays
Main circuit
Fuse links, • Type of coordination "1"1) A 35 63 160 250 250
gL/gG operational class • Type of coordination "2"1) A 20 25/35 63 125 160
LV HRC, 3NA, DIAZED, 5SB, NEO-
ZED, 5SE
acc. to IEC 60947-4-1/ • Weld-free A 10 16 50 63 100
EN 60947-4-1
Control
AC at 50 Hz 0.8 ... 1.1 x Us
AC at 60 Hz 0.85 ...1.1 x Us
DC at 50 °C 0.8 ... 1.1 x Us
DC at 60 °C 0.85 ... 1.1 x Us
AC/DC 0.8 ... 1.1 x Us
Power consumption of the magnetic coils
(when coil is cold and 1.0 x Us)
• AC operation, 50 Hz - Closing VA 61 145 270
- P.f. VA 0.82 0.79 0.68
- Closed VA 7.8 12.5 22
- P.f. VA 0.24 0.36 0.27
• AC operation, 50/60 Hz - Closing VA 26.5/24.3 64/63 170/155 298/274
- P.f. 0.79/0.75 0.82/0.74 0.76/0.72 0.72/0.62
- Closed VA 4.4/3.4 8.4/6.8 15/11.8 27/20
- P.f. 0.27/0.27 0.24/0.28 0.35/0.38 0.29/0.31
• DC operation - Closing W 3.3 5.6 13.3 15
= Closed
• DC operation - Closing delay ms 25 ... 100 30 ... 90 50 ... 110 110 ... 200
- Opening delay ms 7 ... 10 13 ... 40 15 ... 30 14 ... 20
• AC operation - Closing delay ms 8 ... 35 6 ... 30 4 ... 35 20 ... 50
- Opening delay ms 4 ... 30 13 ... 25 10 ... 30 10 ... 25
• Arcing time ms 10 ... 15 10 ... 15 10 ... 15 10 ... 15
Main circuit
AC capacity
• Rated operational currents Ie At 40 °C, up to 690 V A 18 22 35 40 60 110 140
At 60 °C, up to 690 V A 16 20 30 35 55 100 120
• Rated power for AC loads At 230 V kW 7 8.5 12.5 15 23 42 53
P.f. = 0.95 (at 40 °C) 400 V kW 12 14.5 22 26 39 72 92
• Minimum conductor cross-section At 40 °C mm² 2.5 2.5 10 10 16 50 50
for loads with Ie At 60 °C mm² 2.5 2.5 10 10 16 50 50
• Rated operational currents Ie At 60°C, up to 400 V A 9 12 17 25 26 -- --
• Rated power of slipring At 230 V kW 3 3 4 5.5 5.5 -- --
or squirrel-cage motors at 50 Hz 400 V kW 4 5.5 7.5 11 11 -- --
and 60 Hz
1) In accordance with the corresponding 3-pole 3RT1 contactors.
2) With size S00, DC operation: Operating times at 0.85 ... 1.1 x Us.
Siemens · 2011 103

4-pole, 4 NO, 18 ... 140 A

Size S00 S0
Main circuit
Load rating with DC
60 V A 18 22 20
110 V A 2.1 2.1 4.5
220 V A 0.8 0.8 1
440 V A 0.6 0.6 0.4
60 V A 18 22 35
110 V A 12 12 35
220 V A 1.6 1.6 5
440 V A 0.8 0.8 1
60 V A 18 22 35
110 V A 18 22 35
220 V A 18 22 35
440 V A 1.3 1.3 2.9
60 V A 18 22 35
110 V A 18 22 35
220 V A 18 22 35
440 V A 1.3 1.3 2.9
60 V A 0.5 0.5 5
110 V A 0.15 0.15 2.5
220 V A -- -- 1
440 V A -- -- 0.09
60 V A 5 5 35
110 V A 0.35 0.35 15
220 V A -- -- 3
440 V A -- -- 0.27
60 V A 18 20 35
110 V A 18 20 35
220 V A 1.5 1.5 10
440 V A 0.2 0.2 0.6
60 V A 18 20 35
110 V A 18 20 35
220 V A 1.5 1.5 35
440 V A 0.2 0.2 0.6
Maximum breaking current AC
e. g for isolation of load distributions
• 50/60 Hz 400 V A 72 96 200
104 Siemens · 2011

4-pole, 4 NO, 18 ... 140 A

Size S2 S3 S3
Main circuit
Load rating with DC
60 V A 23 23 60
110 V A 4.5 4.5 9
220 V A 1 1 2
440 V A 0.4 0.4 0.6
60 V A 45 70 80
110 V A 45 70 80
220 V A 5 5 10
440 V A 1 1 1.8
60 V A 45 70 80
110 V A 45 70 80
220 V A 45 70 80
440 V A 2.9 2.9 4.5
60 V A 45 70 80
110 V A 45 70 80
220 V A 45 70 80
440 V A 2.9 2.9 4.5
60 V A 6 6 6.5
110 V A 2.5 2.5 2.5
220 V A 1 1 1
440 V A 0.1 0.15 0.15
60 V A 45 70 80
110 V A 25 70 80
220 V A 5 7 7
440 V A 0.27 0.42 0.42
60 V A 45 70 80
110 V A 45 70 80
220 V A 25 35 35
440 V A 0.6 0.8 0.8
60 V A 45 70 80
110 V A 45 70 80
220 V A 45 70 80
440 V A 0.6 0.8 0.8
Maximum breaking current AC
e. g for isolation of load distributions
• 50/60 Hz 400 V A 400 520 760
Siemens · 2011 105

3TK1 Contactors for Switching Resistive Loads (AC-1)
4-pole, 4 NO, 200 ... 1000 A
EN 60947-4-1 (VDE 0660 Part 102) • Isolating systems with ungrounded or poorly grounded neutral
conductors
The contactors also comply with the requirements of
NFC 63-110 and NFC 20–040. • Switching resistive loads
• System transfers when alternative AC power supplies are
The contactors are suitable for use in any climate. They are used
finger-safe according to EN 50274. Terminal covers may have to
be fitted onto the connecting bars, depending on the configura- • The contactors are also suitable for switching mixed loads in
tion with other devices. distribution systems (e. g for supplying heaters, lamps, mo-
tors, PC networks) with p.f. > 0.8 according to IEC 60947-4-1
Magnetic coils for 3TK10 to 3TK13 contactors: as withdrawable test conditions for utilization category AC-1
coils.
Surge suppression
Control circuit
Magnetic coils for 3TK1 contactors: can be retrofitted with
RC elements.
Contactors Type 3TK1
AC load
24 V A 6
110 V A 6
125 V A 6
220 V A 6
230 V A 6
380 V A 4
400 V A 4
500 V A 1
660 V A 1
690 V A 1
DC load
24 V A --
60 V A --
110 V A --
125 V A --
220 V A --
440 V A --
600 V A --
24 V A 6
60 V A 6
110 V A 1.8
125 V A --
220 V A 0.6
440 V A --
600 V A --
max.
106 Siemens · 2011

4-pole, 4 NO, 200 ... 1000 A
Contactors Type 3TK10 3TK11 3TK12 3TK13 3TK14 3TK15 3TK17

General data
NSB0_00649
Vertical mounting position also permitted. 360°
Mechanical endurance Operating cycles Mill. 10 5

Electrical endurance Operating cycles Mill. 0.8 0.8 0.8 0.4 0.65 0.5 0.4
for Ie/AC-1 at 55 °C
Ambient temperature • During operation °C -25 ... +55
Degree of protection acc. to EN 60947-1, Appendix C IP00
Shock resistance Sine pulse g/ms 10/15
Main circuit
Fuse links, gL/gG, LV HRC 3NA, DIAZED 5SB, NEOZED 5SE
acc. to IEC 60947-4-1/ • Type of coordination "1": A 250 355 800 1000
EN 60947-4-1 • Type of coordination "2": A 250 315 630 850
Auxiliary circuit A 10
(short-circuit current Ik ≥ 1 kA) fuse links, gL/gG,
Control
• 50 Hz - Closing VA 820 1100 3500
- P.f. 0.4 0.35 0.26
- Closed VA 44 52 125
- P.f. 0.34 0.35 0.4
• 60 Hz - Closing VA 990 1200 4000
- P.f. 0.35 0.31 0.22
- Closed VA 52 65 140
- P.f. 0.35 0.34 0.43
Operating times at 1.0 x Us
- Closing delay ms 20 ... 40 30 ... 60
- Opening delay ms 7 ... 15 10 ... 20
• Arcing time ms 10 10
Main circuit
AC capacity
• Rated operational currents Ie At 40° C up to 690 V A 200 250 300 350 550 800 1000
At 50° C up to 690 V A 180 230 270 310 470 650 850
• Rated power for AC loads, p.f. = 0.95 At 230 V kW 76 95 114 132 208 303 378
(at 40°C) 400 V kW 132 165 197 230 362 527 658
500 V kW 165 206 247 288 452 658 828
690 V kW 227 284 341 397 624 908 1135
• Minimum conductor cross-sections At 40° C mm² 95 150 185 240 185 240 300
for loads with Ie
• Rated operational currents Ie Up to 400 V A 120 145 210 210 400 550 700
• Rated power of squirrel-cage At 230 V kW 30 45 75 75 110 160 220
or slipring motors at 400 V kW 55 75 110 110 200 280 370
50 Hz and 60 Hz
• Short-time current at 40° C in cold state up to 10 s A 900 1200 1600 1600 5300 5300 6400
Switching frequency1)
• Contactors without overload relays - No-load switching frequency 1/h 3600
- AC-1 1/h 300
- AC-3 1/h 300
1) Dependence of the switching frequency z' on the operational current I'
Siemens · 2011 107

4-pole, 4 NO, 200 ... 1000 A
Contactors Type 3TK10 3TK11 3TK12 3TK13 3TK14 3TK15 3TK17

• Stranded with cable lug mm2 2 x 70 2 x 120 2 x 120 2 x 300

• Solid or stranded AWG MCM 2 x 00 2 x 250 2 x 250 2 x 600
• Connecting bar (max. width) mm 30 30 33 55
- Tightening torque Nm 5 16 16 16
lb.in 42 135 135 135
• Solid mm2 2 x (0.5 ... 2.5)
• Solid or stranded AWG MCM 20 ... 14
- Tightening torque Nm 1.2 (10 lb.in)
108 Siemens · 2011

3TK20 Contactors
4-pole, 4 kW
■ Overview
Short-circuit protection of the contactors
AC and DC operation
For short-circuit protection of the contactors without overload re-
IEC 60947 (VDE 0660). lays see "Technical specifications".
The contactors are suitable for use in any climate. The contac- Version
tors with screw terminals are finger-safe according to EN 50274.
The 3TK2 contactors with 4 main contacts are available with
The contactors are available in versions with screw terminals, screw terminals, 6.3 mm x 0.8 mm flat connectors and solder
6.3 mm plug-in terminals and solder pin connections for solde- pin connectors.
ring in printed circuit boards.
The 3TK2 contactors with 6.3 mm x 0.8 mm flat connectors are
■ Design coded can be used in the plug-in base with solder pin connec-
tions for printed circuit boards.
Auxiliary contacts
Contact reliability
To switch voltages ≤ 110 V and currents ≤ 100 mA the 3TH2 con-
tactor relays should be used as they guarantee a high level of
contact reliability.
These auxiliary contacts are suitable for solid-state circuits with
currents ≥ 1 mA at a voltage of 17 V and higher.
3TK20
The characteristic curves show the con- Contactor type
tact endurance of the contactors when 3TK20
switching inductive AC loads (AC-3) de-
107
pending on the breaking current and rated 107 8 6 8 NSB0_01629
operational voltage. It is assumed that the 8 6 6

4
6 4
operating mechanisms are switched ran- 4
domly, i. e. not synchronized with the 4 2

2
phase angle of the supply system. 2
2 106
The rated operational current Ie complies 106 8 106
with utilization category AC-4 (breaking 106 8 6 8
8 6 6
six times the rated operational current) 6 4
4
and is intended for a contact endurance of 4
4 2
at least 200 000 operating cycles. If a 2
shorter endurance is sufficient, the rated 2
2 105
operational current Ie/AC-4 can be 105 8 105
increased. 105 8 6 8
If the contacts are used for mixed opera- 8 6
4 6
tion, i. e. normal switching (breaking the 6 4
4
rated operational current according to uti- 4 2
lization category AC-3) in combination 2
2
2 104
with intermittent inching (breaking several
104 8
times the rated operational current ac- 104
104 8 6 8
cording to utilization category AC-4), the 8 6 6
4
contact endurance can be calculated ap- 6 4 4
proximately from the following equation: 4 2
A 2
X = ---------------------------------------------------------- 2
C A 2 103
1 + --------- -  ---- – 1 103
100 B 103
1 2 3 4 5 6 8 10 20 30 40 50 60 80
Characters in the equation: a (A)
X = Contact endurance for mixed opera- 9 e (A)
tion in operating cycles 4 2 (kW)
N
A = Contact endurance for normal opera-
tion (Ia = Ie) in operating cycles
B = Contact endurance for inching Diagram legend:
(Ia = multiple of Ie) in operating cycles PN= Rated power for squirrel-cage motors at 400 V
C = Inching operations as a percentage of
total switching operations
Siemens · 2011 109

3TK20 Contactors
4-pole, 4 kW
Contactors
Type 3TK20
General data
• Auxiliary switch block cycles 10 million
• Screw terminals V 690
• Flat connector 6.3 mm x 0.8 mm V 500
• Solder pin connections V 500
• Screw terminals kV 8
• Flat connector 6.3 mm x 0.8 mm kV 6
• Solder pin connections kV 6
Protective separation between coil and main contacts V Up to 300
(acc. to EN 61140)
IP40 coil assembly
Touch protection Finger-safe for screw terminals
Shock resistance
• Rectangular pulse - AC operation g/ms 8.3/5 and 5.2/10
- DC operation g/ms 11.3/5 and 9.2/10
• Sine pulse - AC operation g/ms 13/5 and 8/10
2)
Main circuit3)
• Fuse links gL/gG
acc. to IEC 60947-4-1 - Type of coordination A 25
(VDE 0660, Part 102) "1"
- Type of coordination A 10
"2"4)
- Weld-free A 10
Auxiliary circuit
Short-circuit current Ik ≥ 1 kA
2) See page 114.
3) According to excerpt from IEC 60947-4-1 (VDE 0660 Part 102
Type of coordination "1"
Destruction of the contactor and the overload relay is permissible. The
contactor and/or overload relay can be replaced if necessary.
The overload relay must not suffer any damage. Contact welding on the
contactor is permissible, however, if the contacts can be easily separated.
4) A short-circuit current of Iq ≤ 6 kA applies to type of coordination "2".
110 Siemens · 2011

3TK20 Contactors
4-pole, 4 kW
Contactors
Type 3TK20
Control
Standard version:
P.f. 0.41
Closed VA 6.8
P.f. 0.42
P.f. 0.36
Closed VA 6.1
P.f. 0.46
1)
• AC operation, 50/60 Hz Closing VA 16.5/13.2
P.f. 0.43/0.38
Closed VA 8.0/5.4
P.f. 0.48/0.42
For USA and Canada:
P.f. 0.38
Closed VA 6.5
P.f. 0.40
P.f. 0.30
Closed VA 6.0
P.f. 0.44
Permissible residual current of the electronic circuit2) (for 0 signal)
• AC operation mA ≤ 3 x (230 V/Us)
• DC operation mA ≤ 1 x (230 V/Us)
operating range
- Dead interval To use the 3TK20 AC-operated contactor in reversing duty an additional
dead interval of 50 ms is required along with an NC contact interlock.
- Dead interval To use the 3TK20 AC-operated contactor in reversing duty an additional
dead interval of 50 ms is required along with an NC contact interlock.
2) The 3TX4 490-1J additional load module is recommended
for higher residual currents (see Catalog LV 1).
3) The OFF-delay of the NO contacts and ON-delay of the NC contacts
increase if the contactor coils are protected against voltage peaks (noise
suppression diode 6 to 10 times, diode assemblies 2 to 6 times,
Siemens · 2011 111

3TK20 Contactors
4-pole, 4 kW
Contactors Type 3TK20 . .-0. . . 3TK20 . .-3. . .,

3TK20 . .-6. . .,
3TK20 . .-7. . .
Size 00
Main circuit
AC capacity
• Rated operational current Ie (at 40 °C) Up to 400/380 V A 18 18
690/660 V A 18 --
• Rated operational current Ie (at 55 °C) 400/380 V A 16 16
690/660 V A 16 --
• Rated power of AC loads At 230/220 V kW 6.0 6.0
P.f. = 1 400/380 V kW 10 10
500 V kW 13 13
690/660 V kW 17 --
• Minimum conductor cross-section for loads with Ie mm2 2.5 2.5
• Rated operational current Ie Up to 220 V A 9.0 9.0
230 V A 9.0 9.0
380 V A 9.0 9.0
400 V A 8.4 8.4
500 V A 6.5 6.5
660 V A 5.2 --
690 V A 5.2 --
• Rated power for motors with slipring At 110 V kW 1.2 1.2
or squirrel-cage rotors at 50 Hz and 60 Hz and 115 V kW 1.2 1.2
120 V kW 1.3 1.3
127 V kW 1.4 1.4
200 V kW 2.2 2.2
220 V kW 2.4 2.4
230 V kW 2.5 2.5
240 V kW 2.6 2.6
380 V kW 4.0 4.0
400 V kW 4.0 4.0
415 V kW 4.0 4.0
440 V kW 4.0 4.0
460 V kW 4.0 4.0
500 V kW 4.0 4.0
575 V kW 4.0 --
660 V kW 4.0 --
690 V kW 4.0 --
(contact endurance approx. 200000 operating cycles at Ia = 6 x Ie)
690 V A 1.8 --
• Rated power for motors with squirrel-cage rotor At 110 V kW 0.32 0.32
at 50 and 60 Hz and 115 V kW 0.33 0.33
120 V kW 0.35 0.35
• Max. permissible rated operational current 127 V kW 0.37 0.37
Ie/AC-4 r Ie/AC-3 up to 500 V, for reduced contact 200 V kW 0.58 0.58
endurance and reduced switching frequency 220 V kW 0.64 0.64
230 V kW 0.67 0.67
240 V kW 0.70 0.70
380 V kW 1.10 1.10
400 V kW 1.15 1.15
415 V kW 1.20 1.20
440 V kW 1.27 1.27
460 V kW 1.33 1.33
500 V kW 1.45 1.45
575 V kW 1.30 --
660 V kW 1.10 --
690 V kW 1.15 --
112 Siemens · 2011

3TK20 Contactors
4-pole, 4 kW

3TK20 . .-6. . .,
3TK20 . .-7. . .
Size 00
Main circuit
AC capacity
Utilization category AC-5a, switching gas discharge lamps
• Rated power Rated operational current
per lamp per lamp (A)
- Uncorrected
L 18 W 0.37 Units 43
L 36 W 0.43 Units 37
L 58 W 0.67 Units 23
- DUO switching
L 18 W 011 Units 144
L 36 W 0.21 Units 76
L 58 W 0.32 Units 50
• Rated power Capacitance Rated operational current
per lamp (μF) per lamp (A)
- Parallel correction
L 18 W 4.5 0.11 Units 22
L 36 W 4.5 0.21 Units 22
L 58 W 7 0.31 Units 14
- With solid-state ballast
(single lamp)
L 18 W 6.8 0.10 Units 63
L 36 W 6.8 0.18 Units 35
L 58 W 10 0.27 Units 23
- With solid-state ballast
(two lamps)
L 18 W 10 0.18 Units 35
L 36 W 10 0.35 Units 18
L 58 W 22 0.52 Units 12
Utilization category AC-5b, switching incandescent lamps kW 1.6 --
Utilization category AC-6a, switching AC transformers
- For inrush current n = 20 At 400 V A 5.1 5.1
- For inrush current n = 30 At 400 V A 3.3 3.3
• Rated power P
- For inrush current n = 20 Up to 230/220 V kVA 2.0 2.0
400/380 V kVA 3.5 3.5
500 V kVA 4.6 4.6
690/660 V kVA 6.0 --
- For inrush current n = 30 Up to 230/220 V kVA 1.3 1.3
400/380 V kVA 2.3 2.3
500 V kVA 3.1 3.1
690/660 V kVA 4.0 --
recalculated as follows: Px= Pn 30 x (30/x)
Utilization category AC-6b, switching low-inductance No switching capacity
(low-loss, metallized dielectric) AC capacitors
Utilization category AC-7a, switching low inductive loads in household
appliances
• Rated operational current Ie (at 55 °C) At 400/380 V A 16 16
690/660 V A 16 --
• Rated power at 50 and 60 Hz At 230/220 V kW 6 6
400/380 V kW 10 10
• Minimum conductor cross-section for loads with Ie mm2 2.5 2.5
Utilization category AC-7b, switching motor loads in household
appliances
230 V A 9.0 9.0
380 V A 9.0 9.0
400 V A 8.4 8.4
• Rated power of motors At 110 V kW 1.2 1.2
at 50 and 60 Hz and 220 V kW 2.4 2.4
230 V kW 2.5 2.5
240 V kW 2.6 2.6
380 V kW 4.0 4.0
400 V kW 4.0 4.0
Siemens · 2011 113

3TK20 Contactors
4-pole, 4 kW

3TK20 . .-6. . .,
3TK20 . .-7. . .
Size 00
Main circuit
Load rating with DC
Utilization category DC-1, switching resistive loads
(contact endurance 0.1 x 106 operating cycles; L/R ≤ 1 ms)
60 V A 6 6
110 V A 2 2
220/240 V A 1 1
60 V A 16 16
110 V A 6 6
220/240 V A 2 2
60 V A 16 16
110 V A 16 16
220/240 V A 6 6
Utilization category DC-3 and DC-5, shunt-wound and
series-wound motors (L/R ≤ 15 ms)
60 V A 3 3
110 V A 0.5 0.5
220/240 V A 0.1 0.1
60 V A 5 5
110 V A 2 2
220/240 V A 0.5 0.5
60 V A 16 16
110 V A 16 16
220/240 V A 2 2
Thermal load capacity 10 s current A 70
Switching frequency
Dependence of the switching frequency z' on AC-1 h-1 1000
the operational current I' and operational AC-2 h-1 500
z' = z ⋅(Ie/I' ) ⋅(400 V/U' )1.5 ⋅1/h
• Solid mm2 2 x (0.5 ... 2.5), 1 x 4

2 x (20 ... 14) AWG, 1 x 12 AWG
• Finely stranded with end sleeve mm2 2 x (0.5 ... 1.5),
1 x 2.5
• Prescribed tightening torque for terminal screws Nm 0.8 ... 1.3
lb.in 7 ... 11
Flat connectors
• When using a plug-in sleeve 6.3 ... 1 mm2 0.5 ... 1

• Finely stranded 6.3 ... 2.5 mm2 1 ... 2.5
114 Siemens · 2011

3TK20 Contactors
4-pole, 4 kW

3TK20 . .-6. . .,
3TK20 . .-7. . .
Size 00
s and u rated data of the 3TK20 contactors
Rated insulation voltage Ui V AC 600 300
Uninterrupted current • Open and enclosed A 16 16 (10 for solder pin connection)
• Rated power for induction motors at 60 Hz
- 1-phase At 115 V hp 0.5 --
200 V hp 1 1
230 V hp 1.5 1
460/575 V hp -- --
- 3-phase At 115 V hp -- --
200 V hp 3 3 (1 for 3TK20 . .-6)
230 V hp 3 3 (1 for 3TK20 . .-6)
460/575 V hp 5 --
Overload relay Type/Setting range 3UA7/EB 8 ... 10 A
Contactors Type 3TK20

Size 00
Rated data of the auxiliary contacts acc. to IEC 60947-5-1 (VDE 0660 Part 200)
AC load
110 V A 4
125 V A 4
220 V A 4
230 V A 4
380 V A 3
400 V A 3
500 V A 2
660 V A 1
690 V A 1
DC load
48 V A 2.2
110 V A 1.1
125 V A 1.1
220 V A 0.5
440 V A --
600 V A --
• For rated operational voltage Ue 24 V A 2.1
48 V A 1.1
110 V A 0.52
125 V A 0.52
220 V A 0.27
440 V A --
600 V A --
s, u and U rated data of the auxiliary contacts
Rated voltage, max. V AC 600
Auxiliary switch blocks, max. V AC 300
Switching capacity A 600, Q 300
Uninterrupted current at 240 V AC A 10
Siemens · 2011 115

3RT15 Contactors
4-pole, 2 NO + 2 NC, 4 ... 18.5 kW
■ Overview ■ Integration
AC and DC operation Mountable auxiliary contacts
EN 60947-4-1 (VDE 0660 Part 102). Size S00
The contactors are suitable for use in any climate. They are 4 auxiliary contacts (auxiliary switch blocks according
finger-safe according to EN 50274. to EN 50005)
The accessories for the 3-pole SIRIUS contactors can also be Size S0
used for the 4-pole versions.
ped onto the top auxiliary switch blocks according to EN 50012
■ Function and EN 50005).
• Changing the polarity of hoisting gear motors Size S2
• Switching two separate loads
Note: ped onto the top auxiliary switch blocks to EN 50012 and
Single device for pole reversal; not suitable for reversing duty. EN 50005).
3RT15 contactors are not suitable for switching a load between
two current sources.
Size S00 S00 S0 S2
General data
Permissible mounting position1)
ting
cycles
Electrical endurance at Ie/AC-1 Opera- Approx. 0.5 million
ting
cycles
Degree of protection acc. to EN 60947-1, Appendix C IP20 IP20 (IP00 terminal compartment)
Short-circuit protection of contactors without overload relays
Main circuit
Fuse links, gL/gG • Type of coordination "1" A 35 63 160
LV HRC 3NA, DIAZED 5SB, • Type of coordination "2" A 20 35 80
NEOZED 5SE • Weld-free A 10 16 50
Acc. to IEC 60947-4-1/
EN 60947-4-1
Control
AC at 50 Hz 0.8 ... 1.1 x Us
AC at 60 Hz 0.85 ... 1.1 x Us
DC at 50 °C 0.8 ... 1.1 x Us
DC at 60 °C 0.85 ... 1.1 x Us
AC/DC 0.8 ... 1.1 x Us
• AC operation, 50 Hz - Closing VA 61 145
- P.f. VA 0.82 0.79
- P.f. VA 0.24 0.36
• AC operation, 50/60 Hz - Closing VA 26.5/24.3 64/63 170/155
- P.f. VA 0.79/0.75 0.82/0.74 0.76/0.72
- Closed VA 4.4/3.4 8.4/6.8 15/11.8
- P.f. VA 0.27/0.27 0.24/0.28 0.35/0.38
• DC operation - Closing = Closed W 3.3 5.6 13.3
AC/DC operation
• DC operation - Closing delay ms 25 ... 100 30 ... 90 50 ... 110
- Opening delay ms 7 ... 10 13 ... 40 15 ... 30
• AC operation - Closing delay ms 8 ... 35 6 ... 30 4 ... 35
- Opening delay ms 4 ... 30 13 ... 25 10 ... 30
1) In accordance with the corresponding 3-pole 3RT1 contactors.
2) With size S00, DC operation: operating times at 0.85 ... 1.1 x Us.
116 Siemens · 2011

3RT15 Contactors
4-pole, 2 NO + 2 NC, 4 ... 18.5 kW

Size S00 S00 S0 S2
Main circuit
AC capacity
• Rated operational currents Ie At 40 °C up to 690 V A 18 22 40 60
At 60 °C up to 690 V A 16 20 35 55
• Rated power for AC loads At 230 V kW 6.5 7.5 15 20
P.f. = 0.95 (at 60 °C) 400 V kW 11 13 26 36
• Minimum conductor cross-section At 40 °C mm² 2.5 2.5 10 16
for loads with Ie
• Rated operational currents Ie Up to 400 V A 9 12 25 1) 40
(at 60 °C)
• Rated power of slipring At 230 V kW 3 3 5.5 9.5
or squirrel-cage motors at 50 and 400 V kW 4 5.5 11 18.5
60 Hz
Load rating with DC
Utilization category DC-1, switching resistive load (L/R ≤ 1 ms)
- 1 conducting path Up to 24 V A 16 20 35 50
60 V A 16 20 20 23
110 V A 2.1 2.1 4.5 4.5
220 V A 0.8 0.8 1 1
440 V A 0.6 0.6 0.4 0.4
- 2 conducting paths in series Up to 24 V A 16 20 35 50
60 V A 16 20 35 45
110 V A 12 12 35 45
220 V A 1.6 1.6 5 5
440 V A 0.8 0.8 1 1
Utilization category DC-3/DC-52) ,
shunt-wound and series-wound motors (L/R ≤ 15 ms)
- 1 conducting path Up to 24 V A 16 20 20 35
60 V A 0.5 0.5 5 6
110 V A 0.15 0.15 2.5 2.5
220 V A 0.75 0.75 1 1
440 V A -- -- 0.09 0.1
- 2 conducting paths in series Up to 24 V A 16 20 35 50
60 V A 5 5 35 45
110 V A 0.35 0.35 15 25
220 V A -- -- 3 5
440 V A -- -- 0.27 0.27
1) For AC operation: 25 A
DC operation: 20 A.
2) For Us >24 V the rated operational currents Ie for the NC contact conduc-
ting paths are 50 % of the values for the NO contact conducting paths.
Siemens · 2011 117

3RT16 Capacitor Contactors
12.5 ... 50 kvar
■ Overview
AC operation The auxiliary switch block which is snapped onto the capacitor
contactor contains the three leading NO contacts and in the
IEC 60947, EN 60947 (VDE 0660) case of S00 one standard NC contact and in the case of S0 and
The contactors are suitable for use in any climate. They are S3 one standard NO contact, which is unassigned. Size S00 also
finger-safe according to EN 50274. contains another unassigned NO contact in the basic unit.
The 3RT16 capacitor contactors are special version of the size In addition, a 2-pole auxiliary switch block can be mounted late-
S00 to S3 SIRIUS contactors. The capacitors are precharged by rally on the 3RT16 47 capacitor contactors (2 NO, 2 NC or 1 NO
means of the mounted leading NO contacts and resistors; only + 1 NC versions); Type 3RH19 21-1EA. . . The fitting of auxiliary
then do the main contacts close. switches for 3RT16 17 and 3RT16 27 is not
expandable.
This prevents disturbances in the network and welding of the
contactors. For the capacitor switching capacity of the basic 3RT10
contactor version, see "Technical specifications".
Only discharged capacitors are permitted to be switched on
with capacitor contactors.
All technical specifications not mentioned in the table below are identical to those of the 3RT10 17 contactors for size S00,
to those of the 3RT10 26 contactors for size S0 and to those of the 3RT10 45 contactors for size S3.
Contactors Type 3RT16 17-.A. .3 3RT16 27-.A. .1 3RT16 47-.A. .1
Size S00 S0 S3
Capacitor rating at 230 V, 50/60 Hz kvar 3 … 7.5 3.5 … 15 3.5 … 30
rated power 400 V, 50/60 Hz kvar 5 … 12.5 6 … 25 5 … 50
(utilization category AC-6b) 525 V, 50/60 Hz kvar 7.5 … 15 7.8 … 30 7.5 … 60
690 V, 50/60 Hz kvar 10 … 21 10 … 42 10 … 84
Auxiliary contacts mounted (unassigned) 1 NO + 1 NC 1 NO contact
Auxiliary contacts mountable (lateral), not for sizes S00 and S0 -- 2 NC + 2 NO or
1 NO + 1 NC
Magnetic coil operating range 0.8 … 1.1 x Us
Max. switching frequency h-1 180 100
Electrical endurance Opera- > 250000 > 150000 > 100000
ting
cycles
Ambient temperature °C 60
Standards IEC 60947/EN 60947 (VDE 0660)
Short-circuit protection 1.6 ... 2.2 x Ie
Main conductor Screw terminals
• Solid mm² 2 x (0.5 ... 1.5); 2 x (1 ... 2.5); --

2 x (0.75 ... 2.5) 2 x (2.5 ... 6)
Acc. to IEC 60947; Acc. to IEC 60947;
Max. 2 x (1 ... 4) Max. 1 x 101)
• Finely stranded with end sleeve mm² 2 x (0.5 ... 1.5); 2 x (1 ... 2.5); --
2 x (0.75 ... 2.5) 2 x (2.5 ... 6) 1)
• AWG cables
- Solid AWG 2 x (20 ... 16) 2 x (16 ... 12) --
- Solid or stranded AWG 2 x (18 ... 14) 2 x (14 ... 10) --
- Stranded AWG 1 x 12 1x8 --
• Terminal screws M3 M4 (Pozidriv size 2) --
- Tightening torque Nm 0.8 ... 1.2 2 ... 2.5 --
lb.in 7 ... 10.3 18 ... 22 --
1) 3RV19 25-5AB feeder terminal for 16 mm2.
118 Siemens · 2011

3RT16 Capacitor Contactors
12.5 ... 50 kvar
Contactors Type 3RT16 17-.A. .3 3RT16 27-.A. .1 3RT16 47-.A. .1

Size S00 S0 S3
With box terminal
Front clamping point • Finely stranded with end sleeve mm² -- 2.5 ... 35
connected • Finely stranded without end sleeve mm² -- 4 ... 50
• Solid mm² -- 2.5 ... 16
• Stranded mm² -- 4 ... 70
NSB00479
• Ribbon cable conductors mm -- 6 x 9 x 0.8

• AWG cables, AWG -- 10 ... 2/0
solid or stranded
Rear clamping point • Finely stranded with end sleeve mm² -- 2.5 ... 50
connected • Finely stranded without end sleeve mm² -- 10 ... 50
• Solid mm² -- 2.5 ... 16
• Stranded mm² -- 10 ... 70
NSB00480
• Ribbon cable conductors mm -- 6 x 9 x 0.8

• AWG cables, AWG -- 10 ... 2/0
solid or stranded
Both clamping points • Finely stranded with end sleeve mm² -- Max. 2 x 35
connected • Finely stranded without end sleeve mm² -- Max. 2 x 35
• Solid mm² -- Max. 2 x 16
• Stranded mm² -- Max. 2 x 50
NSB00481

• AWG cables, AWG -- 2 x (10 ... 1/0)
solid or stranded
• Terminal screw -- M6 (hex. socket, A/F 4)
- Tightening torque Nm -- 4 ... 6
lb.in 36 ... 53
Connection for drilled copper bars1) Max. width mm 10
2)
Without box terminal with cable lugs • Finely stranded with cable lug mm² -- 10 ... 503)
(1 or 2 conductors can be • Stranded with cable lug mm² -- 10 ... 703)
connected) • AWG cables, AWG -- 7 ... 1/0
solid or stranded
• Solid mm² 2 x (0.5 ... 1.5)4); 2 x (0.5 ... 1.5)4);
2 x (0.75 ... 2.5)4) 2 x (0.75 ... 2.5)4) acc. to IEC 60947;
acc. to IEC 60947; max. 2 x (0.75 ... 4)
max. 2 x (1 ... 4)
• Finely stranded with end sleeve mm² 2 x (0.5 ... 1.5)4);
2 x (0.75 ... 2.5)4)
• AWG cables, AWG 2 x (20 ... 16)4);
solid or stranded 2 x (18 ... 14)4); 1 x 12
- Tightening torque Nm 0.8 ... 1.2
lb.in 7 ... 10.3
1) If bars larger than 12 x 10 mm are connected, a 3RT19 46-4EA1 terminal
cover is needed to comply with the phase clearance.
2) When connecting conductors which are larger than 25 mm2, the
3RT19 46-4EA1 terminal cover must be used to keep the phase clea-
rance.
3) Only with crimped cable lugs according to DIN 46234.
Cable lug max. 20 mm wide.
Siemens · 2011 119

Contactors with Extended Operating Range 0.7 ... 1.25 x Us , for Railway Applications
3RH11 contactor relays
DC operation Control and auxiliary circuits
IEC 60947-4-1, EN 60947-4-1 (VDE 0660, Part 102), for require- The magnetic coils of the contactor relays have an extended
ments according to IEC 60077-1 and IEC 60077-2. operating range from 0.7 to 1.25 x Us and are fitted as standard
with varistors to provide protection against overvoltage. The
The contactor relays are finger-safe according to EN 50274. The opening delay is consequently 2 to 5 ms longer than for stan-
size S00 contactor relays have Cage Clamp connections for all dard contactors.
terminals.
3RH11 . .-0LA0
Ambient temperature
The DC solenoid systems of the contactor relays are modified (to
The permissible ambient temperature for operation of the con- holding excitation) by means of a series resistor.
tactor relays (across the full magnetic coil operating range) is
-40 °C to +70 °C. The size S00 contactor relays are supplied prewired with a plug-
on module containing the series resistor. The varistor is integra-
Uninterrupted duty at temperatures > +60 °C reduces the me- ted. A 4-pole auxiliary switch block (according to EN 50005) can
chanical endurance, the current-carrying capacity of the con- be fitted additionally.
ducting paths and the switching frequency.
Mounting
At ambient temperatures up to 70 °C, the size S00 contactor re-
lays are allowed to be mounted side by side.
3RH11 22-2K.40
These contactor relays have an extended operating range from
0.7 to 1.25 x Us; the coils are fitted with varistors as standard. An
additional series resistor is not required. Please note:
• Size S00: it is not possible to mount an auxiliary switch block.
At ambient temperatures > 60 °C ≤ 70 °C, a clearance of 10 mm
is required when they are mounted side by side.
Contactors Type 3RH11 .
Power consumption of the magnetic coils For cold coil and 1.0 x Us
• Contactors with series resistor - Closing W 11
- Closed W 4
• Contactors without series resistor - Closing W 2.3
- Closed W 2.3
Upright mounting position 3RH11 22-2K.40: please ask
3RH11 22-2K.40-0LA0 standard version
All specifications and technical specifications not mentioned
here are identical to those of the standard contactors.
120 Siemens · 2011

3TH4 contactor relays
3TH4 contactor relays Control and auxiliary circuits
EN 60947-4-1. The magnetic coils of the contactors have an extended coil ope-
rating range from 0.7 to 1.25 x Us and are fitted as standard with
For requirements according to IEC 60077-1 and IEC 60077-2. varistors to provide protection against overvoltage. The opening
The contactors are finger-safe according to EN 50274. Terminal delay is consequently 2 ms to 5 ms longer than for standard
covers may have to be fitted onto the connecting bars, depen- contactors.
ding on the configuration with other devices. All specifications and technical specifications not mentioned
here are identical to those of the standard 3TH4 contactor relays.
Ambient temperature
The permissible ambient temperature for operation of the con-
tactors (across the full operating range of the magnetic coil) is
-50 to +70 °C. Uninterrupted duty at temperatures < -25 °C and
> +55 °C reduces the mechanical endurance, the current-carry-
ing capacity of the conducting paths and the switching
frequency.
Mounting
At ambient temperatures > 55 °C, a distance of 10 mm must be
observed if contactor relays and size 1 and 2 contactors are
mounted side by side. There is no need to reduce the technical
specifications.
Contactors Type 3TH42
Power consumption of the magnetic coils (for cold coil)
0.7 x Us W 2.6
1.0 x Us W 5.2
1.25 x Us W 8.2
(For cold coil: Closing = Closed)
Permissible ambient temperature • During operation °C -50 ... +70 1)
DC operation ≤ 10 mA x (24 V/Us)
Operating times
(Total break time = OFF-delay + Arcing time)
• Closing
- 0.7 x Us ON-delay (NO) ms 70 ... 200
OFF-delay (NC) ms 28 ... 33
- 1 x Us ON-delay (NO) ms 45 ... 80
- 1.25 x Us ON-delay (NO) ms 40 ... 60
• Opening
- 0.7 ... 1.25 x Us OFF-delay (NO) ms 20 ... 30
ON-delay (NC) ms 22 ... 32
1) Side-by-side mounting with 10 mm distance.
Siemens · 2011 121

Contactors with Extended Operating Range 0.7 ... 1.25 x Us, for Railway Applications
3RT10 motor contactors, 5.5 ... 45 kW
■ Overview Mounting
At ambient temperatures up to 70 °C, the size S00 contactors
DC operation and contactor relays are allowed to be mounted side by side.
IEC 60947-4-1, EN 60947-4-1 (VDE 0660, Part 102), for require- The resistor module of the size S0 to S3 contactors must be
ments according to IEC 60077-1 and IEC 60077-2. mounted to the left of the contactor owing to the prefabricated
connecting cables.
The contactors are finger-safe according to EN 50274 (excep-
tion: series resistors S0 to S3). The contactors are available with 3RT10 17-2K.4.,
both Cage Clamp and screw connection. The size S00 contac- 3RT10 2.-3K.40
tors have Cage Clamp terminals for all connections. The auxili- These contactors have an extended operating range from
ary conductor and coil terminals of sizes S0 to S3 are all Cage 0.7 to 1.25 x Us; the coils are fitted with varistors as standard. An
Clamp terminals. additional series resistor is not required. Please note:
Ambient temperature • Size S00: it is not possible to mount an auxiliary switch block.
The permissible ambient temperature for operation of the con- • Size S0: up to two single-pole auxiliary switch blocks can be
tactors (across the full magnetic coil operating range) is -40 °C mounted.
to +70 °C. At ambient temperatures > 60 °C ≤ 70 °C, a clearance of 10 mm
Uninterrupted duty at temperatures > +60 °C reduces the me- is required when they are mounted side by side.
chanical endurance, the current-carrying capacity of the con- 3RT10 contactors with contactor control unit,
ducting paths and the switching frequency. extended operating range
Dimensions Control and auxiliary circuits
Attaching resistors increases the width of contactor sizes S0 to The magnetic coils of the contactors have an extended opera-
S3 (see "Dimensional Drawings"). ting range from 0.7 to 1.25 x Us and are fitted as standard with
varistors to provide protection against overvoltage. The opening
■ Function delay is consequently 2 ms to 5 ms longer than for standard
contactors.
Control and auxiliary circuits
3RT10 . .-.X.40-0LA2
The magnetic coils of the contactors have an extended opera-
The contactors are energized via upstream control electronics
ting range from 0.7 to 1.25 x Us and are fitted as standard with
which ensure the coil operating range of 0.7 to 1.25 x Us at an
varistors to provide protection against overvoltage. The opening
ambient temperature of 70 °C. They are supplied as complete
delay is consequently 2 to 5 ms longer than for standard
units with a built-on contactor control unit. A varistor is integrated
contactors.
for damping opening surges in the coil.
3RT10 . .-0LA0
The possibility of mounting auxiliary switches is the same as that
The DC solenoid systems of the contactors are modified (to hol- for equivalent standard contactors.
ding excitation) by means of a series resistor.
Mounting
The size S00 contactors are supplied prewired with a plug-on
At ambient temperatures up to 70 °C, sizes S0 to S3 of these
module containing the series resistor. The varistor is integrated.
contactor versions are allowed to be mounted side by side.
A 4-pole auxiliary switch block (according to EN 50005) can be
fitted additionally. Ambient temperature
The size S0 to S3 contactors are equipped on the front with an The permissible ambient temperature for operation of the con-
auxiliary switch block with 2 NO + 2 NC contacts. The separate tactors (across the full operating range of the magnetic coil) is
series resistor, which is attached laterally next to the contactor -40 °C to +70 °C.
on the 35 mm standard mounting rail, is fitted with connecting Uninterrupted duty at temperatures > +60 °C reduces the me-
cables for mounting onto contactors. A circuit diagram showing chanical endurance, the current-carrying capacity of the con-
the terminals is stuck onto each contactor. One NC of the auxili- ducting paths and the switching frequency.
ary contacts is required for the series resistor function. The se-
lection and ordering data shows the number of additional, unas- Dimensions
signed auxiliary contacts. It is only possible to extend the Because of the built-on contactor control unit, the height of the
number of auxiliary contacts with size S00. size S0 to S3 contactors increases by up to 34 mm
(see "Dimensional Drawings").
122 Siemens · 2011

3RT10 motor contactors, 5.5 ... 45 kW
Contactors Type 3RT10 17 3RT10 2. 3RT10 3. 3RT10 4.
• Contactors with series resistor - Closing W 11 23 46 78
- Closed W 4 7 14 23
• Contactors without series resistor - Closing W 2.3 4.2 -- --
- Closed W 2.3 4.2 -- --
Upright mounting position Standard version 3RT10 2.-3K.40: -- --
Special version
required
3RT10 2.-
3K.44-0LA0:
Special version
required
Contactors 3RT10 2. 3RT10 3. 3RT10 4.

3RT10 contactors with contactor control unit
Power consumption For cold coil and 1.0 x Us
• Closing W 6 15 19
• Closed W 5.4 11 12
Upright mounting position Special version required --
Siemens · 2011 123

3TB5 motor contactors, 55 ... 200 kW
■ Overview dering data show the number of additional, unassigned auxiliary

contacts. It is not possible to extend the number of auxiliary con-
EN 60947-4-1. tacts.
For requirements according to IEC 60077-1 and IEC 60077-2. With the 3TB52 and larger contactors, the series resistor must be
connected using an additional K2 reversing contactor
The contactors are finger-safe according to EN 50274. Terminal (3RT13 17-1F.40). This contactor is automatically included in
covers may have to be fitted onto the connecting bars, depen- the scope of supply in the same packaging as the contactor.
ding on the configuration with other devices.
■ Function here are identical to those of the standard 3TB contactors.
Ambient temperature
Control and auxiliary circuits
The permissible ambient temperature for operation of the con-
The magnetic coils of the contactors have an extended coil ope- tactors (across the full operating range of the magnetic coil) is
rating range from 0.7 to 1.25 x Us and are fitted as standard with -50 to +70 °C. Uninterrupted duty at temperatures < -25 °C and
varistors to provide protection against overvoltage. The opening > +55 °C reduces the mechanical endurance, the current-carry-
delay is consequently 2 ms to 5 ms longer than for standard ing capacity of the conducting paths and the switching
contactors. frequency.
The DC solenoid systems of the 3TB contactors must be modi- Mounting
fied (to holding excitation) by means of a series resistor.
At ambient temperatures > 55 °C, a distance of 10 mm must be
This series resistor is supplied separately packed with the con- observed if contactor relays and size 1 and 2 contactors are
tactors. With types 3TB50, the series resistor must be attached mounted side by side. There is no need to reduce the technical
onto the right-hand side of the auxiliary switch block by means specifications.
of the enclosed mounting parts and sets of links provided.
Dimensions
With types 3TB52/54/56, the series resistor must be attached se-
parately next to the contactors. One NC of the auxiliary contacts Attaching resistors and varistors increases the width of the con-
is required for the series resistor function. The selection and or- tactors (see "Dimensional Drawings").
• Closing W 38 40 190 295
• Closed W 20 21 43 59
124 Siemens · 2011

3TC contactors for switching DC voltage, 2-pole
■ Overview The selection and ordering data show the number of additional,
unassigned auxiliary contacts. It is not possible to extend the
EN 60947-4-1. number of auxiliary contacts.
For requirements according to IEC 60077-1 and IEC 60077-2. With the 3TC52 and larger contactors, the series resistor must
be connected using an additional K2 reversing contactor
The contactors are finger-safe according to EN 50274 (excep- (3RT13 17-1F.40). This contactor is automatically included in
tion: series resistor). Terminal covers may have to be fitted onto the scope of supply in the same packaging as the contactor.
the connecting bars, depending on the configuration with other
devices. All specifications and technical specifications not mentioned
here are identical to those of the standard 3TC contactors.
■ Function Ambient temperature
Control and auxiliary circuits The permissible ambient temperature for operation of the con-
tactors (across the full operating range of the magnetic coil) is
The magnetic coils of the contactors have an extended coil ope- -50 to +70 °C. Uninterrupted duty at temperatures < -25 °C and
rating range from 0.7 to 1.25 x Us and are fitted as standard with > +55 °C reduces the mechanical endurance, the current-carry-
varistors to provide protection against overvoltage. The opening ing capacity of the conducting paths and the switching
delay is consequently 2 ms to 5 ms longer than for standard frequency.
contactors.
Mounting
The DC solenoid systems of the 3TC contactors must be modi-
fied (to holding excitation) by means of a series resistor. At ambient temperatures > 55 °C, a distance of 10 mm must be
observed if contactor relays and size 1 and 2 contactors are
This series resistor is supplied separately packed with the con- mounted side by side. There is no need to reduce the technical
tactors. With types 3TC48, the series resistor must be attached specifications.
onto the right-hand side of the auxiliary switch block by means
of the enclosed mounting parts and sets of links provided, while Dimensions
in the case of the 3TC44 it must be mounted and wired between Attaching resistors and varistors increases the width of the con-
the contactor poles. With types 3TC52/56, the series resistor tactors (see "Dimensional Drawings").
must be attached separately next to the contactors. One NC of
the auxiliary contacts is required for the series resistor function.
Contactors Type 3TC44 3TC48 3TC52 3TC56
• Closing W 48 26 40 295
• Closed W 13 14 21 59
Siemens · 2011 125

3TC Contactors for Switching DC Voltage
1- and 2-pole, 32 ... 400 A
■ Overview
3TC4 and 3TC5 3TC7
EN 60947-4-1 (VDE 0660 Part 102). EN 60947-4-1 (VDE 0660 Part 102).
The contactors are finger-safe according to EN 50274. The contactors are suitable for use in any climate. They are sui-
table for switching and controlling DC motors as well as all other
Terminal covers may have to be fitted onto the connecting bars, DC loads. The electromagnetic excitation is designed for a par-
depending on the configuration with other devices. ticularly wide coil operating range.
The DC motor ratings given in the tables are applicable to the It is between 0.7 or 0.8 to 1.2 × Us.
DC-3 and DC-5 utilization categories with two-pole switching of
the load or with the two conducting paths of the contactor con- 3TC74 contactors can be used at up to 750 V/400 A and 50 Hz
nected in series. in AC-1 operation.
One contactor conducting path can switch full power up to
220 V. The ratings for higher voltages are available on request.
Contactors Type 3TC4 and 3TC7 3TC5
Rated data of the auxiliary contacts
Continuous thermal current Ith = 10 10
AC load
24 V A 10 10
110 V A 10 10
125 V A 10 10
220 V A 6 6
230 V A 5.6 5.6
380 V A 4 4
400 V A 3.6 3.6
500 V A 2.5 2.5
660 V A 2.5 2.5
690 V A -- --
DC load
24 V A 10 10
60 V A 10 10
110 V A 3.2 8
125 V A 2.5 6
220 V A 0.9 2
440 V A 0.33 0.6
600 V A 0.22 0.4
24 V A 10 10
60 V A 5 5
110 V A 1.14 2.4
125 V A 0.98 2.1
220 V A 0.48 1.1
440 V A 0.13 0.32
600 V A 0.07 0.21
Contactors Type 3TC44 ... 3TC56

max.
126 Siemens · 2011

1- and 2-pole, 32 ... 400 A
Contactors Type 3TC44 ... 3TC78

107 20 NSB0_00656
8 NSB0_00655
6

18
4
3TC44 3TC48 3TC52 3TC56
2 16
106
8 14
6
4
12
2
105 10
8
6
8
4
2 6
104
8 4
6
4
2
2
0,5
103 50 100 150 200 250 300 1 a (A) 400
10 20 40 100 200 400 600 1000 2000 1 a (A) 4000
3TC44 to 3TC56 contactors 3TC74 and 3TC78 contactors
Diagram legend:

Size 2 4 8 12
General data
N S B 0 _ 0 0 6 5 0 b
Mechanical endurance Operating cycles 10 million

1)
Electrical endurance Operating cycles
Rated insulation voltage Ui (degree of pollution 3) V 800 1000
Protective separation between the coil and the main contacts V Up to 300 Up to 660
Mirror contacts2) Yes, acc. to EN 60947-4-1, Appendix F
A mirror contact is an auxiliary NC contact that cannot be closed simulta-
neously with a NO main contact.
Degree of protection acc. to EN 60947-1, Appendix C IP00/open, for AC operation, coil assembly IP40
Shock resistance Rectangular pulse g/ms 7.5/5 and 3.4/10 10/5 and 5/10 12/5 and 5.5/10 12/5 and 5.6/10
Main circuit
Fuse links gL/gG • Type of coordination "1" A 50 160 250 400
LV HRC 3NA, DIAZED 5SB, • Type of coordination "2" A 35 63 80 250
NEOZED 5SE
Auxiliary circuit
(short-circuit current Ik ≥ 1 kA)
• Fuse links, gL/gG A 16
For the rated data of the auxiliary contacts see page 126.
1) See the endurance diagram above.
2) For 3TC44, one NC contact each must be connected in series for the right
and left auxiliary switch block respectively.
Siemens · 2011 127

1- and 2-pole, 32 ... 400 A

Size 2 4 8 12
Control
(for cold coil and 1.0 x Us)
• DC operation - Closing = Closed W 10 19 30 86
• AC operation, 50 Hz coil - Closing VA/p.f. 68/0.86 300/0.5 640/0.48 1780/0.3
- Closed VA/p.f. 10/0.29 26/0.24 46/0.23 121/0.22
• AC operation, 60 Hz coil - Closing VA/p.f. 95/0.79 365/0.45 730/0.38 2140/0.3
- Closed VA/p.f. 12/0.3 35/0.26 56/0.24 140/0.29
• AC operation, 50/60 Hz coil - Closing at 50 Hz/60 Hz VA/p.f. 79/73/0.83/0.78 -- -- --
- Closed at 50 Hz/60 Hz VA/p.f. 11/9/0.28/0.27 -- -- --
Operating times (at 0.8 ... 1.1 x Us) (The values apply up to and including 20 % undervoltage,
Total break time = opening delay + Arcing time 10 % overvoltage, as well as when the coil is cold and warm)
• DC operation - Closing delay ms 35 ... 190 90 ... 380 120 ... 400 110 ... 400
- Opening delay1) ms 10 ... 25 17 ... 28 22 ... 35 40 ... 110
• AC operation - Closing delay ms 10 ... 40 20 ... 50 20 ... 50 20 ... 50
- Opening delay1) ms 5 ... 25 5 ... 30 10 ... 30 10 ... 30
• Arcing time - DC-1 ms 20
- DC-3/DC-5 ms 30
Main circuit
Load rating with DC
• Rated operational currents Ie Up to Ue 750 V A 32 75 220 400
(at 55 °C)
2
• Minimum conductor cross-section mm 6 25 95 240
• Rated power at Ue At 220 V kW 7 16.5 48 88
440 V kW 14 33 97 176
600 V kW 19.2 45 132 240
750 V kW 24 56 165 300
• Rated operational currents Ie Up to 220 V A 32 75 220 400
(at 55 °C) 440 V A 29 75 220 400
600 V A 21 75 220 400
750 V A 7.5 75 170 400
• Rated power at Ue At 110 V kW 2.5 6.5 20 35
220 V kW 5 13 41 70
440 V kW 9 27 82 140
600 V kW 9 38 110 200
750 V kW 4 45 110 250
Switching frequency
AC/DC operation • With resistive load DC-1 h-1 1500 1000
• For inductive load DC-3/DC-5 h-1 750 600
• Solid mm2 2 x (2.5 ... 10) 2 x (6 ... 16) -- --

• Finely stranded with end sleeve mm2 2 x (1.5 ... 4) -- -- --
• Stranded with cable lug mm2 2 x 16 2 x 35 2 x 120 2 x 150
2
• Pin-end connector to DIN 46231 mm 2 x (1 ... 6) -- -- --
• Busbars mm -- 15 x 2.5 25 x 4 2 x (25 x 3)
• Solid mm2 2 x (1 ... 2.5)
1) The opening delay times can increase if the contactor coils are damped
against voltage peaks. Only 3TC44 contactors are allowed to be fitted
with diodes.
128 Siemens · 2011

1- and 2-pole, 32 ... 400 A
Contactors Type 3TC74 3TC78

1-pole contactors 2-pole contactors
General data
N S B 0 _ 0 0 6 5 0 b
The contactors are designed for
operation on a vertical mounting
surface.
Mechanical endurance Operating cycles 30 million

1)
Electrical endurance Operating cycles
Permissible ambient temperature °C -25 ... +55
Degree of protection acc. to EN 60947-1 Appendix C IP00/open
Main circuit
Fuse links, gL/gG • Type of coordination "1": A 630
LV HRC 3NA • Type of coordination "2": A 500
Auxiliary circuit (short-circuit current Ik ≥ 1 kA)
• Fuse links, gL/gG operational class A 16
DIAZED Type 5SB, NEOZED Type 5SE
Control
• DC operation 24 V 0.8 ...1.2 x Us
> 24 V 0.7 ...1.2 x Us
• AC operation 24 V 0.7 ...1.15 x Us
> 24 V 0.7 ...1.14 x Us
• DC operation Closing = Closed W 46 92
• AC operation, 50 Hz Closing, Closed VA 80/0.95 160/0.95
Operating times (The values apply up to and including 15 % undervoltage,
(Total break time = Opening delay + Arcing time) 10 % overvoltage, as well as when the coil is cold and warm)
• AC and DC operation - Closing delay ms 60 ... 100
• Arcing time at 0.06 ... 4 x Ie ms 40 ... 70
Main circuit
Load rating with DC
• Rated operational current Ie/DC-1 (at 55 °C) A 500 500
• Minimum conductor cross-section mm2 2 x 150 2 x 150
• Rated power at 220 V kW 110 110
440 V kW 220 220
600 V kW 300 300
750 V kW 375 375
1200 V kW -- 600
1500 V kW -- 750
• Critical currents, 440 V A ≤7 --
without arc extinction 600 V A ≤ 13 --
750 V A ≤ 15 --
≤ 800 V A -- ≤7
1200 V A -- ≤ 13
1500 V A -- ≤ 15
2)
Utilization categories DC-3 and DC-5, switching DC motors
Permissible rated current for regenerative braking A 400
At 110 ... 600 V
Switching frequency
• AC/DC operation - With resistive load DC-1 h-1 750 1000
- For inductive load, h-1 500 500
DC-3/DC-5
• Stranded with cable lug mm2 2 x ... 150

• Busbars mm 2 x (30 x 4)
• Solid mm2 1 ... 2.5
• Finely stranded with end sleeve mm2 0.75 ... 1.5
1) For endurance see page 127. 2) See selection table in Catalog LV 1.
Siemens · 2011 129

3RH, 3TH Contactor Relays
3RH1 contactor relays, 4- and 8-pole
■ Overview
The SIRIUS generation of controls is a complete, modular sys- AC and DC operation
tem family, logically designed right down to the last detail, from IEC 60947, EN 60947 (VDE 0660)
the basic units to the accessories.
The 3RH1 contactor relays are suitable for use in any climate.
Contactor relays and coupling relays They are finger-safe according to EN 50274.
Size S00 with accessories
The 3RH1 contactor relays have screw or Cage Clamp
3 terminals. Four contacts are available in the basic unit.
12
5
7 13
8 2
14
10
11
15
NSB0_00066a
16
1 Contactor relay
2 Coupling relay for auxiliary circuits
3 Solid-state timing relay block, with ON-delay
4 Solid-state timing relay block, with OFF-delay
5 Auxiliary switch block, with solid-state time-delay
(versions: ON or OFF-delay)
10 4-pole auxiliary switch block
11 2-pole auxiliary switch block, standard version or solid-state time-delay
version (terminal designations according to EN 50005)
12 Solder pin adapter for contactor relays with 4-pole auxiliary switch block
13 Solder pin adapter for contactor relays and coupling relays
14 Additional load module for increasing the permissible residual current
15 Surge suppressor with LED

16 Surge suppressor without LED
130 Siemens · 2011

■ Function
Contactor relay, EN 50 011,
Contact reliability 4 contacts
High contact stability at low voltages and currents, suitable for
solid-state circuits with currents ≥ 1 mA at a voltage of 17 V.
Surge suppression
tion of a diode and a Zener diode) can be plugged onto all con- Ident. No. 40E Ident. No. 31E, 22E
tactor relays from the front for damping opening surges in the
coil. The plug-in direction is determined by a coding device.
Aux. switch blocks, Aux. switch blocks,
Note: EN 50 011, EN 50 005,
The OFF-delay times of the NO contacts and the ON-delay times 4 contacts 4 or 2 contacts
of the NC contacts increase if the contactor coils are damped
against voltage peaks (noise suppression diode 6 to 10 times;
diode assemblies 2 to 6 times, varistor +2 to 5 ms).
■ Integration Ident. No. 80E, Ident. No. 40, 31,

Auxiliary switch blocks 71E, 62E, 53E, 44E 22, 20, 11, 02
The 3RH1 contactor relays can be expanded by up to

four contacts by the addition of snap-on auxiliary switch blocks. Contactor relay, Contactor relay,
Hilfsschütze
EN 50 011 EN
DIN50EN50
005, 005,
The auxiliary switch block can easily be snapped onto the front 8 contacts 88oroder
6 contacts
6 Kontakte
of the contactors. The auxiliary switch block has a centrally po-
sitioned release lever for disassembly.
The contactor relays with 4 contacts according to EN 50011,
with the identification number 40E, can be extended with 80E to
44E auxiliary switch blocks to obtain contactor relays with
NSB0_00067b
8 contacts according to EN 50011. The identification Ident. No. 80E,
numbers 80E to 44E on the auxiliary switch blocks apply to the 71E, 62E, 53E, 44E
complete contactors. These auxiliary switch blocks
(3RH19 11–1GA ..) cannot be combined with contactor relays
with identification numbers 31E and 22E; they are coded.
All contactor relays with 4 contacts according to EN 50011,
identification numbers 40E to 22E, can be extended with auxili-
ary switch blocks 40 to 02 to obtain contactor relays with 6 or
8 contacts in accordance with EN 50005. The identification
numbers on the auxiliary switch blocks apply only to the at-
tached auxiliary switch blocks.
In addition, fully mounted 3RH12 8-pole contactor relays are
available; the mounted 4-pole auxiliary switch block in the 2nd
tier is not removable.
The terminal designations comply with EN 50011. These versi-
ons are built in accordance with special Swiss regulations
(SUVA) and are distinguished externally by a red labeling plate.
Siemens · 2011 131

Contactors Type 3RH1
Size S00
The contactors are designed for operation • AC and DC operation
360° 30° 30°
NSB0_00478b
on a vertical mounting surface.
Upright mounting position • AC operation

(only for 3RH11/3RH12/3RH14)
N S B 0 _ 0 0 4 7 7 a
Special version required
• DC operation Standard version (for coupling relays and contactor relays with extended
operating range 3RH11 22-2K.40, please ask)
Positively-driven operation of contacts in contactor relays
3RH1: Explanations:
Yes, in the basic unit and the auxiliary switch block as well as between the There is positively-driven operation if it is ensured that the NC and NO
basic unit and the snap-on auxiliary switch block (removable) acc. to: contacts cannot be closed at the same time.
• ZH 1/457
• EN 60947-5-1, Appendix L ZH1/457
Safety rules for control units on power-operated presses in the metal-wor-
3RH12: king industry.
Yes, in the basic unit and the auxiliary switch block as well as between the
basic unit and the snap-on auxiliary switch block (fixed) acc. to: EN 60947-5-1, Appendix L
• ZH 1/457 Low-voltage controlgear, control equipment, and switching elements.
• EN 60947-5-1, Appendix L Special requirements for positively-driven contacts
• SUVA
SUVA
Note: Accident prevention regulations of the "Schweizer Unfallverhütungsan-
3RH19 11-.NF.solid-state compatible auxiliary switch blocks have no posi- stalt" (Swiss Institute for Accident Insurance)
tively-driven contacts.
Contact reliability
Contact reliability at 17 V, 1 mA acc. to EN 60947-5-4 Frequency of contact faults <10-8, i. e. <1 fault per 100 million operating
cycles
Contact endurance for AC-15/AC-14 and DC-13 utilization categories
The contact endurance is mainly dependent on the breaking current. It is 30
assumed that the operating mechanisms are switched randomly, i. e. not NSB0_00072
synchronized with the phase angle of the supply system. Basic unit
Million operating cycles (106 )
If magnetic circuits other than the contactor coil systems or solenoid valves 10
are present, e.g. magnetic brakes, protective measures for the load circuits Basic unit
5
are necessary. 4 with aux. block
RC elements and freewheel diodes would be suitable as protective 3 snapped on
measures. 2
DC-13 DC-13
The characteristic curves apply to: 1 220 V 110 V
AC-15/AC-14
• 3RH11, 3RH12 contactor relays 0,5
• 3RH14 latched contactor relays
• 3RH19 11 auxiliary switch blocks.
DC-13
24 V
0,1
0,05
1)
0,01
0,01 0,03 0,05 0,1 0,3 0,5 1 2 3 5 6 7 10 1 a (A)
1 e -DC-13 1 e -DC-13 1 e -AC-15 1 e -DC-13
220 V 110 V < 230 V 24 V
Diagram legend:
1) Snap-on auxiliary switch blocks: Ie/DC-13 max. 6 A.
132 Siemens · 2011

Contactors Type 3RH11, 3RH12 3RH14

Size S00 S00
s and u ratings
Basic units and auxiliary switch blocks
• Rated control supply voltage V AC Max. 600
• Rated voltage V AC 600
• Switching capacity A 600, Q 600
• Uninterrupted current at 240 V AC A 10
General data
Mechanical endurance • Basic units Opera- 30 million 5 million
ting
cycles
• Basic unit with snap-on auxiliary Opera- 10 million
switch block ting
cycles
• Solid-state compatible auxiliary Opera- 5 million
switch block ting
cycles
Protective separation between the coil and the contacts in the basic unit V 400
Shock resistance
• Rectangular pulse AC/DC operation g/ms 10/5 and 5/10
• Sine pulse AC/DC operation g/ms 15/5 and 8/10
Auxiliary conductor and Screw terminals
coil terminals
• Solid mm2 2 x (0.5 ... 1.5) 2 x (0.75 ... 2.5) acc. to IEC 60947; max. 2 x (1 ... 4)
2
• Finely stranded with end sleeve mm 2 x (0.5 ... 1.5) 2 x (0.75 ... 2.5)
• AWG cables, AWG 2 x (20 ... 16) 2 x (18 ... 14) 1 x 12
solid or stranded
Auxiliary conductor and Cage Clamp terminals
coil terminals
• Solid mm2 2 x (0.25 ... 2.5)
• AWG cables, AWG 2 x (24 ... 14)
solid or stranded
(weld-free protection at Ik ≥1 kA)
• Fuse links, gL/gG operational class
- DIAZED, Type 5SB A 10
- NEOZED, Type 5SE A 10
• Or miniature circuit breakers with C characteristic A 6
For corresponding 8WA2 803/8WA2 804 opening tool, see

Catalog LV 1.
An "insulation stop" must be used for conductor cross-sections
≤ 1 mm2, see Catalog LV 1.
Note:
Siemens · 2011 133

Contactors Type 3RH1.

Size S00
Control
• AC operation At 50 Hz 0.8 ... 1.1 x Us
At 60 Hz 0.85 ... 1.1 x Us
• DC operation At +50 °C 0.8 ... 1.1 x Us
At +60 °C 0.85 ... 1.1 x Us
• AC operation, 50 Hz - Closing VA/p.f. 27/0.8
- Closed VA/p.f. 4.6/0.27
• AC operation, 60 Hz - Closing VA/p.f. 24/0.75
- Closed VA/p.f. 3.5/0.27
• DC operation - Closing = Closed W 3.2
Permissible residual current of the electronics
(with 0 signal)
• For AC operation1) < 3 mA x (230 V/Us)
• For DC operation < 10 mA x (24 V/Us)
Operating times2)
(Total break time = OFF-delay + Arcing time)
AC operation Values apply with coil in cold state
• Closing and at operating temperature for ope-
rating range
- ON-delay of NO contact 0.8 ... 1.1 x Us ms 8 ... 35
1.0 x Us ms 10 ... 25
3RH14 minimum operating time ms ≥ 35
- OFF-delay of NC contact 0.8 ... 1.1 x Us ms 6 ... 20
1.0 x Us ms 7 ... 20
• Opening
- OFF-delay of NO contact 0.8 ... 1.1 x Us ms 4 ... 30
1.0 x Us ms 5 ... 30
- ON-delay of NC contact 0.8 ... 1.1 x Us ms 5 ... 30
1.0 x Us ms 7 ... 20
DC operation
• Closing
- ON-delay of NO contact 0.8 ... 1.1 x Us ms 25 ... 100
1.0 x Us ms 30 ... 50
- OFF-delay of NC contact 0.8 ... 1.1 x Us ms 20 ... 90
1.0 x Us ms 25 ... 45
• Opening
- OFF-delay of NO contact 0.8 ... 1.1 x Us ms 7 ... 10
1.0 x Us ms 7 ... 9
- ON-delay of NC contact 0.8 ... 1.1 x Us ms 13 ... 16
1.0 x Us ms 13 ... 15
Dependence of the switching frequency z' on the operational current I' and
operational voltage U' :
z' = z ⋅(Ie/I' ) ⋅(400 V/U' )1.5 ⋅1/hy
1) The 3RT19 16-1GA00 additional load module is recommended for higher
residual currents, see Catalog LV 1.
increased if the contactor coils are attentuated against voltage peaks
134 Siemens · 2011

Contactors Type 3RH1.

Size S00
Load side
Rated operational currents Ie
AC-12 A 10
AC-15/AC-14 Up to 230 V A 6
For rated operational voltage Us 400 V A 3
500 V A 2
690 V A 1
DC-12
For rated operational voltage Us
• 1 conducting path 24 V A 10
60 V A 6
110 V A 3
220 V A 1
440 V A 0.3
600 V A 0.15
• 2 conducting paths in series 24 V A 10
60 V A 10
110 V A 4
220 V A 2
440 V A 1.3
600 V A 0.65
60 V A 10
110 V A 10
220 V A 3.6
440 V A 2.5
600 V A 1.8
DC-13
For rated operational voltage Us
• 1 conducting path 24 V A 101)
60 V A 2
110 V A 1
220 V A 0.3
440 V A 0.14
600 V A 0.1
60 V A 3.5
110 V A 1.3
220 V A 0.9
440 V A 0.2
600 V A 0.1
60 V A 4.7
110 V A 3
220 V A 1.2
440 V A 0.5
600 V A 0.26
Switching frequency z
• In operating cycles/h AC-12/DC-12 h-1 1000
during normal duty AC-15/AC-14 h-1 1000
for utilization category DC-13 h-1 1000
• No-load switching frequency h-1 10000
Dependence of the switching frequency z' on the operational current I' and
operational voltage U' :
z' = z ⋅(Ie/I' ) ⋅(400 V/U' )1.5 ⋅1/h
1) Snap-on auxiliary switch blocks: 6 A.
Siemens · 2011 135

3RH14 latched contactor relays, 4-pole
■ Overview
AC and DC operation RC elements, varistors diodes or diode assemblies can be fitted
to both coils from the front for damping opening surges in the
IEC 60947, EN 60947 (VDE 0660). coil.
The terminal designations comply with EN 50011. The contactor relay can also be switched on and released
The contactor coil and the coil of the release solenoid are both manually (for minimum actuating times, see page 134).
designed for uninterrupted duty.
The number of auxiliary contacts can be extended by means of
auxiliary switch blocks (up to 4 poles).
136 Siemens · 2011

3TH4 contactor relays, 8- and 10-pole
AC and DC operation Contact reliability
IEC 60947 and EN 60947 (VDE 0660). High contact stability at low voltages and currents thanks to the
use of moving double-break contacts, suitable for solid-state cir-
The 3TH42/3TH43 contactor relays are suitable for use in any cuits with currents ≥1 mA for voltages at 17 V.
climate. They are finger-safe according to EN 50274.
Make-before-break contacting
Terminal designations according to EN 50011
The 3TH42/3TH43 contactor relays are available in versions with
In terms of their terminal designations, identification numbers make-before-break contacting (make-before-break
and identification letters, the 3TH42/3TH43 contactor relays con- between 1 NO and 1 NC).
form to the standard EN 50011 for "Specific contactor relays".
The make-before-break time is approximately 1 ms. This is not
sufficient to cause another contactor to close. If the make-be-
fore-break conducting paths are connected in series, a fleeting
contact element is created; the wiping time is approximately
1 ms.
Surge suppression
The 3TH42/3TH43 contactors can be equipped with RC ele-
ments, varistors, diodes or diode assemblies (combination of a
diode and a Zener diode) for damping opening surges. The
surge suppressors can be mounted directly on the coil
(see "Accessories").
Note:
The OFF-delay times of the NO contacts and the ON-delay times
against voltage peaks (noise suppression diode 6 to 10 times;
diode assembly 2 to 6 times, varistor +2 to 5 ms).
Contactors Type 3TH42/3TH43
The contactors are designed for ope- • AC operation
surface.
N S B 0 _ 0 0 0 7 3 a
• DC operation
30° 30°
NSB0_00649
360°
Upright mounting position • AC and DC operation
N S B 0 _ 0 0 4 7 7 a
Special version required
Positively-driven operation in contactor relays with 8 and 10 contacts
3TH42/3TH43: Explanations:
Yes, the contactor relays comply with the conditions for positively-driven There is positively-driven operation if it is ensured that the NC and NO
operation acc. to: contacts cannot be closed at the same time.
• ZH 1/457
• EN 60947-5-1, Appendix L ZH1/457
• SUVA Safety rules for control units on power-operated presses in the metal-wor-
king industry.
EN 60947-5-1, Appendix L
Low-voltage controlgear, control equipment, and switching elements.
Special requirements for positively-driven contacts
SUVA
Accident prevention regulations of the "Schweizer Unfallverhütungsan-
stalt" (Swiss Institute for Accident Insurance)
Siemens · 2011 137


Contact endurance for AC-15/AC-14 and DC-13 utilization categories
The contact endurance is mainly dependent on the breaking current. It is
assumed that the operating mechanisms are switched randomly, i. e. not 30
NSB0_01391a
synchronized with the phase angle of the supply system.
Million operating cycles (10 6)

If magnetic circuits other than the contactor coil systems or solenoid valves
10
are present, e.g. magnetic brakes, protective measures for the load circuits
are necessary. DC-13 AC-15/AC-14
5
RC elements and freewheel diodes would be suitable as protective 4
110 V
measures. 3
2 DC-13 DC-13
220 V 24 V
1
0,5
0,1
0,01 0,03 0,05 0,1 0,3 0,5 1 2 3 4 5 7 10 a (A)
e–
DC-13 e– DC-13 e – DC-13
220 V 110 V 24 V
e – AC-15/AC-14
230 V
v
Diagram legend:
s and u ratings
Basic units
Rated control supply voltage Us Max. 600 V AC, 230 V DC (acc. to UL 240 V DC)
Rated voltage 600 V AC, 600 V DC
General data
Mechanical endurance Basic units Opera- 30 million
ting
cycles
Protective separation between the coil and the main contacts V Up to 500
Shock resistance
• Rectangular pulse - AC operation g/ms 7.7/5 and 4.4/10
• Sine pulse - AC operation g/ms 12/5 and 6.8/10
Screw terminals
• Solid mm2 2 x (0.5 ... 1)1); 2 x (1 ... 2.5)1); 1 x 4

• Terminal screw M3.5
• Fuse links, gL/gG operational class - LV HRC Type 3NA A 16
- DIAZED Type 5SB A 16
- NEOZED Type 5SE, quick A 20
• Miniature circuit breaker - C Characteristic A 16
- B Characteristic A 16
138 Siemens · 2011


Control
AC operation 0.8 ... 1.1 x Us1)
DC operation (except 24 V) 0.8 ... 1.1 x Us
• At 24 V DC 0.8 ... 1.2 x Us
AC operation, 50 Hz, standard version
• Closing VA/p.f. 68/0.82
• Closed VA/p.f. 10/0.29
AC operation, 50/60 Hz, standard version
• Closing, 50 Hz VA/p.f. 77/0.81
• Closed, 50 Hz VA/p.f. 11/0.28
• Closing, 60 Hz VA/p.f. 71/0.75
• Closed, 60 Hz VA/p.f. 9/0.27
AC operation, 50 Hz, USA/Canada
• Closed VA/p.f. 10/0.29
AC operation, 60 Hz, USA/Canada
• Closed VA/p.f. 9.4/0.29 ... 0.3
• Closed VA/p.f. 10.7/0.29
• Closing VA/p.f. 75 ... 90/0.73
• Closed VA/p.f. 8.5 ... 10.7/0.29 ... 0.3
DC operation up to 250 V Closing = Closed W 6.2
For AC operation ≤ 8 mA x (220 V/Us)
For DC operation ≤ 1.25 mA x (220 V/Us)
Operating times2)
Total break time = OFF-delay + arcing time (the values apply up to and
including 20 % undervoltage, 10 % overvoltage, and with the coil in the
cold state and at operating temperature)
AC operation
Closing
• ON-delay NO ms 8 ... 35
• OFF-delay NC ms 6 ... 20
Opening
• OFF-delay NO ms 4 ... 18
• ON-delay NC ms 5 ... 30
Arcing time ms 10
DC operation
Closing
Opening
Arcing time ms 10
Operating times2) at 1.0 x Us
AC operation
Closing
Opening
DC operation
Closing
Opening
1) Coils for USA, Canada and Japan: 0.85 ... 1.1 Us at 60 Hz.
Siemens · 2011 139


Load side
AC-12 A 16
AC-15/AC-14 for rated operational voltage Ue
230 V A 10
400 V A 6
500 V A 4
690 V A 2
DC-12, for rated operational voltage Ue
• 1 conducting path Up to 48 V A 10
110 V A 2.1
220 V A 0.8
440 V A 0.6
600 V A 0.6
• 2 conducting paths in series
Up to 48 V A 10
110 V A 10
220 V A 1.6
440 V A 0.8
600 V A 0.7
Up to 48 V A 10
110 V A 10
220 V A 10
440 V A 1.3
600 V A 1
DC-13, for rated operational voltage Ue
• 1 conducting path
24 V A 10
48 V A 5
110 V A 1
220 V A 0.45
440 V A 0.25
600 V A 0.2
24 V A 10
48 V A 10
110 V A 2.5
220 V A 0.75
440 V A 0.5
600 V A 0.4
24 V A 10
48 V A 10
110 V A 10
220 V A 2
440 V A 0.9
600 V A 0.8
Rated power of induction motors
Acc. to utilization category AC-2 and AC-3, 50 Hz
230/220 V kW 2.4
400/380 V kW 4
500 V kW 4
690/660 V kW 4
Switching frequency z1)
Operating cycles per hour
during normal duty AC-12/DC-12 h-1 1000
for utilization category AC-2 h-1 500
AC-3 h-1 1000
AC-15/AC-14 h-1 3600
DC-13 h-1 3600
No-load switching frequency h-1 10000
1) Dependence of the switching frequency z' on the operational current I'
140 Siemens · 2011

■ Overview 3TH20 . .-0 contactor relays

Terminal designations according to EN 50011 and EN 50005
AC and DC operation
Contactor relay, EN 50 011,
IEC 60947 (VDE 0660). 4 contacts
The terminal designations comply with EN 50011.

3TH2 contactor relays
The 3TH2 contactor relays are suitable for use in any climate.
The contactor relays with screw terminals are finger-safe accor-
ding to EN 50274. Ident. No. 40E Ident. No. 31E, 22E
3TH27 latched contactor relays

The contactor coil and the coil of the release solenoid are both Aux. switch blocks, Aux. switch blocks,
EN 50 011, EN 50 005,
designed for uninterrupted duty. 4 contacts 4 or 2 contacts
RC elements, varistors diodes or diode assemblies can be fitted
to both coils from the front for damping opening surges in the
coil.
The contactor relay can also be switched on and released
manually. Ident. No. 80E, Ident. No. 40, 31,
71E, 62E, 53E, 44E 22, 20, 11, 02
■ Design
3TH2 contactor relays Contactor relay, Contactor relay,
Hilfsschütze
EN 50 011 EN
DIN50EN50
005, 005,
Version 8 contacts 88oroder
6 contacts
6 Kontakte
The 3TH20 contactors with 4 auxiliary contacts are available with
SIGUT screw terminals, 6.3 mm x 0.8 mm flat connectors and
solder pin connections.
The contactors with 6.3 mm x 0.8 mm flat connectors can be
used in the plug-in base with solder pin connections for printed
NSB0_00067b
circuit boards. The contactor relays are coded and the plug-in Ident. No. 80E,
base is codable in order to ensure non-interchangeability. 71E, 62E, 53E, 44E
The 3TH22 contactor relays with 8 integrated contacts are

available with screw terminals. The terminal designations are ac- Surge suppression
cording to EN 50011.
Contact reliability tion of a diode and a Zener diode for short break times) can be
High contact stability at low voltages and currents, suitable for plugged onto all contactors and auxiliary switch blocks with
solid-state circuits with currents ≥ 1 mA at a voltage of 17 V and screw terminals from the front in order to damp opening surges
higher. in the coil. The unit labeling plate must be removed for this
purpose.
Auxiliary switch blocks It can be snapped onto the attached surge suppressor.
The contactor relays with 4 contacts with screw terminals relays
can be expanded by up to four contacts by the addition of snap- Residual current
on auxiliary switch blocks. The 3TX4 490-1J additional load module (see "Accessories")
A cover (with unit labeling plate) must be removed from the front can be used by programmable logic controllers to increase the
of the contactor for this purpose. The auxiliary switch block is permissible residual current and to limit the residual voltage of
then easy to mount. The auxiliary switch blocks can be removed semiconductor outputs.
again by unlocking them with a laterally arranged slide. This module ensures the safe opening of 3TH2/3TF2 contactors
The contactor relays with screw terminals with 4 contacts accor- with direct control through 230 V AC semiconductor outputs. It is
ding to EN 50011, with the identification number 40E, can be ex- accommodated in the same enclosure as the 3TX4 490-3. surge
tended with 80E, 71E, 62E, 53E or 44E auxiliary switch blocks to suppressors and can be plugged into the contactor.
obtain contactor relays with 8 contacts according to EN 50011.
The identification numbers 80E, 71E, 62E, 53E or 44E on the
coded auxiliary switch blocks apply to the complete contactors
(see graphic on the right). These auxiliary switch blocks cannot
be combined with contactor relays with identification number 31E
and 33E.
All contactor relays with screw terminals with 4 contacts accor-
ding to EN 50011, identification number 40E, 31E or 22E, can be
extended with auxiliary switch blocks with identification number
40, 31, 22, 20, 11 or 02 to obtain contactor relays with 6 or 8 con-
tacts according to EN 50005. The identification numbers on the
auxiliary switch blocks apply only to the attached auxiliary
switch blocks (see the graphic on the right).
Siemens · 2011 141

Contactor relays Type 3TH2
Contact endurance for AC-15/AC-14 and
DC-13 utilization categories
The contact endurance is mainly dependent on the breaking 30 NSB00659
current. It is assumed that the operating mechanisms are Coupling links
Million operating cycles (106)

switched randomly, i. e. not synchronized with the phase angle 10
Contactor relays
of the supply system. 5 +coupling links
If magnetic circuits other than the contactor coil systems or 3
2 DC-13 DC-13
solenoid valves are present, e.g. magnetic brakes, protective 220 V 110 V
1
measures for the load circuits are necessary. RC elements and DC-13 AC-15/AC-14
freewheel diodes would be suitable as protective measures. 0,5 24 V
Diagram legend:
Ie = Rated operational current 0,1
Ia = Breaking current 0,05
0,01
0,01 0,03 0,05 0,1 0,3 0,5 1 2 3 4 5 7 10 1 a (A)
1 e- DC-13 1 e - DC-13 1 e - DC-13 1 e - AC-15/AC-14
220 V 110 V 24 V 230 V
v
Contactor relays Auxiliary switch block
Type 3TH20 ..-.... 3TH22 ..-.... 3TX4 ...-..
General data
cycles
• Screw terminals V 690 500 500
• Flat connector 6.3 mm x 0.8 mm V 500 -- --
• Solder pin connections V 500 -- --
• Screw terminals kV 8 6 6
• Flat connector 6.3 mm x 0.8 mm kV 6 -- --
• Solder pin connections kV 6 -- --
Protective separation between coil and contacts V Up to 300
(acc. to EN 61140)
Positively-driven operation of contacts in contactor relays
3TH20: Explanations:
Yes, in the basic unit and the auxiliary switch block as well as between There is positively-driven operation if it is ensured that the NC and NO con-
the basic unit and the snap-on auxiliary switch block (removable) acc. to: tacts cannot be closed at the same time.
• ZH 1/457
• EN 60947-5-1, Appendix L ZH1/457
Safety rules for control units on power-operated presses in the metal-wor-
3TH22: king industry.
Yes, in the basic unit and the auxiliary switch block as well as between
the basic unit and the snap-on auxiliary switch block (fixed) acc. to: EN 60947-5-1, Appendix L
• ZH 1/457 Low-voltage controlgear, control equipment, and switching elements.
• EN 60947-5-1, Appendix L Special requirements for positively-driven contacts
• SUVA
SUVA
Accident prevention regulations of the "Schweizer Unfallverhütungsanstalt"
(Swiss Institute for Accident Insurance)
IP40 coil assembly
Shock resistance
• Rectangular pulse - AC operation g/ms 7/5 and 4/10
- DC operation g/ms 10/5 and 6/10
2)
1) Applies to 50/60 Hz coil
Operating range at 60 Hz: 0.85 ... 1.1 x Us;
at 50 Hz, 1.1 x Us, side-by-side mounting and 100 % ON period the max.
142 Siemens · 2011


Fuse links gL/gG
LV HRC 3NA, DIAZED 5SB, NEOZED 5SE A 6
Weld-free protection at Ik ≥ 1 kA
Control
P.f. 0.41
Closed VA 6.8
P.f. 0.42
P.f. 0.36
Closed VA 6.1
P.f. 0.46
• AC operation, 50/60 Hz1) Closing VA 16.5/13.2
P.f. 0.43/0.38
Closed VA 8.0/5.4
P.f. 0.48/0.42
AC operation mA ≤ 3 x (220 V/Us)
DC operation mA ≤ 1 x (220 V/Us)
operating range
• AC operation
- Closing ON-delay NO ms 5 ... 20
OFF-delay NC ms 4 ... 12
- Opening OFF-delay NO ms 3 ... 24
ON-delay NC ms 3 ... 20
• DC operation
• AC operation
• DC operation
Main circuit
AC capacity
Utilization category AC-12 A 10
Rated operational current Ie (at 60 °C)
for rated operational voltage Ue
230/220 V A 4
400/380 V A 3
500 V A 2
690/660 V A 1
Siemens · 2011 143


Main circuit
Load rating with DC
Utilization category DC-12 A 10
• 1 conducting path1) Up to 24 V A 4
60 V A 2
110 V A 1.1
240/220 V A 0.5
• 2 conducting paths in series Up to 24 V A 10
60 V A 10
110 V A 4
240/220 V A 2
60 V A 10
110 V A 6
240/220 V A 2.5
• 1 conducting path Up to 24 V A 2.1
60 V A 0.9
110 V A 0.52
240/220 V A 0.27
60 V A 3.5
110 V A 1.3
240/220 V A 0.9
60 V A 4.7
110 V A 3
240/220 V A 1.2
Induction motors
Rated power of induction motors
Acc. to utilization category 110 V kW 0.2
AC-2 and AC-3 230/220 V kW 0.55
400/380 V kW 1.1
500 V kW 1.5
690/660 V kW 1.5
Switching frequency
Rated operation for utilization category
Dependence of the switching fre- AC-12/DC-12 h-1 1000
quency z' on the operational current I'
and operational voltage U' :
z' = z ⋅(Ie/I' ) ⋅(400 V/U' )1.5 ⋅1/h AC-2 h-1 500
AC-3 h-1 1000
AC-15/AC-14 h-1 1200
DC-13 h-1 1200
No-load switching frequency h-1 10000
• Solid mm2 2 x (0.5 ... 2.5)

Flat connectors
• Finely stranded
When using a plug-in sleeve - 6.3 ... 1 mm2 0.5 ... 1
- 6.3 ... 2.5 mm2 1 ... 2.5
1) Contact endurance 0.1 x 106 operating cycles.
144 Siemens · 2011

3RH11 coupling relays for switching
auxiliary circuits, 4-pole
■ Application ■ Function
DC operation No auxiliary switch blocks can be snapped onto
3RH11 coupling relays.
IEC 60947 and EN 60947 (VDE 0660).
Coupling relays have a low power consumption, an extended
The 3RH11 coupling relays for switching auxiliary circuits are magnetic coil operating range and an integrated surge suppres-
tailored to the special requirements of working with electronic sor for damping opening surges
controls. (exceptions: 3RH11 . .-.HB40 and 3RH11 . .-.MB4.-0KT0).
The 3RH11 coupling relays cannot be extended with auxiliary
switch blocks.
All technical specifications not mentioned in the table below are identical to those of the 3RH11 contactor relays (see page 132).
The size S00 coupling relays (3RH11) cannot be extended with auxiliary switch blocks.
Contactor type 3RH11 . .-.HB40 3RH11 . .-.JB40 3RH11 . .-.KB40
Size S00 S00 S00
Power consumption of the magnetic coil
(for cold coil)
Closing = Closed
At Us = 17 V W 1.2
At Us = 24 V W 2.3
At Us = 30 V W 3.6
Permissible residual current < 10 mA x (24 V/Us)
Of the electronics for 0 signal
Overvoltage configuration of the magnetic coil No overvoltage damping With diode With varistor
A2 A2
A1 A3
U
14 14
NSB00228
13 13
Operating times
• Closing at 17 V
- ON-delay NO ms 40 ... 120
- OFF-delay NC ms 30 ... 70
• At 24 V
• At 30 V
• Closing at 17 ... 30 V
- OFF-delay NO ms 7 ... 17 40 ... 60 7 ... 17
- ON-delay NC ms 22 ... 30 60 ... 70 22 ... 30
Upright mounting position Request required
Contactor type 3RH11 . .-.MB40-0KT0 3RH11 . .-.VB40 3RH11 . .-.WB40

Size S00 S00 S00
Power consumption of the magnetic coil W 1.4
(for cold coil)
Closing = Closed at Us = 24 V
Permissible residual current < 8 mA x (24 V/Us)
Of the electronics for 0 signal
Overvoltage configuration of the magnetic coil Diode, varistor or RC element, Built-in diode Built-in varistor
attachable
U
Operating times of the coupling relays
• Closing at 20.5 V
- OFF-delay ms 110 ... 20
- ON-delay ms 120 ... 30
• At 24 V
• At 44 V
- OFF-delay ms 50 ... 10
- ON-delay ms 60 ... 15
• Closing at 17 ... 30 V
- OFF-delay NO ms 5 ... 20 20 ... 80 5 ... 20
- ON-delay NC ms 10 ... 30 30 ... 90 10 ... 30
Upright mounting position Request required
Siemens · 2011 145

3RT Coupling Relays
3RT10 coupling relays (interface),
3-pole, 3 ... 11 kW
■ Application ■ Function
DC operation Coupling relays have a low power consumption, an extended
operating range of the magnetic coil and an integrated surge
IEC 60947, EN 60947 (VDE 0660). suppressor for damping opening surges
The 3RT10 coupling relays for switching motors are tailored to (exceptions: 3RT10 1.-1HB4. and 3RT10 1.-.MB4.-0KT0).
the special requirements of working with electronic controls.
The 3RT10 1. coupling relays cannot be extended with auxiliary
switch blocks.
Two single-pole auxiliary switch blocks can be fitted to the
3RT10 2. coupling relays.
All technical specifications not mentioned in the table below are identical to
those of the 3RT10 contactors for switching motors (see page 20).
The 3RT10 1. coupling relays cannot be extended with auxiliary switch blocks.
Two single-pole auxiliary switch blocks can be fitted to the 3RT10 2. coupling relays (see "Accessories").
Contactors Type 3RT10 1.-.HB4. 3RT10 1.-.JB4. 3RT10 1.-.KB4. 3RT10 2.-.KB4.
Size S00 S00 S00 S0
General data
ting
cycles
Control
Power consumption of the At Us 17 V W 1.2 2.1
magnetic coil 24 V W 2.3 4.2
(for cold coil) 30 V W 3.6 6.6
Closing = Closed
Permissible residual current < 10 mA x (24 V/Us) < 6 mA x (24 V/Us)
Of the electronics (for 0 signal)
Overvoltage configuration of the magnetic coil No overvoltage With diode With varistor With varistor
damping
U U

• Closing
- At 17 V ON-delay NO ms 40 ... 120 93 ... 270
OFF-delay NC ms 30 ... 70 83 ... 250
- At 24 V ON-delay NO ms 30 ... 60 64 ... 87
OFF-delay NC ms 20 ... 40 55 ... 78
- At 30 V ON-delay NO ms 20 ... 50 53 ... 64
OFF-delay NC ms 15 ... 30 45 ... 56
• Opening at 17... 30 V OFF-delay NO ms 7 ... 17 40 ... 60 7 ... 17 18 ... 19
ON-delay NC ms 22 ... 30 60 ... 70 22 ... 30 24 ... 25
146 Siemens · 2011

3RT Coupling Relays
3RT10 coupling relays (interface),
3-pole, 3 ... 11 kW
All technical specifications not mentioned in the table below are identical to
those of the 3RT10 contactors for switching motors (see page 20).
The 3RT10 1. coupling relays cannot be extended with auxiliary switch blocks.
Power consumption of the coils 1.4 W at 24 V.
Contactors Type 3RT10 1. -1MB4. -0KT0 3RT10 1 .-1VB4. 3RT10 1.-1WB4.

Size S00 S00 S00
General data
ting
cycles
Control
Power consumption of the At Us 24 V W 1.4
magnetic coil
(for cold coil)
Closing = Closed
Permissible residual current, On request
upright mounting position
Overvoltage configuration of the magnetic coil No overvoltage With diode With varistor
damping
U

• Closing
- At 20.5 V ON-delay NO ms 40 ... 130
- At 24 V ON-delay NO ms 40 ... 100
- At 44 V ON-delay NO ms 20 ... 30
• Opening OFF-delay NO ms 9 ... 12 45 ... 65 10 ... 15
ON-delay NC ms 12 ... 16 52 ... 72 15 ... 20
Siemens · 2011 147

3TX7, 3RS18 Coupling Relays
3TX7 Coupling Relays, Narrow Design
Relay couplers
■ Design ■ Function
Installation instructions Surge suppression
Snap-on mounting is possible on horizontal and vertical stan- The coupling links have been tested with 1 x 105 operating cyc-
dard mounting rails. In the case of vertical standard mounting les at AC-15 operation with the values specified in the
rails and closely mounted units, the maximum permissible ambi- Technical specifications.
ent temperature Tu = 40 °C. Any service position is possible.
If inductive loads are connected in parallel, the endurance of the
If the coupling elements are operated continuously 24 hours per relay couplers can be increased.
day (100 % ON period) at the maximum permissible rated con-
trol supply voltage and the maximum permissible ambient tem- Note:
perature, it is recommended that no similar equipment or other If capacitive loads without series resistors are switched, which li-
units that generate heat are placed directly adjoining the coup- mit temporary peak currents, microscopic welding of the relay
ling elements because this can reduce the endurance of the contacts may result.
couplers.
A distance > 10 mm to the right and left of the coupling link re-
duces the risk of a premature failure under these operating
conditions.
I/O devices Electronic control Actuators

110 V AC 110 V AC
230 V AC 24 V DC 24 V DC 230 V AC
Output
Input
M
Pushbutton Coupling link Coupling link Motor
NSB0_00186
Position contactor
switch
Connecting a cable to the spring-type terminals
Type 3TX7 002/3TX7 003
General data
Protective separation for relay couplers1) V Up to 300 AC
Between the coil and the contacts acc. to EN 60947-1, Appendix N
Degree of protection • Connections for relay couplers IP20
• Enclosure IP30
Short-circuit protection acc. to IEC 60947-5-1 A 4
Fuse links, gL/gG operational class
Screw terminals
• Solid mm2 1 x (0.25 ... 4)

2
• Finely stranded with or without end sleeve mm 1 x (0.5 ... 2.5)
Corresponding opening tool Screwdriver, 3.5 mm x 0.5 mm (8WA2 804)
For 3TX7 003: Spring-type terminals
• Solid or finely stranded mm2 1 x (0.08 ... 2.5)

Corresponding opening tool Screwdriver, 3.5 mm x 0.5 mm (8WA2 803)
1) For 3TX7 00.-1FB02, no protective separation according to EN 61140.
148 Siemens · 2011

Relay couplers
Type 3TX7 002-/3TX7 003- 1AB02 1AB00 1BB00 1FB02 1CB00 2AB00 2AE00 1BF00 2AF00 2AF05
2BF02
Control side
Operating range 0.8 ... 1.25 x Us 0.8 ... 1.1 x Us
Power consumption at Us W 0.75 0.75 0.75 1.2 1.2 0.75 0.75 1.2 1.2 1.2
Release voltage % ≥ 10 ≥ 25
Max. permissible cable length AC m 300 300 300 300 300 300 15 7 7 350
(min. cross-section: 0.75 mm2) DC m 2000
Permissible residual current mA 2 2 2 2 4 2 0.4 0.35 0.35 4
of the electronics (with 0 signal)
Operating times at Us • ON-delay ms <8
• OFF-delay ms < 10
Function display LED yellow
Type 3TX7 002/3TX7 003

Load side
Rated currents1)
Continuous thermal current Ith A 6
Acc. to utilization categories (EN 60947)

(3TX7 002-1CB00: AC-15, Ie = 2 A)
• AC-15 - At 24 V A 3
- At 110 V A 3
- At 230 V A 3
• DC-13 - At 24 V A 1
- At 110 V A 0.2
- At 230 V A 0.1
Switching current
With resistive load to VDE 0435 (relay standard)
and EN 60947
• AC-12 - At 24 V A 6
- At 110 V A 6
- At 230 V A 6
• DC-12 - At 24 V A 6
- At 110 V A 0.2
- At 230 V A 0.2
Switching voltage AC/DC V 24 ... 250
• Min. contact load for 3TX7 00.- . ..02 mA 1 V, 0.1 AC/DC
Mechanical endurance Operating 20 x 106
cycles
Electrical endurance at Ie Operating 1x105
cycles
Switching frequency Operating 5000
cycles 1/h
Contact material for 3TX7 00.-. . .02 Ag/Ni 0.15 hard gold-plated
Power limit hard gold-plating for 3TX7 00.-. . .02
• Voltage V 30
• Current mA 20
1) Capacitive loads can result in micro-weldings on the contacts.
Note:
relay couplers can be increased.
Siemens · 2011 149

Relay couplers
Type 3TX7 004/3TX7 005

General data
Protective separation for relay couplers V Up to 300 AC
Degree of protection • Terminals IP20
• Enclosure IP30
For 3TX7 004: Screw terminals
• Solid mm2 1 x (0.25 ... 4)

For 3TX7 005: Spring-type terminals

2
• Finely stranded with end sleeve mm 1 x (0.25 ... 1.5)
Control side
Operating range • At Us = 24 V AC/DC 0.7 ... 1.25 x Us
• At Us = 110 V and 230 V AC/DC 0.8 ... 1.1 x Us
Power consumption at Us 0.5 W; 3TX7 00.-. . .05: 1 W at 230 V DC/6 VA at 230 V AC
Permissible residual current of the electronics (for 0 signal)
• Width 6.2 mm
• Us = 24 V mA 2
• Us > 24 V mA 0.5
• From 12.5 mm width mA 2.5
Exceptions: 3TX7 00.-1BF05 mA 5 (Us = 230 V AC)
mA 0.5 (Us = 230 V DC)
Operating times at Us
• ON-delay ms <8
• OFF-delay ms < 15
Type 3TX7 004/3TX7 005 -1.F00 -1.B. . -1BF05

-2ME02 -2MB02
-2MF02
Max. permissible cable length (min. conductor cross-section: 0.75 mm2)
AC m 40 400 350
DC m 2000 2000 2000
150 Siemens · 2011

Relay couplers
Type 3TX7 00.-1B/-1C/-1G/-1H/-1L 3TX7 00.-.M

Load side
Rated operational currents Ie1)
• Continuous thermal current Ith A 6
acc. to utilization categories (EN 60947)
- AC-15 At 24 V A 3 2
At 110 V A 3 2
At 230 V A 3 2
- DC-13 At 24 V A 1
At 110 V A 0.2
At 230 V A 0.1
Switching current with resistive load to VDE 0435 (relay standard)
and VDE 0660
- AC-12 At 24 V A 6
At 110 V A 6
At 230 V A 6
- DC-12 At 24 V A 6
At 110 V A 0.3
At 230 V A 0.2
Power limit for hard gold-plating • Voltage V 30
• Current mA 20
Min. switching voltage (reliability 1 ppm)2)
• Standard contact 17 V DC/5 mA
• Hard gold-plated contacts 5 V DC/1 mA
Endurance • Mechanical Operating 20 x 106
cycles
• Electrical (at Ie) Operating 1 x 106 0.5 x 106
cycles
cycles 1/h
2) 1 ppm = 1st fault in one million operating cycles.
Note:
relay couplers can be increased.
Siemens · 2011 151

Relay couplers with plug-in design
■ Design
Coupling links are used to connect signals to and from a PLC. For easy linking of the signals, each terminal can be jumpered
The plug-in relays enable the relay to be replaced at the end of using an external connecting comb.
its service life without detaching the wiring.
Type 3TX7 01.-1
General data
Protective separation V Up to 300 AC
Degree of protection • Enclosure IP20
• Relays IP40
Screw terminals
• Solid mm2 1 x (0.5 ... 2.5)

• Finely stranded with or without end sleeve mm2 1 x (0.5 ... 1.5)
Permissible opening tool Screwdriver with blade width 3.0 mm x 0.5 mm
Type 3TX7 01.-1.H 3TX7 01.-1.B 3TX7 01.-1.E 3TX7 01. -1. F
Control side
Operating range 0.9 ... 1.1 Us 0.7 ... 1.25 Us 0.8 ... 1.1 Us 0.8 ... 1.1 Us
Power consumption at Us (24 V/115 V/230 V) W < 0.5/0.5/1
Release voltage % 10 of Us
Max. permissible cable length
(min. conductor cross-section: 0.75 mm²)
• AC m -- 100 70 40
• DC m 2000 2000 800 800
Permissible residual current of the electronics (for 0 signal) mA 1 2 0.3 0.3
Operating times at Us
• ON-delay ms <6 <7 <8 <8
• OFF-delay ms <6 <7 < 20 < 20
Protection circuit
• DC Freewheel diode + Reverse polarity protection
• AC Rectifier bridge
Type 3TX7 01.-1

Load side
Rated currents1)
• Rated operational currents Ie
- AC-15 At 24 V A 3
At 110 V A 3
At 230 V A 3
- DC-13 At 24 V A 1
At 110 V A 0.2
At 230 V A 0.1
Min. contact load (reliability 1 ppm)2)
• Standard contact 17 V DC/5 mA
• Hard gold-plated contacts 5 V DC/1 mA
Mechanical endurance Operating 20 × 106
cycles
Electrical endurance at Ie Operating 100000
acc. to AC-15 cycles
cycles 1/h
Note: If inductive loads are connected in parallel, the endurance 1) Capacitive loads can result in micro-weldings on the contacts.
of the relay couplers can be increased. 2) 1 ppm = 1st fault in one million operating cycles.
152 Siemens · 2011

Semiconductor couplers
AC and DC operation Surge suppression
EN 60664-1, EN 60947 and EN 50005; optocouplers: In the case of optocouplers, the contact element is a semicon-
EN 60747-5, IEC 61131-2 (programmable controllers). ductor. These are not subject to wear; so welding is not possible.
In the coupling links in double-decker design, the connections Note:
are arranged on two levels; the units are extremely compact. With semiconductors, the switching current is not dependent on
Connection method: screw or spring-type terminals. For test pur- the inductance of the load, i. e. the switching current for a DC-13
poses, versions are available with manual 0 automatic switches. load is the same as that for an inductive DC-12 load. This means
that coupling links with a semiconductor output are particularly
The input and output coupling links differ with regard to the po- suitable for inductive loads such as solenoid valves. It is not re-
sitioning of the terminals and the LEDs. For equipment identifi- levant to specify the number of operating cycles because this
cation purposes, each coupling link has a blank labeling plate. does not affect the endurance of the semiconductor provided it
In accordance with the technical specifications of electronic sys- is not overheated.
tems, the coupling links have a lower power consumption.
■ Design
Installation instructions
Snap-on mounting is possible on horizontal and vertical stan-
dard mounting rails. In the case of vertical standard mounting
rails and closely mounted units, the maximum permissible ambi-
ent temperature Tu = 40 °C. Any service position is possible.
If the coupling elements are operated continuously 24 hours per
day (100 % ON period) at the maximum permissible rated con-
trol supply voltage and the maximum permissible ambient tem-
perature, it is recommended that no similar equipment or other
units that generate heat are placed directly adjoining the coup-
ling elements because this can reduce the endurance of the
couplers.
A distance > 10 mm to the right and left of the coupling link re-
duces the risk of a premature failure under these operating
conditions. Connecting a cable to the spring-type terminals
Optocouplers switch using semiconductors. These are not sub-
ject to wear; welding is not possible.
The 6.2 mm wide optocouplers have an opening in the right-
hand side of the casing. They can, like relay couplers, be moun-
ted side-by-side without gaps.
I/O devices Electronic control Actuators

110 V AC 110 V AC
230 V AC 24 V DC 24 V DC 230 V AC
Output
Input
M
Pushbutton Coupling link Coupling link Motor
NSB0_00186
Position contactor
switch
Siemens · 2011 153

Type 3TX7 002-1.F.5
General data
Derating diagram for 3TX7 002-3AB01 load Rated insulation voltage Ui V 300
current depending on the ambient (degree of pollution 3)
temperature Tu Optoelectronic coupling element for V Up to 300
(A) protective separation
Continuous
Acc. to EN 60947-1, Appendix N
current per Permissible ambient temperature
channel
1.5 Separate • During operation °C -25 ... +60
Between Conductor cross-sections Screw terminals
2 modules
with 5 mm
1
clearance each and • Solid mm2 1 x (0.25 ... 4)
1 W power loss each • Finely stranded with or without end mm2 1 x (0.5 ... 2.5)
sleeve
0.5 • Terminal screws M3
NSB0_00187
20 40 60 u (°C)
Type 3TX7002- 3AB00 3AB01 4AB00 4AG00

Control side
Operating range V 17 ... 30 DC 11 ... 30 DC 17 ... 30 AC/DC 88 ... 264 AC
Control side power consumption
At 17 V DC mA < 18 <5 -- --
At 24 V DC mA < 20 <7 -- --
At 30 V DC mA < 22 < 8.5 -- --
At 17 V AC/DC mA -- -- < 10 --
At 24 V AC/DC mA -- -- < 14 --
At 30 V AC/DC mA -- -- < 18 --
At 88 V AC mA -- -- -- <9
At 230 V AC mA -- -- -- < 24
At 264 V AC mA -- -- -- < 28
Release voltage V >5 >8 >5 > 40
Operating times
• ON-delay At 17 V DC ms < 10 < 0.1 1 --
At 24 V DC ms < 10 < 0.1 1 --
At 30 V DC ms < 10 < 0.1 1 --
At 17 V AC/DC ms -- -- <1 --
At 24 V AC/DC ms -- -- <1 --
At 30 V AC/DC ms -- -- <1 --
At 88 V AC ms -- -- -- < 18
At 230 V AC ms -- -- -- < 20
At 264 V AC ms -- -- -- < 22
• OFF-delay At 17 V DC ms < 10 < 0.1 < 18 --
At 24 V DC ms < 10 < 0.1 < 25 --
At 30 V DC ms < 10 < 0.1 < 30 --
At 17 V AC/DC ms -- -- < 18 --
At 24 V AC/DC ms -- -- < 25 --
At 30 V AC/DC ms -- -- < 30 --
At 88 V AC ms -- -- -- < 10
At 230 V AC ms -- -- -- < 20
At 264 V AC ms -- -- -- < 25
Function display LED yellow LED yellow LED yellow LED yellow
Max. permissible cable length AC m -- -- 1000 140
(min. cond. cross-section: 0.75 mm2) DC m 2000 2000 2000 --
Load side
Switching current A 1.8 1.5 (see dera- 0.1 0.1
ting diagram)
Short-time loading capacity A 20 4 1 1
ms 20 200 20 20
Contacts 1 NO, 1 NO, 1 NO, 1 NO,
Triac transistor transistor transistor
Switching voltage1) • Effective AC 50/60 Hz V 48 ... 264 -- -- --
(operating range) • DC -- ≤ 60 ≤ 30 ≤ 30
Minimum load current mA 60 -- -- --
Voltage drop conducting V ≤ 1.5 ≤ 1.1 ≤ 1.7 ≤ 0.3
Permissible residual current of the electronics (with 0 signal) mA <5 < 0.1 < 0.1 < 0.001
Switching frequency at Ie Hz 1 1 5 5
1) Observe minimum switching voltage for 3TX7 002-3AB00.
154 Siemens · 2011

Type 3TX7 002

General data
Protective separation acc. to EN 60947-1, Appendix N for optocouplers V Up to 300
Permissible ambient temperature
• During operation °C -25 ... +60
For 3TX7 004 Screw terminals
• Solid mm2 1 x (0.25 ... 4)

Permissible opening tool Screwdriver, 3.5 mm x 0.5 mm (8WA2 804)
For 3TX7 005 Spring-type terminals

Permissible opening tool Screwdriver, 3.5 mm x 0.5 mm (8WA2 803)
Type 3TX7 004-/3TX7 005- 3AB04 3AC.4 3AC03 3PB54 4PG24

Control side
Operating range V 11 ... 30 DC 110
...
230
AC/DC
Power consumption
• At 24 V DC W ≤ 0.5 ≤ 0.5 ≤ 0.25 ≤ 0.2 --
• At 230 V AC W -- -- -- -- ≤ 1.5
Release voltage V 6 5 6 9 20
Permissible residual current of the electronics (for 0 signal) mA 2.3 2.6 1.5 1.5 0.4
Operating times
• ON-delay ms 2.5 0.3 10 0.3 10
• OFF-delay ms 8 4 10 0.3 12
Max. permissible cable length (min. conductor cross-section: 0.75 mm2) m 1700 2000 2000 2000 40
Load side
Switching voltage V 10 ... 48 DC 10 ... 30 DC 24 ... 250 AC 10 ... 30 DC 10 ... 30 DC
Switching current A 0.5 5 2 1.5 0.1
Short-time loading capacity
A 1.5 Short-circuit 100 Short-circuit 0.2
resistant1) resistant2)
ms 20 -- 20 -- 3
Contacts 1 NO, transistor 1 NO, Triac 1 NO, transistor
Minimum load current mA -- 500 3) 50 -- --
Voltage drop conducting V ≤1 ≤ 0.5 ≤ 1.6 ≤ 0.5 ≤ 1.5
Leakage current of the electronics for 0 signal mA < 0.1 < 0.1 <6 < 0.1 < 0.1
Switching frequency for resistive load Hz 50 50 1 500 25
1) In the event of a short-circuit or overload, the semiconductor output swit-
ches off. In order to operate the device again, it must be temporarily dis-
connected from the power supply.
2) In the event of a short-circuit or overload, the current is limited by the
semiconductor output.
3) If the current falls below the minimum load current, the built-in semicon-
ductor detects an open circuit in the load circuit. The control must be tem-
porarily switched off for resetting.
Siemens · 2011 155

Type 3TX7 004-/3TX7 005- 3PB74 3PG74

Control side
Operating range V 11 ... 30 DC 88 ... 253 AC/DC
Power consumption
• At 24 V DC W 0.2 --
• At 110 V DC W -- 0.2
• At 230 V AC W -- ≤ 1.5
Release voltage V 6 25
Permissible residual current of the electronics (for 0 signal) mA 1.2 1
Operating times
• ON-delay ms 0.2 1.5
• OFF-delay ms 1.0 75
Max. permissible cable length (min. conductor cross-section: 0.75 mm2) m 2000 40
Load side
Switching voltage max.
• Min. V 11 DC
• Max. V 30 DC
Switching current A 3
Short-time loading capacity A Short-circuit resistant1)
ms --
Contacts 1 NO, transistor
Minimum load current mA --
Voltage drop conducting V ≤ 0.5
Leakage current of the electronics for 0 signal mA 0.1
Switching frequency for resistive load 1/s 10
1) In the event of a short-circuit or overload, the current is limited by the
semiconductor output.
156 Siemens · 2011

3RS18 Coupling Relays with Industrial Housing
Relay couplers
■ Overview ■ Application
The new 3RS18 coupling relays are couplers in the well-proven Typical applications are found wherever solid-state compatible
standard 22.5 mm timing relay enclosure. The series comprises contacts are required and equipment with a wide voltage range
relays with 1, 2 and 3 changeover contacts with screw and is implemented.
spring-type connections for combined voltages and wide vol-
tage ranges.
Type 3RS1800
General data
Rated insulation voltage Ui degree of pollution 3 V 500
Protective separation acc. to EN 60947-1, Appendix N V 300
between the coil and the contacts and between the individual contacts.
Degree of protection acc. to EN 60529
• Enclosure IP20
• Cover IP40
Permissible Any
Shock resistance g/ms 15/11
Half-sine acc. to IEC 60028-2-27
Vibration resistance g/ms 10 ... 55/0.35
Acc. to IEC 60068-2-6
Electromagnetic compatibility (EMC) IEC 61000-6-2/IEC 61000-6-4
Tests acc. to basic specification
Screw terminals
• Solid mm2 1 x (0.5 ... 4); 2 x (0.5 ... 2.5)

• AWG cables, solid or stranded mm2 2 x (20 ... 14)
• Tightening torque Nm 0.8 ... 1.2
Corresponding opening tool Standard screwdriver, size 2 or Pozidriv 2
Spring-type terminals
• Solid mm2 2 x (0.25 ... 1.5)

• Finely stranded with end sleeve mm2 2 x (0.25 ... 1)
Corresponding opening tool Screwdriver with 3 mm blade or 8WA2 807 opening tool
Control side
Operating range 0.85 ... 1.1 x Us
Rated power
• Max. DC W 1
• Max. AC VA 8
Mains buffering
• Depends on version ms 5 ... 100
Max. permissible cable length
330 pF/m AC • 1 CO - AC m 100
Min. cross-section: 0.75 mm2 DC 1 CO - DC m 2000
• 2 CO - AC m 200
1 CO - DC m 1500
• 3 CO - AC m 200
1 CO - DC m 1500
Permissible residual current mA 2
Of the electronics (for 0 signal)
Temporarily flowing capacitor charging currents mA 450 for ≤ 500 μs1)
On energizing supply voltage
1) Note the short-circuit limitation for control with the semiconductor version!
Siemens · 2011 157

3RS18 Coupling Relays with Industrial Housing
Relay couplers
Type 3RS18 ..-....0 3RS18 ..-....1

Load side
• AC-15
- At 24 V A 3
- At 110 V A 3
- At 230 V A 3
- At 400 V A 3
• DC-13
- At 24 V A 1
- At 110 V A 0.2
- At 230 V A 0.1
Switching current for resistive load
• AC-12
- At 24 V A 5
- At 115 V A 5
- At 230 V A 5
- At 400 V A 5
• DC-12
- At 24 V A 5
- At 115 V A 0.2
- At 230 V A 0.2
Switching voltage
• Max. AC V 400
• Max. DC V 250
Contact material AgSnO2 AgNi 0.15 hard gold-plated
Min. contact load
• Standard contact 17 V DC/5 mA at 1 ppm fault --
• Hard gold-plated contacts -- 5 V DC/1 mA at 1 ppm fault
Endurance
• Mechanical Operating 20 x 106
cycles
• Electrical (at Ie) Operating 1 x 106
cycles
Operating times
• Max. ON-delay at Us ms 8 (for 3RS18 00-. .W0. < 30)
• Max. OFF-delay at Us ms 30 (for 3RS18 00-. .W0. < 150)
cycles 1/h
Short-circuit protection A 4
Weld-free protection with gL/gG operational class at Ik ≥ 1 kA
158 Siemens · 2011

Coupling Relays with LZS, LZX Plug-in Relays
Plug-in relay couplers
■ Overview
The LZX complete units and accessory parts previously availa- Prices for the new LZS series are lower than for the previous LZX
ble are no longer listed in this catalog. They can still be supplied series.
however in limited quantities. In their place you will now find the
new LZS types. LZS complete units are fully compatible with Note:
their predecessors, the LZX complete units. The LZX plug-in re- In addition the LZS series offers not only service-proven screw
lays have not been changed and are used accordingly in both connections but also versions with plug-in terminals.
the LZS and the LZX series. The following conversion list will help you to change over from
Due to differences in geometry the LED modules, plug-in bases, the LZX types previously sold to the new LZS types. Please con-
retaining brackets and labels can be combined and/or used in tact your regional adviser if you have any questions.
only the respective series, LZS or LZX.
List for converting from LZX to LZS plug-in relay couplers:
List for converting from LZX to LZS accessories for individual
Complete units modules:
Previous Order No. New Order No. Accessories for
LZX:PT3A5L24 LZS:PT3A5L24 individual modules
LZX:PT3A5R24 LZS:PT3A5R24 Previous Order No. New Order No.
LZX:PT3A5S15 LZS:PT3A5S15 LZX:MT28800 LZS:MT28800
LZX:PT3A5T30 LZS:PT3A5T30 LZX:MT78750 LZS:MT78750
LZX:PT5A5L24 LZS:PT5A5L24 LZX:PT16016 LZS:PT170241)
LZS:PT170212)
LZX:PT5A5R24 LZS:PT5A5R24
LZX:PT16040 LZS:PT17040
LZX:PT5A5S15 LZS:PT5A5S15
LZX:PT5A5T30 LZS:PT5A5T30
LZX:PT5B5L24 LZS:PT5B5L24
LZX:PT5B5R24 LZS:PT5B5R24
LZX:PT5B5S15 LZS:PT5B5S15
LZX:PT5B5T30 LZS:PT5B5T30
LZX:RPMG0024 LZS:PTMG0024
LZX:RT3A4L24 LZS:RT3A4L24
LZX:RT3A4R24 LZS:RT3A4R24
LZX:RT3A4S15 LZS:RT3A4S15
LZX:RPML0024 LZS:PTML0024
LZX:RT3A4T30 LZS:RT3A4T30
LZX:RT3B4L24 LZS:RT3B4L24
LZX:RT3B4R24 LZS:RT3B4R24
LZX:RPMT00A0 LZS:PTMT00A0
LZX:RT3B4S15 LZS:RT3B4S15
LZX:RPMU0548 LZS:PTMU0524
LZX:RT3B4T30 LZS:RT3B4T30
LZX:RPMU0730 LZS:PTMU0730
LZX:RT4A4L24 LZS:RT4A4L24
LZX:RT16016 LZS:RT17016
LZX:RT4A4R24 LZS:RT4A4R24
LZX:RT4A4S15 LZS:RT4A4S15
LZX:RT4A4T30 LZS:RT4A4T30
LZX:RY16040 LZS:RT17040
LZX:RT4B4L24 LZS:RT4B4L24
LZX:RT4B4R24 LZS:RT4B4R24 1) LZS:PT17024 for PT standard base: Without logical isolation, screw
terminals.
LZX:RT4B4S15 LZS:RT4B4S15
2) LZS:PT1721 for PT base with logical isolation, screw terminals and plug-in
LZX:RT4B4T30 LZS:RT4B4T30 terminals.
Siemens · 2011 159

■ Design ■ Function
Plug-in relay coupling links can be ordered complete or as In accordance with the technical specifications of electronic sys-
single modules. tems, the coupling links have a lower power consumption. In the
versions equipped with LEDs, these indicate the switching state.
Mounting The LZS:PT/MT plug-in relay couplers have a test button. This
The relays are plugged into the base and this is snapped onto a can be used to force the plug-in relay coupler into the tripped
TH 35 standard mounting rail according to EN 60715. state and to lock it. This is indicated by a raised petrol-colored
lever.
A retaining bracket can be ordered for the MT series that additi-
onally fixes the relay into a plug-in base (under conditions of in- Surge suppression
creased mechanical stress). For the RT and PT series, a com- The 24 V DC relays LZX:RT and LZX: PT with LEDs can be sup-
bined fixing and ejection bracket is available which can be used plied with, all others without integral surge suppression (free-
to remove the relay where access is difficult, for example, when wheel diode connected in parallel with A1/A2). The positive sup-
relays are mounted side-by-side. ply voltage must be connected to coil terminal A1.
They can be mounted as required.
Logical disconnection
The terminals for the contacts and the terminals for the coil are
arranged on separate levels, e. g. above for contacts and below
for coil. Logical isolation is not necessarily protective separation.
Protective separation
For protective separation, transfer of the voltage of one circuit to
another circuit is prevented to a suitable degree of safety (requi-
rements and tests are described in EN 60947-1 in Appendix N).
Control with solid-state output
In the case of solid-state outputs (e. g. BERO) with overload and
short-circuit protection, you must make allowance during confi-
guration for the temporarily flowing capacitor charging currents!
This is possible, for example, by using a suitable LZS plug-in re-
lay coupler.
160 Siemens · 2011

Relay type LZX:RT print relay, 8-pole, LZX:PT industrial relay, 8-, 11- and 14-pole,
(12.7 mm) 1 CO/2 CO (22.5 mm) 2 CO/3 CO/4 CO
General data
Rated control supply voltage Us1) V 24 DC 24 AC 115 AC 230 AC 24 DC 24 AC 115 AC 230 AC
Rated insulation voltage Ui V 250 250
Degree of pollution 3 3
Overvoltage category III III
Protective separation Up to 250 V (with plug-in base LZS:RT78726) No
Between the coil and the contacts No (for complete units with standard socket)
Degree of protection of relay/base IP67/IP20 IP50/IP20
• During operation °C -40 ... +70 -40 ... +70
• During storage °C -40 ... +80 -40 ... +80
• Solid
- LZS:RT.A. . . ./LZS:RT.B. . . . mm2 2 x 2.5 2 x 2.5
- LZS:RT.D. . . . mm2 2 x 0.75 ... 1.5 2 x 0.75 ... 1.5
• Finely stranded with or without end sleeve
- LZS:PT.A. . . ./LZS:PT.B. . . . mm2 2 x 1.5 2 x 1.5
- LZS:PT.D. . . . mm2 2 x 0.75 ... 1.5/1.0 2 x 0.75 ... 1.5/1.0
• Permissible opening tool Screwdriver for slotted screws, 3.0 ... 3.5 mm x 0.5 mm
Control side
Operating range
At 20 °C V 16.8 ... 52 18 ... 52 86.3 ... 127 172 ... 264 18 ... 40.8 19.2 ... 39.6 92 ... 190 184 ... 380
Power consumption at Us 0.4 W 0.75 VA 0.75 VA 0.75 VA 0.75 W 1 VA 1 VA 1 VA
Release voltage V 2.4 7.2 34.5 69 3.6 7.2 34.5 69
Permissible residual current mA 1.5 4.2 0.8 0.4 2.8 8.8 1.9 1.0
Protection circuit Freewheel No Freewheel No
diode for diode in
complete LED
unit module
Max. permissible cable length at Us2) m > 2000 30 (with LED), > 2000 500 200 50
(min. cross-section: 0.75 mm2) 20 (without LED)
Load side
Switching voltage
AC/DC V 24 ... 250 24 ... 250
Rated currents3)
• Continuous thermal current Ith A 16/8 (1 CO/2 CO) 12/10/6 (2 CO/3 CO/4 CO)
• Rated operational current Ie AC-15 acc. to A 6/3 5/5/4
utilization categories (EN 60947)
• Rated operational current Ie DC-13 acc. to A 2 at 24 V 5 at 24 V
utilization categories (EN 60947) 0.27 at 230 V 0.5 at 230 V
Short-circuit protection A 10 6
Ik ≥ 1 kA acc. to IEC 60947-5-1
Fuse links gL/gG operational class DIAZED
Shock resistance g/ms 10/11 9/11
Vibration resistance
Floating sine acc. to IEC 60068-2-6;
30 ... 150 Hz
• Opening the normally-closed contacts g 5 Approx. 7
along the critical axis
• Closing the normally-open contacts g > 20 > 20
Min. contact load Standard 17 V, 10 mA; hard gold-plated Standard 17 V, 10 mA; hard gold-plated
(reliability: 1 ppm) 17 V/0.1 mA 20 mV/1 mA
Mechanical endurance Opera- 30 x 106 10 x 106 10 x 106
ting
cycles
Electrical endurance Opera- 1 x 105 1 x 105
(resistive load at 250 V AC) ting
cycles
Switching frequency (operating cycles)
• Without load 1/min 1200 600
1/h 72000 36000
• With load 1/min 6 6
1/h 360 360
Make-time ms 7 15
Break-time ms 3 10
Bounce time ms 2 5
Contact material AgNi 90/10
1) AC voltages, 50 Hz; for 60 Hz operation, the lower response value must 2) The max. cable length depends on the conductor capacity and the cable
be increased by 10 %; the power loss will reduce slightly. installation. It can be increased by means of parallel load on A1/A2.
Siemens · 2011 161
Relay type MT industrial relay, 11-pole

(35.5 mm) 3 CO
AC and DC operation
Rated control supply voltage Us1) V 24 DC 24 AC 115 AC 230 AC
Degree of pollution 3
Overvoltage category III
Acc. to EN 60664-1
Protective separation No
Between the coil and the contacts
Degree of protection of relay/base IP50/IP20
• During operation °C -40 ... +60 -45 ... +50 -45 ... +50 -45 ... +50
• During storage °C -45 ... +80 -45 ... +80 -45 ... +80 -45 ... +80
• Screw terminals
- Solid mm2 2 x 2.5
- Finely stranded with or without end sleeve mm2 2 x 1.5
- Permissible opening tool Screwdriver size 1 or Pozidriv 1
Control side
Operating range
• At 20 °C V 18 ... 38 19.2 ... 38 92 ... 137 184 ... 264
Power consumption at Us 1.2 W 2.3 VA 2.3 VA 2.3 VA
Release voltage V 2.4 9.6 46 92
Permissible residual current mA 4.5 29.2 6.2 3.0
Protection circuit No
Max. permissible cable length at Us2) m > 2000 On request On request 80
(min. cross-section: 0.75 mm2)
Load side
Switching voltage
• AC/DC V 24 ... 250
Rated currents3)
• Rated operational current Ie /DC-13 A 2 at 24 V
acc. to utilization categories (EN 60947) 0.27 at 230 V
• Rated operational current Ie /AC-15 A 5 at 24 V and 230 V
acc. to utilization categories (EN 60947)
Ik ≥ 1 kA acc. to IEC 60947-5-1
Fuse links gL/gG operational class
DIAZED
Floating sine acc. to IEC 60068-2-6
30 ... 150 Hz
• Opening the normally-closed contacts along g 2
the critical axis
• Closing the normally-open contacts g > 20
Min. contact load 12 V DC/10 mA
(reliability: 1 ppm)
Mechanical endurance Opera- 20 x 106
ting
cycles
Electrical endurance Opera- 4 x 105
(resistive load at 250 V AC) ting
cycles
Switching frequency (operating cycles)
• Without load 1/min 100
1/h 6000
• With load 1/min 20
1/h 1200
Make-time typ./ms 12
Break-time typ./ms 5
Bounce time typ./ms 4
Contact material AgNi 90/10
1) AC voltages, 50 Hz; for 60 Hz operation, the lower response value must
be increased by 10 %; the power loss will reduce slightly.
2) The max. cable length depends on the conductor capacity and the cable
installation. It can be increased by means of parallel load on A1/A2.
162 Siemens · 2011

■ More information
Notes on configuration
PT series RT series
Mounting the LZS:PT17024 fixing/ejection bracket on the Mounting the LZS:RT17016 fixing/ejection bracket on the
LZS:PT787.0 standard plug-in base with screw terminals LZS:RT7872. plug-in base

16%B

16%B
Legend: Legend:
$ Locking position $ Locking position
% Mounting direction % Mounting direction
& Demounting direction
Mounting the coupling relays with plug-in relay Mounting the coupling relays with plug-in relay
NSB0_01889
NSB0_01890
Important: Important:
The LZS:PT17021 and LZS:PT17024 ejection brackets of the The LZS:RT17016 ejection brackets of the coupling relays with
coupling relays with plug-in relay are not status displays! plug-in relay are not status displays!
Siemens · 2011 163

3TG10 Power Relays/Miniature Contactors
4-pole, 4 kW
■ Overview
Version
The 3TG10 power relays/miniature contactors with 4 main con-
tacts are available with 6.3 mm × 0.8 mm screw terminals or flat
connectors. The versions with screw terminals are climate-proof
and finger-safe according to EN 61140.
The 3TG10 power relays/miniature contactors are small. The
overall width is 36 mm.
164 Siemens · 2011

4-pole, 4 kW
Type 3TG10
General data
Endurance
• Mechanical Operating cycles 3 million
• Electrical
- AC-1 at Ie Operating cycles 0.1 million
- AC-3 at Ie Operating cycles 0.4 million
Protective separation
Between the coil and the contacts acc. to EN 60947-1, Appendix N V Up to 300
Permissible ambient temperature • During operation1) °C -25 ... + 55
• During storage °C -50 ... + 80
Degree of protection acc. to IEC 60947-1 and EN 60529 (VDE 0470 Part 1) IP00, drive system IP20
Power consumption of the magnetic coils • AC operation 45 ... 450 Hz VA 4.4
(when coil is cold and 1.0 x Us) • P.f. 0.9 (hum-free)
• DC operation W 4
Operating times (Total break time = OFF-delay + Arcing time)
• ON-delay
- Closing NO DC operation ms 11 ... 50
AC operation ms 10 ... 50
- Opening NC DC operation ms 21 ... 39
• OFF-delay
- Closing NC DC operation ms 5 ... 45
- Opening NO DC operation ms 19 ... 35
Shock resistance
• Rectangular pulse AC operation and DC operation g/ms 5.1/5 and 3.5/10
• Sine pulse AC operation and DC operation g/ms 7.9/5 and 5.2/10
Switching frequency z in operating cyc- Acc. to AC-1 1/h 1000
les/hour rated operation Acc. to AC-2 1/h 500
Acc. to AC-3 1/h 1000
No-load switching frequency 1/h 10000
Fuse links
gL/gG operational class LV HRC 3NA, DIAZED 5SB,
NEOZED 5SE acc. to IEC 60947-4-1
(VDE 0660 Part 102) • Type of coordination "1" A 25
• Type of coordination "2" A 10
Miniature circuit breakers C Characteristic A 10
AC capacity
Rated operational current Ie up to 400 V at 55 °C1) A 20 for screw terminals, 16 for flat connector
Rated power Ue for AC loads with p.f. = 1, 230/220 V
• For screw terminals kW 7.5 (13 at 400 V)
• For flat connector kW 6 (10 at 400 V)
Minimum conductor cross-section for load with Ie mm2 2.5
Operational current for AC-3 at 400 V rated value A 8.4
Rated power for slipring or squirrel-cage motors W 4000
with 50 Hz and 60 Hz and at 400 V
Utilization category AC-5a (permissible nominal impedance: ≥ 0.5 Ω)
Switching gas discharge lamps
Per main current path at 230 V, 50 Hz
Rated power/rated operational current per lamp
• Uncorrected 18 W 0.37 A 43
36 W 0.43 A 37
58 W 0.67 A 24
• DUO switching 18 W 2 x 0.11 A 2 x 81
36 W 2 x 0.21 A 2 x 42
58 W 2 x 0.32 A 2 x 28
1) If the three main current paths carry a load of 20 A, the following applies if
I > 10 A for the fourth conducting path: permissible ambient
temperature 40 °C.
Siemens · 2011 165

4-pole, 4 kW
Type 3TG10
AC capacity
Per main current path 230 V, 50 Hz
Rated power per lamp/capacitance/rated operational current per lamp
• Shunt compensation L18 W 4.5 µF 0.11 A Units 15
L36 W 4.5 µF 0.21 A Units 15
L58 W 7 µF 0.32 A Units 10
• With solid-state ballast (single lamp) L18 W 6.8 µF 0.10 A Units 39
L36 W 6.8 µF 0.18 A Units 39
L58 W 10 µF 0.27 A Units 26
• With solid-state ballast (two lamps) L18 W 10 µF 0.18 A Units 2 x 26
L36 W 10 µF 0.35 A Units 2 x 26
L58 W 22 µF 0.52 A Units 2 x 12
Utilization category AC-5b, switching incandescent lamps kW 1.6
Per main current path at 230 V, 50 Hz
Load rating with DC
Utilization category DC-1, switching resistive load (L/R ≤ 15 ms)
60 V A 6
110 V A 2
220/240 V A 0.8
60 V A 16
110 V A 6
220/240 V A 1.6
60 V A 18
110 V A 16
220 / 240 V A 6
60 V A 20
110 V A 20
220 / 240 V A 20
60 V A 0.5
110 V A 0.15
220/240 V A 0
60 V A 5
110 V A 0.35
220/240 V A 0
60 V A 16
110 V A 10
220/240 V A 1.75
60 V A 16
110 V A 10
220/240 V A 2
Screw terminals
M3
• Finely stranded with end sleeve (DIN 46228 Form A/D/C) mm2 2 x (0.75 ... 2.5)
• Solid mm2 2 x (1 ... 2.5), 1 x 4
Flat connectors
• Finely stranded 6.3 mm plug-in sleeve acc. to DIN 46245/46247

- 6.3 ... 1 mm2 0.5 ... 1
- 6.3 ... 2.5 mm2 1 ... 2.5
s and u ratings (screw terminals)
Rated insulation voltage AC V 600
Uninterrupted current • Open and enclosed A 20
Maximum horsepower ratings 1-phase/3-phase
(s and u approved values), rated power for induction motors with 60 Hz
At 115 V hp 0.5/ --
200 V hp 1/ 3
230 V hp 1.5/ 3
460 V hp 0/ 5
575 V hp 0/ 5
600 V hp 0/ 5
For short-circuit protection for overload see "Protection Equipment --> Overload Relays".
166 Siemens · 2011

Accessories and Spare Parts
For 3RT, 3RH Contactors and Contactor Relays
Accessories for 3RT, 3RH contactors
and contactor relays
■ Overview
Snap-on auxiliary switch blocks The timing relays are suitable for both AC and DC operation.
The auxiliary switch blocks and the maximum number of blocks Size S00
that can be mounted are described in the sections "Motor
Contactors" and "Contactor Relays". The version for size S00 contactors is fitted onto the front of the
contactor (with the supply voltage switched off) and then slid
Solid-state time-delay auxiliary switch block into its latched position; at the same time, the timing relay is con-
nected by means of plug-in contacts to coil terminals A1 and A2
The timer module, which is available in the "ON-DELAY" and of the contactor. Any contactor coil terminals which are not requi-
"OFF-DELAY" versions, allows time-delayed functions up to red are sealed off by means of covers on the enclosure of the ti-
100 s (3 distinct delay ranges). ming relay block, to prevent them from being connected
It contains a relay with one NO contact and one NC contact; de- inadvertently.
pending on the version, the relay is switched either after an ON- A varistor is integrated in the timer module in order to damp ope-
delay or after an OFF-delay. ning surges in the contactor coil.
The timer module with "WYE-DELTA FUNCTION" is equipped The solid-state, timing relay block cannot be mounted on size
with one delayed and one instantaneous NO contact, with a S00 coupling relays.
dead time of 50 ms between the two. The delay time of the NO
contact can be adjusted between 1.5 s and 30 s. Sizes S0 to S3
Wye-delta function: The timing relay block for size S0 to S3 contactors is plugged
into coil terminals A1 and A2 on top of each contactor; the timing
relay is connected both electrically and mechanically by means
A 1 /A 2
of pins.
N S B 0 _ 0 0 4 5 3 b
Y 2 7 /2 8
A varistor is integrated in the timer module in order to damp ope-
3 7 /3 8
t 5 0 m s
ning surges in the contactor coil.
Configuring note:
The contactor on which the solid-state, time-delay auxiliary
switch block is mounted operates without a delay. a) b) L1 NSB0_00455b
L1 NSB0_00454b
Size S00 S1 K3 S1
The solid-state, time-delay auxiliary switch block is fitted onto the A1 B1 A2 K3 A1 B1 A2 K3

front side of the contactor. The timer module is supplied with po- 1
1
wer directly by plug-in contacts through the coil terminals of the A1 A2 A1 A2
2 2
contactor, in parallel with A1/A2. The timing function is activated N
by closing the contactor on which the auxiliary switch block is N
mounted. The OFF-delay version operates without an auxiliary $ Timing relay block
voltage; minimum ON period: 200 ms. % Contactor
A varistor is integrated in the timer module in order to damp ope- The activation of loads parallel to the start input is not permissi-
ning surges in the contactor coil. ble when using AC control voltage (see (a) in the circuit
The solid-state, time-delay auxiliary switch block cannot be diagram).
mounted on size S00 coupling relays. The 3RT19 16-2D. . ./3RT19 26-2D. . . OFF-delay time relay
Sizes S0 to S12 blocks have a zero potential start input B1. This means that if
there is a parallel load on terminal B1, activation can be simula-
The solid-state, time-delay auxiliary switch block is fitted onto the ted with AC voltage. In this case, the additional load
front side of the contactor. (e. g. contactor K3) must be wired according to (b).
The timer module is supplied with power through two terminals OFF-delay device for size S00 to S3 contactors
(A1/A2); the time delay of the auxiliary switch block can be acti-
vated either by a parallel link to any contactor coil or by any po- AC and DC operation
wer source.
IEC 60947, EN 60947.
The OFF-delay version operates without an auxiliary voltage; mi-
nimum ON period: 200 ms. For screw and snap-on mounting onto 35 mm standard moun-
ting rail. The OFF-delay devices have screw terminals.
A single-pole auxiliary switch block can be snapped onto the
front of the contactor in addition to the timer module. The OFF-delay device prevents a contactor from dropping out
unintentionally when there is a short-time voltage dip or voltage
The timer module has no integrated components for overvoltage failure. It supplies a downstream, DC-operated contactor with
damping. the necessary energy during a voltage dip, ensuring that the
contactor does not trip. The 3RT19 16 OFF-delay devices are
Solid-state timing relay block with semiconductor output specifically designed for operation with the 3RT contactors and
The timer module in the "ON-DELAY" and "OFF-DELAY with auxi- 3RH contactor relays of the SIRIUS series.
liary voltage" versions allows time-delayed functions up to 100 s The OFF-delay device operates without external voltage on a ca-
(3 distinct delay ranges). Contactors fitted with a timing relay pacitive basis, and can be energized with either AC or DC (24 V
block close or open after a delay according to the set time. version only for DC operation). Voltage matching, which is only
The ON-delay variant of the timing relay is connected in series necessary with AC operation, is performed using a rectifier
with the contactor coil; terminal A1 of this coil must not be bridge.
connected. A contactor opens after a delay when the capacitors of the ma-
With the OFF-delay variant of the timing relay, the contactor coil gnetic coil, built into the OFF-delay device, are switched in par-
is contacted directly through the relay; terminals A1 and A2 of allel. In the event of voltage failures, the capacitors are dischar-
the contactor coil must not be connected. ged via the magnetic coil and thereby delay the opening of the
contactor.
Siemens · 2011 167

If the command devices are upstream of the OFF-delay device
in the circuit, the OFF-delay takes effect with every opening ope- 4000 V
NSB0_00456c
ration. If the opening operation is downstream of the OFF-delay
device, an OFF-delay only applies in the event of failure of the V
mains voltage.
Operation
In the case of the versions for rated control supply voltages of
110 V and 230 V, either AC voltage or DC voltage can be applied
on the line side, whereas the variant for 24 V is designed for DC
operation only.
400 V
A DC-operated contactor is connected to the output in ac-
cordance with the input voltage that is applied. 500 ms t
The mean value of the OFF-delay is approximately 1.5 times the
specified minimum time. Reducing contact arcing
Surge suppressors The connection between the main current path and the EMC in-
• Without LED (also for Cage Clamp terminals) terference suppression module enables contact arcing, which is
size S00, S0, S2, S3, S6 to S12 responsible for contact erosion and the majority of clicking noi-
ses, to be reduced; this in turn is conducive to an electromagne-
• With LED (also for Cage Clamp terminals) size S00 tically compatible design.
All 3RT1 contactors and 3RH1 contactor relays can be retrofitted Higher operational reliability
with RC elements or varistors for damping opening surges in the Since the EMC interference suppression module achieves a si-
coil. Diodes or diode assemblies (comprising noise suppression gnificant reduction in radio-frequency components and the vol-
diodes and Zener diodes for rapid switch-off) can be used. tage level in three phases, the contact endurance is also impro-
The surge suppressors are plugged onto the front of size S00 ved considerably. This makes an important contribution towards
contactors. Space is provided for them next to a snap-on auxili- enhancing the reliability and availability of the system as a
ary switch block. whole.
Dispensing with fine graduations
With all size S0 to S3 contactors, varistors, RC elements and di-
ode assemblies can be plugged on directly at the coil terminals, There is no need for fine graduations within each performance
either on the top or underneath. class, as smaller motors inherently have a higher inductance, so
that one solution for all fixed-speed operating mechanisms up to
The plug-in direction of the diodes and diode assemblies is de- 5.5 kW is adequate.
termined by a coding device.
Two electrical versions are available:
Coupling relays are supplied either without overvoltage dam- • The advantages of the RC circuit lie mainly in the reduction in
ping or with a varistor or diode connected as standard, accor- the rate of rise and in its RF damping ability. The selected
ding to the version. values ensure effective interference suppression over a wide
range.
Note:
The OFF-delay times of the NO contacts and the ON-delay times
NSB0_00457c
against voltage peaks (noise suppression diode 6 to 10 times; V
diode assemblies 2 to 6 times, varistor +2 to 5 ms).
Electromagnetic interference suppression module, 3-phase
for size S00 contactors
930 V
400 V
500 ms t
• The varistor circuit can absorb a high energy level and can
also be used for frequencies ranging from 10 to 400 Hz
(closed-loop controlled operating mechanisms). There is no li-
miting below the knee-point voltage, however.
NSB0_00458c
A so-called counter-e.m.f. (electromotive force) is produced

when motors or various inductive loads are turned off. Voltage
peaks of up to 4000 V may occur as a result, with a frequency
spectrum from 1 kHz to 10 MHz and a rate of voltage variation 950 V
from 0.1 to 20 V/ns. 400 V
Capacitive input to various analog and digital signals makes it 500 ms t

necessary to suppress interference in the load circuit.
168 Siemens · 2011

Additional load module Solder pin adapters
Size S00 for plugging onto the front of the contactors with and The solder pin adapters for the size S00 contactors are available
without auxiliary switch block in two versions:
Coupling links for mounting on contactors of sizes S0 to S3 • Solder pin adapter for contactors with one integrated auxiliary
contact
DC operation • Solder pin adapter for contactors with mounted 4-pole auxili-
IEC 60947 and EN 60947. ary switch block
The coupling link is suitable for use in any climate. It is finger- Screw adapters
safe according to EN 50274. The terminal designations comply
with EN 50005. Plug-on adapters improve the accessibility of the screw fixing for
size S0 contactors. As a result it is possible to position the
System-compatible operation with 24 DC V, screwdriver vertically even when using insulated screwdrivers or
operating range 17 to 30 V. power screwdrivers.
Low power consumption in conformity with the technical specifi- Optionally the adapters can be rotated through 90° before
cations of the solid-state systems. An LED indicates the swit- mounting.
ching state.
Sealable covers for sizes S00 to S12
Surge suppression
When contactors and contactor relays are used in safety-orien-
The 3RH19 24-1GP11 coupling link has an integrated surge ted applications, it must be ensured that it is impossible to ope-
suppressor (varistor) for the contactor coil being switched. rate the contactors manually.
Mounting For SIRIUS contactors there are sealable covers available for
The 3RH19 24-1GP11 coupling link is mounted directly on the this purpose as accessories; these prevent accidental manual
contactor coil. operation. These are transparent molded-plastic caps with a
bracket that enables the contactor to be sealed.
Technical specifications according to EN 61812-1 (VDE 0435 Part 2021)
Contactors Type 3RT19 26-3A
Mechanical latching block for the 3RT1. 2. and 3RT1. 3. contactors
Mechanical endurance • With 3RT1. 2 3 million
(operating cycles) • With 3RT1. 3 50 000
Operating range of the magnetic coil 0.85 ... 1.1 x Us
At AC 50/60 Hz and DC
Power consumption of the magnetic coils of the unlocking magnet W Approx. 4
(for cold coil and 1.0 x Us)
AC and DC operation
Command duration for de-energizing
• AC operation ms 18 ... 31
• DC operation ms 18 ... 26
• Solid mm2 2 x (0.5 ... 2.5); 1 x 4
AWG 2 x 14; 1 x 12
• Finely stranded with end sleeve mm2 2 x (0.5 ... 2.5); 1 x 2.5
AWG 2 x 14; 1 x 12
Tightening torque of the terminal screws Nm 0.8 ... 1.1
lb.in 7 ... 9.5
Siemens · 2011 169

Contactors Type 3RT19 .6-2C 3RT19 .6-2D 3RT19 .6-2L 3RT19 .6-2E 3RT19 .6-2F 3RT19 .6-2G
Solid-state time-delay blocks with semi- Solid-state time-delay auxiliary switch
conductor output blocks
Rated insulation voltage Ui V AC 250 300 250
Degree of pollution 3
Overvoltage category III acc. to EN 60664-1
Operating range of excitation 0.8 ... 1.1 x Us, 0.85 ... 1.1 x Us,
0.95 ... 1.05 times 0.95 ... 1.05 times rated frequency
rated frequency
Rated power W 1 2
• Power consumption at 230 V AC, 50 Hz VA 1 4
• AC-140, DC-13 A 0.3 for 3RT19 16 --
A 0.3 for 3RT19 26 --
• AC-15, 230 V, 50 Hz A -- 3
• DC-13, 24 V A -- 1
• DC-13, 110 V A -- 0.2
• DC-13, 230 V A -- 0.1
DIAZED protection gL/gG operational class A -- 4
Switching frequency for load
• With Ie 230 V AC h-1 2500
• With 3RT10 16 contactor, 230 V AC h-1 2500 5000
Recovery time ms 50 150
Minimum ON period ms 35 35 (OFF-delay 200 (with OFF-delay)
with auxiliary
voltage)
Residual current Max. mA 5 --
Voltage drop Max. VA 3.5 --
With conducting output
Short-time loading capacity Up to 10 ms A 10 --
Setting accuracy Typ. % ±15
With reference to upper limit of scale
Repeat accuracy Max. % ±1
Mechanical endurance Opera- 100 x 106 10 x 106
ting
cycles
Degree of protection acc. to EN 60947-1, Appendix C
• Cover IP40
• Terminals IP20
Conductor connections
• Solid mm2 2 x (0.5 ... 1.5), 2 x (0.75 ... 4)
Permissible mounting position Any
Acc. to IEC 60068-2-6 Hz/mm 10 ... 55/0.35
EMC tests Basic specification IEC 61000-6-4 IEC 61000-6-2; IEC 61000-6-4
IEC 61000-6-4
Overvoltage protection Varistor integrated in timing relay --
170 Siemens · 2011

Function table 3RT19 16, 3RT19 26 Function chart 3RT19 16 timing relays 3RT19 26 timing relays
3RT19 16-2G
3RT19 26-2G
3RT19 16-2C
3RT19 16-2D
3RT19 26-2C
3RT19 26-2D
3RP19 16-2E
Function Timing relay energized
3RT19 26-2E
3RT19 16-2F
3RT19 16-2L
3RT19 16-2F
Contact closed
Contact open
1 CO contact
OFF-delay A1/A2 ✓
With auxiliary voltage > 35 ms
B1/A2
NSB00859
15/18
15/16
t
1 NO contact + 1 NC contact
ON-delay A1/A2 ✓
(varistor integrated)
NSB00933
27/28
35/36
t
With ON-delay ✓
A1/A2
NSB00936
-7/-8
-5/-6
t
OFF-delay > 200 ms ✓

Without auxiliary voltage A1/A2
NSB00934
27/28
35/36
t
OFF-delay > 200 ms ✓
without auxiliary voltage A1/A2
NSB00937
-7/-8
-5/-6
t
2 NO contacts
Wye-delta function ✓
(varistor integrated) A1/A2
1 NO delayed,
NSB00935
Y 27/28
1 NO instantaneous,
dead time 50 ms , 37/38
t 50 ms
Wye-delta function A1/A2 ✓

1 NO delayed,
NSB00938
1 NO instantaneous, Y -7/-8
dead time 50 ms
, -7/-8
t 50 ms
1 NO contact (semiconductor)
ON-delay A1/A2 ✓ ✓
Two-wire version Timing relay
NSB00939a
t
A1/A2
Contactor
OFF-delay A1/A2 ✓ ✓
With auxiliary voltage Timing relay
NSB00940a
(varistor integrated) B1/A2

> 35 ms
A1/A2
Contactor
t
✓ Function is possible.
Siemens · 2011 171

Versions 3RT19 16-2BE01 3RT19 16-2BK01 3RT19 16-2BL01

OFF-delay devices
Connectable contactor sizes
Caution! Only contactors and contactor relays with DC operation can
be connected.
• DC supply S00 ...S3 S00/S0 S00/S0
• AC supply -- S00/S0 S00/S0
Type 3RT10 . .-1BB4., 3RT10 1. -1BF4, 3RT10 1.-1BM4. /1BP4. ,
3RH1. . .-1BB40 3RT10 2. -1BF4, 3RT10 2.-1BM4. /1BP4. ,
3RH1 . . . -1BF40 3RH1. . .-1BM40/1BP40
Permissible mounting position 3 6 0 ° 3 6 0 °
N S B 0 _ 0 1 0 6 4 a
N S B 0 _ 0 1 0 6 5 a
Rated control supply voltage Us V 24 (DC) 110 (UC) 220/230 (UC)
Operating range 0.9 ... 1.1 Us
Rated frequency/ies
with AC supply f Hz ±5 % -- 50/ 60 50/ 60
Ambient temperature permissible:
• During operation
- Side-by-side mounting without Tu °C -25 ... +50
distance
- Side-by-side mounting with 5 mm di- Tu °C -25 ... +60
stance
• During storage Tu °C -40 ... +80
OFF-delay1)
(minimum times at Usp = 0.9 x Us, Tsp = 20 °C) Note:
In practice the mean value is 1.5 times the minimum time.
• S00 toff > ms 250 130 600
• S0 toff > ms 150 100 400
• S2 (only for DC supply) toff > ms 90 -- --
• S3 (only for DC supply) toff > ms 70 -- --
Installed capacity C
3RT19 16-2B.01 µF 2000 68 68
Capacitor voltage V 35 180 350
ON-delay Note:
(maximum at Usp = 0.9 x Us, Tsp = 20 °C) The total ON-delay = Contactor make-time + ton
• S00 ton < ms 10 60 200
• S0 ton < ms 10 80 250
Mechanical endurance Operating 30 million
cycles
Endurance, electrical approx. Operating >1 million
cycles
Switching frequency z max. (at Tu = 60 °C) h-1 300
Power loss Pv max. approx. W 0.4 0.5 1
Surge suppression with varistor, integrated
2)
Usp = Coil voltage
Tsp = Coil temperature
1) Doubling the delay time can be achieved by doubling the capacitance.
Commercially available capacitors can be used, which can be connected
to terminals C+ and Z–.
2) See 3RT10 1 contactors, page 23.
172 Siemens · 2011

Contactors Type 3RT19 26-2P.

Pneumatic delay block1)
General data
cycles
Electrical endurance at Ie Operating 1 million
cycles
Acc. to utilization categories EN 60947
• AC-12 A 10
• AC-15/AC-14 at Ue Up to 230/220 V A 6
400/380 V A 4
500 V A 2.5
690/660 V A 1.5
• DC-13 at Ue 24 V A 4
48 V A 2
110 V A 0.7
220 V A 0.3
440 V A 0.15
• Solid, stranded: mm2 2 x 0.5 ... 2.52) or 2 x 2.5 ... 42)
• Finely stranded with end sleeve mm² 2 x 0.5 ... 2.5
• AWG cables AWG 2 x 22 ... 12
• Tightening torque of the terminal screws Nm 0.8 ... 1.1
Time delay
• Accuracy ±10 %
s and u rated data
• Rated voltage V AC 600
• Switching capacity A 600, Q 600
1) For size S0. 2) If two different conductor cross-sections are connected to one clamping
In addition to the pneumatic delay block, no other auxiliary contacts are point, both cross-sections must lie in the range specified. If identical
permitted. cross-sections are used, this restriction does not apply.
Versions 3RT1900-4RE01 3RT1916-4RD01 3RT1926-4RD01

Connection modules for contactors with screw terminals plugs S00, S0 adapters S00 adapters S0
General data
cycles
Electrical endurance at Ie Operating 1 million
cycles
Rated operational voltage Ue V 440
Protective separation acc. to EN 60947-1 V 400
Rated operational current Ie A 25 20 25
AC-3 at 400 V
Rated frequency f Hz 50/60
For AC operation
Degree of protection acc. to EN 60529 IP20
Screw terminals
• Solid mm2 1x (0.5 ... 6)
• Finely stranded without/with end sleeve mm² 1x (0.5 ... 6)
• Stranded mm² 1x (0.5 ... 6)
• AWG cables, solid or stranded AWG 1x (20 ... 10)
• Corresponding opening tool Short-slot screwdriver PZ2
Siemens · 2011 173

Versions 3RT1900-4RE01 3RT1916-4RD01 3RT1926-4RD01

Connection modules for contactors with screw terminals plugs S00, S0 adapters S00 adapters S0
s and u rated data

• Rated operational voltage Ue V 480
• Rated insulation voltage Ui V 600
• Uninterrupted current, at 40 °C A 16/25 16 25
• Short-circuit protection1)
• At 600 V kA 5
• CLASS RK5 fuse A 100 60 100
• Circuit breakers with A 100 60 100
overload protection
acc. to UL 489
Combination motor controllers type E
Acc. to UL 508 • At 480 V Type 3RV102
A 22 -- 22
kA 65 -- 65
• At 600 V Type 3RV102
A 22 -- 22
kA 10 -- 10
short-circuit currents, see the UL guide (Order No.: A5E02118883) or
UL reports (http://www.siemens.com/lowvoltage/ul-europe) for the indivi-
dual devices.
Contactors Type 3RH19 24, 3TX7 090

Coupling links for mounting on contactors
acc. to IEC 60947/EN 60947
General data
Protective separation between the coil and the contacts V AC Up to 300
Degree of protection acc. to EN 60947-1, Appendix C
• Terminals IP20
• Enclosure IP40
• Solid mm2 2 x (0.5 ... 2.5)
• Finely stranded with end sleeve mm² 2 x (0.5 ... 1.5)
Terminal screws M3
(weld-free protection at Ik ≥1 kA)
Control side
Rated control supply voltage Us V DC 24
Operating range V DC 17 ... 30
Power consumption at Us W 0.5
Nominal current input mA 20
Release voltage V ≥4
Protection circuit Varistor
174 Siemens · 2011

Contactors Type 3RH19 24, 3TX7 090

Coupling links for mounting on contactors
acc. to IEC 60947/EN 60947
Load side
Mechanical endurance In million operating cycles 20
Electrical endurance at Ie In million operating cycles 0.1
Switching frequency Operating cycles h-1 5000
Make-time ms Approx. 7
Break-time ms Approx. 4
Bounce time ms Approx. 2
Contact material AgSnO
Switching voltage V AC/DC 24 ... 250
Permissible residual current of the electronics (for 0 signal) mA 2.5
Rated operational currents1)
Acc. to utilization categories EN 60947
• AC-15 - At 24 V A 3
- At 110 V A 3
- At 230 V A 3
• DC-13 - At 24 V A 1
- At 110 V A 0.2
- At 230 V A 0.1
Switching current with resistive load to EN 60255 (relay standard)
and EN 60947
• AC-12 - At 24 V A 6
- At 110 V A 6
- At 230 V A 6
• DC-12 - At 24 V A 6
- At 110 V A 0.3
- At 230 V A 0.21)
Siemens · 2011 175

For 3T Contactors and Contactor Relays
Accessories for
3TB, 3TC, 3TF, 3TG, 3TK contactors
For 3TF2 contactors Auxiliary switch block
Type 3TX4 4. .-. .
General data
Mechanical endurance 10 million
• AC operation Operating 10 million
cycles
• DC operation Operating 30 million
cycles
Rated insulation voltage Ui For screw terminals
V 500
Rated impulse withstand voltage Uimp For screw terminals
kV 6
Protective separation between the coil and the contacts V Up to 300
Positively-driven operation
• 3TF2 basic unit or complete unit ZH1/457, SUVA
• 3TF20 basic unit with - Upper level ZH1/457, SUVA
3TX4 4 auxiliary switch block - Lower level ZH1/457, SUVA
- Different levels SUVA
Permissible ambient temperature1)
Degree of protection acc. to EN 60947-1 Appendix C IP20 for screw terminals
Shock resistance
Fuse links gL/gG
176 Siemens · 2011

For 3T Contactors and Contactor Relays
Accessories for 3TH contactor relays
For 3TH2 contactor relays Auxiliary switch block
Type 3TX4 4. .-. .
General data
Mechanical endurance
• AC operation Operating 10 million
cycles
• DC operation Operating 30 million
cycles
Rated insulation voltage Ui For screw terminals
V 500
Rated impulse withstand voltage Uimp For screw terminals
kV 6
Protective separation between the coil and the contacts V Up to 300
Positively-driven operation
• 3TH2 basic unit or complete unit ZH1/457, SUVA
• 3TH20 basic unit with - Upper level ZH1/457, SUVA
3TX4 4 auxiliary switch block - Lower level ZH1/457, SUVA
- Different levels SUVA
Permissible ambient temperature1)
Degree of protection acc. to EN 60947-1 Appendix C IP20 for screw terminals
Shock resistance
Fuse links gL/gG
Siemens · 2011 177

Project planning aids
■ Overview
Dimensional drawings Schematics
3RA13 ........................................................................ 200 ... 202 3RA13 ................................................................................... 237

3RA14 ........................................................................... 203, 204 3RA14 ................................................................................... 238
3RA19 ........................................................................... 199, 200 3RH11 ................................................... 226, 231, 232, 235, 236
3RH11 ........................................................................... 188, 191 3RH14 ........................................................................... 232, 235
3RH14 ................................................................................... 191 3RH19 ..................................................... 222 ... 224, 227 ... 230
3RH19 ........................................................................... 196, 197 3RS18 ................................................................................... 249
3RS18 .................................................................................. 216 3RT10 ........................................................ 221, 226 ... 228, 231
3RT10 ..................................................... 179 ... 184, 188 ... 190 3RT12 ................................................................................... 221
3RT12 ................................................................................... 185 3RT13 ........................................................................... 221, 228
3RT13 ................................................................................... 185 3RT14 ........................................................................... 221, 227
3RT14 ................................................................... 181, 183, 184 3RT15 ........................................................................... 221, 228
3RT15 ................................................................................... 186 3RT16 ........................................................................... 225, 230
3RT16 ................................................................................... 187 3RT19 ........................................................ 222 ... 225, 229, 230
3RT19 ........................................................ 193 ... 196, 198, 204
3TB5 ............................................................................. 240, 243
3TB5 ............................................................................. 207, 212 3TC4 ............................................................................. 242, 244
3TC4 ............................................................................. 210, 212 3TC5 ............................................................................. 242, 244
3TC5 .................................................................................... 210 3TC7 ............................................................................. 242, 244
3TC7 ..................................................................................... 211 3TD68 ................................................................................... 240
3TD68 ................................................................................... 207 3TE68 ................................................................................... 241
3TE68 ................................................................................... 207 3TF2 ...................................................................................... 245
3TF2 ...................................................................................... 213 3TF6 .............................................................................. 239, 243
3TF6 ...................................................................................... 205 3TG10 ........................................................................... 239, 243
3TG10 ................................................................................... 204 3TH2 ..................................................................................... 246
3TH2 ............................................................................. 215, 216 3TH4 ............................................................................. 233, 234
3TH4 ..................................................................................... 192 3TK1 ............................................................................. 241, 244
3TK1 ............................................................................. 208, 209 3TK2 ..................................................................................... 245
3TK2 ..................................................................................... 214 3TX4 ............................................................................. 245, 246
3TX2 ..................................................................................... 211 3TX7 .................................................................. 239, 247 ... 249
3TX4 .................................................................. 192, 213 ... 215 3TY6 ..................................................................................... 240
3TX7 ..................................................................... 192, 206, 217 3TY7 ..................................................................................... 239
LZS/LZX ..................................................................... 218 ... 220 LZS/LZX ........................................................................ 250, 251
178 Siemens · 2011

■ Dimensional drawings
3RT10 contactors, 3-pole
3RT10 1 contactors, size S00 Lateral distance to

Screw terminals grounded components = 6 mm
with surge suppressor, auxiliary switch block and mounted overload relay
106
99
45 95
5,3 8,6 5 67
5
5)
50
57,5
4)
51
118
3) 2) 35
2)
Auxiliary switch block
(also solid-state compatible version
3RH19 11- . NF . . )
3) Surge suppressor
(also 3RT19 16-1GA00
NSB00752b
additional load module)

4)
15,5 67 5 Drilling pattern
5)
1-pole
3RT10 1 contactors, size S00

Cage Clamp terminals with auxiliary switch block
5
25
44
47
37
60
50
4)
NSB01221 35
5 9 5 68
36 109
45
3RT10 2 contactors, 3RT10 2 coupling relays, size S0

Screw terminals
with surge suppressor, auxiliary switch blocks and mounted overload relay
10 135
1) 10 45 b) 86
5 3)
35
a
4)
85
80
60
2)
143
63
For size S0:

a = 3 mm at < 240 V
a = 7 mm at > 240 V
b = DC 10 mm deeper than AC
NSB00753c
1)
Auxiliary switch block, laterally mountable
2) Auxiliary switch block, mountable on the front,
15,5 86 5 1-, 2- and 4-pole (also solid-state compatible
version 3RH19 21-. FE22)
3)
Surge suppressor
4)
Drilling pattern
Siemens · 2011 179

3RT10 2 contactors, 3RT10 2 coupling relays, size S0

Cage Clamp terminals
10 135
85
1) 10 45 b) 5 3)
35
a
85
72
60
4)
2) For size S0:

143
63
a = 0 mm with varistor < 240 V, diode assembly

NSB0_01220c
a = 3.5 mm with varistor > 240 V

a = 17 mm with RC element
1)
2) Auxiliary switch block, mountable on the front,
(1-, 2- and 4-pole)
3)
Surge suppressor
5 4)
15,5 86 Drilling pattern

Screw terminals
15 159
55 10 110
a
b) 5 3)
45
1)
5
4)
112
80
95
2)
171
75
For size S2:

1)
NSB00754b
2)
Auxiliary switch block, mountable on the front,
20,5 (1-, 2- and 4-pole)
107 5 3) Surge suppressor
4)
Drilling pattern
180 Siemens · 2011

3RT10 and 3RT14 contactors, 3-pole

159
55 110
35 15 64
a
18 10 b) 5 14 3)
45
1)
5
4)
112
72
95
171
2)
75
Test NSB 01219a For size S2:

STOP RESET 0 1
H A
1) Auxiliary switch block, laterally mountable
2)
Auxiliary switch block, mountable on the front,
(1-, 2- and 4-pole)
20 107 5 3)
Surge suppressor
4) Drilling pattern
3RT10 4, 3RT14 46 contactors, size S3 Lateral distance to

13 183
70 10 10 134
3)
a
b) 5
60
1)
5
4)
130
146
80
2)
221
5)
100
NSB00755b
6)
For size S3:

a = 0 mm with varistor, diode assembly
and < 240 V
a = 3.5 mm with varistor and > 240 V
1)
2) Auxiliary switch block, mountable on the
front (1-, 2- and 4-pole), same dimensions
for versions with screw or Cage Clamp
28 7 132 5
terminals
3)
Surge suppressor
4)
Drilling pattern
5) For mounting onto TH 35 standard moun-
ting rail according to EN 60715 (15 mm
deep) or TH 75 standard mounting rail
according to EN 60715
6)
Allen screw 4 mm
Siemens · 2011 181


b) 183
70 134
45 10 13 86
3)
a
23 10 5 40 60
1)
5
4)
130
146
72
2)
224
5)
100
6)
NSB 01218a 7 For size S3:

Test
STOP RESET 0 1
H A
a = 0 mm with varistor, diode assembly
and < 240 V
a = 3.5 mm with varistor and > 240 V
2)
Auxiliary switch block, mountable on the
front (1-, 2- and 4-pole), same dimensions
28 131 5 for versions with screw or Cage Clamp
terminals
3)
Surge suppressor
4) Drilling pattern
5)
For mounting onto TH 35 standard moun-
deep) or TH 75 standard mounting rail
according to EN 60715
6)
Allen screw 4 mm
3RT10 coupling relays, size S00

with surge suppressor
Deviating dimensions for coupling relays
3) with Cage Clamp terminals:
5
Height: 60 mm
57,5
3)
50
4) Surge suppressor
4)
NSB00258a
Drilling pattern
5,3 8,6 5 67 35
45 99
182 Siemens · 2011

3RT10 5, 3RT14 5 contactors, size S6 Distance from grounded parts

with lateral and front mounted auxiliary switch block Lateral: 10 mm
mounted overload relay and box terminals, Front: 20 mm
lateral solid-state module with remaining lifetime indicator
k
7) 3) 37 107 5) 6)
17 61
17
100
1)
2)
Æ7
Æ9
172
164
140
Drilling pattern
130
268
8)
For size S6:
k = 120 mm (minimum clearance for removing the
withdrawable coil)
1) 2nd auxiliary switch block, lateral
2)
Auxiliary switch block, mountable on the front
4) 3)
120 72 RC element
NSB01171a
140 170 4) 3RB20 overload relay, mounted

140 180 5)
3RT19 55-4G box terminal block
150 217
(Allen screw 4 mm)
6)
3RT19 56-4G box terminal block
(Allen screw 4 mm)
7) PLC connection 24 V DC and changeover switch
(for 3RT1...-.N)
8)
Solid-state module with remaining lifetime indicator
(auxiliary switch block not mountable on right-hand
side)
Siemens · 2011 183

3RT10 6, 3RT14 6 contactors, size S10

with lateral and front mounted auxiliary switch block
mounted overload relay and box terminals,
lateral solid-state module with remaining lifetime indicator
k
k
6) 3) 48 132
70 5)
17
25 120
1) 7) Æ9
11 2)
210
180
200
168
Drilling pattern
324
4)
145 138
NSB01158a
165 202
165 217
175 251
3RT10 7, 3RT14 7 contactors, size S12 For sizes S10 and S12:
with lateral and front mounted auxiliary switch block Distance from grounded parts
mounted overload relay and box terminals, Lateral: 10 mm
lateral solid-state module with remaining lifetime indicator Front: 20 mm
k
k
6) 3) 48 150
89 5)
25
17
130
1) 7)
9
11
2)
214
200
182
180
Drilling pattern
331
For sizes S10 and S12:

withdrawable coil)
4) 1) 2nd auxiliary switch block, lateral
156 2)
160 Auxiliary switch block, mountable on the front
NSB01159b
180 225 3)
RC element
180 236 4) 3RB20 overload relay, mounted
190 271 5)
Box terminal block (Allen screw 6 mm)
6)
PLC connection 24 V DC and changeover switch
(for 3RT1...-.N)
7) Solid-state module with remaining lifetime indicator
(auxiliary switch block not mountable on right-hand
side)
184 Siemens · 2011

3RT12 vacuum contactors, 3-pole
3RT12 6 vacuum contactors, size S10

with lateral auxiliary switch block,
mounted overload relay and box terminals
3)
k
k
25 48 6) 132
70 5)
17
120
1)
9
11
2)
210
Drilling pattern
180
168
200
324
Detail for 2)
Contact erosion indication for vacuum tubes
NSB0_01160c
4)
145 138
NSB01162
165 206
217
3RT12 7 vacuum contactors, size S12

with lateral auxiliary switch block,
mounted overload relay and box terminals
k
3) k
48 6) 150
89 5)
17
25 130
1)
9
11
2)
214
200
182
180
Drilling pattern
331
For sizes S10 and S12:

withdrawable coil)
4) 1)
2nd auxiliary switch block, lateral
NSB0_01161e
2) Switch position and contact erosion indication

160 156
180 3)
225 RC element
236 4)
3RB20 overload relay, mounted
5) Box terminal block (Allen screw 6 mm)
6)
PLC connection 24 V DC and changeover switch
(for 3RT1...-.N)
Siemens · 2011 185

3RT13 1 and 3RT15 1 contactors, size S00, Lateral distance to

with surge suppressor and auxiliary switch block
106 For size S00:
45 99
8,6 95 Deviating dimensions for contactors
5,3 5 67 with Cage Clamp terminals:
Height: 60 mm
5
5) Mounting depth with auxiliary switch block:
110 mm
2)
50
57,5

4)
(also solid-state compatible version
3RH19 11-.N. . .)
3)
Surge suppressor
NSB00757b 3) 2) (also 3RT19 16-1GA00
35
additional load module)
4) Drilling pattern
5)
1-pole
3RT13 2 and 3RT15 2 contactors, size S0
b ) 3 ) For size S0:
1 ) 1 3 5
1 0 6 1 1 0 5 8 6 3 5 a = 3 mm at < 250 V and mounting of
a
surge suppressor
2 )
a = 7 mm at > 250 V and mounting of
surge suppressor
5
4 ) (left)
6 0
8 0
8 5
2)
front
3)
Surge suppressor
4) Drilling pattern
N S B 0 _ 0 0 7 5 8 f
3RT13 3 and 3RT15 3 contactors, size S2

b ) 3 ) For sizes S2 and S3:
1 6 0
1 0 7 3 1 5 5 1 1 0 4 5 a = 0 mm with varistor < 240 V
a
1 ) a = 3.5 mm with varistor > 240 V

2 ) 5 a = 17 mm with RC element and diode
assembly
b = S2: DC 15 mm deeper than AC
4 )
S IE M E N S S3: DC 13 mm deeper than AC
1)
9 5
(right or left)
8 0
2)
1 1 2

front, (1-, 2- and 4-pole, also 3RH19 21-
1FE22 solid-state compatible version)
3) Surge suppressor
4)
Drilling pattern
N S B 0 _ 0 0 7 5 9 d 5)
For mounting onto TH 35 standard moun-
deep) or for size S3 also to TH 75 standard
mounting rail according to EN 60715
6) Allen screw 4 mm

b)
183
10 93 13 5 134
3)
a
60
1) 5
SIEMENS
4)
130
146
80
2)
5)
6)
NSB 00760b
186 Siemens · 2011

3RT16 capacitor contactors
3RT16 17 capacitor contactors, size S00
5
101
Drilling
36
58
16
50
pattern
5 35
NSB0_01236d
51
45
92
105

1 2 1
N S B 0 _ 0 0 7 6 1 e
6 6
4 4
3 5
Drilling
1 0 0
7 2
6 0
8 5
4 8
6 0
1 8
pattern
ø 5
5
4 5 1 3 0

170
116
22,5 22,5 90
51
60
150
167
130
104
124
130
18
38
Drilling
pattern
NSB0_00763d
70 5
7
8
183
Siemens · 2011 187

Contactors with extended operating range 0.7 to 1.25 x Us
Size S00
45 5 118
5
Without series resistor:
3RH11 22-2KB40
-2KF40
3RT10 17-2KB41
50
60
28
-2KF41
-2KB42
NSB00764a
-2KF42
35 For dimensions see page 179 (size S00)
Size S0 1)
70 View from the left
45 5 148
Without series resistor:

35 x 60
86
47
3RT10 25-3KB40
-3KF40
3RT10 26-3KB40
-3KF40
NSB00765a For dimensions see page 180 (size S0)
Size S2 1)
55 5 162
45 x 95
110
47
NSB00766a
Size S3 1)
70 5 186
60 x 130
145
47
NSB00767a
1) Sizes S0 to S3: Contactor series resistor must be connected by customer.

The series resistor is equipped with the necessary connecting cables.
188 Siemens · 2011

3RT10 2 . -3X . 40-0LA2 contactors, size S0 3RT10 2 . -1X . 40-0LA2 contactors, size S0
Cage Clamp terminals Screw terminals
61 6 1
45 7 4 4
4 5 7
77
63
7 7
119
6 3
1 1 6
NSB01384
N S B 0 _ 0 1 3 8 5
3RT10 3.-3X.40-0LA2 contactors, size S2

64
45 10
87
74
142
NSB01386

Screw terminals
6 4
4 7
4 5 1 0
8 7
7 4
1 4 2
N S B 0 _ 0 1 3 8 7
All dimensions not mentioned are identical to those of the contactors with
DC operation (see page 180 to page 182).
Siemens · 2011 189


69
45 15
104
91
176
NSB01388

Screw terminals
6 9
5 2
4 5 1 5
1 0 4
9 1
1 7 6
N S B 0 _ 0 1 3 8 9
All dimensions not mentioned are identical to those of the contactors with DC operation
(see page 180 to 182).
190 Siemens · 2011

3RH11 and 3RH14 contactor relays
3RH11 contactor relays, size S00

with screw terminals,
106 Lateral distance to
45 99 grounded components = 6 mm
5,3 8,6 5 67 2)
1)
5
2)
Surge suppressor
3) Drilling pattern
57,5
50
3)
NSB00252a 1)
35
with Cage Clamp terminals,

with auxiliary switch block
5
25
44
47
37
60
50
3 4)
NSB01221 35
5 9 5 68
36 109
45
3RH14 latched contactor relays, size S00

2) 1)
SIEMENS SIEMENS
57,5
NSB00253
5,3 8,6 5 67
90 99
106
3RH11 coupling relays

3RH11 coupling relays, size S00
with screw terminals,
with surge suppressor
1)
Surge suppressor
2)
5
1) Drilling pattern
SIEMENS
Deviating dimensions for coupling relays

57,5
50
2) with Cage Clamp terminals:

NSB00258
Height: 60 mm
5,3 8,6 5 67 35
45 99
Siemens · 2011 191

3TH42/3TH43
AC operation DC operation
4,8 M3,5 4,8

M3,5 Contactor a 8 Contactor a
8
NSB0_00259a type type
3TH42 45 3TH42 45
78
60
3TH43 55 3TH43 55
78
60
NSB0_00260a
5 97 35 5 130
35
a a
Accessories for 3TH42/3TH43 contactor relays

3TX7 402-3.varistors,
3TX7 402-3A noise suppression diode,
3TX7 402-3D diode assemblies
3TX7 402-3 RC elements
(for DC operation) for 3TH42/3TH43 contactor relays
for mounting onto the coil terminals for 3TH42/3TH43 contactor relays for mounting onto the coil terminals
12 26
3,6
290
6 290
3,6
4
3,6
32
NSB00261
34
8
3,6
NSB00262
8
12 30
3TX4 180-0A ON-delay devices 3TX4 701 OFF-delay devices

for 3TH42/3TH43 contactor relays for 3TH42/3TH43 contactor relays
11 27 165
6,3
NSB00263
24
62,5
60
76
3,8
NSB00264
1)
M3,5 10,5 7 5,3

45 100 35
3TX4 090-0C coupling link 3TX4 090-0D coupling link

for mounting onto the contactor coil of 3TH42/3TH43 contactor relays, for mounting onto the contactor coil of
without surge suppression 3TH42/3TH43 contactor relays with surge suppression
45 45
NSB00283
NSB00265
30,1
20
20
30,1
28
28
1) For 35 mm standard mounting rail.
192 Siemens · 2011

Accessories for 3RT1 contactors
3RT19 16-2E . . ., 3RT19 16-2F . . ., 3RT19 16-2G . . . 3RT19 16-2 . . . .

solid-state time-delay auxiliary switch blocks solid-state time-delay blocks, with ON-delay
for contactors, size S00 Size S00
for mounting onto the front of contactors
(the dimensions are also valid for time-delay blocks with an
OFF-delay)
38
38
NSB00256
NSB00254
5 9 127 45 92
45 143 105
3RT19 26-2E . . ., 3RT19 26-2F . . ., 3RT19 26-2G . . . 3RT19 26-2 . . . .

solid-state time-delay auxiliary switch blocks solid-state time-delay blocks, with ON-delay
for contactors, sizes S0 to S3 Sizes S0 to S3
for mounting onto the top of the contactors
(the dimensions are also valid for time-delay blocks with an
OFF-delay and for 3RH19 24-1GP11 coupling links)
45 41
6 4 50
46
46
25
NSB00772
66
40
5 73
33
NSB00773
3RT19 16-2B.01 3RT19 26-2P. .1

OFF-delay devices pneumatic delay block
for contactors, sizes S00 to S3 for contactors, size S0
for mounting onto the front of 3RT1. 2 contactors
NSB01063
NSB0_01607
30
55 NC 67 NO
26
45
0,1
57,5
36
55
56 NC 68 NO
for 3RT1.2
ON DELAY
10 33 8
44 47
45 5 67,5
3RT19 16-4KA1 3RT19 26-4P

solder pin adapters screw adapters
Size S00 for contactors of size S0
Mounted onto 3RT10 1. contactors with 1 auxiliary contact
in the basic unit
55 45
NSB0_01405
NSB00770
A1
67,4
57,5
50
90
60
10x 2,0
A2
5
5
1,4 5,2 5,2

50 8,6 8,6
57,5 8,6 8,6 45
35 65
Siemens · 2011 193

3RT19 16-4BB31 3RT19 16-4BB41

parallel connector parallel connector
Size S00 Size S00
3-pole, with terminal 4-pole, with terminal
NSB 01233
76
76
33
33
NSB01217 11 5 29 32
11
24 5 29 32 33
3RT19 26-4BB31 3RT19 36-4BB31

parallel connector parallel connector
Size S0 Size S2
3-pole, with terminal 3-pole, with terminal
96
140
18
NSB01216
14 23
60
32 67
44
45 84
25
NSB 01215
24 6 17
47 46 57
55
3RT19 46-4BB31 3RT19 26-3A.

parallel connector mechanical latching block
Size S3
3-pole, with through hole and cover for touch protection
NSB0_01431
48
120
50
234
22,5 84 7
329
56 3
NSB 01214
70 79 40
194 Siemens · 2011

3RT19 36-4EA2 3RT19 46-4EA2

terminal cover for box terminals terminal cover for box terminals
for size S2 for size S3
NSB01222a
123
85
160
124
NSB 01223a
55 66
94
106
70 69
108
124
3RT19 46-4EA1
terminal cover for cable lug and busbar connection
for size S3
55
144
199
NSB 01224
70 75 59
Siemens · 2011 195

3RT19 46-4F
auxiliary terminals, 3-pole
Size S3
Mounted on contactor 160
124
NSB01222
70 69
108
124
3RH19 11-1AA. ., 3RH19 11-1LA . . 3RH19 11-1BA . ., 3RH19 11-1MA . .

auxiliary switch blocks auxiliary switch blocks
Screw terminals Screw terminals
2-pole 2-pole
Cable entry from above Cable entry from below
5 9 25
38
NSB01202
38
NSB01203
36 38
36 38
3RH19 11-1F . ., 3RH19 11-1H . . 3RH19 11-. NF . .

auxiliary switch blocks according to EN 50012 and EN 50005 solid-state compatible auxiliary switch blocks according to EN 50005
Screw terminals Screw terminals 1)
1- to 4-pole
5 9 25 5 9 25
16
16
38
38
NSB01204
NSB01205
36 38 36 38
3RH19 11-2F . . ., 3RH19 11-2H . . . 3RH19 11-1AA.., 3RH19 11-1BA..

auxiliary switch blocks according to EN 50005 and EN 50012 auxiliary switch blocks, 1-pole
Cage Clamp terminals Cable entry from one side
1- to 4-pole
5 9 13,6
27,5
25
38
NSB00255
NSB01206
24 27
36 42
1) Deviating dimension for auxiliary switch block with Cage Clamp terminals:
mounting depth 42 mm.
196 Siemens · 2011

3RH19 21-. HA . ., 3RH19 21- . F . . . 3RH19 21-. C . . .

auxiliary switch blocks according to EN 50005 and EN 50012 auxiliary switch block according to EN 50005 and EN 50012
for sizes S0 to S12 for sizes S0 to S12
Screw and Cage Clamp terminals Screw and Cage Clamp terminals
4-pole 1-pole
5 11
38
18
38
18
NSB01207a
NSB01208
11 11 44
44 49
3RH19 21-1LA . . 3RH19 21-1MA . .

auxiliary switch block according to EN 50005 auxiliary switch block according to EN 50005
Screw terminals Screw terminals
2-pole 2-pole
5 11
38
38
NSB01209
NSB01210
44 49
44 49
3RH19 21-1D . . ., 3RH19 21-1J . . ., 3RH19 21-1E . . ., 3RH19 21-1K . . . 3RH19 21-2D . . ., 3RH19 21-2J . . ., 3RH19 21-2E . . ., 3RH19 21-2K . . .
auxiliary switch blocks, for lateral mounting auxiliary switch blocks, for lateral mounting
Screw terminals Cage Clamp terminals
2-pole 2-pole
72
80
NSB 01235
NSB 01234
10 70
10 71
3RT19 00-4RE01 and 3RT19 16-4RD01 3RT19 00-4RE01 and 3RT19 26-4RD01
connection modules for contactors with screw terminals connection modules for contactors with screw terminals
size S00 size S0
5 67 5 86
85
28
108
128
2T1 4T2 6T3

21
51
NSB0_01666a
2T1 4T2 6T3

51
NSB0_01667a
45 Ø13 53
45 Ø13 53
Siemens · 2011 197


3RT19 66-1PV3 3RT19 66-1PV4
main current path surge suppression module main current path surge suppression module
for 3RT12 vacuum contactors, sizes S10 and S12 for 3RT12 vacuum contactors, sizes S10 and S12
Connected to outgoing side of contactor (2-T1/4-T2/6-T3) Connected to outgoing side of contactor (2-T1/4-T2/6-T3)
using approx. 350 mm long, molded cable using approx. 350 mm long, molded cable
NSB01362a
76
76
NSB01360a
45 7 99 7
100 102,5
62,5
60
62,5
60
5,3
35 5
90
3RT19 .6-4EA1 3RT19 .6-4EA2

terminal covers for busbar connections terminal covers for box terminals
Sizes S6 to S12 Sizes S6 to S12
for mounting onto the contactor enclosure for mounting onto box terminals
C
C
D
D
B
B
NSB01166a
A E F
NSB01165a
A E F
A B C D E F A B C D E F
S6 119 324 107 241 91 52 S6 119 215 27 190 91 52
S10 145 385 128 289 106 66 S10 145 265 30 235 106 66
S12 145 399 128 303 124 66 S12 145 279 30 249 124 66
3RT19 .6-4BA31
links for paralleling
sizes S6 to S12
B
NSB01167a
A C 5
A B ∅C
S6 91 199 10.5
S10 121 244 12.5
S12 121 258 12.5
198 Siemens · 2011

Accessories for 3RA1 contactor assemblies

3RA19 54-2A
mechanical interlocks
Sizes S6 to S12
10
NSB01173
3RA19 .2-2A base plates for reversing contactor assemblies

C
A E 18
D
B
NSB01172a
A B C D E
S6 190 205 250 229 9
S10 240 249 300 275 11
S12 280 249 330 275 11
3RA19 .2-2E, 3RA19 .2-2F

base plates for contactor assemblies for wye-delta starting
C
A E 18
D
B
NSB01176a
A B C D E
S6-S6-S3 316 205 376 229 9
S6-S6-S6 343 205 403 229 9
S10-S10-S6 393 250 453 275 11
S10-S10-S10 423 250 483 275 11
S12-S12-S10 450 250 510 275 11
S12-S12-S12 465 250 525 275 11
Siemens · 2011 199


Size S00
NSB00774
5
67
50
5 8,6 35 7,5
90 5 51
67
Size S0
with 3RA19 24-2B with 3RA19 24-1A
mechanical interlocking mechanical interlocking
Lateral On front
5
NSB00776
29
36
60
86
NSB00775
45 16
8 14 10 28 7,5
40 5 39 90 44
100 61
86
DC 95
Size S2
5
NSB00777
120
95
10
13
10 17,5 50 8
120 5 36
52
110
DC 125
Size S3
NSB00778
5
157
130
12
10
12 22 65 8
150 5 46
85
134
DC147
200 Siemens · 2011

Size S6 with 3RA19 53-2A wiring module

2 5 0 1 8 7
1 9 0 9 1 5 2
6 4
1 8
1 3 2
2 2 9
2 0 5
3 6 4
2 0 5
1 7 3
1 3 8
2 3 6
1 0 7
6 7
N S B 0 _ 0 1 2 3 0 a
Size S6 with 3RA19 53-2M wiring module

250
190
140
205
229
333
222
202
NSB0_01714
Siemens · 2011 201

Size S10
3 0 6 2 2 2
3 0 0 2 0 2
1 0 6 6 6
2 1 9 4
4 6 5
2 1 3
2 4 9
2 7 5
1 6 8
2 9 0
5 9
1 0 0
N S B 0 _ 0 1 2 3 1 a
2 4 0
Size S12
2 2 8
1 2 6 6 6
2 1 1 1 0
2 1 3
1 8 2
4 8 1
2 4 9
2 7 5
3 0 4
6 5
1 0 9
N S B 0 1 2 3 2 a
2 8 0
3 3 0
202 Siemens · 2011

Sizes S00 – S00 – S00
K4
71
K3 K2
NSB00779
135 5 67
143
(AC+DC)
Sizes S0 – S0 – S0
88
K1 K3 K2
K4
158 5 130 (AC)

NSB00780
140 (DC)
140
125
K2
K1 K3 K4
7 10
150 169 (AC)
178 184 (DC)
NSB00781
125
140
K1 K3 K2 K4
7 10
150 169 (AC)
198 184 (DC)
NSB00782
Siemens · 2011 203

165
180
K1 K3 K2 K4
7
10
150 194 (AC)
218 207 (DC)
NSB00783
3TG10 miniature contactors

3TG10 . .-0. .contactors 3TG10. .-1. .contactors 3TG10 contactors
with screw terminals with tab connectors with 3UA7 overload relays
36 36 36
18 5 55 18 5 56
NSB00787
42,5
42,5
35 1)
35 1)
52
62
62
52
90
100
NSB00785 NSB00786
48
3,5x4,7 3,5x4,7 M3
45 62 6
3RT19 16-4BB41 links for paralleling, 4-pole, with terminal

for 3TG10 contactors
NSB00788
45
M4
The links for paralleling can be reduced by one pole.

1) Can be snapped onto 35 mm standard mounting rail.
204 Siemens · 2011

3TF68 and 3TF69 vacuum contactors, 3-pole
3TF68 vacuum contactors Detail

A = Contact erosion indication for vacuum interrupter contacts
230 237 A
70 100 NSB00795
M10 30 28
Ø12
210
232
276
245
300
M3,5
A
150 1) NSB00794
178
3TF69 vacuum contactors Detail

A = Contact erosion indication for vacuum interrupter contacts
230 237 A
70 100 NSB00793
M12 40 28
2,5
9,2 12
232
295
210
240
259
255
320
M3,5
A
NSB00792a
70 1)
150 220
1) With box terminals for laminated copper bars (accessories).
Siemens · 2011 205

Accessories for 3T contactors
3TX7 462-3. varistors 3TX7 462-3., 3TX7 522-3., 3TX7 090-0D coupling link
3TX7 572-3. for laterally snapping onto
RC elements and varistors contactors
70 4,2 4,2
NSB00806
200
230
35
4,2
NSB00808
13 21
95
95
NSB00266
21 52
22 52
3TX7 box terminals for laminated copper bars

Box terminals with cover, mounted to contactor
NSB00812
For contactor Box terminals a b c

type
3TF68 3TX7 570-1. 182 178 300
3TF69 3TX7 690-1F 200 219 320
c
a b
3TX7 686-0A and 3TX7 696-0A terminal covers

For 3TF68 and 3TF69 contactors, size 14,
for screwing onto free screw end of the two outer conducting paths
21
For contactor Terminal covers
type a b c
3TF68 3TX7 686-0A 245 M10 104
3TF69 3TX7 696-0A 255 M12 99
a
b
c
NSB00815
230 70
3TX7 680-0D link for paralleling 3TX7 680-0E cover plate

for 3TF68 contactors for 3TX7 680-0D link for paralleling for 3TF68 contactor
NSB00817a 200
5
19
30
64
11
170
NSB00819
206 Siemens · 2011

3TB5 contactors
3TB50 and 3TB52 contactors 3TB54 and 3TB56 contactors

Sizes 6 and 8 Sizes 10 and 12
a1 c3 3
1) a
1
c
3 3 1)
a3 c2
a3 7 f4
d2 d1 c2
52
M3,5 g2
M3,5 M10
b3
b1
e3
180
200
e3
NSB00822
NSB00823a
48 25 Ø10,5 f
4
Type a1 a3 b1 b3 c2 c3 d1 d2 e3 f4 g2 Type a1 a3 c2 c3 e3 f4
3TB50 120 100 150 130 23 198 37 15 133 137.5 M6 3TB54 145 120 30.5 264 168 188
3TB52 135 110 180 160 28 217 42 20 154 147 M8 3TB56 160 130 39 282 178 200
1) Minimum clearance from insulated components 3 mm.

Minimum clearance from grounded components 10 mm.
3TX6 .. 6-3B terminal covers

l
NSB00824
b h
For contactors
Size Type b h l
6 3TB50 27 33 58
8 3TB52 34 44 75
10 to 12 3TB54 to 3TB56 38 56 95
3TD68, 3TE68 contactor assemblies

3TD68 contactor assemblies
400
NSB00827a
280
310
470
13,5
257 25
520 278
3TE68 contactor assemblies

550
NSB00828a
295
325
470
13,5
231 196 25
665 278
Siemens · 2011 207

3TK10 to 3TK17 contactors
3TK10 to 3TK17 contactors e M10 grounding screw for 3TK14 to 3TK17

The scope of supply includes screws and rubber buffers.
k2
b1 p e
b2 p1 t1
c t
h1
c1
c1
h
M4
for c
NSB0_00833 M6 c2
for M6 f g d
k1
Contac- a b1 b2 c c1 c2 1) c2 2) d 3) e min. f g h h1 k1 k2 4) p p1 t t1
tors
Type
3TK10 186 165 136 120 140 166 187 6.6 40 41 15 156 156 7.5 134 154.5 102.3 10 4
3TK11 186 165 136 120 140 168 187 11 40 42 20 156 172 10 134 154.5 102.3 10 4
3TK12 225 201 176 160 140 202 226 11 15 45 20 156 198 10 134 172 106.7 10 5
3TK13 225 201 176 160 140 202 226 11 15 45 20 156 198 10 134 172 106.7 10 5
3TK14 266 244 244 220 200 271 293 11 40 67 25 223 272 12.5 -- 225.5 139.5 23 5) 6
3TK15 266 244 244 220 200 271 293 11 40 67 25 223 273 12.5 -- 225.5 139.5 23 5) 6
3TK17 266 244 244 220 200 271 293 11 40 67 40 223 273 12.5 -- 225.5 139.5 23 5) 6
1) Distance when 2 contactors, each with one auxiliary switch block oppo- 3) Nuts, bolts, screws and washers are supplied.
site, are mounted. 4) Minimum clearance for removing the withdrawable coil.
2) Distance when 2 contactors, each with two auxiliary switch blocks oppo- 5) Damping elements are supplied.
site, are mounted.
208 Siemens · 2011

Accessories for 3TK1 contactors
3TK19 4. terminal covers
NSB00835
Contactors Terminal h2 p2 for k2 for b4
Type covers I II III I II III
3TK10, 3TK11 3TK19 40-0A 372 153 178 203 47 72 97 168
3TK12, 3TK13 3TK19 42-0A 399 158 183 208 47 72 97 202
3TK14, 3TK15 3TK19 44-0A 464 193 218 243 47 72 97 268
3TK17 3TK19 46-0A 464 193 218 243 47 72 97 268
h2
II
b4 k2
p2
3TK19 20 and 3TK19 22 locking devices

for mechanical locking of two identical 3TK10 to 3TK13 contactors,
mounted side by side on the mounting plate
NSB00836
Contactors Locking
Type devices c2 c3 c4
3TK10, 3TK11 3TK19 20-0A 120 140 65
3TK12, 3TK13 3TK19 22-0A 160 140 63.5
c3
M6
c2 c4 c2
3TK19 24 locking device

for mechanical locking of two identical 3TK14, 3TK15 or 3TK17
contactors, mounted side by side on the mounting plate
5 8 0 2 7 6
5 5 0 1 9 0
2 4 0 7 3
2 6 5
2 9 5
N S B 0 0 8 3 7
B a s e p la te
Siemens · 2011 209

3TC4 and TC5 contactors
3TC44 contactors 3TC48 contactors

Size 2, AC and DC operation Size 4, AC and DC operation
70 b t 100 b t
50 Ø 4,8 a 60 a
56,5
130
110
75
85
160
NSB00839
M3,5
NSB00838
Ø 5,8 c
M5 M3,5 8 4
15 M6
7,5
50
80
t = minimum clearance from insulated components: 15 mm (600 V and 750 V) t = minimum clearance from insulated components: 15 mm (600 V),
20 mm (750 V)
from grounded components: 30 mm (600 V and 750 V) from grounded components: 35 mm (600 V),
55 mm (750 V)
a b a b c
DC operation 109 141 DC operation 112 180 21.5
AC operation 68 100 AC operation 86 154 23.5

Size 8, AC and DC operation Size 12, AC and DC operation
135 b t 160 b t
110 a 130 a
79 27 96 1) 39 1)
1)
52
80
NSB00840
179,5
160
89
215
180
200
M3,5
256
Ø 6,8
M3,5
Ø10,5
25 M10
12,5
36,5 NSB00841
71
25 M10
12,5
41,5
85
t = minimum clearance from insulated components: 20 mm (600 V and 750 V) t = minimum clearance from insulated components: 25 mm (600 V and 750 V)
from grounded components: 70 mm (600 V and 750 V) from grounded components: 80 mm (600 V),
100 mm (750 V)
a b a b
DC operation 147 232 DC operation 200 310
AC operation 115 200 AC operation 141 251
1) DC operation only.
210 Siemens · 2011

3TC7 contactors

Size 12, DC and AC operation Size 12, DC and AC operation
83 80 288
NSB00842
14
14 52 M10 100 Ø 12 160
16,5 132
b
Ø9
16
b
28
M10
352
280
366
330
42
NSB00843
14
d
14
a 14 4 75 25
d
c 33 M3,5 78
272 a M10 50 M3,5 25
c 290 80
Dimensions Minimum clearance from Dimensions Minimum clearance from

insulated grounded insulated grounded
components components components components
a ≥ 20 ≥ 50 a ≥ 20 ≥ 50
b ≥ 10 ≥ 25 b ≥ 10 ≥ 25
c ≥ 180 (clearance for removing arc chute) c ≥ 180 (clearance for removing arc chute)
d Coil terminal
3TC78 14-0E: 8 mm
3TC78 14-1C: 16 mm
3TX2 746-2. varistors

for 3TC74 and 3TC78 contactors
70
20
NSB00847
26 10
Siemens · 2011 211


3TC44 17-0L contactors, size 2, DC operation

82
70 141 t
50 109
Series
8 resistor
30
75
85
NSB00848 4
Ø 4,8 M5 M3,5
Varistor
t = minimum clearance from insulated components: 15 mm (600 V and 750 V)
from grounded components: 30 mm (600 V and 750 V)
Additional space requirements for mounting resistors and varistors

For 3TB50 to 3TB56, 3TC48 to 3TC56 contactors
a Contactor c For contactors Additional space requirements
for series resistor for varistor
c a b1 b2*)
3TB50 30 13 70 110
3TB52, 3TB54, 3TB56 -- 15 82 120
3TC48 30 13 70 110
3TC52, 3TC56 -- 15 82 120
*) Terminal compartment.
b1
b2
NSB00850
Mounted Space for

varistor mounting a resistor
Separately mounted series resistor

For contactors Number of
16
85 series resistors
5,5
NSB00851
3TB52, 3TC52 1
3TB54, 3TB56 2
3TC56 2
212 Siemens · 2011

3TF2 contactors for switching motors, width 45 mm, size S00
3TF20, 3TF28, $?
3TX4 490 3TF20, 3TF22, 3TF28, 3TF29 $?
3TX4 490
with 1 auxiliary contact, surge suppressor with 2 to 5 auxiliary contacts, surge suppressor
with screw terminals, %?
Additional module with screw terminals, %?
Additional module
AC and DC operation, (on overload relay) AC and DC operation, (on overload relay)
without or with overload relay without or with overload relay &?
(3UA7),
3 8 3 8
1 1
4 ,4
4 ,4
3 5 1 1 3 5 1 1 3
M 3 M 3
3 1
1 8
2 4
2 4
4 8
4 0
1 8
4 8
4 0
4 5
4 5
9 0
2 5 2 5
9 0
2 8
4 8
4 8
9 6
9 6
M 3 2 M 3 2
N S B 0 _ 0 0 7 8 4 a
N S B 0 _ 0 1 5 5 9
1 0
1 0
4 5 5 6 3 6 4 5 5 6 3 6
7
7
3TF20 3TF20
with flat connectors 6.3 mm x 0.8 mm, with flat connectors 6.3 mm x 0.8 mm,
for snap-on and screw fixing, for screw fixing (diagonal),
AC and DC operation AC and DC operation
5 ,7 x 4 ,5 3 ,5 3 ,5 A 6 ,3 x 0 ,8 D IN 4 6 2 4 4
N S B 0 _ 0 1 5 4 0
N S B 0 _ 0 1 5 3 9
N S B 0 _ 0 1 5 4 4
1 7 ,5
3 6
1 5
4 0
4 8
4 5 8
5 0 6 0 8 ,3 8 ,6 8 ,1
3 6 ,5 5 8 8 ,6 8 ,6
4 5 6 4 ,5
Grid size for

flat connectors
3TF20 3TX4 491-2A plug-in base
with solder pin connections for printed circuit boards with solder pin connections for printed circuit boards
for screw fixing (diagonal),
AC and DC operation
p
3,5 0,8 x 1,2 49,8 Solder pin
NSB0_01541
21,7 0,32 x 1,0 Unassigned
13,5 connections
22,6
1)
36
15
1,8 11,4 18,5 1,4

NSB0_01542
12,4
45 59 4
42,8
36,8
39,8
17,5
50 8,3 8,6 8,1 1,3 1

8,6 8,6
1)
NSB0_01543
5,8
Hole pattern for 2,4 3,2 26,2 3,3

8,6 8,6 4,8
solder pin for tapping for cheesehead 8,6 7,8
connections screw ST2.9 screw M3
Hole pattern for
plug-in base
3TX4 490 OFF-delay device
3 8
3 5 1 1
4 ,4
N S B 0 _ 0 1 5 4 5
4 8
4 0
4 2
M 3
4 5 5 6 3
1) Holes required only for integrated overvoltage damping in the plug-in

base.
Siemens · 2011 213

3TK20 contactors, width 45 mm, size S00
3TK20 3TK20
with screw terminals, with flat connectors 6.3 mm x 0.8 mm,
for snap-on and screw fixing, for snap-on and screw fixing,
M 3 5 ,7 x 4 ,5 5 ,7 x 4 ,5
N S B 0 _ 0 1 5 9 8
N S B 0 _ 0 1 5 3 9
4 0
4 8
4 0
4 8
3 6 ,5 5 8
3 6 ,5 5 6 3
4 5 6 4 ,5
4 5
3TK20 3TK20
with flat connectors 6.3 mm x 0.8 mm, with solder pin connections for printed circuit boards,
for screw fixing (diagonal), for screw fixing (diagonal),
3 ,5 3 ,5 A 6 ,3 x 0 ,8 D IN 4 6 2 4 4 3,5 Solder pin 0.8 x 1.2
12,4
N S B 0 _ 0 1 5 4 0 NSB0_01560
N S B 0 _ 0 1 5 4 4
22,6
1 7 ,5
15
36
3 6
1 5
1,8
4 5 8 45 55,5 4
5 0 6 0 8 ,3 8 ,6 8 ,1 8,3 8,6 8,1
50
8 ,6 8 ,6 8,6 8,6
Grid size Hole pattern

for flat connectors for solder pin
connections
3TX4 491-2A plug-in base
with solder pin connections for printed circuit boards
49,8 Unassigned
Solder pin
21,7 0,32 x 1,0 connections
13,5 1)
1,4
11,4 18,5
NSB0_01542
17,5
1,3 1
42,8
36,8
39,8
1)
NSB0_01543
5,8
8,6 8,6 4,8

2,4 3,2 26,2 3,3 8,6 7,8
for tapping for cheesehead
screw ST2.9 screw M3
Hole pattern
for plug-in base

base.
214 Siemens · 2011

3TH2 contactor relays, width 45 mm, size S00
3TH20 with 4 contacts $?

3TX4 490 3TH20 with 6 and 8 contacts, $?
3TX4 490
with screw terminals, surge suppressor 3TH22 with 8 contacts surge suppressor
AC and DC operation with screw terminals, %?Auxiliary switch block
AC and DC operation
3 7 ,5 3 7 ,5
3 5 1 1 1 3 5 1 1 2 1
4 ,4
4 ,4
N S B 0 _ 0 1 5 5 4 N S B 0 _ 0 1 5 5 5
3 1
1 8
2 4
4 8
4 0
4 5
4 8
4 0
4 5
1 8
2 4
4 5 M 3 5 6 3 2 5 4 5 M 3 5 6 3 2 8 2 5

3TX4 490 3TH20 with 6 and 8 contacts, $?
3TX4 490
AC and DC operation surge suppressor 3TH22 with 8 contacts surge suppressor
AC and DC operation %?
3 7 ,5 3 7 ,5
3 5 1 1 2 1
4 ,4
3 5 1 1 1
4 ,4
N S B 0 _ 0 1 5 5 8
N S B 0 _ 0 1 5 5 7
4 5
4 8
4 0
2 4
3 3
1 8
1 8
4 8
4 0
4 5
2 4
4 5 5 6 3 2 5 4 5 5 6 3 2 8 2 5
3TH20 3TH20
with flat connectors 6.3 mm x 0.8 mm, with solder pin connections for printed circuit boards
for snap-on and screw fixing, for screw fixing (diagonal),
5 ,7 x 4 ,5 Solder pin
N S B 0 _ 0 1 5 3 9 3,5 0,8 x 1,2 NSB0_01541
22,6
36
15
4 0
4 8
1,8
12,4
45 59 4
3 6 ,5 5 8 8,3 8,6 8,1
50
4 5 6 4 ,5 8,6 8,6
Hole pattern
for solder pin
connections
3TX4 491-2A plug-in base 3TX4 490 OFF-delay device
with solder pin connections for printed circuit boards
49,8 Solder pin 1)
21,7 0,32 x 1,0 1,4
13,5 3 8
3 5 1 1
4 ,4
11,4 18,5
N S B 0 _ 0 1 5 4 5
17,5
1,3 1
NSB0_01542
1)
42,8
36,8
39,8
NSB0_01543
5,8
4 8
4 0
4 2
8,6 8,6 4,8

8,6 7,8 M 3
2,4 3,2 26,2 3,3 4 5 5 6 3
for tapping for cheesehead
screw ST2.9 screw M3
Hole pattern for
plug-in base
base.
Siemens · 2011 215

3TH27 latched contactor relays, width 90 mm, size S00

3TX4 490
with screw terminals, surge suppressor
for screw and snap-on mounting,
AC and DC operation
8 1
5 ,8 1 1 1
N S B 0 _ 0 1 5 5 6
4 8
4 0
4 5
1 8
2 4
4 ,5
M 3
9 0 5 6 3 2 5
Coupling relays in industrial enclosure
3RS18
5 86
36
110
62
90
62
74
62
82
C
A
B
100
NSB0_01625
15 15 15
22,5 22,5 22,5
A B C
3RS18 00-.A 3RS18 00-.B 3RS18 00-.H
Removable terminals
Spring-type terminals 84 94 103
Screw terminals 83 92 102
216 Siemens · 2011


Coupling relays with narrow design
3TX7 002, 3TX7 003 coupling links in terminal block design
3TX7 00 .-1AB . ., 3TX7 002-3AB00, 3TX7 00 .-1BB00, 3TX7 00 .-1CB00,
3TX7 00 .-2A . . ., 3TX7 002-4A . . . 3TX7 00 .-1BF00, 3TX7 002-1FB02
3TX7 002-3AB01 3TX7 002-2BF02
NSB00270
NSB00284
NSB00268
NSB00269
60
M3 M3 M3 M3
11,5 12,5 17,5 22,5 62
3TX7 004, 3TX7 005 coupling links in double-decker design

3TX7 00 .-1MB00, 3TX7 00 .-1BB00, 3TX7 00 .-1HB00 3TX7 00 .-1GB00
3TX7 00 .-1MF00, 3TX7 00 .-1BB10, relay coupling links relay coupling links
3TX7 00 .-1L . 0 ., 3TX7 00 .-1CB00,
3TX7 00 .-2M . . . 3TX7 00 .-1BF05
relay coupling links relay coupling links
3TX7 00 .-3AB04, 3TX7 00 .-3AC04,

3TX7 00 .-4AB04, 3TX7 00 .-3AC14,
3TX7 00 .-3PB . ., 3TX7 00 .-3AC03
3TX7 00 .-3PG74, semiconductor coupling links
3TX7 00 .-3RB43
semiconductor coupling links
NSB00274c
79 1)
80 2)
NSB00271
NSB00273
NSB00272
6,2 12,5 17,5

22,5 84
3TX7 014, 3TX7 015 3TX7 014-7CE00

relay couplers with plug-in design galvanic isolation plate
3 0 °
8 9 ,2
8 9 ,5
N S B 0 _ 0 1 6 4 3
N S B 0 _ 0 1 4 2 8
1 8 6 ,6 8
9 4 ,1 8
6 ,2 9 2
3TX7 014-7AA00 3TX7 014-7B.0.

connecting comb, 16-pole individual relay module
N S B 0 _ 0 1 6 4 2
N S B 0 _ 0 1 6 4 1
1 2 ,5
1 4 ,5
3 ,2 3 ,0 3
9 6 ,2
6 ,2
2 7 ,8 5
1 0 0
1) Dimensions for 3TX7 004 coupling links (screw terminals).

2) Dimensions for 3TX7 005 coupling links (spring-type terminals).
Siemens · 2011 217


LZS:PT relay couplers
Complete units, 11- and 14-pole, PT series
LZS:PT3A5 LZS:PT5B5 LZS:PT5D5
LZS:PT5A5
Standard plug-in base with screw terminals Plug-in base with logical isolation and Plug-in base with logical isolation and
screw terminals plug-in terminals
61 48,5
42 42,5 36
24 24 24
NSB0_01742a
NSB0_01743a
NSB0_01741
74
77
98
28 4,5 28 4,5
24 31
72 79
28 4,5
31
79
LZX industrial relays, 8-, 11-, and 14-pole, PT series

LZX:PT270, 8-pole LZX:PT370, 11-pole LZX:PT520, LZX:PT570, LZX:PT580, 14-pole
2 CO 3 CO 4 CO
NSB0_01012a
NSB0_01624a
NSB0_00279a
28
28
28
6
6
28 2,2 28 2,2 28 2,2

22,5 22,5 22,5
Plug-in bases for PT series

LZS:PT78740 LZS:PT78742 LZS:PT7874P
with screw terminals with logical isolation and screw terminals with logical isolation and plug-in terminals
43 36
24 24
NSB0_01746
NSB0_01745a
NSB0_01744
74
77
98
28 4,5 28 4,5
24 31
42 62
28 4,5
31
48,5
218 Siemens · 2011


LZS:RT relay couplers
Complete units, 8-pole, 5 mm pinning, RT series
LZS:RT3A4; LZS:RT3B4; LZS:RT3D4;
LZS:RT4A4 LZS:RT4B4 LZS:RT4D4
Standard plug-in base with screw terminals Plug-in base with logical isolation and Plug-in base with logical isolation and
screw terminals plug-in terminals
62 48,5
42,5 43 36
24 24 24
NSB0_01748a
NSB0_01747a
NSB0_01749a
77
78
98
15,5 4,5 16,5 4,5
31 31
71 71
15,5 4,5
31
71
LZX:RT3; LZX:RT4 print relays

N S B 0 _ 0 0 2 7 6
1 5 ,7
2 ,6 1 2 ,7
2 9
3 ,8
Plug-in bases for RT series

LZS:RT78725 LZS:RT78726 LZS:RT7872P
with screw terminals with logical isolation and screw terminals with logical isolation and plug-in terminals
43 36
24 24 24
NSB0_01751a
NSB0_01750a
NSB0_01752
77
78
98
15,5 4,5 16,5 4,5

31 31
42,5 62
15,5 4,5
31
48,5
Siemens · 2011 219


LZX:MT relay couplers
Industrial relays, 11-pole, MT series
LZX:MT32 LZS:MT78750 plug-in bases
for industrial relays
3 5 ,5
N S B 0 _ 0 0 2 8 1
62
3 5 ,5 5 7
32,5
NSB0_01753
6 9
28 4,5
38 28
220 Siemens · 2011

■ Schematics
Internal circuit diagrams for 3RT1 contactors and accessories (valid for screw and Cage Clamp terminals)
Size S00 Size S0 to S12

Terminal designations according to EN 50012 Terminal designations according to EN 50012
3RT10 1 contactors 3RT10 2, 3RT10 3 contactors 3RT10 5 to 3RT10 7, 3RT12,
1 NO 1 NC 3RT14 contactors
Ident. No.: 10E 01
NSB0_00484a
1 /L 1 3 /L 2 5 /L 3 1 3 1 /L 1 3 /L 2 5 /L 3 2 1 A1(+) 1/L1 3/L2 5/L3 A1(+) 1/L1 3/L2 5/L3
NSB0_01711
A 1 (+ )
N S B 0 _ 0 0 4 8 2 a
N S B 0 _ 0 0 4 8 3 a
A 1 (+ ) U
A 2 ( ) A 2 ( ) A2(-) 2/T1 4/T2 6/T3 A2(-) 2/T1 4/T2 6/T3

2 /T 1 4 /T 2 6 /T 3 1 4 2 /T 1 4 /T 2 6 /T 3 2 2
3RT10 1 contactors (with 1 NO) 3RT10 2 and 3RT10 3, 3RT14 contactors

with front-mounted 3RH19 11-.H... auxiliary switch blocks with front-mounted 4-pole 3RH19 21- . HA22 auxiliary switch block
1 NO + 1 NC 2 NO + 2 NC
Ident. No.: 11E Ident. No.: 22E
1/L1 3/L2 5/L3 13 21 31 43
NSB0_00487b
1 /L 1 3 /L 2 5 /L 3 1 3 2 1 A1(+)
N S B 0 _ 0 0 4 8 5 b
A 1 (+ )
A 2 ( ) A2(–)
2 /T 1 4 /T 2 6 /T 3 1 4 2 2 2/T1 4/T2 6/T3 14 22 32 44
Contactors 3RT1. 5, 3RT1. 6, 3RT1. 7 (sizes S6, S10, S12)

with front-mounted 4-pole 3RH19 21- . HA22 auxiliary switch block or
with lateral 2-pole 3RH19 21-1DA11 auxiliary switch blocks
2 NO + 2 NC 2 NO + 2 NC
22E
NSB0_01712a
1 /L 1 3 /L 2 5 /L 3 1 3 2 1 3 1 4 3 A1(+) 1/L1 3/L2 5/L3 13 21 31 43
U
N S B 0 _ 0 0 4 8 6 a
A 1 (+ )
A 2 ( ) A2(–) 2/T1 4/T2 6/T3 14 22 32 44

2 /T 1 4 /T 2 6 /T 3 1 4 2 2 3 2 4 4
4-pole 3RH19 21- . HA . ./- .XA. . auxiliary switch blocks,

for snapping onto the front1)
2 NO + 3 NC 3 NO + 1 NC 2 NO + 2 NC 2 NO + 2 NC 1 NO + 3 NC
Ident. No.: 23E Ident. No.: 31 22 22 13
3RH19 21-.HA. . 3RH19 21-.HA. . 3RH19 21-.XA. . 3RH19 21-.HA. .
1 /L 1 3 /L 2 5 /L 3 1 3 2 1 3 1 4 1 5 3 1 3 2 1 3 3 4 3 1 3 2 1 3 1 4 3 5 3 6 1 7 1 8 3 1 3 2 1 3 1 4 1
N S B 0 _ 0 1 3 5 4 a
N S B 0 _ 0 0 4 9 0 a
N S B 0 _ 0 0 4 9 1 a
N S B 0 _ 0 0 4 9 2 a
N S B 0 _ 0 0 4 8 8 a
A 1 (+ )
A 2 ( )
2 /T 1 4 /T 2 6 /T 3 1 4 2 2 3 2 4 2 5 4 1 4 2 2 3 4 4 4 1 4 2 2 3 2 4 4 5 4 6 2 7 2 8 4 1 4 2 2 3 2 4 2
First laterally mountable 3RH19 21- . DA11, 3RH19 21-2DE11

auxiliary switch block (solid-state compatible)
3 NO + 2 NC 1 NO + 1 NC 1 NO + 1 NC
32E Left Right
1 /L 1 3 /L 2 5 /L 3 1 3 2 1 3 1 4 3 5 3 2 1 1 3 3 1 4 3
N S B 0 _ 0 0 4 9 4 a
N S B 0 _ 0 0 4 9 3 a
N S B 0 _ 0 0 4 8 9 a
A 1 (+ )
A 2 ( ) 3 2 4 4
2 /T 1 4 /T 2 6 /T 3 1 4 2 2 3 2 4 4 5 4 2 2 1 4
Size S0 to S3 Second laterally mountable 3RH19 21- . JA11, 3RH19 21-2JE11

Terminal designations according to EN 50012 auxiliary switch block (solid-state compatible)
(only for sizes S3 to S12)
3RT10 . . - . X . 40-0LA2 contactors 1 NO + 1 NC 1 NO + 1 NC
Varistor built-in Left Right
1 /L 1 3 /L 2 5 /L 3 6 1 5 3 7 1 8 3
N S B 0 _ 0 0 4 9 6 a
N S B 0 _ 0 0 1 6 9 a
A 1 (+ )
N S B 0 _ 0 0 4 9 5 a
A 2 ( ) 7 2 8 4
2 /T 1 4 /T 2 6 /T 3 6 2 5 4
Contactors with 4 main contacts, size S00 Contactors with 4 main contacts, sizes S0 to S3
3RT13 and 3RT15 contactors 3RT13 and 3RT15 contactors
4 NO 2 NO + 2 NC 4 NO 2 NO + 2 NC
1 /L 1 3 /L 2 5 /L 3 7 /L 4 A1(+) 1 R1 R3 3 1 /L 1 3 /L 2 5 /L 3 7 /L 4 A1(+) 1 R1 R3 3
N S B 0 _ 0 0 4 9 7 a
N S B 0 _ 0 0 4 9 9 a
A 1 (+ ) A 1 (+ )
NSB00500
NSB00500
A 2 ( ) A 2 ( )
2 /T 1 4 /T 2 6 /T 3 8 /T 4 A2( ) 2 R2 R4 4 2 /T 1 4 /T 2 6 /T 3 8 /T 4 A2( ) 2 R2 R4 4
(3RH19 11 auxiliary switch blocks acc. to EN 50005 can be snapped on) (3RH19 21 auxiliary switch blocks acc. to EN 50005 can be snapped on)
Surge suppressors for sizes S00 to S3 (coded plug-in direction; exception: for 3RT19 16-1T. . .diode assembly designation with +/–)
Diode Diode assembly Varistor RC element Diode with LED Varistor with LED
NSB00501
NSB00502
NSB00503
NSB00505
NSB00506
NSB00504
U U
1) Not for 3RT12 vacuum contactors.
Siemens · 2011 221

Accessories for size S00 contactors and contactor relays

3RH19 11-.F. . . auxiliary switch blocks and 3RH19 11-.NF. . solid-state compatible auxiliary switch blocks
(solid-state compatible auxiliary switch blocks
2 NO 1 NO + 1 NC 2 NC 1 NO + 1 NC
Ident. No.: 20 11 02 11 U
53 63 5 3 6 1 5 1 6 1 57 65
N S B 0 _ 0 0 5 0 8 a
N S B 0 _ 0 0 5 0 9 a
NSB00510
NSB00507
54 64 5 4 6 2 5 2 6 2 58 66
with make-before-break
4 NO 3 NO + 1 NC 2 NO + 2 NC 2 NO + 2 NC 2 NO + 2 NC
Ident. No.: 40 31 22 22 U 11/11 U
53 63 73 83 5 3 6 1 7 3 8 3 5 3 6 1 7 1 8 3 57 67 75 85 5 3 6 1 7 5 8 7
N S B 0 _ 0 0 5 1 2 a
N S B 0 _ 0 0 5 1 3 a
N S B 0 _ 0 0 5 1 5 a
NSB00514
NSB00511
54 64 74 84 5 4 6 2 7 4 8 4 5 4 6 2 7 2 8 4 58 68 76 86 5 4 6 2 7 6 8 8
with make-before-break 1 NO + 1 NC standard
1 NO + 1 NC with
make-before-break
3RH19 11-1AA.. and 3RH19 11-1BA.. 3RH19 11-1LA.. and 3RH19 11-1MA.. Internal wiring
auxiliary switch blocks, auxiliary switch blocks,
for snapping onto the front, for snapping onto the front,
cable entry from above or below cable entry from above or below
1 NO 1 NC 2 NO 1 NO + 1 NC
53 5 1 53 63 5 3 6 1
N S B 0 _ 0 0 5 1 7 a
N S B 0 _ 0 0 5 0 8 a
NSB00516
NSB00507
N S B 0 _ 0 0 5 2 0 a
54 5 2 54 64 5 4 6 2
5 3 5 4 6 1 6 2
Example of
1 NO + 1 NC, cable
entry from below

Terminal designations according to DIN 46199 Part 5
3RT19 16-2E. . ./2F. . ./2G. . . solid-state, time-delay auxiliary switch blocks
1 NO + 1 NC 1 NO + 1 NC 2 NO
With ON-delay OFF-delay Wye-delta function
A1 27 35 A1 27 35 A1 27 37
NSB00521
NSB00522
NSB00523
A2 28 36 A2 28 36 A2 28 38
(Integrated varistors not shown)
Accessories for size S0 to S12 contactors

3RH19 21- . F. . . auxiliary switch blocks, 4-pole,
for snapping onto the front1)
4 NO 3 NO + 1 NC 2 NO + 2 NC 4 NC 2 NO + 2 NC
Ident. No.: 40 31 22 04 22 U
13 23 33 43 1 3 2 3 3 3 4 1 1 3 2 3 3 1 4 1 1 1 2 1 3 1 4 1 17 27 35 45
N S B 0 _ 0 0 5 2 5 a
N S B 0 _ 0 0 5 2 6 a
N S B 0 _ 0 0 5 2 7 a
NSB00528
NSB00524
14 24 34 44 1 4 2 4 3 4 4 2 1 4 2 4 3 2 4 2 1 2 2 2 3 2 4 2 18 28 36 46
3RH19 21-.CA. . auxiliary switch blocks, 1-pole, 3RH19 21-1CD. . auxiliary switch blocks, 1-pole
for snapping onto the front 1) with make-before-break, for snapping onto the front 1)
1 NO 1 NC 1 NO 1 NC
.3 .1 .7 .5
N S B 0 _ 0 0 5 3 0 a
NSB00532
NSB00531
NSB00529
.4 .2 .8 .6
(Terminal designations according to EN 50005 or EN 50012)
222 Siemens · 2011


3RH19 21-1LA. . and 3RH19 21-1MA. . auxiliary switch block, 2-pole, Internal wiring
for snapping onto the front 1)
cable entry from above or below
N S B 0 _ 0 0 5 3 6 a
2 NO 1 NO + 1 NC 2 NC
1 3 1 4 2 1 2 2
13 23 1 3 2 1 1 1 2 1
N S B 0 _ 0 0 5 3 4 a
N S B 0 _ 0 0 5 3 5 a
NSB00533
Example of
14 24 1 4 2 2 1 2 2 2
1 NO + 1 NC,
cable entry
from below
3RH19 21-.FE22 solid-state compatible auxiliary switch block, 4-pole,
for snapping onto the front 1)
2 NO + 2 NC
Ident. No.: 22
1 3 2 3 3 1 4 1
N S B 0 _ 0 0 5 3 7 a
1 4 2 4 3 2 4 2
3RH19 21-.EA. . first laterally mountable auxiliary switch blocks (left) 3RH19 21-.EA. . first laterally mountable auxiliary switch blocks (right)
2 NO 1 NO + 1 NC 2 NC 2 NO 1 NO + 1 NC 2 NC
53 63 5 1 6 3 5 1 6 1 73 83 7 1 8 3 7 1 8 1
N S B 0 _ 0 0 5 3 9 a
N S B 0 _ 0 0 5 4 2 a
N S B 0 _ 0 0 5 4 3 a
N S B 0 _ 0 0 5 0 9 a
NSB00541
NSB00507
54 64 5 2 6 4 5 2 6 2 74 84 7 2 8 4 7 2 8 2
3RH19 21-.KA. . second laterally mountable auxiliary switch blocks (left) 3RH19 21-.KA. . second laterally mountable auxiliary switch blocks
(only for sizes S3 to S12) (right)
153 163 1 5 1 1 6 3 1 5 1 1 6 1 173 183 1 7 1 1 8 3 1 7 1 1 8 1
N S B 0 _ 0 0 5 4 6 a
N S B 0 _ 0 0 5 4 9 a
N S B 0 _ 0 0 5 4 5 a
N S B 0 _ 0 0 5 4 8 a
NSB00544
NSB00547
154 164 1 5 2 1 6 4 1 5 2 1 6 2 174 184 1 7 2 1 8 4 1 7 2 1 8 2

3RT19 26-2E. . ./2F. . ./2G. . . solid-state, time-delay auxiliary switch blocks 3RH19 24-1GP11 coupling link with surge suppression
1 NO + 1 NC 1 NO + 1 NC 2 NO
With ON-delay OFF-delay Wye-delta function Connection diagram Connection example
A1 -7 -5 A1 -7 -5 A1 -7 -7 L1 B1+ B2- N L1 L+ L- N
NSB00550
NSB00551
NSB00552
1
1 L1 B1+ B2- N
U
A2 -8 -6 A2 -8 -6 A2 -8 -8
U A1 A2
2
A1
2
A2 NSB00184
NSB00182
$ Coupling link $ Coupling link

% Contactor % Contactor
Accessories for contactors size S0

Terminal designations, pneumatic delay block
With ON-delay OFF-delay
3RT19 26-2PA.1 3RT19 26-2PR.1
55 67 57 65
NSB0_01848
NSB0_01847
56 68 58 66
Siemens · 2011 223

Schematics for accessories for sizes S00 to S3
3RT19 16-2BK01, 110 V UC 3RT19 16-2BE01, 24 V DC OFF-delay devices

3RT19 16-2BL01, 230 V UC OFF-delay devices
L1 AC
NSB01134
NSB01135a
A3 A4 A5 B1 Z+ Z+
~ A3 A4 A5 B1 Z+
~ Z+
= K1 K1
=
NSB01136a
A2- A1+ C+ Z-
NSB01178
C A2- A1+ C+ Z- C
A2- A1+ C+ Z- A2- A1+ C+ Z-

L-
N/L- Internal circuit diagram 24 V DC Internal circuit
L+
L+ DC Option t v >> diagram
Option t v >>
3RT19 16-2BK01, 110 V UC 3RT19 16-2BE01, 24 V DC

110 V UC A1 A3 A4 A5 B1 A2 Z+ Z– tv (ms) > 24 V DC A1 A2 Z+ Z– tv (ms) >
S00 DC L+ L– 130 S00 L+ L– 3RT1. 1.-.BB4. 250
● ● 3RH1. . .-.BB4.
50 Hz L1 N 3RT1. 1. -. BF4 . 130 S0 L+ L– 3RT1. 2.-.BB4. 150
● ● 3RH1. . . -.BF4 . S2 L+ L– 3RT1. 3.-.BB4. 90
60 Hz L1 N 130 S3 L+ L– 3RT1. 4.-.BB4. 70
S0 DC L+ L– 100
● ●
50 Hz L1 N 100
● ● ●
3RT1. 2. -. BF4.
60 Hz L1 N 100
● ●
3RT19 16-2BL01, 230 V UC

230 V UC A1 A3 A4 A5 B1 A2 Z+ Z– tv (ms) >
S00 DC L+ L– 600
● ● 3RT1. 1.-.BM4.
N 3RT1. 1.-.BP4.
50 Hz L1 600
3RH1. . .-.BM4.
60 Hz L1 N 3RH1. . .-.BP4. 600
● ●
S0 DC L+ L– 400
● ●
L1 3RT1. 2.-.BM4.
50 Hz N 400
3RT1. 2.-.BP4.
60 Hz L1 N 400
● ●
Operation after OFF-delay Operation before OFF-delay

(Contactor only switches off with delay in case of voltage failure) (Contactor always switches off with delay)
L 1 /L + L 1 /L + A C 5 0 H z 2 3 0 V L 1 /L + L 1 A C 5 0 H z 2 3 0 V
S 0 S 0
S 1 K S 1 K S 1 K S 1 K
S 0 S 0
A 3 A 4 A 5 B 1 Z + A 1 + A 3 A 4 A 5 B 1 Z + A 1 + A 3 A 4 A 5 B 1 Z + A 1 + A 3 A 4 A 5 B 1 Z + A 1 +
3 R T 1 9 1 6 -2 B L 0 1 3 R T 1 .1 . -1 B P 4 .
3 R T 1 9 1 6 -..... 3 R T 1 . ..-.B ... 3 R T 1 9 1 6 -2 B L 0 1 3 R T 1 .2 .-1 B P 4 . 3 R T 1 9 1 6 -..... 3 R T 1 . ..-.B ... o ff-d e la y 3 R T 1 .1 . -1 B M 4 .
o ff-d e la y 3 R H 1 1 ..-.B ... o ff-d e la y 3 R T 1 .2 .-1 B M 4 . o ff-d e la y 3 R H 1 1 ..-.B ... d e v ic e s 3 R H 1 1 .. -1 B P 4 0
d e v ic e K c o n ta c to r d e v ic e K c o n ta c to r d e v ic e K c o n ta c to r 3 R H 1 1 .. -1 B M 4 0
K c o n ta c to r
A 2 - A 1 + C + Z - A 2 - A 2 - A 1 + C + Z - A 2 - A 2 - A 1 + C + Z - A 2 -
A 2 - A 1 + C + Z - A 2 -
N /L - N /L - N /L - N
N S B 0 1 1 3 7 b N S B 0 1 1 3 8 b N S B 0 1 1 3 9 c N S B 0 1 1 4 0 d
Schematic circuit Typical circuit diagram: Schematic circuit Typical circuit diagram:
diagram Contactor size S0, diagram Contactor size S00,
DC operation, at AC 50 Hz 230 V DC operation, at AC 50 Hz 230 V
224 Siemens · 2011

Circuit diagrams for accessories for sizes S00 to S3
Accessories for size S00 to S3 contactors and contactor relays 3RT16 capacitor contactors
Solid-state time-delay blocks Size S00 Sizes S0 and S3
(note planning aids on Page 167!) L 1 L 2 L 3 L 1 L 2 L 3
3RT19 16-2C. . . 3RT19 16-2D. . .
With ON-delay OFF-delay (with auxiliary voltage) F 0 F 0
Size S00 Size S00
L1/L+ L1/L+
NSB00555
NSB00554
S1 S1
1 3 5 1 4 3
1 /L 1
5 /L 3
3 /L 2
1 /L 1
3 /L 2
5 /L 3
A 1 A 1
A1
1 A1 B1 A 2 A 2
2 /T 1
4 /T 2
6 /T 3
2 /T 1
4 /T 2
6 /T 3
1 1 4 5 2 4 4
2 A2
N/L A2 N/L 2
3RT19 26-2C. . . 3RT19 26-2D. . .

With ON-delay OFF-delay (with auxiliary voltage)
Sizes S0 to S3 Sizes S0 to S3
N S B 0 _ 0 1 3 8 2 c
N S B 0 _ 0 0 5 5 8 b
L1/L+ L1/L+
A2 can be connected A2 must only be
C 1 C 1
NSB00557
NSB00556
S1 connected to N(L--)
A2
to N(L–)
A1 A1 B1 A2 from the timing relay.
using either the
1 1
contactor or the Do not connect
A1 A2 timing relay. A1 A2
2 - - - optionally 2 1 Timing relay block
A1 A2 connect
A1 A2
N/L 2 Contactor
N/L
L+
NSB0_02006 Circuit diagram for
A1+ railway-type contac-
tors with solid-state
coil excitation
A2+
L–
Siemens · 2011 225


Internal circuit diagrams for accessories of size S00 to S3
Contactors with extended operating range 0.7 to 1.25 × Us

Terminal designations Terminal designations Terminal designations
according to EN 50012 according to EN 50011 according to EN 50012
3RT10 17-2K.42-0LA0 contactors 3RH11 22-2K.40-0LA0 3RT10 2.-, 3RT10 3.-,
contactor relays 3RT10 4.-3K.44-0LA0 contactors
with front-mounted 4-pole 3RH19 21-1HA22
L + L+
L-
L -
2 NO + 2 NC
S 1 S1 Ident. No.: 22
(+ )
1 /L 1 3 /L 2 5 /L 3 1 3 2 1 3 1 4 3
N S B 0 _ 0 0 5 6 1 b
A 1
E 1 + E1+
R v RV K1 A 2 ( )
K 1 2 /T 1 4 /T 2 6 /T 3 1 4 2 2 3 2 4 4
Circuit diagram of the series resistor wiring

1 /L 1 3 /L 2 5 /L 3 K1 13 23 31 (-)
K 1
N S B 0 _ 0 0 5 6 2 c A 1
A 2
N S B 0 _ 0 0 5 5 9 b
NSB00560a
A 2 - A2-
2 /T 1 4 /T 2 6 /T 3 14 24 32
R v
A 1
Series resistor RV 2 NO + 1 NC unassigned
2 1 A 2
plugged on, Series resistor RV 2 2
NC contact prewired. (+ ) (-)
plugged on,
NC contact prewired.
The series resistor is supplied separately packed.
3RT10 17-2K.41/2K.42 contactor 3RH11 22-2K.40 contactor relay The 21/22 NC contact is necessary to wire the
Varistor integrated Varistor integrated series resistor.
Size S00 Size S00
3RT10 25-3K.40 contactor
1 NO 2 NO + 2 NC Varistor integrated
Ident. No.: 10E 22E Size S0
A 1 (+ ) 1 /L 1 3 /L 2 5 /L 3 1 3 A 1 (+ ) 1 3 2 1 3 1 4 3 1 /L 1 3 /L 2 5 /L 3
N S B 0 _ 0 0 1 6 9 a
A 1 (+ )
N S B 0 _ 0 0 1 6 4 a
N S B 0 _ 0 0 1 6 8 b
A 2 ( ) A 2 ( )
2 /T 1 4 /T 2 6 /T 3 1 4 A 2 (-) 1 4 2 2 3 2 4 4 2 /T 1 4 /T 2 6 /T 3
1 NC (Two single-pole auxiliary switch blocks can be
01E snapped on)
A 1 (+ ) 1 /L 1 3 /L 2 5 /L 3 2 1
N S B 0 _ 0 0 1 6 5 a
A 2 ( )
2 /T 1 4 /T 2 6 /T 3 2 2
226 Siemens · 2011

Position of the terminals for 3RT1 contactors and accessories (valid for screw and Cage Clamp terminals)

3RT10 1 contactors, 3RT10 1 coupling relays 3RT10 2, 3RT 10 3, 3RT10 2, 3RT10 3, 3RT10 4
3RT10 17-2K.4.contactors with extended operating range 3RT10 4, 3RT14 46 contactors, contactors
3RT10 2 coupling relays with front-mounted
3RT10 25-3K.40 contactors with 4-pole 3RH19 21- . HA22
extended operating range auxiliary switch block
1 NO 1 NC 2 NO + 2 NC
Ident. No.: 10E 01 Ident. No.: 22 E
1 3 5 13 A1 1 3 5 2 1 A 1 A1 A2 A1 A2
1 3 5 1 3 5
1. 2. 3. 4. 13 21 31 43
N S B 0 _ 0 0 5 6 4 a
NSB00563
1. 2. 3. 4. 14 22 32 44
2 4 6 14 A2 2 4 6 2 2 A 2
NSB00568
NSB00565
2 4 6 2 4 6
A1 A2 A1 A2
3RT10 1 contactors (with 1 NO contact) 3RT10 2, 3RT10 3, 3RT10 4 3RT10 2, 3RT10 3, 3RT10 4
with front-mounted 3RH19 11-. H . . . auxiliary switch blocks contactors contactors
with front-mountable with front-mountable
4-pole 3RH19 21- . HA31 4-pole 3RH19 21- . HA13
auxiliary switch block auxiliary switch block
1 NO + 1 NC 2 NO + 2 NC 3 NO + 1 NC 1 NO + 3 NC
Ident. No.: 11E 22E Ident. No.: 31 E 13 E
1 3 5 13 A1 1 3 5 13 A1 A1 A2
A1 A2
1 3 5 1 3 5
21 21 31 43
13 21 33 43 13 21 31 41
22 22 32 44
NSB00566
NSB00567
14 22 34 44 14 22 32 42
2 4 6 14 A2 2 4 6 14 A2
NSB0_01348
NSB01349
2 4 6 2 4 6
2 NO + 3 NC 3 NO + 2 NC A1 A2 A1 A2
Ident. No.: 23E 32E
1 3 5 13 A1 1 3 5 13 A1 First laterally mountable Second laterally mountable

3RH19 21-.DA11 1) 3RH19 21-. JA11 1)
21 31 41 53 21 31 43 53 auxiliary switch block auxiliary switch block
can be mounted on the left or can be mounted on the left or
right right
(only for sizes S3 to S12)
22 32 42 54 22 32 44 54 1 NO + 1 NC 1 NO + 1 NC
NSB00570
NSB00569
Left Right Left Right

2 4 6 14 A2 2 4 6 14 A2
32 72 62
21 61 71
22
31
Size S0 to S3
Terminal designations according to EN 50012 13
44
43
14
53
84
83
54
3RT10 . . - . X . 40-0LA2 contactors 43 83 53

14 54 84
13
with solid-state control unit 44
A1 A2
NSB00571
NSB00573
NSB00574
NSB00572
31 71 61
22 62 72
21
32
1 3 5
1. 2. 3. 4.
1. 2. 3. 4.
2 4 6
NSB01390
1) Note location identifier. Can only be used if no 4-pole auxiliary switch

block is snapped onto the front.
Siemens · 2011 227

Sizes S6 to S12
3RT1 .5, 3RT1 .6, 3RT1 .7 contactors
• With conventional operating • With solid-state operating • With solid-state operating • With solid-state operating
mechanism mechanism mechanism mechanism
(3RT1. ..-.A...) (3RT1. ..-.N...) (3RT1. ..-.P...) (3RT1. ..-.Q...)
With laterally mountable auxiliary With laterally mountable auxiliary With laterally mountable auxiliary With laterally mountable auxiliary
switch blocks switch blocks switch blocks switch blocks
3RH19 21-1DA11 3RH19 21-1DA11 3RH19 21-1DA11 3RH19 21-1DA11
(for 2 NO + 2 NC, included in the (for 2 NO + 2 NC, included in the (for 1 NO + 1 NC, included in the (for 1 NO + 1 NC, included in the
contactors) contactors) contactors) contactors)
3RH19 21-1JA11 3RH19 21-1JA11 3RH19 21-1JA11 3RH19 21-1JA11
(can be extended to 4 NO + (can be extended to 4 NO + (can be extended to 2 NO + (can be extended to 2 NO +
4 NC) 4 NC) 2 NC) 2 NC)
2 NO + 2 NC or 4 NO + 4 NC 2 NO + 2 NC or 4 NO + 4 NC 1 NO + 1 NC or 2 NO + 2 NC 1 NO + 1 NC or 2 NO + 2 NC
SPS
DC 24 V
A1 A2 A1 A2
NSB0_01154a
1 L1 3 L2 5 L3 1 L1 3 L2 5 L3 1 L1 3 L2 5 L3 1 L1 3 L2 5 L3
A1 A2 A1 A2
61 21 31 71 61 21 31 71 61 21 61 21 H1
H2
53 13 43 83 53 13 43 83 53 13 H1 53 13 H3
H2
54 14 44 84 54 14 44 84 54 14 54 14 SF1
R1 SF2
62 22 32 72 62 22 32 72 62 22 R2 62 22 AS-i +
IN + AS-i +
IN - AS-i -
2 T1 4 T2 6 T3 2 T1 4 T2 6 T3 2 T1 4 T2 6 T3 2 T1 4 T2 6 T3 AS-i -
NSB01153
NSB01155
NSB01156
Contactors with 4 main contacts, size S00 Contactors with 4 main contacts, sizes S0 to S3
3RT13 and 3RT15 contactors 3RT13 and 3RT15 contactors
4 NO 2 NO + 2 NC 4 NO 2 NO + 2 NC
1 3 5 7 A1 1 R1 R3 3 A1 A 1 A 2 A1 A2
1 3 5 7 1 R1 R3 3
NSB00575
NSB01152
N S B 0 _ 0 0 5 7 7 a
2 4 6 8 A2 2 R2 R4 4 A2
NSB00578
2 4 6 8 2 R2 R4 4
A 1 A 2 A1 A2

3RH19 11-.F. . . auxiliary switch blocks and 3RH19 11-.NF. . solid-state compatible auxiliary switch blocks
for snapping onto the front
2 NO 1 NO + 1 NC 2 NC 1 NO + 1 NC
Ident. No.: 20 11 02 11 U
53 63 53 61 51 61 57 65
NSB00579
NSB00580
NSB00581
NSB00582
54 64 54 62 52 62 58 66
Ident. No.: 40 31 22 22 U 11/11 U
53 63 73 83 53 61 73 83 53 61 71 83 57 67 75 85 53 61 75 87
NSB00583
NSB00584
NSB00585
NSB00586
NSB00587
54 64 74 84 54 62 74 84 54 62 72 84 58 68 76 86 54 62 76 88
with make-before-break 1 NO + 1 NC ON-delay
1 NO + 1 NC with make-
before-break
228 Siemens · 2011

3RH19 11-1AA. . 3RH19 11-1BA. .
auxiliary switch blocks for snapping onto the front auxiliary switch blocks for snapping onto the front
1 NO 1 NC 1 NO 1 NC
5 3 5 4 51 52
N S B 0 _ 0 0 5 9 0 a
N S B 0 _ 0 0 5 9 1 a
N S B 0 _ 0 0 5 8 8 a
NSB00589
5 3 5 4 5 1 5 2
3RH19 11-1LA20 3RH19 11-1LA11 3RH19 11-1MA20 3RH19 11-1MA11

2 NO 1 NO + 1 NC 2 NO 1 NO + 1 NC
53 54 63 64 5 3 5 4 6 1 6 2
N S B 0 _ 0 0 5 9 4 a
NSB00592
NSB00593
NSB00595
53 54 63 64 53 54 61 62

1 NO + 1 NC 1 NO + 1 NC 2 NO
2 7 3 5 2 7 3 5 2 7 3 7
N S B 0 _ 0 0 5 9 6 a
N S B 0 _ 0 0 5 9 6 a
N S B 0 _ 0 0 5 9 8 a
2 8 3 6 2 8 3 6 2 8 3 8

3RH19 21-.F. . . auxiliary switch blocks, 4-pole,
4 NO 3 NO + 1 NC 2 NO + 2 NC 4 NC 2 NO + 2 NC
Ident. No.: 40 31 22 04 22 U
13 23 33 43 13 23 33 41 1 3 2 3 3 1 4 1 11 21 31 41 17 27 35 45
N S B 0 _ 0 0 6 0 1 a
NSB00599
NSB00600
NSB00603
NSB00602
14 24 34 44 14 24 34 42 1 4 2 4 3 2 4 2 12 22 32 42 18 28 36 46
3RH19 21-1LA. . auxiliary switch blocks, 2-pole 3RH19 21-1MA. . auxiliary switch blocks, 2-pole,
for snapping onto the front, cable entry from the top for snapping onto the front, cable entry from the bottom
1 3 1 4 2 3 2 4 1 3 1 4 2 1 2 2 1 1 1 2 2 1 2 2
N S B 0 _ 0 0 6 0 9 a
N S B 0 _ 0 0 6 0 8 a
N S B 0 _ 0 0 6 1 0 a
NSB00611
NSB00612
NSB00613
13 14 23 24 13 14 21 22 11 12 21 22
3RH19 21-.FE22 solid-state compatible auxiliary switch block, 4-pole,

2 NO + 2 NC
Ident. No.: 22
13 23 31 41
NSB00614
14 24 32 42
Terminal designations according to EN 50005 or EN 50012

3RH19 21-.CA. . auxiliary switch blocks, 1-pole,
1 NO 1 NC 1 NO 1 NC
.3 .1 .7 .5
NSB00604b
NSB00605a
NSB00606a
NSB00607a
.4 .2 .8 .6
with extended with extended
contacting contacting
Siemens · 2011 229

Position of the terminals for 3RT1 contactors and accessories

First laterally mountable 3RH19 21- . EA. . auxiliary switch blocks (left) First laterally mountable 3RH19 21- . EA. . auxiliary switch blocks (right)
74 72 72 54 52 52
53 51 51 73 71 71
84 84 82 64 64 62
63 63 61 83 83 81
83 83 81 63 63 61
64 64 62 84 84 82
NSB00615
NSB00616
NSB00617
NSB00618
NSB00619
NSB00620
73 71 71 53 51 51
54 52 52 74 72 72
Second laterally mountable 3RH19 21- . KA. . Second laterally mountable 3RH19 21- . KA. .
auxiliary switch blocks (left) auxiliary switch blocks (right)
(only for sizes S3 to S12; can only be used if no auxiliary switches are (only for sizes S3 to S12; can only be used if no auxiliary switches are
snapped onto to the front) snapped onto to the front)
1 7 2 1 7 2
1 5 1 1 5 1
174 154 1 5 2 1 5 2
153 173 1 7 1 1 7 1
1 8 4 1 8 2
1 6 3 1 6 1
184 164 1 6 4 1 6 2
163 183 1 8 3 1 8 1
1 8 3 1 8 1
1 6 4 1 6 2
183 163 1 6 3 1 6 1
164 184 1 8 4 1 8 2
N S B 0 _ 0 0 6 2 2 a
N S B 0 _ 0 0 6 2 3 a
N S B 0 _ 0 0 6 2 5 a
N S B 0 _ 0 0 6 2 6 a
NSB00624
NSB00621
1 7 1 1 7 1
1 5 2
173
1 5 2
153 1 5 1 1 5 1
154 174 1 7 2 1 7 2

1 NO + 1 NC 1 NO + 1 NC 2 NO
-7 -5 A1 -7 -5 A1 -7 -7 A1
NSB00627
NSB00627
NSB00629
-8 -6 A2 -8 -6 A2 -8 -8 A2
3RT16 capacitor contactors

Size S00 Size S0 and S3
with 4-pole auxiliary switch block mounted on the front with 4-pole auxiliary switch block mounted on the front
1 3 5 1 3 A 1 A1 A2
1 3 5
5 1
43
N S B 0 _ 0 1 3 8 3 a
5 2
44
2 4 6 1 4 A 2
NSB00630
2 4 6
A1 A2
The auxiliary switch block contains 3 leading contacts The auxiliary switch block contains 3 leading contacts
(not shown), and one unassigned NO contact (not shown) and one unassigned NO contact.
and one unassigned NC contact.
230 Siemens · 2011

Position of the terminals for 3RT1 contactors and accessories

Size S00
3RT10 17-2K.42-0LA0 contactors 3RH11 22-2K.40-0LA0 contactor relays
.
1 3 5 1 3 2 3 3 1
N S B 0 _ 0 0 6 3 2 b
N S B 0 _ 0 0 6 3 1 b
2 4 6 E 1 + A 2 - 1 4 2 4 3 2 E 1 + A 2 -
Series resistor RV plugged on, NC contact prewired. Series resistor RV plugged on, NC contact prewired.
3RH19 11-2. . . . auxiliary switch blocks according to EN 50005 can be 3RH19 11-2. . . . auxiliary switch blocks according to EN 50005 can be
snapped on. snapped on.
Contactor relays with extended tolerance 0.7 to 1.25 × Us

Size S00
3RH11 22-2K.40 contactor relays
2 NO + 2 NC
Ident. No.: 22 E
13 21 31 43 A1
NSB00126
14 22 32 44 A2
It is not possible to mount an auxiliary switch block.

Size S0 to S3
3RT10 2.-, 3RT10 3.-, 3RT10 4.-3K.44-0LA0 contactors
with front 4-pole 3RH19 21-2HA22 auxiliary switch block
2 NO + 2 NC
Ident. No.: 22 E
A1 A2
1 3 5 (-)
13 21 31 43
(+)
14 22 32 44
NSB00633a
2 4 6 (-)
A1 A2
For circuit diagram of the series resistor wiring, see page 226.
Note:
For position of terminals for the 3RT10 17-2K.4. and 3RT10 25-3K.40
contactors see page 227.
Siemens · 2011 231

Connection diagrams for 3RH1 contactor relays, size S00
Terminal designations according to EN 500111)

4 NO 3 NO + 1 NC 2 NO + 2 NC
Ident. No.: 40E 31 E 22E
A1(+) 13 23 33 43 A 1 (+ ) 1 3 2 1 3 3 4 3 A 1 (+ ) 1 3 2 1 3 1 4 3
N S B 0 _ 0 0 0 8 0 b
N S B 0 _ 0 0 0 8 1 b
NSB00079
A2( ) 14 24 34 44 A 2 ( ) 1 4 2 2 3 4 4 4 A 2 ( ) 1 4 2 2 3 2 4 4
3RH11 40 contactor relays

with 3RH19 11-1GA. .,
3RH12 44, 3RH12 62 auxiliary switch blocks snapped onto the front
8 NO 7 NO + 1 NC 6 NO + 2 NC
Ident. No.: 80E 71E 62E
A1(+) 13 23 33 43 53 63 73 83 A 1 (+ ) 1 3 2 3 3 3 4 3 5 3 6 1 7 3 8 3 A 1 (+ ) 1 3 2 3 3 3 4 3 5 3 6 1 7 1 8 3
N S B 0 _ 0 0 0 8 3 b
N S B 0 _ 0 0 0 8 4 b
NSB00082
A2( ) 14 24 34 44 54 64 74 84 A 2 ( ) 1 4 2 4 3 4 4 4 5 4 6 2 7 4 8 4 A 2 ( ) 1 4 2 4 3 4 4 4 5 4 6 2 7 2 8 4
5 NO + 3 NC 4 NO + 4 NC
Ident. No.: 53E 44E
A 1 (+ ) 1 3 2 3 3 3 4 3 5 3 6 1 7 1 8 1 A 1 (+ ) 1 3 2 3 3 3 4 3 5 1 6 1 7 1 8 1
N S B 0 _ 0 0 0 8 5 b
N S B 0 _ 0 0 0 8 6 b
A 2 ( ) 1 4 2 4 3 4 4 4 5 4 6 2 7 2 8 2 A 2 ( ) 1 4 2 4 3 4 4 4 5 2 6 2 7 2 8 2
3RH14 latched contactor relays

4 NO 3 NO + 1 NC 2 NO + 2 NC
( ) 13 23 33 43
E1(+) A1+ E 1 (+ ) A 1 (+ ) 1 3 2 1 3 3 4 3 E 1 (+ ) A 1 (+ ) 1 3 2 1 3 1 4 3
N S B 0 _ 0 0 0 8 8 b
NSB00087
N S B 0 _ 0 0 0 8 9 b
E2(-) A2(-) 14 24 34 44 E 2 ( ) A 2 ( ) 1 4 2 2 3 4 4 4 E 2 ( ) A 2 ( ) 1 4 2 2 3 2 4 4
Surge suppressor (plug-in direction coded)

NSB00092
NSB00090
NSB00091
NSB00095
NSB00093
NSB00094
U U
1) Positively-driven operation is assured likewise for auxiliary switch blocks

according to EN 50005 in conjunction with 3RH11 contactor relays (basic
units).
232 Siemens · 2011

Connection diagrams for 3TH42 contactor relays with 8 contacts

8 NO 7 NO + 1 NC 6 NO + 2 NC
1 3 2 3 3 3 4 3 5 3 6 3 7 3 8 3 13 23 33 43 53 61 73 83 13 23 33 43 53 61 71 83
NSB0_01909
NSB0_01910
A 1 (+ )
N S B 0 _ 0 1 6 3 0
A1(+) A1(+)
A 2 ( ) A2( ) A2( )
1 4 2 4 3 4 4 4 5 4 6 4 7 4 8 4 14 24 34 44 54 62 74 84 14 24 34 44 54 62 72 84
5 NO + 3 NC 4 NO + 4 NC 3 NO + 3 NC and 1 NO + 1 NC
Ident. No.: 53E 44E make-before-break
44E, U
13 23 33 43 53 61 71 81 13 23 33 43 51 61 71 81 13 23 33 47 51 61 71 85
NSB0_01912
NSB0_01913
NSB0_01911
A1(+) A1(+) A1(+)
A2( ) A2( ) A2( )

14 24 34 44 54 62 72 82 14 24 34 44 52 62 72 82 14 24 34 48 52 62 72 86
Circuit diagrams for 3TH42 contactor relays with

8 contacts
3TX4 180-0A NTC thermistor module
Switching examples
Momentary-contact Maintained-contact
operation operation
L1 L1
NSB00123
1
J S
13
2
K1
14 1
13
S1 J K1
2 14
S0
A1 A1
NSB00122
K1 K1
A2 A2
N N
Position of the terminals for 3TH42 contactor relays with 8 contacts
Ident. No.: 80E 71E 62E 53E 44E
A1 A1 A1 A1 A1
13 23 33 43 13 23 33 43 13 23 33 43 13 23 33 43 13 23 33 43
53 63 73 83 53 61 73 83 53 61 71 83 53 61 71 81 51 61 71 81
54 64 74 84 54 62 74 84 54 62 72 84 54 62 72 82 52 62 72 82
NSB0_01844
NSB0_01843
NSB0_01845
NSB0_01846
NSB0_01842
14 24 34 44 14 24 34 44 14 24 34 44 14 24 34 44 14 24 34 44
A2 A2 A2 A2 A2
Siemens · 2011 233

Connection diagrams for 3TH43 contactor relays with 10 contacts

10 NO 9 NO + 1 NC 8 NO + 2 NC
13 23 33 43 53 63 73 83 93 03 1 3 2 3 3 3 4 3 5 3 6 3 7 1 8 3 9 3 0 3
A1(+) A 1 (+ ) 1 3 2 3 3 3 4 3 5 3 6 3 7 1 8 3 9 1 0 3
NSB00114
N S B 0 _ 0 0 1 1 5 b
N S B 0 _ 0 0 1 1 6 b
A 1 (+ )
A2( ) A 2 ( ) A 2 ( )
14 24 34 44 54 64 74 84 94 04 1 4 2 4 3 4 4 4 5 4 6 4 7 2 8 4 9 4 0 4 1 4 2 4 3 4 4 4 5 4 6 4 7 2 8 4 9 2 0 4
7 NO + 3 NC 6 NO + 4 NC 5 NO + 5 NC
1 3 2 3 3 3 4 3 5 3 6 3 7 1 8 1 9 1 0 3 1 3 2 3 3 3 4 3 5 3 6 3 7 1 8 1 9 1 0 1 1 3 2 3 3 3 4 3 5 3 6 1 7 1 8 1 9 1 0 1
N S B 0 _ 0 0 1 1 7 b
N S B 0 _ 0 0 1 1 8 b
A 1 (+ ) A 1 (+ )
N S B 0 _ 0 0 1 1 9 b
A 1 (+ )
A 2 ( ) A 2 ( ) A 2 ( )
1 4 2 4 3 4 4 4 5 4 6 4 7 2 8 2 9 2 0 4 1 4 2 4 3 4 4 4 5 4 6 4 7 2 8 2 9 2 0 2 1 4 2 4 3 4 4 4 5 4 6 2 7 2 8 2 9 2 0 2
4 NO + 4 NC, 1 NO + 1 NC make-before-break 6 NO + 2 NC, 1 NO + 1 NC make-before-break

Ident. No.: 44E/11U 63E/11U
NSB0_01907
NSB0_01908
13 23 37 43 53 61 71 85 91 01 13 23 37 43 53 63 71 85 91 03
A1(+) A1(+)
A2( ) A2( )
14 24 38 44 54 62 72 86 92 02 14 24 38 44 54 64 72 86 92 04
Circuit diagrams for 3TH43 contactor relays with 10 contacts
3TX4 180-0A NTC thermistor module

Switching examples
Momentary-contact operation Maintained-contact operation
L1 L1
NSB00123
1
J S
13
2
K1
14 1
13
S1 J K1
2 14
S0
A1 A1
NSB00122
K1 K1
A2 A2
N N
Position of the terminals for 3TH43 contactor relays with 10 contacts
10 NO 9 NO + 1 NC 8 NO + 2 NC 7 NO + 3 NC
Ident. No.: 100E 91E 82E 73E
A1 A1 A1 A1
13 23 33 43 53 13 23 33 43 53 13 23 33 43 53 13 23 33 43 53
63 73 83 93 03 63 71 83 93 03 63 71 83 91 03 63 71 81 91 03
64 74 84 94 04 64 72 84 94 04 64 72 84 92 04 64 72 82 92 04
NSB00148
NSB00150
NSB00149
NSB00151
14 24 34 44 54 14 24 34 44 54 14 24 34 44 54 14 24 34 44 54
A2 A2 A2 A2
6 NO + 4 NC 5 NO + 5 NC 5 NO + 5 NC
Ident. No.: 64E 55E 55E, U
A1 A1 A1
13 23 33 43 53 13 23 33 43 53 13 23 37 43 53
63 71 81 91 01 61 71 81 91 01 63 71 85 91 01
64 72 82 92 02 62 72 82 92 02 64 72 86 92 02
NSB0_02005
NSB00152
NSB00153
14 24 34 44 54 14 24 34 44 54 14 24 38 44 54
A2 A2 A2
234 Siemens · 2011

Position of the terminals for 3RH1 contactor relays, size S00

4 NO 3 NO + 1 NC 2 NO + 2 NC
13 23 33 43 A1 13 21 33 43 A1 13 21 31 43 A1
NSB00125
NSB00126
NSB00124
14 24 34 44 A2 14 22 34 44 A2 14 22 32 44 A2
3RH11 40 contactor relays

with 3RH19 11-1GA. ., 3RH12 44, 3RH12 62
auxiliary switch blocks snapped onto the front
8 NO 7 NO + 1 NC 6 NO + 2 NC 5 NO + 3 NC
Ident. No.: 80E 71E 62E 53E
13 23 33 43 A1 13 23 33 43 A1 13 23 33 43 A1 13 23 33 43 A1
53 63 73 83 53 61 73 83 53 61 71 83 53 61 71 81
54 64 74 84 54 62 74 84 54 62 72 84 54 62 72 82
NSB00127
NSB00129
NSB00128
NSB00130
14 24 34 44 A2 14 24 34 44 A2 14 24 34 44 A2 14 24 34 44 A2
4 NO + 4 NC
Ident. No.: 44E
13 23 33 43 A1
51 61 71 81
52 62 72 82
NSB00131
14 24 34 44 A2
3RH14 latched contactor relays

4 NO 3 NO + 1 NC
Ident. No.: 40E 31E
13 23 33 43 A1+ E1+ 13 21 33 43 A1+ E1+
NSB00133
NSB00132
14 24 34 44 A2- E2- 14 22 34 44 A2- E2-
2 NO + 2 NC
Ident. No.: 22E
13 21 31 43 A1+ E1+
NSB00134
14 22 32 44 A2- E2-
Siemens · 2011 235

Connection diagrams for 3RH11 coupling relays for switching auxiliary circuits
DC operation
L+ is to be connected to coil terminal A1.
3RH11 coupling relays for auxiliary circuits,
size S00
(it is not possible to snap on an auxiliary switch block)
Surge suppressor can be mounted

4 NO 3 NO + 1 NC 2 NO + 2 NC
A1(+) 13 23 33 43 A 1 (+ ) 1 3 2 1 3 3 4 3 A 1 (+ ) 1 3 2 1 3 1 4 3
N S B 0 _ 0 0 1 5 7 b
N S B 0 _ 0 0 1 5 8 b
NSB00156
A2 (-) 14 24 34 44 A 2 (-) 1 4 2 2 3 4 4 4 A 2 (-) 1 4 2 2 3 2 4 4
Diode integrated
4 NO 3 NO + 1 NC 2 NO + 2 NC
A1(+) 13 23 33 43 A 1 (+ ) 1 3 2 1 3 3 4 3 A 1 (+ ) 1 3 2 1 3 1 4 3
N S B 0 _ 0 0 1 6 3 b
N S B 0 _ 0 0 1 6 2 b
NSB00161
A2 (-) 14 24 34 44 A 2 (-) 1 4 2 2 3 4 4 4 A 2 (-) 1 4 2 2 3 2 4 4
Varistor integrated
4 NO 3 NO + 1 NC 2 NO + 2 NC
A1(+) 13 23 33 43 A 1 (+ ) 1 3 2 1 3 3 4 3 A 1 (+ ) 1 3 2 1 3 1 4 3
N S B 0 _ 0 0 1 6 7 b
N S B 0 _ 0 0 1 6 8 b
NSB00166
A2 (-) 14 24 34 44 A 2 (-) 1 4 2 2 3 4 4 4 A 2 (-) 1 4 2 2 3 2 4 4
Surge suppressors for size S00 coupling relays

See 3RH11 contactor relays, page 232.
Position of the terminals for 3RH11 coupling relays for switching auxiliary circuits
Size S00
3RH11 coupling relays
4 NO 3 NO + 1 NC 2 NO + 2 NC
13 23 33 43 A1 13 21 33 43 A1 13 21 31 43 A1
NSB00125
NSB00126
NSB00124
14 24 34 44 A2 14 22 34 44 A2 14 22 32 44 A2
236 Siemens · 2011

Circuit diagrams for 3RA13 reversing contactor assemblies

Size S00
Main circuit Control circuit
(The terminal designations for the contactors comply with EN 50012)
For momentary-contact operation For maintained-contact operation
L1 L1/L+
L2 L1/L+
L3 F3 F3
95 95
F1 F2 F2
96 96
S0
K1 10 2
S2 S1
K2 S
53 53
S1 K1 S2 K2
NSB00634 54 54
F2
UV W 22 22 22 22
K2 K1
NSB0_00635a
K1
NSB0_00636a
M K2
21 21
3~ 21 21
A1 A1 A1 A1
K1 K2 K1 K2
N/L A2 A2 N/L A2 A2
The 3RA19 13-2A assembly kit contains, among other The 3RA19 13-2A assembly kit contains, among other things,
things, wiring connectors for connecting the main the electrical interlock.
circuit.
Sizes S0 to S3
Main circuit Control circuit
(The terminal designations for the contactors comply with EN 50005)
L1 L1/L+ L1/L+
L2 F3
F3
L3
95 95
F2 F2
F1 96
96
S0
10 2
K1 S2 S1 S
K2
.3 .3
S1 K1 S2 K2
.4 .4
NSB00634
F2
UV W K2 112 K1 121 112 121
K2 K1
M 122 111 122
NSB00639
111
NSB00638
3~ A1 A1 A1 A1
K1 K2 K1 K2
N/L A2 A2 N/L A2 A2
The 3RA19 .3-2A assembly kits contain, The 3RA19 24-2B mechanical interlock contains one NC contact
among other things, the wiring modules for each contactor for the NC contact interlock.
on the top and bottom for connecting the
main current paths.
Position of the terminals for 3RA13 reversing contactor assemblies

Size S0 to S3
3RA19 24-2B mechanical interlock (laterally mountable),
integrated in reversing contactor assemblies (reversing starters),
contains one NC contact for the electrical interlock for each contactor
2 NC
S0 Button "OFF"
111 1 3 5 1 3 5
S1 Button "Clockwise ON"
111
S2 Button "Counterclockwise ON"
112
K2 S Button "CW-OFF-CCW"
112 K1 Clockwise contactor
121
K1 K2 K2 Counterclockwise contactor
121 F1 Fuses for main circuit
122 K1 F3 Fuses for control circuit
NSB00640 122
F2 Overload relays
2 4 6 2 4 6
NSB00641
Siemens · 2011 237

Circuit diagrams for 3RA14 wye-delta starting contactor assemblies

Size S00 + S0
Main circuit Control circuits
with 3RT19 16-2G. . . solid state time-delay auxiliary switch block,
snapped onto the front (example circuits)
L1 3AC 50Hz ...V L1(L+) AC 50Hz (DC) ...V L1(L+) AC 50Hz (DC) ...V
L2 F0 F0 95
95
L3 F1 F1
96 96
F0
S0
K1 1 3 5 K3 1 3 5 K2 S1 S
2 4 6 2 4 6 13 13
K1 K1
14 14
27 37 27 37
F1 NSB00642
K4 K4
U1 W2 28 38 28 38
V1 M U2
W1 3~ V2 22 22 22 22
K3 K2 K3 K2
21 21 21 21
U1 W2 K4 K1 K2 K3 K4 K1 K2 K3
V1 M U2
W1 3~ V2
N(L ) N(L )
NSB00643 NSB00644
The contact element 27/28 for the solid-state time-delay auxiliary switch block with wye-delta
function is only closed on the wye stage; the contact element is open in the delta stage as
well as in the de-energized state.
Sizes S2 to S121)
Joint supply line of with 3RP15 7. timing relay,
line contactor and delta contactor laterally mounted (example circuits)
L1 3AC 50Hz ...V L 1 (L + ) A C 5 0 H z (D C ) ...V L1(L+) AC 50Hz (DC) ...V
L2 F 0 9 5 F0 95
L3 F 1 F1
9 6 96
F0
S 0
K1 1 3 5 K3 1 3 5 K2 S 1 S
2 4 6 2 4 6 4 4 44
K 1 K1
4 3 43
1 7 17
3 3 1 3 33 13 13
F1 NSB00645
K 4 K 1 K 2 K4 K1 K2 K3
3 4 1 4 34 14 14
U1 W2 1 8 2 8 18 28
V1 M U2
W1 3~ V2 4 2 2 2 42 22
K 3 K 2 K3 K2
4 1 2 1 41 21
U1 W2 K 4 K 2 K 3 K 1 K4 K2 K3 K1
V1 M U2
W1 3~ V2
N (L ) N S B 0 _ 0 0 6 4 6 a N(L ) NSB0_00647b
The contact element 17/18 is only closed in the wye stage; the contact element is open in the
delta stage as well as in the de-energized state.
S1 (S) is connected to clamping point K1/33.
Alternative for separate supply line

of line contactor and delta contactor
L1 3AC 50Hz ...V S0 Button "OFF"
L2 S1 Button "ON"
L3 S Maintained-contact switch
F0 F0 K1 Line contactor
K2 Star contactor
K3 Delta contactor
K1 1 3 5 K3 1 3 5 K2 K4 Solid-state, time-delay auxiliary switch block or timing relay
2 4 6 2 4 6 F0 Fuses
F1 Overload relays
F1 NSB00648
U1 W2
V1 M U2
W1 3~ V2
U1 W2
V1 M U2
W1 3~ V2
1) Only 3RA19 53-2B assembly kit.
238 Siemens · 2011

Internal circuit diagrams for 3TG10 miniature contactors

3TG10 10 contactors 3TG10 01 contactors
1 NO 1 NC
Ident. No.: 10E 01E
1 /L 1 3 /L 2 5 /L 3 1 3 1 /L 1 3 /L 2 5 /L 3 2 1
N S B 0 _ 0 0 6 6 1 a
N S B 0 _ 0 0 6 6 2 a
A 1 (+ ) A 1 (+ )
A 2 ( ) A 2 ( )
2 /T 1 4 /T 2 6 /T 3 1 4 2 /T 1 4 /T 2 6 /T 3 2 2
Internal circuit diagrams for 3TF68 and 3TF69 vacuum contactors, 3-pole
3TF68 44 and 3TF69 44 contactors 3TF68 33 and 3TF69 33 contactors
4 NO + 4 NC 3 NO + 3 NC
AC operation DC operation
Maximum number of auxiliary Maximum number of auxiliary contacts
contacts that can be fitted that can be fitted
1 /L 1 3 /L 2 5 /L 3 1 3 2 1 3 1 4 3 5 3 6 1 7 1 8 3 1 /L 1 3 /L 2 5 /L 3 3 1 4 3 5 3 6 1 7 1 8 3
N S B 0 _ 0 0 6 7 3 a
N S B 0 _ 0 0 6 7 1 a
A 1 A 1
A 2 A 2
2 /T 1 4 /T 2 6 /T 3 1 4 2 2 3 2 4 4 5 4 6 2 7 2 8 4 2 /T 1 4 /T 2 6 /T 3 3 2 4 4 5 4 6 2 7 2 8 4
3TY7 681-1G 3TY7 561-1AA00 3TY7 561-1KA00 3TY7 561-1EA00

auxiliary switch blocks auxiliary switch blocks auxiliary switch blocks auxiliary switch blocks
for coil reconnection, 1st auxiliary switch block 2nd auxiliary switch block with overlapping contacting
3TF68 and 3TF69, left or right left or right
DC economy circuit
Mounted on left Mounted on right Mounted on left Mounted on right Mounted on left Mounted on right
B1 25 13 21 53 61 71 83 13 25 43 35
NSB00679
NSB00675
NSB00676
NSB00678
NSB00680
NSB00688
B2 26 14 22 54 62 72 84 14 26 44 36
3TY7 561-1. auxiliary switch blocks

Solid-state compatible auxiliary switch
block
Mounted on left Mounted on right
51 61
NSB00683
NSB00682
52 54 62 64
3TX7 090-0D
coupling links for control by PLC
with surge suppression
X2
X1 NO13 1 ➀ Coupling link
B1+
2 ➁ Contactor
B2-
NO14 NSB00183
Circuit diagrams for 3TF68 and 3TF69 vacuum contactors, 3-pole

DC economy circuit · Maintained-contact operation For AC control supply voltage subject to strong interference
3TF68 33-.D.4 and 3TF69 33-.D.4 contactors 3TF68 33-.Q.7 and 3TF69 33-.Q.7 contactors
L+ L1
L- N
S1
A1 1 3 5
A1
A1 A2
A2 1
Rv L1 L2 3 B1
B1
5 25 ~
A1 1 3 +
Rv Rv T1 T2 7 -
2 4 25
A2 A2 9 26
26 11 B2
B2
2 4 6
NSB0_00686 NSB0_01713
Siemens · 2011 239

Internal circuit diagrams for 3TB50 to 3TB56 contactors, 3-pole

Sizes 6 to 12 Auxiliary switch block
3TB50 to 3TB56 3TY6 501-1E, 3TY6 561-1E
DC operation With overlapping
Auxiliary contacts: 2 NO + 2 NC contacting
1 /L 1 3 /L 2 5 /L 3 1 3 2 1 3 1 4 3 43 35
N S B 0 _ 0 0 6 8 7 a
A 1
NSB00688
A 2
2 /T 1 4 /T 2 6 /T 3 1 4 2 2 3 2 4 4 44 36
Circuit diagrams for 3TD68 reversing contactor assemblies

In the main circuit the connections are made The control circuit cables indicated by broken lines
between contactors K1 and K2. are not wired in the factory.
Momentary-contact operation Maintained-contact operation
L1
L2 L1/L+
L3
L1/L+
F3 F3
F1 95 95
F2 F2
96 96
S0
K1
10 2
K2 S2 S1
S
53 53
NSB00689 S1 K1 S2 K2
F2
54 54
UV W
M 22 22 22 22
3~ K2 K1 K1
NSB0_00635a
NSB0_00636a
K2
21 21 21 21
A1 A1 A1 A1
K1 K2 K1 K2
N/L A2 A2 N/L A2 A2
Terminal designations of the unassigned auxiliary contacts

Contactor With electrical interlock Without electrical interlock S0 Button "OFF"
S1 Button "Clockwise ON"
assembly Contactor Contactor Contactor Contactor S2 Button "Counterclockwise ON"
K1 K2 K1 K2 S Button "CW-OFF-CCW"
NO contact NC contact NO contact NC contact NO contact NC contact NO contact NC contact K1 Clockwise contactor
K2 Counterclockwise contactor
3TD68 13 – 14 21 – 22 13 – 14 31 – 32 13 – 14 21 – 22 13 – 14 21 – 22 F1 Fuses for main circuit
43 – 44 61 – 62 43 – 44 61 – 62 43 – 44 31 – 32 43 – 44 31 – 32 F3 Fuses for control circuit
53 – 54 71 – 72 53 – 54 71 – 72 53 – 54 61 – 62 53 – 54 61 – 62 F2 Overload relays
83 – 84 83 – 84 83 – 84 71 – 72 83 – 84 71 – 72
240 Siemens · 2011

Circuit diagrams for 3TE68 wye-delta starting contactor assemblies

Main circuit
Single infeed Double infeed
Without main conducting path connection Without main conducting path connection
between line and delta contactors between line and delta contactors
L1 3 ~50Hz ...V L1 3 ~50Hz ...V
L2 L2
L3 L3
F0 F0 F0
3TE
3TE
1 3 5 1 3 5 1 3 5 1 3 5
K1 K3 K2 K1 K3 K2
2 4 6 2 4 6 2 4 6 2 4 6
NSB00692 F1 NSB00693
F1
W1 W2 W1 W2
V1 M V2 Clockwise V1 M V2 Clockwise
U1 3~ U2 U1 3~ U2
W1 W2 Counter- W1 W2 Counter-
V1 M V2 V1 M V2
U1 3~ U2 clockwise U1 3~ U2 clockwise
Control circuit with 3RP1 574 timing relay

L 1 (L + ) A C 5 0 H z (D C ) ...V L 1 (L + ) A C 5 0 H z (D C ) ...V
F 0 9 5 F 0 9 5
F 1 F 1
9 6 9 6
S 0
S 1 S
4 3 4 3
K 1 K 1
4 4 4 4
1 7 1 7
1 3 1 3 1 3 1 3 1 3
K 4 K 1 K 2 K 4 K 1 K 2 K 3
1 4 1 4
1 8 2 8 1 4 1 4 1 4
1 8 2 8
2 2 2 2 2 2
2 2
K 3 K 2 K 3 K 2
2 1 2 1 2 1
2 1
K 4 K 2 K 3 K 1 K 4 K 2 K 3 K 1
N (L ) N S B 0 _ 0 1 6 0 3 N (L ) N S B 0 _ 0 1 6 0 4
The contact element 17/18 is only closed in the wye stage; the contact element is open in the delta stage as well as in the de-energized state.
S0 Button "OFF"
S1 Button "ON"
S Maintained-contact switch
K1 Line contactor
K2 Star contactor
K3 Delta contactor
K4 Timing relay
F0 Fuses
F1 Overload relays
Internal circuit diagrams for 3TK1 contactors, 4-pole (4 NO) for switching resistive loads (AC-1)
3TK1 contactors 3TK1 910-3B
Mounted on left Mounted on right
1 3 5 7 13 21 31 43 53 61 71 83
A1
NSB00679
NSB00699
NSB00678
A2
2 4 6 8 14 22 32 44 54 62 72 84
Siemens · 2011 241

Internal circuit diagram for 3TC44 to 3TC56 contactors for switching DC voltage
1 3 13 21 31 43
A1
NSB00702
A2
2 4 14 22 32 44
Internal circuit diagrams for 3TC74, 3TC78 contactors for switching DC voltage
DC operation
Auxiliary contacts 4 NO + 4 NC Auxiliary contacts 4 NO + 4 NC
A 1 1 /L 1 1 3 2 1 3 1 4 3 5 3 6 1 7 1 8 3 A 1 1 /L 1 3 /L 2 1 3 2 1 3 1 4 3 5 3 6 1 7 1 8 3
N S B 0 _ 0 0 7 0 3 a
N S B 0 _ 0 0 7 0 4 a
2 /T 1 1 4 2 2 3 2 4 4 5 4 6 2 7 2 8 4 2 /T 1 4 /T 4 1 4 2 2 3 2 4 4 5 4 6 2 7 2 8 4
A 2 A 2
AC operation
Auxiliary contacts 4 NO + 4 NC Auxiliary contacts 4 NO + 4 NC
Must be operated in the DC circuit Must be operated in the DC circuit
Z Z
1 /L 1 1 3 2 1 3 1 4 3 5 3 6 1 7 1 8 3 1 /L 1 3 /L 2 1 3 2 1 3 1 4 3 5 3 6 1 7 1 8 3
N S B 0 _ 0 0 7 0 5 a
N S B 0 _ 0 0 7 0 6 a
~ A 2 ~ A 2
~ A 1 ~ A 1
2 /T 1 1 4 2 2 3 2 4 4 5 4 6 2 7 2 8 4 2 /T 1 4 /T 2 1 4 2 2 3 2 4 4 5 4 6 2 7 2 8 4
Circuit diagrams for 3TC74, 3TC78 contactors for switching DC voltage
3TC74 contactors
Momentary-contact operation Maintained-contact operation Momentary-contact operation Maintained-contact operation
DC operation AC operation (must be operated in the DC circuit)
L+ L+ L1 L1
~ A1 ~ A1
S0 S0
~ A2 ~ A2
14 14
S1 K S S1 K S
13 13
A1 A1 Z Z
R2 R2 R2 R2
K K K K
NSB00710
NSB00709
NSB00707
NSB00708
R2 R2 R2 R2
L A2 L A2 N N
3TC78 contactors
Momentary-contact operation Maintained-contact operation Momentary-contact operation Maintained-contact operation
DC operation AC operation (must be operated in the DC circuit)
L+ L+ L1 L1
~ A1 ~ A1
S0 S0
~ A2 ~ A2
14 14
S1 K S S1 K S
13 13
A1 A2 A1 A2 Z Z
R2 R2 R2 R2 R2 R2 R2 R2
K K K K
NSB00712
NSB00711
NSB00713
NSB00714
R2 R2 R2 R2 R2 R2 R2 R2
L L N N
242 Siemens · 2011

Circuit diagrams for 3T contactors with extended operating range 0.7 to 1.25 x Us
Circuit with series resistor Rv (size 2 or larger) Circuit with series resistor Rv and Rv:
without reversing contactor reversing contactor K2 Two resistors are connected in
(for K1 contactors size 8 or larger) series for 3TB54, 3TB56 and
L L+
3TC56 contactors.
L L- K2:
S1 S1 For 3TB52 to 3TB56 and
21
3TC52 to 3TC56:
1 3 3RT13 17-1F . 40
31
K2 K2 K1 22
2 4
Rv K1 Rv
5 7
32
K2 K2
6 8
K1 A1 K1 A1 K2 A1
NSB00715 A2 NSB0_01357b A2 A2
Position of the terminals for 3TG10 miniature contactors

3TG10 10 contactors 3TG10 01 contactors
1 NO 1 NC
A1 A1
1 3 5 13 1 3 5 21
2 4 6 14 2 4 6 22
NSB00717
NSB00718
A2 A2
Position of the terminals for 3TF68 and 3TF69 vacuum contactors, 3-pole
AC operation DC operation 3TY7 561-1 . solid-state compatible auxiliary switch blocks
3TF68 and 3TF69 contactors 3TF68 and 3TF69 contactors for lateral mounting
4 NO + 4 NC 3 NO + 3 NC
Maximum number of auxiliary
contacts that can be fitted
Left Right
mounted mounted
1 /L 1 3 /L 2 5 /L 3 1 /L 1 3 /L 2 5 /L 3 54 62
A 1 A 1
A 2 A 2 61
5 3 1 3 4 3 8 3 5 3 B 1 4 3 8 3
6 1 2 1 3 1 7 1 6 1 3 1 7 1 51
NSB00727
2 5
6 2 2 2 3 2 7 2 6 2 2 6 3 2 7 2 52 64
5 4 1 4 4 4 8 4 5 4 B 2 4 4 8 4
2 /T 1 4 /T 2 6 /T 3 2 /T 1 4 /T 2 6 /T 3
N S B 0 _ 0 0 7 2 1 a N S B 0 _ 0 0 7 2 6 a
Siemens · 2011 243

Position of the terminals for 3TB50 to 3TB56 contactors, 3-pole

Size 6 to 12
3TB50 to 3TB56 contactors
2 NO + 2 NC
A 1 A 2
1 /L 1 3 /L 2 5 /L 3
1 3 4 3
2 1 3 1
2 2 3 2
1 4 4 4
N S B 0 _ 0 0 7 2 8 a
2 /T 1 4 /T 2 6 /T 3
Position of the terminals for 3TK1 contactors for switching resistive loads (AC-1)
3TK10 to 3TK17 contactors
2 NO + 2 NC
A 1 A 2
2 1 1 /L 1 3 /L 2 5 /L 3 7 /L 4 3 1
3 2 2 2
4 4
4 3
1 4
1 3
1 4 4 4
4 3 1 3
3 1 2 1
2 2 3 2
2 /T 1 4 /T 2 6 /T 3 8 /T 4
N S B 0 _ 0 0 7 2 9 a
Position of the terminals for 3TC contactors for switching DC voltage

AC and DC operation
Size 2 Sizes 4, 8 and 12
3TC44 contactors 3TC48 to 3TC56 contactors
A1 A1 A2
1-L1 3-L2 1-L1 3-L2
13 43 13 43
21 31 21 31
22 32 22 32
14 44 14 44
NSB00732
NSB00733
2-T1 4-T2 2-T1 4-T2

A2
DC operation AC operation DC operation AC operation

3TC74 contactors 3TC74 contactors 3TC78 contactors 3TC78 contactors
1 1 1 3 1 3
62 22 32 72 62 22 32 72 22 32 62 72 22 32 62 72
54 14 44 84 54 14 44 84 14 44 54 84 14 44 54 84
53 13 43 83 53 13 43 83 13 43 53 83 13 43 53 83
61 21 31 71 61 21 31 71 21 31 61 71 21 31 61 71
NSB00737a
NSB00736a
NSB00734a
NSB00735a
2 2 2 4 2 4
A1 A2 A1 A2 + Z A1 A2 A1 A2 + Z
244 Siemens · 2011

Internal circuit diagrams for 3TF2 and 3TK2 contactors

3TF20 ..-0 and 3TF28 ..-0 contactors 3TF20 ..-3, 3TF20 ...-6 and 3TF20 ..-7 contactors
with AC and DC operation with AC and DC operation
1 NO 1 NC 1 NO 1 NC
Ident. No.: 10E 01E Ident. No.: 10E 01E
1 /L 1 3 /L 2 5 /L 3 1 3 1 /L 1 3 /L 2 5 /L 3 2 1 1 /L 1 3 /L 2 5 /L 3 1 3 1 /L 1 3 /L 2 5 /L 3 2 1
A 1 (+ )
N S B 0 _ 0 0 6 6 1 a
N S B 0 _ 0 0 4 8 2 a
N S B 0 _ 0 0 4 8 3 a
N S B 0 _ 0 0 6 6 2 a
A 1 (+ ) A 1 (+ ) A 1 (+ )
A 2 ( ) A 2 ( ) A 2 ( ) A 2 ( )
2 /T 1 4 /T 2 6 /T 3 1 4 2 /T 1 4 /T 2 6 /T 3 2 2 2 /T 1 4 /T 2 6 /T 3 1 4 2 /T 1 4 /T 2 6 /T 3 2 2
3TF20 10 contactors with 3TX4 4 ..-1 auxiliary switch block,

3TF22 and 3TF29 contactors
with AC and DC operation
1 NO + 1 NC 2 NO + 2 NC
Ident. No. 11E 22E
1 /L 1 3 /L 2 5 /L 3 1 3 2 1 1 /L 1 3 /L 2 5 /L 3 1 3 2 1 3 1 4 3
N S B 0 _ 0 0 4 8 6 a
A 1 (+ )
N S B 0 _ 0 0 4 8 5 b
A 1 (+ )
A 2 ( ) A 2 ( )
2 /T 1 4 /T 2 6 /T 3 1 4 2 2 2 /T 1 4 /T 2 6 /T 3 1 4 2 2 3 2 4 4
2 NO + 3 NC 3 NO + 2 NC
Ident. No.: 23E 32E
1 /L 1 3 /L 2 5 /L 3 1 3 2 1 3 1 4 1 5 3 1 /L 1 3 /L 2 5 /L 3 1 3 2 1 3 1 4 3 5 3
N S B 0 _ 0 0 4 8 8 a
N S B 0 _ 0 0 4 8 9 a
A 1 (+ ) A 1 (+ )
A 2 ( ) A 2 ( )
2 /T 1 4 /T 2 6 /T 3 1 4 2 2 3 2 4 2 5 4 2 /T 1 4 /T 2 6 /T 3 1 4 2 2 3 2 4 4 5 4

3TX4 4 ..-2 auxiliary switch block
4 NO 3 NO + 1 NC 2 NO + 2 NC 2 NO + 2 NC
Ident. No.: 40 31 22 22U
53 63 73 83 5 3 6 1 7 3 8 3 5 3 6 1 7 1 8 3 57 67 75 85
N S B 0 _ 0 0 5 1 2 a
N S B 0 _ 0 0 5 1 3 a
NSB00511
NSB00514
54 64 74 84 5 4 6 2 7 4 8 4 5 4 6 2 7 2 8 4 58 68 76 86
2 NO 1 NO + 1 NC 2 NC 1 NO + 1 NC
Ident. No.: 20 11 02 11U
53 63 5 3 6 1 5 1 6 1 57 65
N S B 0 _ 0 0 5 0 8 a
N S B 0 _ 0 0 5 0 9 a
NSB00510
NSB00507
54 64 5 4 6 2 5 2 6 2 58 66
3TK20 contactors
4 NO 3 NO + 1 NC 2 NO + 2 NC
A1(+) 1 3 5 7 A 1 (+ ) 1 3 5 R 1 A1(+) 1 3 R1 R3
NSB0_01591a
NSB0_01593a
N S B 0 _ 0 1 5 9 2
A2( ) 2 4 6 8 A 2 ( ) 2 4 6 R 2 A2( ) 2 4 R2 R4
Surge suppressors
NSB00501
NSB00502
NSB00503
NSB00505
NSB00506
NSB00504
U U
Siemens · 2011 245

Internal circuit diagrams for 3TH2 contactor relays and 3TH27 latched contactor relays
Size S00
3TH20 ..-0 contactor relays,
AC and DC operation,
with screw terminals
4 NO 3 NO + 1 NC 2 NO + 2 NC
A1(+) 13 23 33 43 A 1 (+ ) 1 3 2 1 3 3 4 3 A 1 (+ ) 1 3 2 1 3 1 4 3
N S B 0 _ 0 0 0 8 0 b
N S B 0 _ 0 0 0 8 1 b
NSB00079
A2( ) 14 24 34 44 A 2 ( ) 1 4 2 2 3 4 4 4 A 2 ( ) 1 4 2 2 3 2 4 4
3TH20 ..-3, 3TH20 ..-6, 3TH20 ..-7 contactor relays,

AC and DC operation,
with flat connectors 6.3 mm x 0.8 mm and solder pin connections
4 NO 3 NO + 1 NC 2 NO + 2 NC
1 3 2 3 3 3 4 3 1 3 2 1 3 3 4 3 1 3 2 1 3 1 4 3
A 1 (+ ) A 1 (+ )
N S B 0 _ 0 1 5 6 2
A 1 (+ )
N S B 0 _ 0 1 5 6 1
N S B 0 _ 0 1 5 6 3
A 2 ( ) A 2 ( ) A 2 ( )
1 4 2 4 3 4 4 4 1 4 2 2 3 4 4 4 1 4 2 2 3 2 4 4
3TH20 40 contactor relays with 3TX4 4 ..-0 auxiliary switch block and
3TH22 contactor relay
8 NO 7 NO + 1 NC 6 NO + 2 NC
A1(+) 13 23 33 43 53 63 73 83 A 1 (+ ) 1 3 2 3 3 3 4 3 5 3 6 1 7 3 8 3 A 1 (+ ) 1 3 2 3 3 3 4 3 5 3 6 1 7 1 8 3
N S B 0 _ 0 0 0 8 3 b
N S B 0 _ 0 0 0 8 4 b
NSB00082
A2( ) 14 24 34 44 54 64 74 84 A 2 ( ) 1 4 2 4 3 4 4 4 5 4 6 2 7 4 8 4 A 2 ( ) 1 4 2 4 3 4 4 4 5 4 6 2 7 2 8 4
5 NO + 3 NC 4 NO + 4 NC
Ident. No.: 53E 44E
A 1 (+ ) 1 3 2 3 3 3 4 3 5 3 6 1 7 1 8 1 A 1 (+ ) 1 3 2 3 3 3 4 3 5 1 6 1 7 1 8 1
N S B 0 _ 0 0 0 8 5 b
N S B 0 _ 0 0 0 8 6 b
A 2 ( ) 1 4 2 4 3 4 4 4 5 4 6 2 7 2 8 2 A 2 ( ) 1 4 2 4 3 4 4 4 5 2 6 2 7 2 8 2
3TH27 latched contactor relays,

AC and DC operation
4 NO 3 NO + 1 NC 2 NO + 2 NC
( ) 13 23 33 43
E1(+) A1+ E 1 (+ ) A 1 (+ ) 1 3 2 1 3 3 4 3 E 1 (+ ) A 1 (+ ) 1 3 2 1 3 1 4 3
NSB00087
N S B 0 _ 0 0 0 8 8 b
N S B 0 _ 0 0 0 8 9 b
E2(-) A2(-) 14 24 34 44 E 2 ( ) A 2 ( ) 1 4 2 2 3 4 4 4 E 2 ( ) A 2 ( ) 1 4 2 2 3 2 4 4

3TX4 4 ..-2 auxiliary switch block
Positively-driven operation is assured likewise for auxiliary switch blocks according to EN 50005 in conjunction with
3TH20 contactor relays (basic units).
4 NO 3 NO + 1 NC 2 NO + 2 NC 2 NO + 2 NC
Ident. No.: 40 31 22 22U
5 3 6 3 7 3 8 3 5 3 6 1 7 3 8 3 5 3 6 1 7 1 8 3 5 7 6 7 7 5 8 5
N S B 0 _ 0 1 5 4 7
N S B 0 _ 0 1 5 4 9
N S B 0 _ 0 1 5 5 1
N S B _ 0 1 5 5 3
5 4 6 4 7 4 8 4 5 4 6 2 7 4 8 4 5 4 6 2 7 2 8 4 5 8 6 8 7 6 8 6
2 NO 1 NO + 1 NC 2 NC 1 NO + 1 NC
Ident. No.: 20 11 02 11U
5 3 6 3 5 3 6 1 5 1 6 1 5 7 6 5
N S B 0 _ 0 1 5 5 0
N S B 0 _ 0 1 5 4 6
N S B 0 _ 0 1 5 5 2
N S B 0 _ 0 1 5 4 8
5 4 6 4 5 4 6 2 5 2 6 2 5 8 6 6
Surge suppressors
NSB00501
NSB00502
NSB00503
NSB00505
NSB00506
NSB00504
U U
246 Siemens · 2011


Relay couplers – connection diagrams for 3TX7 002/3TX7 003
3TX7 002-.A.00 -1B.00 -1CB00 -1FB02 -2BF02
3TX7 002-1AB02
3TX7 002-2AF05
3TX7 003-.A.00 -1B.00 1CB00
A1 13 A1 11 A1 A1 13 23 A1 11 21 11
A1
NSB00188 NSB00189 NSB00191a

NSB00190 NSB00192
A2 14 A2 A2 12 14 A2 A2 14 24 A2 12 14 22 24 12 14
A2
Relay couplers – position of the terminals

Output coupling links Input coupling links
3TX7 002-1AB0. -1B.00 -1CB00 -1FB02 3TX7 002-2A.0. -2BF02
3TX7 003-1AB00 -1B.00 -1CB00 3TX7 003-2A.0.
A1 A2 A1 A2 A2 A1A1 A2 A2 A1 A2 12 11 13 14 12 14 11
NSB00197
NSB00198
NSB00201
NSB00202
NSB00199
NSB00200
13 14 11 12 14 13 14 23 24 21 24 22 14 A1 A2 A1 A2
Relay couplers – connection diagrams for 3TX7 004/3TX7 005

Output coupling links
3TX7 00.-1M.00 3TX7 00.-1BB00 3TX7 00.-1L.0.
3TX7 00.-1BF05
A1 A1 A1 12
14 A1 14
12
A2 14 A2
13 A2 11
NSB00205 NSB00208
A2 11
NSB00207 11
3TX7 00.-1BB10
A A = Automatic
0
M
0 = Neutral position
A1
12 M = Manual
A3 14
A2
A2 11
NSB00209 11
Input coupling links

3TX7 00.-2M.02
A1
14
A2
13
NSB00213
Siemens · 2011 247


Relay couplers – position of the terminals
3TX7 004 3TX7 004-2M. . .
-1M.00 -1L.0. -1B.0. -1BB10 -1CB00 -1HB00 -1GB00
-A2 A2 A2 A2 A2 A2 A2 A2 A2 A2 A2 A2 A2 A2 A2 13
+A1 A1 A1 A1 A1 A3 A11 A21 A11 A21 A31 A11 A11 A21 A21 14
12
11
14 112 114 212 214 A1
NSB00286
NSB00224
NSB00225
14 12 14 12 14 114 214 114 214 314
NSB00285
NSB00220
NSB00221
NSB00222
NSB00223
13 11 11 11 11 113 213 113 213 313 111 111 211 211 A2
3TX7 005 3TX7 005-2M. . .

-1M.00 -1L.0. -1BB00 -1BB10 -1CB00 -1HB00 -1GB00
-A2 A2 A2 A2 A2 A2 A2 A2 A2 A2 A2 A2 A2 A2 A2 A2 13
+A1 A1 A1 A1 A11 A21 A11 A21 A11 A11 A21 A21 A11 A11 A21 A21 14
12
11
14 112 114 212 214 112 114 212 214 A1
NSB00232
NSB00233
14 114 214 114 214
NSB00234
12 14
NSB00226
NSB00230
NSB00231
NSB00227
NSB00229
13 11 11 113 213 113 213 111 111 211 211 111 111 211 211 A2
Semiconductor couplers – connection diagrams

3TX7 002-3AB00 -3AB01 -4AB00 -4AG00
A1 13 A1 13 A1 13
A1 13
NSB00193
NSB00195 NSB00196
NSB00194
A2 14 A2 14 A2 14
A2 14
Semiconductor couplers – position of the terminals

3TX7 002-3AB0. 3TX7 002-4A.0.
A1 A2 1 3 1 4
N S B 0 _ 0 1 5 6 4
NSB00197
13 14 A 1 A 2
248 Siemens · 2011


Semiconductor couplers – connection diagrams
Output coupling links
3TX7 00.-3AB04 3TX7 00.-3PB54 3TX7 00.-3AC04
3TX7 00.-3PB41 3TX7 00.-3PG74
3TX7 00.-3PB74
A 1
+ A 1 A 1
A 2 + 1 3 +
A 1 + 1 3
A 2
+ 1 3 +
1 4 A 2
N S B 0 0 2 1 4 N S B 0 0 2 1 5 L o a d
L o a 0 V _
A 2 1 4
N S B 0 0 2 1 6 L o _a d
0 V
Input coupling links

3TX7 00.-3AC14 3TX7 00.-3AC03 3TX7 00.-4AB04
A
0
M A 1 A 1
A1 A 1 ~ 1 3
+ 1 3
+13
A3 +13 + ~ 1 3 A 2
A2 A 2 1 4
N S B 0 0 2 1 9
A2 14 A 2 ~ 1 4 L o a d
Load N S B 0 0 2 1 8
NSB00217 0V _ ~ 1 4
L o a d A= Automatic
0= Neutral position
M= Manual
Semiconductor couplers – position of the terminals

3TX7 004 3TX7 004-4AB04
-3AB04, -3PB54, -3AC04 -3AC14 -3AC03
-3PB41 -3PB74,
-3PG74
A2 A2 A2 A2 A2 A2 A2 A2 +13
A1 A1 A1 A1 A1 A3 A1 A1 14
+13
14
14 0V 14 0V 14 14 A1
NSB00235
NSB00238
NSB00240
NSB00239
14 0V
NSB00236
NSB00237
+13 +13 +13 +13 +13 13 13 A2
3TX7 005 3TX7 005-4AB04

-3AB04, -3PB54, -3AC04 -3AC14 -3AC03
-3PB41 -3PB74,
-3PG74
A2 A2 A2 A2 A2 A2 A2 A2 +13
A1 A1 A1 A1 A1 A3 A1 A1 14
+13
14
0V 14 0V 14 0V 14 14
NSB00244
NSB00245
A1
NSB00243
14
NSB00242
NSB00241
NSB00246
+13 +13 +13 +13 +13 13 13 A2
3RS18 coupling relays with industrial housing – position of the terminals

3RS18 00 3RS18 00 3RS18 00 3RS18 00 3RS18 00
-.AP00 -.BP00 -.HP0. -.BW00 -.HW0.
-.AQ00 -.BQ00 -.HQ0.
3 1 C 3 1 C
3 2 N C 3 4 N O 3 2 N C 3 4 N O
A 1 A 3 + A 2 - A 1 A 2 -
A 1 A 3 + A 2 -
A 1 A 3 + A 2 - A 1 A 2 -
N S B 0 _ 0 1 6 3 6
1 1 C 1 1 C 1 1 C 1 1 C
N S B 0 _ 0 1 6 3 9
1 2 N C 1 4 N O
N S B 0 _ 0 1 6 3 8
1 4 N O
N S B 0 _ 0 1 6 4 0
1 2 N C 1 2 N C 1 4 N O 1 2 N C 1 4 N O 1 2 N C 1 4 N O
N S B 0 _ 0 1 6 3 7
1 1 C
2 2 N C 2 4 N O 2 2 N C 2 4 N O 2 2 N C 2 4 N O 2 2 N C 2 4 N O
2 1 C 2 1 C 2 1 C 2 1 C
Siemens · 2011 249


LZX plug-in relays – relay couplers
LZX:PT270 LZX:PT370 LZX:PT520, LZX:PT570, LZX:PT580
2-pole 3-pole 4-pole
(1 ) (4 ) (1 ) (2 ) (3 ) (1 ) (2 ) (3 ) (4 )
1 2 4 2 1 2 2 2 3 2 1 2 2 2 3 2 4 2
1 4 4 4 1 4 2 4 3 4 1 4 2 4 3 4 4 4
(5 ) (8 ) (4 ) (5 ) (6 ) (5 ) (6 ) (7 ) (8 )
N S B 0 _ 0 0 2 5 0 a
N S B 0 _ 0 1 0 1 1 a
N S B 0 _ 0 0 2 4 9 a
1 1 (9 ) 4 1 (1 2 ) 1 1 (7 ) 2 1 (8 ) 3 1 (9 ) 1 1 (9 ) 2 1 (1 0 ) 3 1 (1 1 ) 4 1 (1 2 )
(1 3 )A 1 A 2 (1 4 ) (1 3 )A 1 A 2 (1 4 ) (1 3 )A 1 A 2 (1 4 )
LZX:RT3 LZX:RT4 LZX:MT32

1-pole 2-pole 3-pole
(5 ) (6 ) (7 )
A 1 1 2 1 1 1 4 A 1 1 2 1 1 1 4 2 2 2 1 2 4
(4 )1 2 (8 )3 2
A 2 A 2 2 2 2 1 2 4 (3 )1 4 (9 )3 4
2 2 2 1 2 4
N S B 0 _ 0 0 2 4 7 a N S B 0 _ 0 0 2 4 8 a
N S B 0 _ 0 0 2 5 1 a
(2 ) (1 ) (1 1 ) (1 0 )
A 1 1 1 3 1 A 2
Values in brackets: socket designations.

Without brackets: contact/coil designations.
Position of the connection terminals

Standard plug-in bases for PT series
LZS:PT78720 LZS:PT78730 LZS:PT78740
for 2 CO contacts, with screw terminals for 3 CO contacts, with screw terminals for 4 CO contacts, with screw terminals
8 7 NO 6 5 6 NO 5 4 8 7 NO 6 5
44 34 24 14 34 24 14 44 34 24 14
4 3 NC 2 1 3 NC 2 1 4 3 NC 2 1
42 32 22 12 32 22 12 42 32 22 12
A2 COIL COIL A1 A2 COIL COIL A1 A2 COIL COIL A1

NSB0_01755
NSB0_01756
NSB0_01757
14 13 14 13 14 13
41 31 21 11 31 21 11 41 31 21 11
12 11 COM 10 9 9 COM 8 7 12 11 COM 10 9
250 Siemens · 2011

Plug-in bases with logical isolation for PT series

LZS:PT78722 LZS:PT78742 LZS:PT7872P LZS:PT7874P
for 2 CO contacts, for 4 CO contacts, for 2 CO contacts, for 4 CO contacts,
with screw terminals with screw terminals with spring-type terminals with spring-type terminals
12 9 9
COM
COM
12 11 10
COM
COM
41 11 41 31 21 11
8 12 41 9 11 12 41 1131 10 21 9 11
NO
5 8 7 6 5
NO
44 14 44 34 24 14
NO
NO
NC
NC
4 4 3 2 1 8 44 5 14 8 44 7 34 6 24 5 14
42 12 42 32 22 12
NC
NC
4 42 1 12 4 42 3 32 2 22 1 12
NSB0_01758a
NSB0_01759
A2 COIL A1 A2 COIL A1
14 13 14 13
NSB0_01761a
NSB0_01760
COIL
COIL
A2 14 A1 13 A2 14 A1 13
Plug-in bases for RT series

LZS:RT78725 LZS:RT78726 LZS:RT7872P
with screw terminals with logical isolation and with logical isolation and spring-type
screw terminals terminals
21 COM 11 22 NC 12
24 NO 14 21 COM 11 NC
22 12
24 NO 14
21 COM 11
24 NO 14
NSB0_01763a
NSB0_01762a
A2 COIL A1
22 NC 12 A2 COIL A1
NSB0_01764a
A2 COIL A1
Plug-in bases for MT series

LZS:MT78750
for industrial relays
34 32 24 22 14 12
9 8 7 5 3 4
NSB0_01754
10 11 6 1 2
A2 31 21 11 A1
Siemens · 2011 251

252 Siemens · 2011

Service & Support
Download catalogs and information material:
www.siemens.com/industrial-controls/catalogs
Newsletter - always up to date:

www.siemens.com/industrial-controls/newsletter
E-Business in the Industry Mall:

www.siemens.com/industrial-controls/mall
Online-Support:
www.siemens.com/industrial-controls/support
Contact for all technical information:

Technical Assistance
Tel.: +49 (911) 895-5900
E-Mail: [email protected]
www.siemens.com/industrial-controls/technical-assistance
Siemens AG Subject to change without prior notice

Industry Sector
Postfach 23 55
90713 FÜRTH © Siemens AG 2009
GERMANY

LV1T_03_2011_10_en_129653222023918956

Uploaded by

Copyright:

Available Formats

LV1T_03_2011_10_en_129653222023918956

Uploaded by

Document Information

Copyright

Available Formats

Share this document

Share or Embed Document

Sharing Options

Did you find this document useful?

Is this content inappropriate?

Copyright:

Available Formats

LV1T_03_2011_10_en_129653222023918956

Uploaded by

Copyright:

Available Formats

Controls

Contactors and Contactor Assemblies

2 Introduction 3RH, 3TH Contactor Relays

3RA13, 3RA14 Contactor 3TX7, 3RS18 Coupling Relays

3RT14 AC-1 contactors

Accessories for contactors

3RU11 and 3RB20/21 overload relays (protection equipment: overload relays)

3RA13 reversing contactor assemblies

3RA14 contactor assemblies for wye-delta starting

S3 S6 S10 S12 S14

-- -- 3RT12 64 3RT12 65 3RT12 66 3RT12 75 3RT12 76 3TF68 3TF69

30 37 45 55 75 90 110 132 160 200 250 355 400

3RT14 46 3RT14 56 3RT14 66 3RT14 76 --

3RU11 46 18 ... 100 A -- -- -- --

3RV10 41 45 ... 100 A -- -- -- --

3RA13 44 3RA13 45 3RA13 46 -- -- -- 3TD68 04

3RA14 44 3RA14 45 -- -- -- 3TE68 04

The advantages at a glance

3TX7 3RS18 LZS/LZX 3TG10

Order No. Page

Cage Clamp terminals or spring-type terminals

Solder pin connections

These connections are indicated in the Technical

The SIRIUS generation of

For contactor assemblies see pages 84 to 85.

For fuseless load feeders, see "Load Feeders and Motor

For mountable overload relays see "Protection Equipment -->

1 3RT10 and 3RT14 air-break contactor, size S6

2 3RA19 54-2A mechanical interlock, laterally mountable

For mountable overload relays see "Protection Equipment -->

2 Mechanical interlock, laterally mountable

For mountable overload relays see "Protection Equipment -->

1 Air-break contactor, sizes S6, S10 and S12

3 Withdrawable coils for 3RT1. ..-.A..

Identical for sizes S6 to S12

For mountable overload relays see "Protection Equipment -->

3RT10 contactors, 3-pole, 3 ... 250 kW

3RT10 contactors, 3-pole, 3 ... 250 kW

In connection with converters, the control cables should be ins- OFF ON

talled separately from the load cables of the converter.

3RT10 contactors, 3-pole, 3 ... 250 kW

3RT1. . .-.Q version: Communication-capable with integrated

3RT10 contactors, 3-pole, 3 ... 250 kW

I/O configuration (hex) 7

Indication behavior LEDs States Description of state

Contactor diagnostics using the user program

3RT10 contactors, 3-pole, 3 ... 250 kW

Ident. No. 32E, Ident. No. 40, 31,

Contactors, Contactors, Possible complements of

23E, 22E, 11E 22, 20, 11, 02 03, 30

Size S00 contactors have an auxiliary contact integrated in the

3RT10 contactors, 3-pole, 3 ... 250 kW

3RT10 contactors, 3-pole, 3 ... 250 kW

Contactors Type 3RT1

The characteristic curves apply to: 10

3RT10 contactors, 3-pole, 3 ... 250 kW

Endurance of the main contacts

operations Contactor type 3RT1023 3RT1024 3RT1025 3RT1026

3RT10 contactors, 3-pole, 3 ... 250 kW

Endurance of the main contacts